Toyota Tundra 2025 Owner Manual

Pictorial index
Search by illustration
For safety
and security
Make sure to read through them
Vehicle status
information and
indicators
Before driving
(Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)
Reading driving-related information
(Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)
Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving
1
2
3
(Main topics: Keys, doors, seats)
Driving
Operations and advice which are necessary for
driving
4
(Main topics: Starting engine, refueling)
Interior features
Usage of the interior features
Maintenance
and care
Caring for your vehicle and maintenance
procedures
When trouble
arises
What to do in case of malfunction and emergency
Vehicle
specifications
Vehicle specifications, customizable features
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, seat belt
and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
Index
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
(Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)
5
6
(Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)
(Main topics: Battery discharge, flat tire)
(Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)
Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
7
8
9
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
For your information................... 6
Reading this manual ................12
How to search..........................13
Pictorial index ..........................14
1
For safety and security
1-1. For safe use
Before driving...................26
For safe driving ................27
Seat belts .........................29
SRS airbags .....................36
Front passenger occupant
classification system ......46
Exhaust gas precautions..51
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children ..........52
Child restraint systems.....53
1-3. Emergency assistance
Safety Connect ................68
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
.......................................73
Alarm................................74
2
Vehicle status
information and
indicators
2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators
.......................................78
Gauges and meters (4.2-inch
display type) ...................85
Gauges and meters (full LCD
type) ...............................89
Multi-information display...93
Head-up display ............ 101
Fuel consumption information
.................................... 105
3
Before driving
3-1. Key information
Keys .............................. 108
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
Side doors ..................... 111
Power running boards ... 115
Tailgate .......................... 118
Power bed step ............. 128
Smart key system.......... 130
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats .................... 135
Rear seats ..................... 138
Driving position memory 141
Head restraints .............. 144
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel .............. 147
Inside rear view mirror .. 149
Digital Rear-view Mirror 150
Outside rear view mirrors
.................................... 160
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows ............. 165
Power back window ...... 168
Panoramic moon roof.... 169
4
Driving
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle......... 177
Cargo and luggage ....... 184
Vehicle load limits ......... 187
Trailer towing................. 188
Dinghy towing ............... 203
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch . 204
Automatic transmission . 208
Turn signal lever............ 212
Parking brake................ 213
Brake Hold .................... 216
4-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch ............ 219
Fog light switch ............. 222
AHB (Automatic High Beam)
.................................... 222
Windshield wipers and
washer......................... 226
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
.................................... 230
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Toyota Safety Sense 2.5 232
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
.................................... 237
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
.................................... 248
RSA (Road Sign Assist). 259
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ... 262
Cruise control ................ 274
Stop & Start system....... 277
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
.................................... 284
Intuitive parking assist ... 291
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert)............................ 298
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake).......................... 304
Parking Support Brake function (static objects) ...... 309
Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)
.................................... 312
Toyota parking assist monitor
.................................... 314
Panoramic view monitor 327
Multi-terrain Monitor ...... 362
Electronically modulated air
suspension .................. 373
Driving mode select switch
.................................... 376
Four-wheel drive system379
AUTO LSD system ........ 381
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Rear differential lock system
.................................... 382
Crawl Control ................ 383
Multi-terrain Select ........ 387
Downhill assist control system .............................. 390
Driving assist systems .. 392
Trailer brake controller .. 398
Trailer Backup Guide .... 401
Active front spoiler ........ 406
4-6. Driving tips
Off-road precautions ..... 408
Winter driving tips ......... 411
5
Interior features
5-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system......................... 416
Heated steering wheel/seat
heaters/seat ventilators423
5-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ............ 425
5-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features . 428
Luggage compartment features ............................ 433
5-4. Using the other interior features
Other interior features ... 436
Garage door opener...... 453
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
6
Maintenance and care
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle exterior ............ 462
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle interior ............. 466
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
.................................... 469
General maintenance .... 470
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M) programs
.................................... 473
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions............................. 474
Hood.............................. 476
Engine compartment ..... 477
Tires .............................. 486
Tire inflation pressure .... 496
Wheels .......................... 498
Air conditioning filter ...... 499
Electronic key battery .... 501
Checking and replacing fuses
.................................... 503
Light bulbs ..................... 506
7
When trouble arises
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers....... 512
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency
.................................... 512
TABLE OF CONTENTS
If the vehicle is submerged or
water on the road is rising
.................................... 513
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be
towed........................... 515
If you think something is
wrong .......................... 517
Fuel pump shut off system
.................................... 518
If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds 519
If a warning message is displayed.......................... 529
If you have a flat tire...... 533
If the engine will not start543
If you lose your keys ..... 544
If the electronic key does not
operate properly .......... 545
If the vehicle battery is discharged ....................... 547
If your vehicle overheats 551
If the vehicle becomes stuck
.................................... 553
8
Vehicle specifications
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil
level, etc.).................... 556
Fuel information ............ 566
Tire information ............. 568
8-2. Customization
Customizable features .. 578
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ........... 589
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
9
5
For owners
9-1. For owners
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners................. 592
Reporting safety defects for
Canadian owners ........ 592
Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners (in
French) ........................ 593
SRS airbag instructions for
Canadian owners (in
French) ........................ 595
Camper information....... 603
1
2
3
4
Index
What to do if... (Troubleshooting) .............................. 610
Alphabetical Index ......... 613
5
6
7
8
9
6
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual
applies to all models and
explains all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find
explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle and the
illustrations used may differ from
your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this
manual are current at the time of
printing. Over time, your vehicle
may receive updates that modify
the vehicle and make material in
this manual incomplete and/or
inaccurate. Because of Toyota’s
interest in continual product
improvement, Toyota reserves
the right to make changes to this
manual at any time without
notice.
If Toyota chooses to update the
manual, updated versions can
be viewed by selecting your
vehicle by model and year at the
following URL or on your mobile
device if you have access to the
Toyota app.
www.toyota.com/owners
Noise from under vehicle
after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after
the engine is turned off, you
may hear sound coming from
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
under the vehicle for several
minutes. This is the sound of a
fuel evaporation leakage check
and it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts
and modification of your
Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine
spare parts and accessories for
Toyota vehicles are currently
available in the market. You
should know that Toyota does
not warrant these products and
is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they
may cause to, or adverse effect
they may have on, your Toyota
vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota
products. Modification with nongenuine Toyota products could
affect its performance, safety or
durability, and may even violate
governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from
the modification may not be covered under warranty.
Also, remodeling like this will
have an effect on advanced
safety equipment such as Toyota Safety Sense 2.5 and there
is a danger that it will not work
properly or the danger that it
7
may work in situations where it
should not be working.
Cyber Attack Risk
Installing electronic devices and
radios increases the risk of
cyber attacks through the
installed parts, which may lead
to unexpected accidents and
leakage of personal information. Toyota does not make any
guarantees for problems caused
by installing non-genuine Toyota
products.
Installation of a mobile
two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile twoway radio system in your vehicle
could affect electronic systems
such as:
 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
 Toyota Safety Sense 2.5
 Anti-lock brake system
 Vehicle dynamics integrated
management
 SRS airbag system
 Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary
measures or special instructions
regarding installation of a mobile
two-way radio system.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Vehicle data recording
The vehicle is equipped with
sophisticated computers that will
record certain data, such as:
• Engine speed / Electric motor
speed (traction motor speed)
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the driving
assist systems
• Images from the cameras
Your vehicle is equipped with cameras. Contact your Toyota dealer for
the location of recording cameras.
The recorded data varies
according to the vehicle grade
level and options with which it is
equipped.
These computers do not record
conversations or sounds, and
only record images outside of
the vehicle in certain situations.
 Data Transmission
Your vehicle may transmit the data
recorded in these computers to
Toyota without notification to you.
 Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded
in this computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and
development, and improve quality.
Toyota will not disclose the
recorded data to a third party
except:
• With the consent of the vehicle
owner or with the consent of the
lessee if the vehicle is leased
8
• In response to an official request
by the police, a court of law or a
government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner
 Recorded image information
can be erased by your Toyota
dealer.
The image recording function can
be disabled. However, if the function is disabled, data from when the
system operates will not be available.
 To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and
shared by Toyota, please visit
www.toyota.com/privacyvts/.
Usage of data collected
through Safety Connect
(U.S.mainland only)
If your Toyota has Safety Connect and if you have subscribed
to those services, please refer to
the Safety Connect Telematics
Subscription Service Agreement
for information on data collected
and its usage.
 To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and
shared by Toyota, please visit
www.toyota.com/privacyvts/.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Statement on Warranty
Coverage for Aftermarket
and Recycled Parts (For
U.S. Owners)
The Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq.,
makes it illegal for motor vehicle
manufacturers to void a motor
vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage solely because
an aftermarket or recycled part
has been used to repair the
vehicle or someone other than
the authorized service provider
performed service on the vehicle. This provision does not
apply to a new motor vehicle
purchased solely for commercial
or industrial use.
Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for repairs to a
vehicle if it is discovered that an
aftermarket or recycled part
installed on the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly
and caused damage to another
part of the vehicle otherwise
covered under warranty. The
Federal Trade Commission
requires that a manufacturer
demonstrate that an aftermarket or recycled part or service
performed by a person other
than an authorized service provider caused damage to another
part of the vehicle otherwise
covered under warranty before
9
denying warranty coverage.
Additionally, federal law allows a
manufacturer to void a motor
vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or
service to consumers free of
charge under the warranty or
the manufacturer has secured a
waiver from the Federal Trade
Commission.
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data
as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver
was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was trav-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
eling.
These data can help provide a
better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an
EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the
information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
 Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data
recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s
owner (or the lessee for a leased
vehicle) is obtained
• In response to an official request
by the police, a court of law or a
government agency
10
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
 However, if necessary, Toyota may:
• Use the data for research on
vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party
for research purposes without
disclosing information about the
specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt
pretensioner devices in your
Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped
with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are,
this may cause an accident such
as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat
belt pretensioner removed and
disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota
dealer before you scrap your
vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components
that may contain perchlorate.
These components may include
airbags, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control
batteries.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
“QR Code”
The word “QR Code” is registered trademark of DENSO
WAVE INCORPORATED in
Japan and other countries.
WARNING
■ General precautions while
driving
Driving under the influence: Never
drive your vehicle when under the
influence of alcohol or drugs that
have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time,
impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an
accident that could result in death
or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive
defensively. Anticipate mistakes
that other drivers or pedestrians
might make and be ready to avoid
accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give
your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such
as adjusting controls, talking on a
cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting
death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
11
WARNING
■ General precaution regarding
children’s safety
Never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, and never allow
children to have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the
vehicle or shift the vehicle into
neutral. There is also a danger
that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the panoramic moon roof,
or other features of the vehicle. In
addition, heat build-up or
extremely cold temperatures
inside the vehicle can be fatal to
children.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
12
Reading this manual
Symbols
Indicates the action
(pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate
switches and other
devices.
Explains symbols used in
this manual.
Symbols in this manual
Symbols
Meanings
Indicates the outcome of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).
Meanings
WARNING:
Explains something
that, if not obeyed,
could cause death or
serious injury to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something
that, if not obeyed,
could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or
its equipment.
Indicates operating
or working procedures. Follow the
steps in numerical
order.
Symbols in illustrations
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Symbols
Meanings
Indicates the component or position
being explained.
Means Do not, Do
not do this, or Do
not let this happen.
13
How to search
■ Searching by name
 Alphabetical index: P.613
■ Searching by installation
position
 Pictorial index: P.14
■ Searching by symptom or
sound
 What to do if... (Troubleshooting): P.610
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Searching by title
 Table of contents: P.2
14
Pictorial index
Pictorial index
■Exterior
Side doors .......................................................................... P.111
Locking/unlocking .................................................................P.111
Opening/closing the side windows ....................................... P.165
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key .................. P.545
Warning messages .............................................................. P.519
Tailgate................................................................................ P.118
Locking/unlocking ................................................................ P.118
Opening/closing the tailgate................................................. P.119
Removing the tailgate .......................................................... P.125
Outside rear view mirrors ................................................. P.160
Adjusting the mirror angle .................................................... P.160
Folding the mirrors ............................................................... P.162
Driving position memory* ..................................................... P.141
Defogging the mirrors .......................................................... P.418
Windshield wipers.............................................................. P.226
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Pictorial index
15
Precautions for winter season.............................................. P.411
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)*.................... P.421
Precautions for car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)* ...................................................................................... P.463
Back window ...................................................................... P.168
Fuel filler door .................................................................... P.230
Refueling method ................................................................. P.230
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity ................................................. P.559
Tires..................................................................................... P.486
Tire size/inflation pressure ........................................... P.486, 564
Winter tires/tire chains ......................................................... P.411
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system .................. P.486
Coping with flat tires............................................................. P.533
Hood .................................................................................... P.476
Opening ............................................................................... P.476
Engine oil ............................................................................. P.560
Coping with overheating ...................................................... P.551
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P.506, Watts: P.565)
Headlights........................................................................... P.219
Parking lights ..................................................................... P.219
Turn signal lights ............................................................... P.212
Daytime running lights ......................................................... P.219
Head lights/daytime running lights .................................. P.219
Turn signal lights ............................................................... P.212
Parking lights ....................................................................... P.219
Side marker lights .............................................................. P.212
Fog lights* ........................................................................... P.222
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
16
Pictorial index
Tail lights............................................................................. P.219
Turn signal lights ............................................................... P.212
Stop lights
Back-up lights
Changing the shift position to R ........................................... P.208
license plate lights ............................................................. P.219
Turn signal lights* .............................................................. P.212
*: If equipped
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Pictorial index
17
■Instrument panel
Turn signal lever................................................................. P.212
Headlight switch ................................................................ P.219
Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/license plate lights/daytime running lights ............................................................................. P.219
Fog lights*1 ........................................................................... P.222
Multi-information display .................................................... P.93
Display ................................................................................... P.93
When a warning message is displayed................................ P.529
Meters ............................................................................. P.85, 89
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light . P.85, 89
Warning lights/indicator lights ................................................ P.78
When a warning light turns on ............................................. P.519
Windshield wiper and washer switch............................... P.226
Usage................................................................................... P.226
Adding washer fluid.............................................................. P.485
Warning messages .............................................................. P.529
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
18
Pictorial index
Engine switch ..................................................................... P.204
Starting the engine/changing the modes ............................. P.204
Emergency stop of the engine ............................................. P.512
When the engine will not start .............................................. P.543
Warning messages .............................................................. P.529
Multimedia system*2
Air conditioning system .................................................... P.416
Usage................................................................................... P.416
Back window defogger ......................................................... P.418
Shift lever............................................................................ P.208
Changing the shift position................................................... P.209
Precautions for towing ......................................................... P.515
When the shift lever does not move..................................... P.209
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch*1/tilt and telescopic
steering lock release lever*1P.147
Adjustment ........................................................................... P.147
Driving position memory*1 .................................................... P.141
Hood lock release lever ..................................................... P.476
*1
: If equipped
*2
: Refer to “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Pictorial index
■Switches
Cargo lamp main switch.................................................... P.426
Automatic High Beam switch* .......................................... P.222
Stop & Start cancel switch ................................................ P.278
Instrument panel light control switch .......................... P.88, 92
“ODO TRIP” switch ........................................................ P.87, 91
PKSB (Parking Support Brake) OFF switch* ................... P.306
Power steps switch
Power running boards* ......................................................... P.115
Power bed step* ................................................................... P.128
Headlight leveling dial* ...................................................... P.221
Heated steering wheel switch* .......................................... P.423
AC 120V switch* ................................................................. P.447
Outer mirror lamp switch* ................................................. P.164
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
19
20
Pictorial index
Outer mirror extend switch* .............................................. P.162
Trailer brake control switch* ............................................. P.398
*
: If equipped
Front-wheel drive control switch*..................................... P.379
“DRIVE MODE” switch* ..................................................... P.376
“TOW HAUL” switch* ......................................................... P.211
Mode select switch* ................................... P.211, 376, 383, 387
“MTS” switch*..................................................................... P.387
“DAC/CRAWL” switch* ...................................................... P.383
Trailer Backup Guide switch* ............................................ P.401
Camera switch*................................................................... P.329
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) OFF switch..................... P.393
Emergency flasher switch................................................. P.512
Height control mode select switch*.................................. P.373
Height control switch* ....................................................... P.373
Rear differential lock switch* ............................................ P.382
Brake hold switch .............................................................. P.216
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Pictorial index
Parking brake switch ......................................................... P.213
Applying/releasing the parking brake ................................... P.213
Precautions for winter season.............................................. P.412
Warning buzzer/messages........................................... P.215, 524
Power tailgate opener switch* .......................................... P.120
*
: If equipped
Driving position memory switches* ................................. P.141
Outside rear view mirror switches ................................... P.160
Window lock switch ........................................................... P.167
Door lock switches ............................................................ P.114
Power window switches .................................................... P.165
*
: If equipped
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
21
22
Pictorial index
Meter control switches ........................................................ P.94
Phone switch*1
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch*2 ................................ P.269
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch*2................................... P.248
Cruise control switches
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range*2 .......... P.262
Cruise control*2 .................................................................... P.274
Audio remote control switches*1
Talk switch*1
*1
: Refer to “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*2: If equipped
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Pictorial index
■Interior
SRS airbags .......................................................................... P.36
Floor mats............................................................................. P.26
Front seats.......................................................................... P.135
Rear seats ........................................................................... P.138
Head restraints ................................................................... P.144
Seat belts .............................................................................. P.29
Inside lock buttons ............................................................ P.114
Console box ....................................................................... P.431
Cup holders ........................................................................ P.429
Bottle holders ..................................................................... P.430
Assist grip .......................................................................... P.445
Rear seat heaters/seat ventilators control switch* ......... P.424
*
: if equipped
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
23
24
Pictorial index
“SOS” button*....................................................................... P.68
Personal/interior lights ...................................................... P.426
Power back window switch*.............................................. P.168
Panoramic moon roof switches*....................................... P.169
“MOOD” switch* ................................................................. P.426
Garage door opener buttons* ........................................... P.453
Inside rear view mirror* ..................................................... P.149
Digital Rear-view Mirror*.................................................... P.150
Sun visors........................................................................... P.452
Vanity mirrors* .................................................................... P.452
*: If equipped
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
25
For safety and security
1
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.................26
For safe driving ..............27
SRS airbags ...................36
Front passenger occupant
classification system ....46
Exhaust gas precautions 51
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children ........52
Child restraint systems... 53
1-3. Emergency assistance
Safety Connect ..............68
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
.....................................73
Alarm..............................74
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
For safety and security
Seat belts .......................29
1
26
1-1. For safe use
Before driving
1-1.For safe use
Observe the following
before starting off in the
vehicle to ensure safety of
driving.
Installing floor mats
Use only floor mats designed
specifically for vehicles of the
same model and model year as
your vehicle. Fix them securely
in place onto the carpet.
1 Insert the retaining hooks
(clips) into the floor mat eyelets.
The shape of the retaining hooks
(clips) may differ from that shown in
the illustration.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the
driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly
interfering with the pedals while
driving. An unexpectedly high
speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
■ When installing the driver’s
floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed
for other models or different
model year vehicles, even if
they are Toyota Genuine floor
mats.
● Only use floor mats designed
for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat
securely using the retaining
hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor
mats on top of each other.
2 Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.
Always align the
marks
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
.
● Do not place the floor mat bot-
tom-side up or upside-down.
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is
securely fixed in the correct
place with all the provided
retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this
check after cleaning the floor.
27
For safe driving
For safe driving, adjust the
seat and mirror to an appropriate position before driving.
● With the engine stopped and
the shift lever in P, fully depress
each pedal to the floor to make
sure it does not interfere with
the floor mat.
Adjust the angle of the seatback so that you are sitting
straight up and so that you do
not have to lean forward to
steer. (P.135)
Adjust the seat so that you
can depress the pedals fully
and so that your arms bend
slightly at the elbow when
gripping the steering wheel.
(P.135)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P.144)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P.29)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
For safety and security
Correct driving posture
1
28
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
■ For safe driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the position of the
driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between
the driver or passenger and the
seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct
posture from being achieved,
and reduce the effectiveness of
the seat belt and head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the
front seats.
Objects placed under the front
seats may become jammed in
the seat tracks and stop the
seat from locking in place. This
may lead to an accident and the
adjustment mechanism may
also be damaged.
● Always observe the legal speed
limit when driving on public
roads.
● When driving over long dis-
tances, take regular breaks
before you start to feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy
while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take
a break immediately.
Correct use of the seat
belts
Make sure that all occupants are
wearing their seat belts before
driving the vehicle. (P.29)
Use a child restraint system
appropriate for the child until the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
child becomes large enough to
properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt. (P.53)
Adjusting the mirrors
Make sure that you can see rear
of the vehicle clearly by adjusting the inside rear view mirror (if
equipped), Digital Rear-view
Mirror (if equipped) and outside
rear view mirrors properly.
(P.149, 150, 160)
1-1. For safe use
Seat belts
29
■ Pregnant women
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat
belts before driving the
vehicle.
1
WARNING
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear
a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt prop-
erly.
● Each seat belt should be used
by one person only. Do not use
a seat belt for more than one
person at once, including children.
● Toyota recommends that chil-
dren be seated in the rear seat
and always use a seat belt
and/or an appropriate child
restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating
position, do not recline the seat
more than necessary. The seat
belt is most effective when the
occupants are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats.
Obtain medical advice and wear
the seat belt in the proper way.
(P.30)
Women who are pregnant should
position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips in the same
manner as other occupants,
extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and
avoiding belt contact with the
rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant
woman, but also the fetus could
suffer death or serious injury as a
result of sudden braking or a collision.
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear
the seat belt in the proper way.
(P.30)
■ When children are in the vehi-
● Do not wear the shoulder belt
cle
P.66
● Always wear your seat belt low
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts
under your arm.
and snug across your hips.
by allowing the belt, plate, or
buckle to be jammed in the
door.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
For safety and security
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
30
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
● Inspect the seat belt system
periodically. Check for cuts,
fraying, and loose parts. Do not
use a damaged seat belt until it
is replaced. Damaged seat belts
cannot protect an occupant
from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate
are locked and the belt is not
twisted.
If the seat belt does not function
correctly, immediately contact
your Toyota dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly,
including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no
obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install,
remove, modify, disassemble or
dispose of the seat belts. Have
any necessary repairs carried
out by your Toyota dealer. Inappropriate handling may lead to
incorrect operation.
Correct use of the seat
belts
 Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
 Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
 Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were
principally designed for persons of
adult size.
● Use a child restraint system
appropriate for the child, until the
child becomes large enough to
properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt. (P.53)
● When the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage.
(P.29)
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.
WARNING
■ Using a seat belt extender
 Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
31
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
● Do not wear the seat belt
extender if you can fasten the
seat belt without the extender.
● Do not use the seat belt
● The personalized extender may
not be safe on another vehicle,
when used by another person,
or at a different seating position
other than the one originally
intended.
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt
extender
When releasing the seat belt,
press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the
seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the
vehicle interior and the extender
itself.
Fastening and releasing
the seat belt (except for
the rear center seat)
1 To fasten the seat belt, push
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
2 To release the seat belt,
press the release button
.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out
of the retractor, firmly pull the belt
and release it.
■ Emergency locking retractor
(ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during
a sudden stop or on impact. It may
also lock if you lean forward too
quickly. A slow, easy motion will
allow the belt to extend so that you
can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor
(ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is
completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is
locked in that position and cannot
be extended. This feature is used to
hold the child restraint system
(CRS) firmly. To free the belt again,
fully retract the belt and then pull the
belt out once more. (P.53)
■ After using the seat belts on the
outboard rear seats
Stow the seat belt buckles in their
respective pockets.
1
For safety and security
extender when installing a child
restraint system because the
belt will not securely hold the
child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious
injury in the event of an accident.
the plate into the buckle until
a click sound is heard.
32
1-1. For safe use
Fastening the seat belt
(for the rear center seat)
1 Take out the plate.
Plate A
Plate B
2 When fixing the belt, in the
order of plate A and then
plate B, insert the plate into
the buckle until a clicking
sound is heard.
WARNING
■ When using the rear center
seat belt
Do not use the rear center seat
belt with either buckle released.
Fastening only one of the buckles
may result in death or serious
injury in case of sudden braking
or a collision.
Releasing and stowing
the seat belt (for the rear
center seat)
1 To release the hooked
buckle, push the buckle
release button .
Plate B
2 Insert the mechanical key
(P.108) or plate B into the
notch of buckle and remove
the belt.
Buckle
Retract the belt slowly when releas-
Plate A
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1-1. For safe use
ing and stowing the seat belt.
33
4 Stow the seat belt buckle in
the pocket.
1
Plate B
Buckle
3 Stow in the holder in the
order of plate B and then
plate A.
In order to securely fix it, firmly
insert it to the back.
■ Emergency locking retractor
(ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during
a sudden stop or on impact. It may
also lock if you lean forward too
quickly. A slow, easy motion will
allow the belt to extend so that you
can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor
(ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is
completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is
locked in that position and cannot
be extended. This feature is used to
hold the child restraint system
(CRS) firmly. To free the belt again,
fully retract the belt and then pull the
belt out once more. (P.53)
Adjusting the seat belt
shoulder anchor height
(front seats)
Plate A
Plate B
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
For safety and security
Mechanical key
34
1-1. For safe use
1 Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing
the release button .
2 Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up while pressing the
release button .
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
WARNING
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt
should be kept away from your
neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce
the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or
accident.
Seat belt pretensioners
(front and outboard rear
seats)
frontal or side collision or a vehicle rollover.
The pretensioners do not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a minor side impact or a
rear impact.
■ Replacing the belt after the pre-
tensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple
collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not
activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ PCS-linked seat belt preten-
sioner control (vehicles with
Toyota Safety Sense 2.5)
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System)
determines that the possibility of a
collision with a vehicle is high, the
seat belt pretensioners will be prepared to operate.
WARNING
■ Seat belt pretensioners
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● Do not place anything, such as
The pretensioners help the seat
belts to quickly restrain the
occupants by retracting the seat
belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so will
disperse the passenger’s
weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a
result, the seat belt pretensioner
for the front passenger’s seat
may not activate in the event of
a collision.
1-1. For safe use
35
WARNING
● If the pretensioner has acti-
vated, the SRS warning light will
come on. In that case, the seat
belt cannot be used again and
must be replaced at your Toyota
dealer.
1
For safety and security
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
36
1-1. For safe use
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury
to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to
help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
SRS airbag system
■ Location of the SRS airbags
 SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
 SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS curtain shield airbags
• Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1-1. For safe use
37
• Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the
event of vehicle rollover
■ SRS airbag system components
1
For safety and security
Front impact sensors
Knee airbags
Front passenger airbag
Side impact sensors (front)
Curtain shield airbags
Side impact sensors (front door)
Front passenger occupant classification sensors
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
Side airbags
Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters
Side impact sensors (rear)
Driver airbag
SRS warning light
Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
38
1-1. For safe use
Driver’s seat position sensor
Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed
based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The
airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on
information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system
components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical
reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to
help restrain the motion of the occupants.
■ If the SRS airbags deploy
(inflate)
● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising,
etc., may be sustained from SRS
airbags, due to the extremely high
speed deployment (inflation) by
hot gases.
● A loud noise and white powder will
be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and
inflator) as well as the front seats,
parts of the front and rear pillars,
and roof side rails, may be hot for
several minutes. The airbag itself
may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● All of the doors will be unlocked.
(P.112)
● The brakes and stop lights will be
controlled automatically. (P.393)
● The interior lights will turn on automatically. (P.427)
● The emergency flashers will turn
on automatically. (P.512)
● Fuel supply to the engine will be
stopped. (P.518)
● For Safety Connect subscribers, if
any of the following situations
occur, the system is designed to
send an emergency call to the
response center, notifying them of
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
the vehicle’s location (without
needing to push the “SOS” button)
and an agent will attempt to speak
with the occupants to ascertain
the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants
are unable to communicate, the
agent automatically treats the call
as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency
services. (P.68)
• An SRS airbag is deployed.
• A seat belt pretensioner is activated.
• The vehicle is involved in a severe
rear-end collision.
■ SRS airbag deployment condi-
tions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy
in the event of an impact that
exceeds the set threshold level
(the level of force corresponding
to an approximately 12 - 18 mph
[20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with
a fixed wall that does not move or
deform).
However, this threshold velocity will
be considerably higher in the following situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object,
such as a parked vehicle or sign
pole, which can move or deform
on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an
underride collision, such as a colli-
1-1. For safe use
■ SRS airbag deployment condi-
tions (SRS side and curtain
shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield
airbags will deploy in the event of
an impact that exceeds the set
threshold level (the level of force
corresponding to the impact force
produced by an approximately
3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding
with the vehicle cabin from a
direction perpendicular to the
vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 30 km/h]).
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags
may deploy in the event of a
severe side collision.
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags
will deploy in the event of vehicle
rollover.
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags
may also deploy in the event of a
severe frontal collision.
■ Conditions under which the
SRS airbags may deploy
(inflate), other than a collision
The SRS front airbags and SRS
side and curtain shield airbags may
also deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in
the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement
or hard surface
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Falling into or jumping over a deep
hole
● Landing hard or falling
1
The SRS curtain shield airbags may
also deploy under the situations
shown in the illustration.
● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
● The vehicle skids and hits a curb
stone.
■ Types of collisions that may not
deploy the SRS airbags (SRS
front airbags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a side or rear collision, if it rolls
over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes
sufficient forward deceleration of the
vehicle, deployment of the SRS
front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
For safety and security
sion in which the front of the vehicle underrides, or goes under, the
bed of a truck
● Depending on the type of collision,
it is possible that only the seat belt
pretensioners and knee airbags
will activate.
● The SRS front airbags for the front
passenger will not activate if there
is no passenger sitting in the front
passenger seat. However, the
SRS front airbags for the front
passenger may deploy if luggage
is put in the seat, even if the seat
is unoccupied.
39
40
1-1. For safe use
involved in a rear collision, if it
pitches end over end, or if it is
involved in a low-speed side or lowspeed frontal collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Pitching end over end
■ Types of collisions that may not
deploy the SRS airbags (SRS
side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the
side at certain angles, or a collision
to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger
compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls
over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
The SRS curtain shield airbags do
not generally inflate if the vehicle is
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ When to contact your Toyota
dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle
will require inspection and/or repair.
Contact your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have
been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was
involved in an accident that was
not severe enough to cause the
SRS front airbags to inflate.
● A portion of a door or its surround-
ing area is damaged, deformed or
has had a hole made in it, or the
vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough
to cause the SRS side and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
1-1. For safe use
41
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● The pad section of the steering
● The surface of the seats with the
side airbag is scratched, cracked,
or otherwise damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear
pillars or roof side rail garnishes
(padding) containing the SRS curtain shield airbags inside, is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
the vehicle must wear their seat
belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with
the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys
with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious
injury especially if the driver is
very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA)
advises: Since the risk zone for
the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3
in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from
your driver airbag provides you
with a clear margin of safety. This
distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to
your breastbone. If you sit less
than 10 in. (250 mm) away now,
you can change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as
far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
1
For safety and security
wheel, dashboard near the front
passenger airbag or lower portion
of the instrument panel is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● The driver and all passengers in
42
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
• Slightly recline the back of the
seat.
Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the
10 in. (250 mm) distance, even
with the driver seat all the way
forward, simply by reclining the
back of the seat somewhat. If
reclining the back of your seat
makes it hard to see the road,
raise yourself by using a firm,
non-slippery cushion, or raise
the seat if your vehicle has that
feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This
points the airbag toward your
chest instead of your head and
neck.
The seat should be adjusted as
recommended by NHTSA above,
while still maintaining control of
the foot pedals, steering wheel,
and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● If the seat belt extender has
been connected to the front
seat belt buckles but the seat
belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the
seat belt, the SRS front airbags
will judge that the driver and
front passenger are wearing the
seat belt even though the seat
belt has not been connected. In
this case, the SRS front airbags
may not activate correctly in a
collision, resulting in death or
serious injury in the event of a
collision. Be sure to wear the
seat belt with the seat belt
extender.
● The SRS front passenger air-
bag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death
or serious injury especially if the
front passenger is very close to
the airbag. The front passenger
seat should be as far from the
airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
● Improperly seated and/or
● Do not lean against the door,
the roof side rail or the front,
side and rear pillars.
1
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on
the passenger seats toward the
door or put their head or hands
outside the vehicle.
● Do not sit on the edge of the
seat or lean against the dashboard.
● Do not attach anything to or
● Do not allow a child to stand in
front of the SRS front passenger
airbag unit or sit on the knees of
a front passenger.
● Do not allow the front seat occu-
pants to hold items on their
knees.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
lean anything against areas
such as the dashboard, steering
wheel pad and lower portion of
the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver,
front passenger and knee airbags deploy.
For safety and security
restrained infants and children
can be killed or seriously injured
by a deploying airbag. An infant
or child who is too small to use
a seat belt should be properly
secured using a child restraint
system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats
of the vehicle and properly
restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children
than the front passenger seat.
(P.53)
43
44
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
● Do not attach anything to areas
such as a door, windshield, side
windows, front or rear pillar, roof
side rail and assist grip.
● If breathing becomes difficult
after the SRS airbags have
deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or
leave the vehicle if it is safe to
do so. Wash off any residue as
soon as possible to prevent skin
irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS air-
● Do not hang coat hangers or
hard objects on the coat hooks.
All of these items could become
projectiles and may cause
death or serious injury, should
the SRS curtain shield airbags
deploy.
● If a vinyl cover is put on the area
where the SRS knee airbag will
deploy, be sure to remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories
which cover the parts where the
SRS side airbags inflate as they
may interfere with inflation of
the SRS airbags. Such accessories may prevent the SRS
side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or
cause the SRS side airbags to
inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant
levels of force to the area of the
SRS airbag components or the
front doors. Doing so can cause
the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the compo-
nent parts immediately after the
SRS airbags have deployed
(inflated) as they may be hot.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
bags are stored, such as the
steering wheel pad and front
and rear pillar garnishes are
damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota
dealer.
● Do not place anything, such as
a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so will
disperse the passenger’s
weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a
result, the SRS front airbags for
the front passenger may not
deploy in the event of a collision.
■ Modification and disposal of
SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or
perform any of the following modifications without consulting your
Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags
may malfunction or deploy
(inflate) accidentally, causing
death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassem-
bly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal
or replacement of the steering
wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery,
front, side and rear pillars, roof
side rails, front door panels,
front door trims or front door
speakers
1-1. For safe use
45
WARNING
● Modifications to the front door
panel (such as making a hole in
it)
● Repairs or modifications of the
front fender, front bumper, or
side of the occupant compartment
bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow
plows, winches or roof luggage
carrier
● Modifications to the vehicle’s
suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices
such as mobile two-way radios
and CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for
a person with a physical disability
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
For safety and security
● Installation of a grille guard (bull
1
46
1-1. For safe use
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant
classification system. This system detects the conditions of
the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the
front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag.
System components
SRS warning light
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant
classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the front passenger
occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Make sure the front passenger’s
seat belt plate has not been left
inserted into the buckle before
someone sits in the front passenger seat.
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF”
● Do not apply a heavy load to the
front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback pocket).
● Do not put weight on the front
passenger seat by putting your
hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the
rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift
the front passenger seat with
their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the
front passenger seat.
● Do not recline the front passen-
ger seatback so far that it
touches a rear seat. This may
cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the SRS
airbags for the front passenger
will not activate in the event of a
severe accident. If the seatback
touches the rear seat, return the
seatback to a position where it
does not touch the rear seat.
Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving.
Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.
● If an adult sits in the front pas-
senger seat, the “AIR BAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated. If
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is
illuminated, ask the passenger
to sit up straight, well back in
the seat, feet on the floor, and
with the seat belt worn correctly.
If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
still remains illuminated, either
ask the passenger to move to
the rear seat, or if that is not
possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install
a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger
seat, install the child restraint
system on the front passenger
seat in the proper order.
(P.55)
● Do not modify or remove the
front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger
seat or subject it to severe
impact. Otherwise, the SRS
warning light may come on to
indicate a malfunction of the
front passenger occupant classification system. In this case,
contact your Toyota dealer
immediately.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1
For safety and security
indicator light is not illuminated
when using the seat belt
extender for the front passenger
seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from
the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect
the seat belt extender after
making sure the “AIR BAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated. If
you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the
SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate, which
could cause death or serious
injury in the event of a collision.
47
48
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
● Child restraint systems installed
on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory,
such as a cushion and seat
cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the
upholstery of the front seat.
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant
classification system
■ Adult*1
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
“AIR BAG ON”
SRS warning light
Off
Indicators/warning
lights
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
Off*2 or flashing*3
belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag
Activated
■ Child*4
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF” or
“AIR BAG ON”*4
SRS warning light
Off
Indicators/warning
lights
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
Off*2 or flashing*3
belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Deactivated or
activated*4
1-1. For safe use
49
■ Child restraint system with infant*5
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”*6
SRS warning light
Off
Indicators/warning
lights
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
Off*2 or flashing*3
belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
■ Unoccupied
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Indicators/warning
lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light
Off
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
■ There is a malfunction in the system
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Indicators/warning
lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light
On
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
*1
: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize
him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2
: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt
*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt
*4
: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors
which may affect this can be the physique or posture.
*5
: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
For safety and security
Devices
1
50
1-1. For safe use
seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on
the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P.53)
*6
: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how
to install the child restraint system properly. (P.55)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1-1. For safe use
Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the
human body is included in
exhaust gases if inhaled.
WARNING
■ Important points while driving
● Keep the back window closed.
● If you smell exhaust gases in
the vehicle even when the back
window is closed, open the windows and have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly venti-
lated area or a closed area,
such as a garage, stop the
engine.
● Do not leave the vehicle with
the engine running for a long
time.
If such a situation cannot be
avoided, park the vehicle in an
open space and ensure that
exhaust fumes do not enter the
vehicle interior.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Do not leave the engine running
in an area with snow build-up,
or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect and
enter the vehicle.
■ Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be
checked periodically. If there is a
hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to
have the vehicle inspected and
repaired by your Toyota dealer.
1
For safety and security
Exhaust gases contain harmful
carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Observe
the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle
and may lead to an accident
caused by light-headedness, or
may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
51
52
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children
1-2.Child safety
Observe the following precautions when children are
in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system
appropriate for the child,
until the child becomes
large enough to properly
wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
 It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to
avoid accidental contact
with the shift lever, wiper
switch, etc.
 Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window
lock switch to avoid children
opening the door while driving or operating the power
window accidentally.
(P.114, 167)
 Do not let small children
operate equipment which
may catch or pinch body
parts, such as the power
window, hood, tailgate,
seats, etc.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
WARNING
■ When children are in the vehi-
cle
Never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, and never allow
children to have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the
vehicle or shift the vehicle into
neutral. There is also a danger
that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows or other features of the
vehicle. In addition, heat build-up
or extremely cold temperatures
inside the vehicle can be fatal to
children.
1-2. Child safety
Child restraint systems
Use a child restraint system
when riding with a small child
that cannot properly use a
seat belt. For the child’s
safety, install the child
restraint system to a rear seat.
Be sure to follow the installation method that is in the operation manual enclosed with
the restraint system.
Table of contents
Points to remember: P.53
Child restraint system: P.55
When using a child restraint system: P.56
Child restraint system installation method
• Using an anchor bracket (for
top tether strap): P.58
• Fixed with a child restraint
LATCH anchor: P.60
• Fixed with a seat belt: P.63
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Points to remember
The laws of all 50 states of the
U.S.A. as well as Canada now
require the use of child restraint
systems.
 Prioritize and observe the
warnings, as well as the laws
and regulations for child
restraint systems.
 Use a child restraint system
until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belt.
 Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle
and is appropriate to the age
and size of the child.
WARNING
■ When a child is riding
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● For effective protection in auto-
mobile accidents and sudden
stops, a child must be properly
restrained, using a seat belt or
child restraint system which is
correctly installed. For installation details, refer to the operation manual enclosed with the
child restraint system. General
installation instruction is provided in this manual.
1
For safety and security
Before installing a child
restraint system in the vehicle, there are precautions
that need to be observed,
different types of child
restraint systems, as well
as installation methods,
etc., written in this manual.
53
54
1-2. Child safety
WARNING
● Toyota strongly urges the use of
a proper child restraint system
that conforms to the weight and
size of the child, installed on the
rear seat. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seat than in the front seat.
● Holding a child in your or some-
one else’s arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system.
In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield
or between the holder and the
interior of the vehicle.
■ Handling the child restraint
system
If the child restraint system is not
properly fixed in place, the child or
other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving, or an accident.
● If the vehicle were to receive a
strong impact from an accident,
etc., it is possible that the child
restraint system has damage
that is not readily visible. In
such cases, do not reuse the
restraint system.
● Make sure you have complied
with all installation instructions
provided with the child restraint
system manufacturer and that
the system is properly secured.
● Keep the child restraint system
properly secured on the seat
even if it is not in use. Do not
store the child restraint system
unsecured in the passenger
compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the
child restraint system, remove it
from the vehicle.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
55
1-2. Child safety
Child restraint system
■ Types of child restraint system installation methods
Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint
system about the installation of the child restraint system.
Installation method
Page
P.58
Child restraint LATCH
anchors attachment
P.60
Seat belt attachment
P.63
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
For safety and security
Anchor brackets (for
top tether strap) attachment
1
56
1-2. Child safety
When using a child
restraint system
■ When installing a child
restraint system to a front
passenger seat
For the safety of a child, install
child restraint systems to a rear
seats. When installing child
restraint system to a front passenger seat is unavoidable,
adjust the seat as follows and
install the child restraint system.
 Move the front seat fully rearward.
 Adjust the seatback angle to
the most upright position.
When installing a forward-facing
child seat, if there is a gap between
the child seat and the seatback,
adjust the seatback angle until
good contact is achieved.
 If the head restraint interferes
with the child restraint system
installation and the head
restraint can be removed,
remove the head restraint.
Otherwise, put the head
restraint in the upper most
position.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
WARNING
■ When using a child restraint
system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Never install a rear-facing child
restraint system on the front
passenger seat even if the “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid
inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rearfacing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger
seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint
system may be installed on the
front passenger seat only when
it is unavoidable. A child
restraint system that requires a
top tether strap should not be
used in the front passenger seat
since there is no top tether strap
anchor for the front passenger
seat.
1-2. Child safety
WARNING
● A forward-facing child restraint
● Do not allow the child to lean
his/her head or any part of
his/her body against the door or
the area of the seat, front or rear
pillars, or roof side rails from
which the SRS side airbags or
SRS curtain shield airbags
deploy even if the child is
seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS
side and curtain shield airbags
inflate, and the impact could
cause death or serious injury to
the child.
● When a booster seat is
installed, always ensure that the
shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of the child’s
shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck,
but not so that it could fall off the
child’s shoulder.
● Use child restraint system suit-
able to the age and size of the
child and install it to the rear
seat.
● If the driver’s seat interferes
with the child restraint system
and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the
child restraint system to the
right-hand rear seat.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1
For safety and security
system may be installed on the
front passenger seat only when
it is unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front
passenger seat, adjust the seatback angle to the most upright
position, move the seat to the
rearmost position, and raise the
seat to the upper most position,
even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
If the head restraint interferes
with the child restraint system
installation and the head
restraint can be removed,
remove the head restraint.
If the head restraint cannot be
removed, raise it to the uppermost position.
57
58
1-2. Child safety
WARNING
● Adjust the front passenger seat
so that it does not interfere with
the child restraint system.
Using an anchor bracket
(for top tether strap)
■ Anchor brackets (for top
tether strap)
■ Fixing the top tether strap
to the anchor bracket
Install the child restraint system
in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child
restraint system.
 Outboard rear seats
1 Remove the head restraint.
(P.146)
Anchor brackets are provided
for each rear seat.
Use anchor brackets when fixing the top tether strap.
 Outboard rear seats
2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
3 Latch the hook onto the
anchor bracket.
Anchor brackets
Top tether strap
 Rear center seat
Anchor bracket
Top tether strap
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1 Swing the seatback forward
slightly. (P.138)
2 Latch the hook onto the
1-2. Child safety
anchor bracket.
3 Fix the top tether strap so
that there is no slack.
4 Return the seatback.
2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
3 Latch the hook onto the
anchor bracket.
1
For safety and security
4 Secure the child restraint
system using the seat belt
(P.64) or the lower anchors
(P.60), and then tighten the
top tether strap.
59
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
5 If the head restraint does not
interfere with the child
restraint system installation,
install the head restraint.
 Rear center seat
1 Adjust the head restraint to
the upmost position.
If the head restraint interferes with
the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be
removed, remove the head
restraint. (P.146)
1 Swing the seatback forward
slightly. (P.138)
2 Latch the hook onto the
anchor bracket.
3 Fix the top tether strap so
that there is no slack.
4 Return the seatback.
4 Secure the child restraint
system using the seat belt
(P.64) or the lower anchors
(P.60), and then tighten the
top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
When installing the child restraint
system with the head restraint
being raised, be sure to have the
top tether strap pass underneath
the head restraint.
5 If the head restraint does not
interfere with the child
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
60
1-2. Child safety
restraint system installation,
install the head restraint.
● If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm
the security of the child restraint
system.
Child restraint system
fixed with a child restraint
LATCH anchor
■ Child restraint LATCH
anchors
■ Laws and regulations pertain-
LATCH anchors are provided for
the outboard rear seat.
ing to anchors
The LATCH system conforms to
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming
to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform
to SAE J1819.
WARNING
■ When installing a child
restraint system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Firmly attach the top tether
strap and make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
● Do not attach the top tether
strap to anything other than the
anchor bracket.
● Follow all installation instruc-
tions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
● Rear center seat: When install-
ing the child restraint system
with the head restraint being
raised, after the head restraint
has been raised and then the
anchor bracket has been fixed,
do not lower the head restraint.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ When installing in the rear
outboard seats
Install the child restraint system
in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child
restraint system.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, install the top tether
strap before installing the child
restraint system, and then install
the child restraint system.
(P.58)
1 If the head restraint interferes
with the child restraint system
installation and the head
restraint can be removed,
1-2. Child safety
remove the head restraint.
(P.146)
61
the presence of a lower connector system.
1
For safety and security
2 Widen the gap between the
seat cushion and seatback
slightly.
 With flexible lower attach-
ments
3 Latch the hooks of the lower
attachments onto the LATCH
anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child
restraint system indicates
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Canada only
 With rigid lower attachments
3 Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child
restraint system indicates
62
1-2. Child safety
the presence of a lower connector system.
WARNING
■ When installing a child
restraint system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● When using the LATCH
anchors, be sure that there are
no foreign objects around the
anchors and that the seat belt is
not caught behind the child
restraint system.
● Follow all installation instruc-
tions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
● Child restraint systems cannot
Canada only
4 If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, tighten the top
tether strap. (P.58)
5 After installing the child
restraint system, rock it back
and forth to ensure that it is
installed securely. (P.66)
■ Laws and regulations pertain-
ing to anchors
The LATCH system conforms to
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming
to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform
to SAE J1819.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
be installed in the rear center
seat. Do not install the child
restraint system in the rear center seat using the LATCH
anchors.
● When securing some types of
child restraint systems in rear
seats, it may not be possible to
properly use the seat belts in
positions next to the child
restraint without interfering with
it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits
snugly across your shoulder
and low on your hips. If it does
not, or if it interferes with the
child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious
injury.
● If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm
the security of the child restraint
system.
1-2. Child safety
Child restraint system
fixed with a seat belt
63
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
A child restraint system for a
small child or baby must itself be
properly restrained on the seat
with the lap portion of the
lap/shoulder belt.
1
system using a seat belt
(child restraint lock function belt)
Install the child restraint system
in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child
restraint system.
3 Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode,
the belt cannot be extended.
■ Rear-facing  Infant
seat/convertible seat
1 Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing
the rear of the vehicle.
4 While pushing the child
restraint system down into
the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the
child restraint system is
securely in place.
2 Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
For safety and security
■ Installing child restraint
64
1-2. Child safety
check that it cannot be extended.
5 After installing the child
restraint system, rock it back
and forth to ensure that it is
installed securely. (P.66)
remove the head restraint.
(P.145)
3 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
■ Forward-facing  Convert-
ible seat
Before installing the child
restraint to the rear seat:
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, install the top tether
strap, and then install the child
restraint system. (P.58) Also,
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s operation manual
regarding the installation.
1 Adjust the seat
When using the front passenger
seat: If installing the child restraint
system to the front passenger seat
is unavoidable, refer to P.56 for
front passenger seat adjustment.
4 Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
2 If the head restraint interferes
with the child restraint system
installation and the head
restraint can be removed,
5 Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1-2. Child safety
in lock mode. In lock mode,
the belt cannot be extended.
65
ger seat is unavoidable, refer
to P.56 for front passenger
seat adjustment.
6 While pushing the child
restraint system into the rear
seat, allow the shoulder belt
to retract until the child
restraint system is securely in
place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
3 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
 Booster type
7 If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, tighten the top
tether strap. (P.58)
8 After installing the child
restraint system, rock it back
and forth to ensure that it is
installed securely. (P.66)
■ Booster seat
1 If installing the child restraint
system to the front passen-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1
For safety and security
2 High back type: If the head
restraint interferes with your
child restraint system, and
the head restraint can be
removed, remove the head
restraint. (P.145)
66
1-2. Child safety
 High back type
system.
Since the seat belt automatically
reels itself, slowly return it to the
stowing position.
4 Sit the child in the child
restraint system. Fit the seat
belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P.29)
WARNING
■ When installing a child
restraint system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to play
with the seat belt. If the seat belt
becomes twisted around a
child’s neck, it may lead to
choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle
cannot be unfastened, scissors
should be used to cut the belt.
● Ensure that the belt and plate
are securely locked and the
seat belt is not twisted.
■ Removing a child restraint
system installed with a seat
belt
Press the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
When releasing the buckle, the
child restraint system may spring
up due to the rebound of the seat
cushion. Release the buckle while
holding down the child restraint
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Shake the child restraint system
left and right, and forward and
backward to ensure that it has
been securely installed.
● When a booster seat is
installed, always ensure that the
shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of the child’s
shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck,
but not so that it could fall off the
child’s shoulder.
1-2. Child safety
WARNING
● Follow all installation instruc-
tions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
● When securing some types of
● When installing a child restraint
system in the rear center seat,
adjust both seat cushions to the
same position and align both
seatbacks at the same angle.
Otherwise, the child restraint
system cannot be securely
restrained and this may cause
death or serious injuries in the
event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm
the security of the child restraint
system.
■ When installing a booster
seat
To prevent the belt from going into
ALR lock mode, do not fully
extend the shoulder belt. ALR
mode causes the belt to tighten
only. This could cause injury or
discomfort to the child. (P.31,
33)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Do not use a seat belt
extender
If a seat belt extender is used
when installing a child restraint
system, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint
system, which could cause death
or serious injury to the child or
other passengers in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
1
For safety and security
child restraint systems in rear
seats, it may not be possible to
properly use the seat belts in
positions next to the child
restraint without interfering with
it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits
snugly across your shoulder
and low on your hips. If it does
not, or if it interferes with the
child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious
injury.
67
68
1-3. Emergency assistance
Safety Connect*
1-3.Emergency assistance
*
System components
: If equipped
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics
service that uses Global
Positioning System (GPS)
data and embedded cellular
technology to provide
safety and security features to subscribers. Safety
Connect is supported by
Toyota’s designated
response center, which
operates 24 hours per day, 7
days per week.
Safety Connect service is
available by subscription on
select, telematics hardwareequipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the
Telematics Subscription
Service Agreement and its
Terms and Conditions, as in
effect and amended from
time to time, a current copy
of which is available at Toyota.com. All use of the
Safety Connect service is
subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.
Microphone
“SOS” button
LED light indicators
Speaker
■ Certification
P.630
Services
Subscribers have the following
Safety Connect services available:
 Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary
response from emergency service
providers. (P.70)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
 Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle
theft. (P.70)
 Emergency Assistance Button
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1-3. Emergency assistance
(“SOS”)
69
1-888-869-6828
■ Languages
 Puerto Rico
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The Safety Connect system
will offer voice prompts in English,
Spanish, and French. Please indicate your language of choice when
enrolling.
Connects drivers to response-center support. (P.70)
 Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road
assistance. (P.70)
Subscription
After you have signed the
Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement and are enrolled,
you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is
available for purchase. Contact
your Toyota dealer, call the following or push the “SOS” button
in your vehicle for further subscription details.
 The United States
1-800-331-4331
1-877-855-8377
■ Safety Connect Services Infor-
mation
● Phone calls using the vehicles
Bluetooth® technology will not be
possible during Safety Connect.
● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Toyota
models (in the contiguous United
States only). Contact with the
Safety Connect response center
is dependent upon the telematics
device being in operative condi-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ When contacting the response
center
You may be unable to contact the
response center if the network is
busy.
1
For safety and security
 Canada
tion, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal
reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or
receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics
Subscription Service Agreement
required. A variety of subscription
terms is available; charges vary
by subscription term selected and
location.
● Automatic Collision Notification,
Emergency Assistance and Stolen
Vehicle Location will function in
the United States, including
Hawaii and Alaska, Puerto Rico
and in Canada, and Enhanced
Roadside Assistance will function
in the United States, Puerto Rico
and in Canada.
● Automatic Collision Notification,
Emergency Assistance, Stolen
Vehicle and Enhanced Road
Assistance will not function in the
United States Virgin Islands.
For vehicles first sold in the USVI,
no Safety Connect services will
function in and outside the United
States Virgin Islands.
● Safety Connect services are not
subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the
device is not TTY compatible.
70
1-3. Emergency assistance
Safety Connect LED light
Indicators
When the engine switch is
turned to ON, the red indicator
light comes on for 2 seconds
then turns off. Afterward, the
green indicator light comes on,
indicating that the service is
active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system
usage conditions:
 Green indicator light on =
Active service
 Green indicator light flashing
= Safety Connect call in process
 Red indicator light (except at
vehicle start-up) = System
malfunction (contact your Toyota dealer)
 No indicator light (off) =
Safety Connect service not
active
Safety Connect services
■ Automatic Collision Notifi-
cation
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to
automatically call the response
center. The responding agent
receives the vehicle’s location
and attempts to speak with the
vehicle occupants to assess the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically
treats the call as an emergency,
contacts the nearest emergency services provider to
describe the situation, and
requests that assistance be sent
to the location.
■ Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety
Connect can work with local
authorities to assist them in
locating and recovering the
vehicle. After filing a police
report, call the Safety Connect
response center at 1-800-3314331 in the United States, 1877-855-8377 in Puerto Rico or
1-888-869-6828 in Canada, and
follow the prompts for Safety
Connect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law
enforcement with recovery of a
stolen vehicle, Safety-Connectequipped vehicle location data
may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third
parties to locate your vehicle.
Further information is available
at Toyota.com.
■ Emergency Assistance But-
ton (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on
the road, push the “SOS” button
to reach the Safety Connect
response center. The answering agent will determine your
vehicle’s location, assess the
1-3. Emergency assistance
emergency, and dispatch the
necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS”
button, tell the response-center
agent that you are not experiencing
an emergency.
■ Enhanced Roadside Assis-
tance
Subscribers can press the
“SOS” button to reach a Safety
Connect response-center agent,
who can help with a wide range
of needs, such as: towing, flat
tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a
description of the Roadside
Assistance services and their
limitations, please see the
Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at
Toyota.com.
Safety information for
Safety Connect
Important! Read this information about exposure to radio frequency signals before using
Safety Connect;
The Safety Connect system
installed in your vehicle is a lowpower radio transmitter and
receiver. It receives and also
sends out radio frequency (RF)
signals.
In August 1996, the Federal
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Communications Commission
(FCC) adopted RF exposure
guidelines with safety levels for
mobile wireless phones. Those
guidelines are consistent with
the safety standards previously
set by the following U.S. and
international standards bodies.
 ANSI (American National
Standards Institute) C95.1
[1992]
 NCRP (National Council on
Radiation Protection and
Measurement) Report 86
[1986]
 ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on
comprehensive and periodic
evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians
from universities, and government health agencies and
industries reviewed the available body of research to
develop the ANSI Standard
(C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect
complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.
■ Free /Open Source Software
Information
This product contains Free/Open
Source Software (FOSS). The
License information and/or the
source code of such FOSS can be
1
For safety and security
Enhanced Roadside Assistance
adds GPS data to the already
included warranty-based Toyota
roadside service.
71
72
1-3. Emergency assistance
found at the following
https://www.denso.com/global/en/
opensource/dcm/toyota/
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system
73
1-4.Theft deterrent system
Never leave the keys inside
the vehicle when you leave
the vehicle.
This system is designed to
help prevent vehicle theft
but does not guarantee
absolute security against all
vehicle thefts.
Operating the system
The indicator light flashes after
the engine switch has been
turned off to indicate that the
system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the engine switch has been
turned to ACC or ON to indicate
that the system has been canceled.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
The vehicle has a maintenance-free
type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the
system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in
contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or
touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■ Certification
P.631
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system oper-
ates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the
proper operation of the system
cannot be guaranteed.
1
For safety and security
The vehicle’s keys have
built-in transponder chips
that prevent the engine from
starting if a key has not
been previously registered
in the vehicle’s on-board
computer.
■ System maintenance
74
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
trol. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The alarm uses light and
sound to give an alert when
an intrusion is detected.
The alarm is triggered in the
following situations when
the alarm is set:
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the system is set.
 A locked door or tailgate is
unlocked or opened in any
way other than using the
entry function or wireless
remote control. (The doors
will lock again automatically.)
 The hood is opened.
Setting/deactivating/stopping the alarm system
■ Items to check before lock-
ing the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle
theft, make sure of the following:
 Nobody is in the vehicle.
 The windows and the panoramic moon roof (if
equipped) are closed before
the alarm is set.
 No valuables or other personal items are left in the
vehicle.
■ Setting
Close the doors and hood, and
lock all the doors using the entry
function or wireless remote con-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Deactivating or stopping
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
 Unlock the doors and tailgate
using the entry function or
wireless remote control.
 Turn the engine switch to
ACC or ON, or start the
engine. (The alarm will be
deactivated or stopped after a
few seconds.)
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free
type alarm system.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the
following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the
alarm system.)
● The doors are unlocked using the
mechanical key.
1-4. Theft deterrent system
75
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system oper-
ates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the
proper operation of the system
cannot be guaranteed.
● A person inside the vehicle opens
● The battery is recharged or
replaced when the vehicle is
locked. (P.549)
■ Alarm-operated door lock
In the following cases, depending
on the situation, the door may automatically lock to prevent improper
entry into the vehicle:
● When a person remaining in the
vehicle unlocks the door and the
alarm is activated.
● While the alarm is activated, a
person remaining in the vehicle
unlocks the door.
● When recharging or replacing the
battery.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
For safety and security
a door, hood or power tailgate* or
unlocks the vehicle.
*
: If equipped
1
76
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
77
Vehicle status information and indicators
2
2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators ...............................78
Gauges and meters (4.2inch display type) .........85
Gauges and meters (full
LCD type) .....................89
Head-up display .......... 101
Fuel consumption information ............................ 105
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Vehicle status information and indicators
Multi-information display 93
2
78
2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators
2-1.Instrument cluster
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster,
overhead console and outside rear view mirrors inform the
driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all
warning lights and indicators illuminated.
 4.2-inch display type
The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on
the target region.
 Full LCD type
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
2-1. Instrument cluster
79
The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on
the target region.
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
80
2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver
of malfunctions in the indicated
vehicle’s systems.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
(Red)
(Yellow)
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light*1 (P.519)
Brake system warning light*1 (P.519)
Brake system warning light*1 (P.519)
(Red)
(Yellow)
PCS warning light*1 (if
(Flashes or equipped) (P.521)
illuminates)
(Orange)
High coolant temperature warning light*2
(P.519)
Charging system
warning light*2
(P.520)
Low engine oil pressure warning light*2
(P.520)
(Flashes)
Malfunction indicator
lamp*1 (P.520)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
SRS warning light*1
(P.520)
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light*1
(P.521)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
LTA indicator*3 (if
equipped) (P.522)
Stop & Start cancel
indicator*1 (P.522)
Intuitive parking assist
OFF indicator*4 (if
equipped) (P.522)
PKSB OFF indicator*1 (if equipped)
(P.523)
“RCTA OFF” indicator*1 (if equipped)
(P.523)
Slip indicator light*1
(P.523)
Inappropriate pedal
operation warning
light*2 (P.524)
Malfunction indicator
lamp*1 (P.520)
ABS warning light*1
(P.521)
Electric power steering system warning
light*1 (P.521)
Electric power steering system warning
light*1 (P.521)
(Flashes)
(U.S.A.)
(Flashes)
Brake hold operated
indicator*1 (P.524)
Parking brake indicator (P.524)
2-1. Instrument cluster
(Canada)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
Parking brake indicator (P.524)
Rear differential lock
indicator (if equipped)
(P.524)
Tire pressure warning
light*1 (P.525)
*1
: These lights turn on when the
engine switch is turned to ON to
indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn
off after the engine is started, or
after a few seconds. There may
be a malfunction in a system if
the light does not come on, or
turn off. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*2
: This light illuminates on the
multi-information display with a
message.
*3
: For 4.2-inch display type: This
light illuminates on the multiinformation display.
*4: Intuitive parking assist OFF indi-
cator turns on when the engine
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
switch is turned to ON while the
Intuitive parking assist function is
on. It will turn off after a few seconds.
WARNING
■ If a safety system warning
light does not come on
Should a safety system light such
as the ABS and SRS warning light
not come on when you start the
engine, this could mean that
these systems are not available to
help protect you in an accident,
which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately if this occurs.
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Low fuel level warning light (P.525)
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
(P.525)
Rear passengers’ seat
belt reminder lights*3
(P.526)
Air suspension malfunction indicator*3 (if
equipped) (P.526)
Trailer brake warning
light (if equipped)
(P.526)
81
82
2-1. Instrument cluster
Indicators
The indicators inform the driver
of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
(Flashes)
VSC OFF indicator*4, 6
(P.394)
PCS warning light*4, 6 (if
equipped) (P.241)
BSM outside rear view
mirror indicators*6, 7 (if
equipped) (P.284, 299)
Turn signal indicator
(P.212)
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Headlight indicator
(P.219)
BSM OFF indicator*4, 6 (if
equipped) (P.286)
Tail light indicator
(P.219)
RCTA OFF indicator*4, 6
(if equipped) (P.299)
Headlight high beam indicator (P.221)
Automatic High Beam
indicator (if equipped)
(P.222)
Front fog light indicator (if
equipped) (P.222)
Stop & Start indicator*6
(P.277)
Stop & Start cancel indicator*4, 6 (P.278)
Brake hold standby indicator*6 (P.216)
Smart key system indicator*1 (P.204)
Brake hold operated indicator*6 (P.216)
Cruise control indicator*2
(P.262, 274)
Dynamic radar cruise
control indicator*2 (if
equipped) (P.262)
Cruise control “SET” indicator*2 (P.262, 274)
(*3)
LTA indicator*2 (if
equipped) (P.238, 255)
Intuitive parking assist
OFF indicator*4, 5 (if
equipped) (P.292)
PKSB OFF indicator*4, 6
(if equipped) (P.306)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Slip indicator light*6
(P.393)
Security indicator*8
(P.73, 74)
Low outside temperature
indicator*2, 9 (P.86, 90)
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Parking brake indicator
(P.213)
Parking brake indicator
(P.213)
“ECO” mode indicator*2
(P.376)
“SPORT” mode indicator*2 (if equipped)
(P.376)
2-1. Instrument cluster
Air suspension indicator*2
(if equipped) (P.373)
“4H” indicator (if
equipped) (P.379)
ROCK mode indicator*2
(if equipped) (P.387)
MOGUL mode indicator*2 (if equipped)
(P.387)
“TOW HAUL” indicator*2
(if equipped) (P.211)
“TOW+” indicator*2 (if
equipped) (P.211)
“AIR BAG ON/OFF”
indicator*4, 8 (P.46)
*1
*2: For 4.2-inch display type: This
light illuminates on the multiinformation display.
*3
: Depending on the operating conditions of the system, the color
and state (illuminated/blinking) of
the indicator change.
*4
: The light comes on when the
system is turned off.
“4L” indicator (if
equipped) (P.379)
“AUTO LSD” indicator*6
(if equipped) (P.381)
Rear differential lock indicator (if equipped)
(P.382)
Crawl Control indicator*2,
6 (if equipped) (P.383)
Crawl Control speed level
indicator*2 (if equipped)
(P.383)
*5: Intuitive parking assist OFF indi-
cator turns on when the engine
switch is turned to ON while the
Intuitive parking assist function is
on. It will turn off after a few seconds.
*6
: These lights turn on when the
engine switch is turned to ON to
indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn
off after the engine is started, or
after a few seconds. There may
be a malfunction in a system if
the lights do not turn on, or turn
off. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
*7
: This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.
DIRT mode indicator*2 (if
equipped) (P.387)
SAND mode indicator*2
(if equipped) (P.387)
MUD mode indicator*2 (if
equipped) (P.387)
DEEP SNOW mode indicator*2 (if equipped)
(P.387)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
: This light illuminates on the
multi-information display with a
message.
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
“SPORT S” mode indicator*2 (if equipped)
(P.376)
“SPORT S+” mode indicator*2 (if equipped)
(P.376)
“COMFORT” mode indicator*2 (if equipped)
(P.376)
“CUSTOM” mode indicator*2 (if equipped)
(P.376)
Downhill assist control
system indicator*2, 6 (if
equipped) (P.390)
83
84
2-1. Instrument cluster
*8
: This light illuminates on the overhead console.
*9
: When the outside temperature is
approximately 37°F (3°C) or
lower, the indicator will flash for
approximately 10 seconds, then
stay on.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
2-1. Instrument cluster
85
Gauges and meters (4.2-inch display type)
The meters display various drive information.
Meter display
2
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
Engine oil pressure gauge
Displays the engine oil pressure
Outside temperature (P.86)
Clock (P.86)
Time displayed is linked to the multimedia system. For details, refer to
“MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Voltmeter
Displays the charge state
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
Odometer and trip meter (P.87)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Vehicle status information and indicators
The units used on the meter and display may differ depending on the target
region.
86
2-1. Instrument cluster
Shift position and shift range display
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P.208)
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (P.93)
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (P.529)
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
■ The meters and display illumi-
■ Liquid crystal display
P.94
nate when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ Customization
■ Clock settings screen
Settings (e. g. meter display) can be
changed on
screen of the multi-
If clock setting item is displayed
when
is selected on the multiinformation display, the system may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Outside temperature display
● In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not
be displayed, or the display may
take longer than normal to
change.
• When stopped, or driving at low
speeds (less than 12 mph [20
km/h])
• When the outside temperature
has changed suddenly (at the
entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel,
etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the
system may be malfunctioning.
Take your vehicle to your Toyota
dealer.
● Displays the outside temperature
within the range of -40°F (-40°C)
to 122°F (50°C).
● When the outside temperature is
approximately 37°F (3°C) or
lower, the indicator
will flash
for approximately 10 seconds,
then stay on.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
information display. (P.98)
WARNING
■ The information display at
low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to
warm up before using the liquid
crystal information display. At
extremely low temperatures, the
information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display
changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag
between the driver’s shifting and
the new gear number appearing
on the display. This lag could
cause the driver to downshift
again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly
an accident resulting in death or
injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle
of the tachometer enter the red
zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.
2-1. Instrument cluster
NOTICE
● The engine may be overheating
if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone
(H). In this case, immediately
stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and check the engine after it
has cooled completely.
(P.551)
■ Voltmeter
different distances independently.
 Distance until next engine oil
change
Displays the distance the vehicle
can be driven until an oil change is
necessary.
■ Changing the display
Each time the “ODO TRIP”
switch is pressed, the displayed
item will be changed. When the
trip meter is displayed, pressing
and holding the switch will reset
the trip meter.
■ Engine oil pressure gauge
When the value of the engine oil
pressure gauge drops while the
engine is running, stop the vehicle
in a safe place immediately and
check the amount of engine oil.
(P.478)
When the oil pressure drops even
though the engine oil amount has
not decreased, or if the oil pressure does not increase when
engine oil is added, contact your
Toyota dealer, as there may be a
problem with the lubrication system.
Odometer and trip meter
display
■ Display items
 Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
 Trip meter A/Trip meter B
Displays the distance the vehicle
has been driven since the meter
was last reset. Trip meters A and B
can be used to record and display
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Pop-up display
In some situations the following
will be temporarily displayed:
Distance until next engine oil
change
Displays the distance until the next
engine oil change. This display will
be displayed in the following situations:
 When the engine switch is
turned to ON.
 When a warning message
indicating that oil maintenance should be performed
soon or is required is displayed.
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
When the voltmeter indicates 19
V or higher or 9 V or lower while
the engine is running, there may
be a battery or charging system
malfunction. Have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer.
87
88
2-1. Instrument cluster
Instrument panel light
control
The brightness of the instrument
panel lights can be adjusted.
Pressing the button will adjust
brightness of the instrument
panel light.
The brightness of the instrument
panel lights can be adjusted by
pressing the button.
Short press: 1 step change of
brightness level.
Long press: continues change of
brightness level until released.
■ Instrument cluster brightness
adjustment
The instrument cluster brightness
levels when the tail lights are on and
off can be adjusted individually.
However, when the surroundings
are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on
the tail lights will not change the
instrument cluster brightness.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
2-1. Instrument cluster
89
Gauges and meters (full LCD type)
The meters display various drive information.
Meter display
2
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (P.93)
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (P.529)
Outside temperature (P.90)
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
Clock (P.90)
Time displayed is linked to the multimedia system. For details, refer to
“MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Right Side Gauges
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle states data (P.92)
Shift position and shift range display
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P.208)
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Vehicle status information and indicators
The units used on the meter and display may differ depending on the target
region.
90
2-1. Instrument cluster
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
Voltmeter
Displays the charge state
Engine oil pressure gauge
Displays the engine oil pressure
Odometer and trip meter (P.91)
■ The meters and display illumi-
nate when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ Clock settings screen
If clock setting item is displayed
when
is selected on the multiinformation display, the system may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Outside temperature display
● In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not
be displayed, or the display may
take longer than normal to
change.
• When stopped, or driving at low
speeds (less than 12 mph [20
km/h])
• When the outside temperature
has changed suddenly (at the
entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel,
etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the
system may be malfunctioning.
Take your vehicle to your Toyota
dealer.
● Displays the outside temperature
within the range of -40°F (-40°C)
to 122°F (50°C).
● When the outside temperature is
approximately 37°F (3°C) or
lower, the indicator
will flash
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
for approximately 10 seconds,
then stay on.
■ Liquid crystal display
P.94
■ Customization
Settings (e. g. meter display) can be
changed on
screen of the multiinformation display. (P.98)
WARNING
■ The information display at
low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to
warm up before using the liquid
crystal information display. At
extremely low temperatures, the
information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display
changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag
between the driver’s shifting and
the new gear number appearing
on the display. This lag could
cause the driver to downshift
again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly
an accident resulting in death or
injury.
2-1. Instrument cluster
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle
of the tachometer enter the red
zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating
■ Voltmeter
When the voltmeter indicates 19
V or higher or 9 V or lower while
the engine is running, there may
be a battery or charging system
malfunction. Have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer.
■ Engine oil pressure gauge
When the value of the engine oil
pressure gauge drops while the
engine is running, stop the vehicle
in a safe place immediately and
check the amount of engine oil.
(P.478)
When the oil pressure drops even
though the engine oil amount has
not decreased, or if the oil pressure does not increase when
engine oil is added, contact your
Toyota dealer, as there may be a
problem with the lubrication system.
Odometer and trip meter
display
■ Display items
 Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
 Trip meter A/Trip meter B
Displays the distance the vehicle
has been driven since the meter
was last reset. Trip meters A and B
can be used to record and display
different distances independently.
 Distance until next engine oil
change
Displays the distance the vehicle
can be driven until an oil change is
necessary.
■ Changing the display
Each time the “ODO TRIP”
switch is pressed, the displayed
item will be changed. When the
trip meter is displayed, pressing
and holding the switch will reset
the trip meter.
■ Pop-up display
In some situations the following
will be temporarily displayed:
Distance until next engine oil
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone
(H). In this case, immediately
stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and check the engine after it
has cooled completely.
(P.551)
91
92
2-1. Instrument cluster
change
Displays the distance until the next
engine oil change. This display will
be displayed in the following situations:
 When the engine switch is
turned to ON.
 When a warning message
indicating that oil maintenance should be performed
soon or is required is displayed.
■ Instrument cluster brightness
adjustment
The instrument cluster brightness
levels when the tail lights are on and
off can be adjusted individually.
However, when the surroundings
are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on
the tail lights will not change the
instrument cluster brightness.
Right Side Gauges
Displays the various types of
vehicle information.
■ Display items
Instrument panel light
control
 Boost Meter
The brightness of the instrument
panel lights can be adjusted.
 Pitch and roll gauges
Pressing the button will adjust
brightness of the instrument
panel light.
 Tow gauges
The brightness of the instrument
panel lights can be adjusted by
pressing the button.
Short press: 1 step change of
brightness level.
Long press: continues change of
brightness level until released.
Displays the boost pressure.
Displays the longitudinal and lateral
inclination of the vehicle
Displays the boost pressure,
engine oil temperature, transmission fluid temperature
 Off
Select to turn the display off
■ Changing the display items
1 Press
or
to select
2 Press
or
to select
“Customize Right Side”, and
then press and hold
.
3 Select the item and then
press
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
.
.
2-1. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
Content display area
By selecting menu icons on the
multi-information display, a variety
of driving-related information can
be displayed. The multi-information
display can also be used to change
display settings and other vehicle
settings.
Warning or advice pop-up displays
are also displayed in certain situations.
 Full LCD type
Display and menu icons
■ Display
 4.2-inch display type
Content display area
Driving support system status
display area
Displays an image when the following systems are operating and a
menu icon other than
is
selected:
• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped) (P.248)
• Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range (if equipped)
(P.262)
• RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped) (P.259)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
By selecting menu icons on the
multi-information display, a variety
of driving-related information can
be displayed. The multi-information
display can also be used to change
display settings and other vehicle
settings.
Warning or advice pop-up displays
are also displayed in certain situations.
Driving support system status
display area
• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
(P.248)
• Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range (P.262)
• RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped) (P.259)
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
The multi-information display is used to display fuel
efficiency related information and various types of
driving-related information.
The multi-information display can also be used to
change the display settings
and other settings.
93
94
2-1. Instrument cluster
■ Menu icons
Changing the display
The menu icons will be displayed by pressing the
or
meter control switch.
 4.2-inch display type
The multi-information display is
operated using the meter control
switches.
Driving information display
(P.95)
Driving support system
information display
(P.96)
Audio system-linked display (P.97)
Vehicle information display (P.97)
Scroll the screen*/switch the
display*/move the cursor
Settings display (P.98)
Press: Enter/Set
Press and hold: Reset/Display customizable items
Warning message display
(P.100)
 Full LCD type
Driving information display
(P.95)
Navigation system-linked
display (P.96)
Audio system-linked display (P.97)
Vehicle information display (P.97)
Settings display (P.98)
Warning message display
(P.100)
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may
appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem
continuing to use the display.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Return to the previous screen
Call sending/receiving and
history display
Linked with the hands-free system,
sending or receiving call is displayed. For details regarding the
hands-free system, refer to the
“MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*
: On screens where the screen can
be scrolled and the display can
be switched, a scroll bar or a
round icon that shows the number of registered screens is displayed.
95
2-1. Instrument cluster
WARNING
■ Caution for use while driving
For safety, avoid operating the
meter control switch while driving
as much as possible, and do not
look continuously at the multiinformation display while driving.
Stop the vehicle and operate the
meter control switch. Failure to do
so may cause a steering wheel
operation error, resulting in an
unexpected accident.
Select to display fuel consumption data in various forms.
■ Speedometer display/Dis-
tance to empty (4.2-inch
display type only)
Displays the driving range with
remaining fuel. (P.96)
Current fuel consumption
Displays instantaneous current fuel
consumption.
Average fuel economy (after
reset)
To reset the average fuel economy
display, press and hold the
meter control switch.
The average fuel economy display can be changed in
.
(P.98)
 Average fuel economy (after
start)
Speedometer display
Displays the vehicle speed.
Distance to empty
Displays the driving range with
remaining fuel. (P.96)
■ Fuel economy
Use the displayed values as a reference only.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Displays the average fuel consumption since engine start.
 Average fuel economy (after
refuel)
Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was
refueled.
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Content of driving information
Distance to empty
96
2-1. Instrument cluster
■ Eco Driving Indicator/Dis-
tance to empty
 Eco Driving Indicator
● When “Refuel” is displayed, the
remaining fuel amount is low and
the distance that can be driven
with the remaining fuel cannot be
calculated. Refuel immediately.
Driving support system
information display (4.2inch display type only)
■ Driving support system
information
Eco Driving Indicator Zone
Display
Suggests the Zone of Eco driving
with current Eco driving ratio based
on acceleration.
Eco driving ratio based on
acceleration
If the acceleration exceeds the
Zone of Eco driving, the right side
of the Eco Driving Indicator Zone
Display will illuminate.
Zone of Eco driving
 Distance to empty
Displays the driving range with
remaining fuel. (P.96)
■ Distance to empty
● This distance is computed based
on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ
from that displayed.
● When only a small amount of fuel
is added to the tank, the display
may not be updated. When refueling, turn the engine switch to OFF.
If the vehicle is refueled without
turning the engine switch to OFF,
the display may not be updated.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Select to display the operational
status of the following systems:
 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped) (P.248)
 Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range (if
equipped) (P.262)
■ Navigation system-linked
display
Select to display the following
navigation system-linked information:
 Route guidance to destination
 Compass display (heading-up
display)
Navigation system-linked
display (full LCD type
only)
Select to display the following
navigation system-linked information:
 Route guidance to destination
 Compass display (heading-up
display)
97
2-1. Instrument cluster
Audio system-linked display
The operating conditions of the
audio system can be displayed
on the multi-information display.
changes according to the “Drive
Info Type” setting (since the system was started or between
resets). (P.98)
Use the displayed information as a
reference only.
Following items will be displayed.
Vehicle information display
■ Trailer brake
*
: To select the trailer, press and
hold the
meter control switch.
(P.98)
■ Trailer Mode BSM
Displays trailer length* and
trailer blind spot status
(P.284).
*: To select the trailer, press and
hold the
meter control switch.
(P.98)
■ Pitch and roll gauges (4.2-
inch display type only)
Displays the longitudinal and lateral inclination of the vehicle
• “Average Speed”: Displays the
average vehicle speed since
engine start*
• “Distance”: Displays the distance
driven since engine start*
• “Total Time”: Displays the elapsed
time since engine start*
*
: These items are reset each time
the engine stops.
 “Total”
• “Average Speed”: Displays the
average vehicle speed since the
display was reset*
• “Distance”: Displays the distance
driven since the display was
reset*
• “Total Time”: Displays the elapsed
time since the display was reset*
*
: To reset, display the desired item
and press and hold the
meter
control switch.
■ Drive information
■ Tire inflation pressure
2 items that are selected using
the “Drive Info Items” setting
(average speed, distance and
total time) can be displayed vertically.
Displays inflation pressure of
each tire.
The displayed information
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Displays trailer brake control
status (P.398) and trailer
type*.
 “Trip”
98
2-1. Instrument cluster
Settings display
■ Meter display settings that
can be changed
 Language
Select to change the language displayed.
 Units
Select to change the units of measure displayed.
 Meter Type (full LCD type
only)
Select to change the main dial type
to speedometer or tachometer.

/
(Driving information
display settings)
• Fuel economy display
age vehicle
speed/distance/elapsed time.
 Pop-up display
Select to enable/disable pop-up
displays for each relevant system.
 Multi-information display off
Select to turn the multi-information
display off.
To turn the multi-information display
on again, press any of the meter
control switches.
 Default setting
Select to reset the meter display
settings to the default setting.
■ Changing settings of the
trailer type
 Trailer settings screen
Select to change the average fuel
consumption display between after
start/after reset/after refuel.
(P.95)

/
(Audio settings)
Select to display/not display the
audio system linked display.

/
(Vehicle information
display settings)
Select to change the displayed content of the following:
• Drive information type
Select to change the drive information type display between after
start/after reset.
• Drive information items
Select to set the first and second
items of the drive information display to any of the following: aver-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Displays the name of the currently selected trailer or “No
Trailer Selected” if a trailer
has not yet been selected
Add a new trailer or select an
existing saved trailer
• Maximum of 10 trailers can be
saved.
• Select the trailer name, length,
hitch type, brake type and number of axles.
• The parameters which can be set
depend on which of the trailer
2-1. Instrument cluster
systems are installed on the vehicle. (Trailer Brake Controller,
Trailer Backup Guide and Trailer
Mode BSM)
Deselect the currently
selected trailer
• Used when a 4-pin trailer connector has been disconnected. (4-pin
trailer connector disconnection
cannot be automatically detected
by Trailer Brake Controller)
• The parameters which can be
edited depend on which of the
trailer systems are installed on
the vehicle (Trailer Brake Controller, Trailer Backup Guide and
Trailer Mode BSM)
Delete a saved trailer
 Trailer detail screen
(conventional), gooseneck or
fifth wheel. Note that gooseneck and fifth wheel trailers
are not supported for some
features (Trailer Backup
Guide and Trailer Mode
BSM)
Change the length of the
trailer. If the exact length is
not listed, round up the actual
length of the trailer to the
closest available value.
“Auto” length detection can also be
selected.
Change the number of axles.
Change the brake type (electric or electric over hydraulic)
and weight of the trailer, or
turn trailer brakes off for that
trailer.
Save the trailer information
If there are any errors with the
trailer values, re-select the value or
delete and re-save the trailer. If the
error continues, contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Vehicle functions and set-
tings that can be changed
P.578
Displays the name of the current trailer which is being
added or edited.
Change the name of the
trailer.
Change the hitch type of the
trailer between ball hitch
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Suspension of the settings dis-
play
● Some settings cannot be changed
while driving. When changing settings, park the vehicle in a safe
place.
● If a warning message is displayed,
operation of the settings display
will be suspended.
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Edit the parameters of a
saved trailer (name, length,
hitch type, brake type and
number of axles)
99
100
2-1. Instrument cluster
WARNING
■ Cautions during setting up
the display
If the engine is running when
changing the display settings,
ensure that the vehicle is parked
in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a
garage, exhaust gases including
harmful carbon monoxide (CO)
may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During setting up the display
To prevent battery discharge,
ensure that the engine is running
while setting up the display features.
Warning message display
Select to display warning messages and measures to be
taken if a malfunction is
detected. (P.529)
Stop & Start system information
 Stop & Start system operation time (after start)/status
notification
Displays the current amount of time
the engine has been stopped by the
operation of the Stop & Start system.
Also shows the status of the Stop &
Start system with a pop-up display.
(P.281)
 Stop & Start system settings
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
The length of time of the Stop &
Start system will operate when the
“A/C” switch of the air conditioning
system is on can be set to 2 different levels in
of the multi-infor-
mation display. (P.281)
2-1. Instrument cluster
101
Head-up display*
*
: If equipped
The head-up display projects a variety of driving-related information and the operating state of the driving support systems
on the windshield.
System components
2
Driving support system status (if equipped)/navigation systemlinked display area (P.103)
Shift position display/RSA (Road Sign Assist) display area (if
equipped) (P.208, 259)
Vehicle speed display
Eco Driving Indicator/Outside temperature display area (P.104)
■ Head-up display will operate
when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ When using the head-up dis-
play
The head-up display may seem
dark or hard to see when viewed
through sunglasses, especially
polarized sunglasses. Adjust the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
brightness of the head-up display or
remove your sunglasses.
■ Street name display
Only street names which are
included in the map data will be displayed.
Vehicle status information and indicators
Illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from
the image that is actually displayed by the head-up display.
102
2-1. Instrument cluster
WARNING
■ When using the head-up dis-
play
● Check that the position and
brightness of the head-up display image does not interfere
with safe driving. Incorrect
adjustment of the image’s position or brightness may obstruct
the driver’s view and lead to an
accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Do not continuously look at the
head-up display while driving as
you may fail to see pedestrians,
objects on the road, etc., ahead
of the vehicle.
NOTICE
■ Head-up display projector
● Do not place any drinks near
the head-up display projector. If
the projector gets wet, electrical
malfunctions may result.
Using the head-up display
Select
on the multi-informa-
tion display (P.580) and then
“HUD Main”.
■ Enabling/disabling the
head-up display
Press the
meter control
switch to enable/disable the
head-up display.
■ Changing the head-up display settings
Press and hold the
meter
control switch to change the following settings:
 Brightness and vertical position of the head-up display
Select to adjust the brightness or
vertical position of the head-up display.
 Display content
Select to change the display
between the following:
● Do not place anything on or put
stickers onto the head-up display projector.
Doing so could interrupt headup display indications.
● Do not touch the inside of the
head-up display projector or
thrust sharp edges or the like
into the projector.
Doing so could cause mechanical malfunctions.
• No content
• Eco Driving Indicator
 Select to enable/disable the
following items:
• Route guidance to destination
• Driving support system display (if
equipped)
• Compass (heading-up display)
• Audio system operation status
 Display angle
Select to adjust the angle of the
head-up display.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
2-1. Instrument cluster
■ Enabling/disabling of the head-
up display
If the head-up display is disabled, it
will remain disabled when the
engine switch is turned off then back
to ON.
■ Display brightness
WARNING
■ Caution for changing settings
of the head-up display
If the engine is running when
changing the display
settings, ensure that the vehicle
is parked in a place with adequate
ventilation. In a closed area such
as a garage, exhaust gases
including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter
the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■ When changing the settings
of the head-up display
To prevent battery discharge,
ensure that the engine is running
while changing the settings of the
head-up display.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving support system
status/navigation systemlinked display area
■ Driving support system sta-
tus display
Displays the operational status
of the following systems:
 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped) (P.248)
 Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range (if
equipped) (P.262)
Details of content displayed on the
head-up display may differ from
that displayed on the multi-information display. For details, refer to the
explanation of each system.
■ Navigation system-linked
display area
Displays the following items
which are linked to the navigation system:
 Street name
 Route guidance to destination
 Compass (heading-up display)
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
The brightness of the head-up display can be adjusted on
of the
multi-information display. Also, it is
automatically adjusted according to
the ambient brightness.
103
104
2-1. Instrument cluster
Pop-up display
Pop-up displays for the following
systems will be displayed when
necessary:
■ Driving support systems
Displays a warning/suggestion/advice message or the
operating state of a relevant
system.
 PCS (Pre-Collision System)
(if equipped) (P.237)
 LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped) (P.248)
■ Warning message
Some warning messages are
displayed when necessary,
according to certain conditions.
Details of content displayed on the
head-up display may differ from
that displayed on the multi-information display.
■ Audio system operation
status
Displayed when an audio
remote control switch on the
steering wheel is operated.
■ Hands-free system status
 PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) (if equipped) (P.304)
Displayed when the hands-free
system is operated.
 Brake Override System
(P.178)
■ When a pop-up display is dis-
 Drive-Start Control (P.184)
Details of content displayed on the
head-up display may differ from
that displayed on the multi-information display. For details, refer to the
explanation of each system.
■
/
icons
These icons are linked to the
multi-information display
played
When a pop-up display is displayed,
a current display may no longer be
displayed. In this case, the display
will return after the pop-up display
disappears.
Eco Driving Indicator/Outside temperature display
■ Eco Driving Indicator
: Master warning icon
Displayed when a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display. (P.529)
: Information icon
Displayed when an advice pop-up
display is displayed on the multiinformation display.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Eco Driving Indicator Zone
Display
2-1. Instrument cluster
Eco driving ratio based on
acceleration
Zone of Eco driving
Displayed content is the same as
that displayed on the multi-information display (Eco Driving Indicator).
For details, refer to P.96.
■ Outside temperature dis-
play
Fuel consumption
information
Fuel consumption information can be displayed on the
multimedia system.
Consumption
■ Current fuel consumption
screen
1 Select
on the main
menu.
■ Outside temperature display
● When the ambient temperature is
approximately 37°F (3°C) or
lower, the low outside temperature
indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds and the outside temperature display will turn
off. In this case, the display will be
displayed again when the outside
temperature becomes approximately 41°F (5°C) or higher.
● In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not
be displayed, or the display may
take longer than normal to
change:
• When stopped, or driving at low
speeds (less than 16 mph [25
km/h])
• When the outside temperature
has changed suddenly (at the
entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel,
etc.)
● When “--” is displayed, the system
may be malfunctioning. Take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
2 Select “Trip information”.
If a screen other than “Current” is
displayed, select “Current”.
Average vehicle speed since
the engine was started.
Trip range
Elapsed time since the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Displayed when the engine
switch is turned to ON or when
the low outside temperature
indicator is flashing.
105
106
2-1. Instrument cluster
engine was started.
tion
Fuel consumption in the past
15 minutes
Previous fuel consumption
record
Current fuel consumption
Resetting the history data
Resetting the consumption
data
Updating the latest fuel consumption data
Use the displayed average fuel
consumption as a reference. The
image is an example only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.
Use the displayed average fuel
consumption as a reference. The
image is an example only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.
■ History fuel consumption
screen
1 Select
on the main
menu.
■ Updating the history data
Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the current fuel consumption
again.
■ Resetting the data
The fuel consumption data can be
deleted by selecting “Clear data”.
■ Trip range
2 Select “Trip information”.
If a screen other than “History” is
displayed, select “History”.
Latest fuel consumption
Best recorded fuel consump-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Displays the estimated maximum
distance that can be driven with the
quantity of fuel remaining.
As a result, the actual distance that
can be driven may differ from that
displayed.
107
Before driving
3
3-1. Key information
Keys ............................ 108
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and
tailgate
Side doors................... 111
Power running boards . 115
Tailgate........................ 118
3
Power bed step ........... 128
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats .................. 135
Rear seats................... 138
Driving position memory
.................................. 141
Head restraints............ 144
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel ............ 147
Inside rear view mirror 149
Digital Rear-view Mirror150
Outside rear view mirrors
.................................. 160
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows ........... 165
Power back window .... 168
Panoramic moon roof.. 169
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Before driving
Smart key system ....... 130
108
3-1. Key information
Keys
3-1.Key information
The keys
The following keys are provided
with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key system
(P.130)
• Operating the wireless remote
control function (P.109)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key
onto an aircraft, make sure you do
not press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying an electronic key in your bag, etc., ensure
that the buttons are not likely to be
pressed accidentally. Pressing a
button may cause the electronic key
to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2
years.
● If the battery becomes low, an
alarm will sound in the cabin and a
message will be shown on the
multi-information display when the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
engine is stopped.
● To reduce key battery depletion
when the electronic key is to not
be used for long periods of time,
set the electronic key to the battery-saving mode. (P.132)
● As the electronic key always
receives radio waves, the battery
will become depleted even if the
electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the
electronic key battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery
when necessary.
• The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.
• The detection area becomes
smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do
not leave the electronic key within
3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a
magnetic field:
• TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones
and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or
cordless phones
• Table lamps
• Induction cookers
■ Replacing the battery
P.501
■ Confirmation of the number of
registered keys
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for
details.
■ If “A New Key has been Regis-
tered Contact Your Dealer for
Details” is shown on the multiinformation display
This message will be displayed
each time the driver’s door is
opened when the doors are
unlocked from the outside for
3-1. Key information
approximately 10 days after a new
electronic key has been registered.
If this message is displayed but you
have not had a new electronic key
registered, ask your Toyota dealer to
check if an unknown electronic key
(other than those in your possession) has been registered.
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject
them to strong shocks, or bend
them.
● Do not expose the keys to high
■ In case of a smart key system
malfunction or other keyrelated problems
P.545
■ When an electronic key is lost
P.544
Wireless remote control
The electronic keys are
equipped with the following
wireless remote control:
 Vehicles without power tail-
gate
● Do not get the keys wet or wash
them in an ultrasonic washer,
etc.
● Do not attach metallic or mag-
netic materials to the keys or
place the keys close to such
materials.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or any-
thing else to the surface of the
electronic key.
 Vehicles with power tailgate
● Do not place the keys near
objects that produce magnetic
fields, such as TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or
medical electrical equipment,
such as low-frequency therapy
equipment.
■ Carrying the electronic key
on your person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in.
(10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on.
Radio waves emitted from electric
appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm)
of the electronic key may interfere
with the key, causing the key to
not function properly.
Locks the doors and the tailgate (P.111)
Unlocks the doors and the
tailgate (P.111)
Opens the windows*1 and the
panoramic moon roof*1, 2
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3
Before driving
temperatures for a long period
of time.
109
110
3-1. Key information
(P.111)
Opens the tailgate or
opens/closes the power tailgate*2 and deploys power
bed step*1, 2. (P.119, 129)
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the entry
function does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
(P.545)
Sounds the alarm
*1
: This setting must be customized
at your Toyota dealer.
*2: If equipped
■ Theft deterrent panic mode
When
is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm
will sound intermittently and the
vehicle lights will flash to deter any
person from trying to break into or
damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button
on the electronic key.
■ When required to leave the
vehicle’s key with a parking
attendant
Remove the mechanical key for
your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.
■ If you lose your mechanical
keys
P.544
■ If a wrong key is used
The key cylinder rotates freely, isolated from the internal mechanism.
Using the mechanical key
To take out the mechanical key,
slide the release lever
and
take the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key
only has grooves on one side. If the
key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to
insert it.
After using the mechanical key,
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
Side doors
3-2.Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
111
■ Wireless remote control
Unlocking and locking the
doors from the outside
■ Smart key system (entry
function)
Carry the electronic key to
enable this function.
1 Locks all the doors and the
tailgate
Check that the doors and the tailgate are securely locked.
1 Grip the driver’s door handle
to unlock the door. Holding
the driver’s door handle for
approximately 2 seconds
unlocks all the doors. Grip
front passenger door handle
to unlock all the doors.*
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the doors are locked.
2 Touch the lock sensor (indentation on the upper part or
lower part of the handle) to
lock all the doors.
Check that the door is securely
locked.
*
: The door unlock settings can be
changed.
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 5 seconds unlocks the
other door.
Press and hold to open the windows*1 and the panoramic moon
roof*1, 2
*1
: This setting must be customized
at your Toyota dealer.
*2: If equipped
■ Switching the door unlock func-
tion
It is possible to set which doors the
entry function unlocks using the
wireless remote control.
1 Turn the engine switch off.
2 When the indicator light on the
key surface is not on, press and
hold
,
,
(if
equipped) or
for approximately 5 seconds while pressing
and holding
.
The setting changes each time an
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Before driving
2 Unlocks all the doors and the
tailgate
3
112
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
operation is performed, as shown
below. (When changing the setting
continuously, release the buttons,
wait for at least 5 seconds, and
repeat step 2.)
Multi-informaUnlocking function display/Beep
tion
Holding the
driver’s door
handle unlocks
only the driver’s
door.
Exterior: Beeps 3 Holding the front
times
passenger door
Interior: Pings
once
handles unlocks
all the doors and
tailgate.
Holding either
front door handle
unlocks all the
Exterior: Beeps
doors and tailtwice
gate.
Interior: Pings
once
To prevent unintended triggering of
the alarm, unlock the doors using
the wireless remote control and
open and close a door once after
the settings have been changed. (If
a door is not opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the doors
will be locked again and the alarm
will automatically be set.)
In a case that the alarm is triggered,
immediately stop the alarm. (P.74)
■ Impact detection door lock
release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors
are unlocked. Depending on the
force of the impact or the type of
accident, however, the system may
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
not operate.
■ Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that
the doors have been
locked/unlocked. (Locked: once;
Unlocked: twice)
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the
windows are operating.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within
approximately 60 seconds after the
vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle
again.
■ When the doors cannot be
locked by the lock sensor on
the upper part of the door handle
If the door will not lock even when
the topside sensor area is touched,
try touching both the topside and
underside sensor areas at the same
time.
■ Open door warning buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is
made when a door is not fully
closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the
door to stop the buzzer, and lock the
vehicle once more.
■ Setting the alarm
Locking the doors will set the alarm
system. (P.74)
■ Conditions affecting the opera-
tion of the smart key system or
wireless remote control
P.132
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
■ If the smart key system or the
wireless remote control does
not operate properly
Use the mechanical key to lock and
unlock the doors. (P.545)
Replace the key battery with a new
one if it is depleted. (P.501)
■ If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked and
unlocked using the smart key system or wireless remote control. Lock
or unlock the doors using the
mechanical key. (P.545)
■ Rear seat reminder function
● In order to remind you not to for-
● The rear seat reminder function
determines that luggage, etc., has
been placed in a rear seat based
on opening and closing of a rear
door. Therefore, depending on the
situation, the rear seat reminder
function may not operate and you
may still forget luggage, etc., in
the rear seat, or it may operate
unnecessarily.
● The rear seat reminder function
can be enabled/disabled.
(P.578)
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.578)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions
while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a
door opening and an occupant
falling out of the vehicle, resulting
in death or serious injury.
● Ensure that all doors are prop-
erly closed and locked.
● Do not pull the inside handle of
the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front
doors, as the doors may be
opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child-protector
locks when children are seated
in the rear seats.
■ When opening or closing a
door
Check the surroundings of the
vehicle such as whether the vehicle is on an incline, whether there
is enough space for a door to
open and whether a strong wind
is blowing. When opening or closing the door, hold the door handle
tightly to prepare for any unpredictable movement.
3
Before driving
get luggage, etc., in the rear seat,
when the engine switch is turned
to OFF after any of the following
conditions are met, a buzzer will
sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information
display for approximately 6 seconds.
• The engine is started within 10
minutes after opening and closing
a rear door.
• A rear door has been opened and
closed after the engine was
started.
However, if a rear door is opened
and then closed within approximately 2 seconds, the rear seat
reminder function may not operate.
113
114
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
Unlocking and locking the
doors from the inside
■ Door lock switches (to
lock/unlock)
may be locked.
■ Open door warning buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer
will sound when the vehicle speed
reaches 3 mph (5 km/h).
The open door(s) is indicated on the
multi-information display.
Rear door child-protector
lock
The door cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle when the
lock is set.
1 Locks all the doors
2 Unlocks all the doors
■ Inside lock buttons
1 Locks the door
2 Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by
pulling the inside handle even if the
lock buttons are in the lock position.
■ Locking the front doors from
the outside without a key
1 Move the inside lock button to
the lock position.
2 Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the
engine switch is in ACC or ON, or
the electronic key is left inside the
vehicle. However, the key may not
be detected correctly and the door
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1 Unlock
2 Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear doors.
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
Automatic door locking
and unlocking systems
The following functions can be
set or canceled:
For instructions on customizing,
refer to P.578.
Function
Operation
Speed linked
door locking
function
All doors are automatically locked
when vehicle
speed is approximately 12 mph (20
km/h) or higher.
All doors are automatically locked
when the shift position is shifted to a
position other than
P.
Shift position
linked door
unlocking
function
All doors are automatically unlocked
when the shift position is shifted to P.
Driver’s door
linked door
unlocking
function
All doors are automatically unlocked
when driver’s door
is opened within
approximately 45
seconds after turning the engine
switch off.
Power running boards*
*
: If equipped
The power running boards
deploy when opening a door
or by using the switch
inside the vehicle.
The power running boards
stow by closing a door,
operating the switch inside
the vehicle, or by driving 3
mph (5 km/h) or higher.
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the power
running boards
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers and people in the vehicle’s surrounding area do not
have a hand on the boards or
any part of their body in a position where it could be caught
between the boards and the
vehicle when the power running
boards is being operated.
● Confirm that the boards have
completely deployed or stowed
before getting in or out of the
vehicle. If someone gets in or
out of the vehicle during the
power running boards operation, the boards may stop
deploying or stowing.
● Take care when pressing the
power steps switch. The boards
will deploy or stow and may hit
other people or objects.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3
Before driving
Shift position
linked door
locking function
115
116
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
WARNING
● Always check that the power
Side door linked operation
steps switch is turned off when
cleaning the boards, before
jacking up or placing any object
under the vehicle, or if boards
are not operating correctly.
● Do not allow children to operate
the power running boards.
Operating the power running
boards so that the boards contacts someone can cause serious injury, and in some
instances, even death.
■ Jam protection function
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
Do not place any body part
between the boards and vehicle.
The jam protection function may
not work depending on the shape
of the object that is caught.
1 Opening a door: The appropriate board deploys.
2 Closing a door: The appropriate board stows.
■ Jam protection function
If a board contacts an obstacle
when deploying, it will stow. If an
obstacle gets caught between a
board and the vehicle when stowing, the board will deploy.
If an obstacle is detected 3 times in
a row during power running board
operation, the board will stop at the
position it contacts the obstacle.
When the side door on the same
side as the board is opened and
closed, or switch is operated once
the obstacle is cleared, the board
will attempt to stow or deploy again.
■ Automatic stowing function
The boards will be automatically
stowed, for safety, under the following conditions:
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
● A board is not completely stowed
● Vehicle speed is approximately 3
mph (5 km/h) or higher
The boards will not automatically
deploy again when vehicle speed
returns to less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
■ If “Running Board Unable to
Deploy” is displayed on the
multi-Information display
The board may not be completely
deployed.
Close and open the door once more
or use the switch inside the vehicle
(P.117) and completely deploy the
board.
117
■ When getting in and out of the
vehicle
Take care because clothes and
shoes may become dirty due to contact with the lower part of the vehicle
body.
Deploying and stowing
the power running boards
from inside
3
■ If “Power Steps Unable to
■ If “Power Steps System Mal-
function See Owner’s Manual”
is displayed on the multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by Toyota dealer.
■ When snow or mud is attached
to the boards or the boards are
frozen
The power running boards may not
operate correctly. Before stepping
on a board, check that it is completely deployed. If the power running boards are not operating
correctly, turn the power steps
switch off and refrain from use.
■ After recharging/reconnecting
the battery
If the power running boards have
not completely deployed or stowed,
the boards may not move in the
intended direction the first time they
are operated. However, from the
second time onwards, the boards
will resume normal operation.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1 Deploys the running boards
on both sides.
2 Stows the running boards on
both sides.
The power bed step is also linked
with switch operations. (P.128)
Putting the switch in the neutral
position sets the power running
boards to AUTO mode. AUTO
mode allows the deploying/stowing
of the boards to be linked to opening/closing of the side doors.
Both power running boards and
power bed step are deployed when
“OUT” position is selected. Operation only if steps are not already
deployed.
Both power running boards and
power bed step are stowed when
“OFF” position is selected. Operation only if steps are not already
stowed.
Before driving
Retract” is displayed on the
multi-Information display
The boards may not be completely
stowed.
Check that nothing is caught
between the boards and the vehicle.
118
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
■ Automatic stowing function
The boards will be automatically
stowed, for safety, under the following condition:
● Vehicle speed is approximately 3
mph (5 km/h) or higher
Tailgate
The tailgate can be
locked/unlocked and
opened/closed by the following procedures.
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious personal injury.
● Do not drive with the tailgate
open.
● Do not allow anyone to get on
the rear step bumper.
Locking/unlocking the
tailgate
■ Smart key system (entry
function)
Carry the electronic key to
enable this function.
1 Unlock the tailgate (vehicles
without power tailgate) or
opens/closes the tailgate
(vehicles with power tailgate)
The tailgate cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the tailgate is
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
locked.
119
gate horizontal.
2 Locks all the doors and the
tailgate
Check that the tailgate is securely
locked.
■ Using the wireless remote
control
P.109
Opening/closing the tailgate (vehicles without
power tailgate)
 Using the wireless remote
control (if equipped)
 Using the handle switch
Unlock the tailgate before operating.
Press and hold the switch.*
Open the tailgate slowly while
pushing the tailgate opener
switch.
The support cables will hold the tailgate horizontal.
The support cables will hold the tailgate horizontal.
Tailgate opens by gravity.
*
: This setting can be customized at
your Toyota dealer.
■ Closing the tailgate
 Using the tailgate release
switch
While carrying an electronic key,
press the tailgate opener switch
on the left side tail lamp.
Tailgate opens by gravity.
The support cables will hold the tail-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Lift and close the tailgate
After closing the tailgate, try pulling
it toward you to make sure it is
securely locked.
Before driving
■ Opening the tailgate
3
120
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
● Check that the tailgate is not
frozen and its opening and closing is not obstructed.
● If there is any type of strong
impact in area of the tailgate
release switch, have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer.
● Do not place stickers, etc., or
WARNING
■ Opening the tailgate (tailgate
release switch and wireless
remote control)
Observe the following precautions
when operating the tailgate
release switch. Failure to do so
may cause death or serious injury.
paint anything on the tailgate
release switch.
● Do not use if a carrier or acces-
sory other than a genuine Toyota part is installed to the
tailgate.
■ After closing the tailgate
Try pulling it toward you to make
sure it is securely locked.
● If there are people in the vicinity,
make sure they are safe and let
them know that the tailgate is
about to open or close.
● On upward inclines, the tailgate
may suddenly open after pressing the tailgate release switch or
electronic key switch. Make
sure the tailgate is fully open
and secure.
● On downward inclines, the tail-
gate may be difficult to open
after pressing the tailgate
release switch or electronic key
switch. Make sure the tailgate is
fully open and secure.
NOTICE
■ Opening the tailgate (tailgate
release switch and wireless
remote control)
● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure
there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of
your belongings to get hit.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Changing the setting of tailgate
open alert
When the tailgate is left open, a
buzzer sounds and a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display.
Settings can be changed on
screen of the multi-information display. Select the “
Alert” and
change the settings. (P.582)
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.578)
Opening/closing the tailgate (vehicles with power
tailgate)
■ Using the wireless remote
control
Press and hold the switch.
The power tailgate automatically
opens/closes.
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
Pressing the switch while the power
tailgate is opening/closing reverses
the operation, after two presses the
switch the function is stopped.
121
opens.
Pressing the switch while the power
tailgate is opening/closing reverses
the operation. After two additional
reverse operations, the switch function is stopped. To reactivate
switch, manually close tailgate.
The support cables will hold the tailgate horizontal.
 Tailgate opener switch on tail
lamp
3
■ Opening/closing the tail-
gate from the inside
Before driving
Press and hold the switch.
The power tailgate automatically
opens/closes.
Pressing the switch while the power
tailgate is opening/closing reverses
the operation, after twice press the
switch the function is stopped.
 Tailgate opener switch on tail-
gate handle
■ Opening the tailgate
When the tailgate is unlocked:
Press the tailgate opener
switch.
When the tailgate is locked: While
carrying the electronic key on your
person, press the tailgate opener
switch.
The power tailgate automatically
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Closing the tailgate
 Using the tailgate opener
switch on tail lamp
Press the switch.
The power tailgate automatically
122
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
closes.
Pressing the switch while the power
tailgate is opening/closing reverses
tailgate operation. After two
presses of the switch, the tailgate is
stopped.
■ Changing the setting of tailgate
open alert
When the tailgate is left open, a
warning message is displayed on
the multi-information display.
Settings can be changed on “
Settings” screen of the multi-information display.
Select the “
Alert” and change
the settings. (P.582)
■ Tailgate closer
In the event that the tailgate is left
partially latched, the tailgate closer
will automatically close it to the fully
closed position.
Whatever the state of the engine
switch, the tailgate closer operates.
■ Battery saving function
 Close assist
Lift the tailgate from the fullopen position to at least 0.8 in.
(2 cm) using hands or knee.
The tailgate closing assist will be
activated, and the power tailgate
will fully close automatically.
When the engine switch is off and
the tailgate is open for more than 8
hours, the close assist may not be
activated.
If you unlock the doors, or open a
door with the electronic key on your
person, (P.131) any of these
things will wake the system and
close assist will activate.
■ Power tailgate operating condi-
tions
The power tailgate can automatically open and close under the following conditions:
● When the power tailgate system is
enabled. (P.125)
● When the tailgate is unlocked.
However, if the tailgate opener
switch on the tailgate handle or the
tail lamps is pressed while carrying
the electronic key on your person,
the power tailgate will be operated
even if the tailgate is locked.
(P.121)
● Vehicle speed is below approxi-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
mately 2 mph (3 km/h).
■ Operation of the power tailgate
● The emergency flashers twice
■ Jam protection function
The motor has detection function to
detect jam, there also are sensors
on each side of the tailgate. If something obstructs the power tailgate
while it is closing, the tailgate will
automatically stop.
After jam protection function operate, power tailgate system is disabled. The power tailgate system is
re-enabled when the tailgate is fully
closed manually. (P.532)
■ Initializing the power tailgate
If the tailgate is reattached or the
battery is reinstalled, it must be initialized by manually closing the tailgate fully.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Manual mode
The power tailgate changes to manual mode under the following conditions:
• Jam protection function operates.
• The power tailgate system is
turned off on the multi-information
display.
• When the power tailgate system
has an internal failure.
• When the tailgate has been
removed and re-attached (and the
wire harness connectors reattached) but the tailgate has not
been fully closed yet.
• When the battery has been disconnected and re-attached while
the tailgate is open but the tailgate
has not been fully closed yet.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(Customizable features: P.578)
WARNING
■ Tailgate closer
● In the event that the tailgate is
left partially latched, the tailgate
closer will automatically close it
to the fully closed position. It
takes several seconds before
the tailgate closer begins to
operate. Be careful not get fingers or anything else caught in
the path of the power tailgate or
tailgate hinges, as this may
cause bone fractures or other
serious injuries.
3
Before driving
flash to indicate that the tailgate is
opening/closing.
● While carrying the electronic key
on your person, the tailgate can
be operated when the other doors
are locked.
● When the power tailgate system is
disabled, the power tailgate does
not operate but it can be opened
and closed by hand by pressing
the tailgate open switch on the
tailgate handle or the tail lamp.
● When the power tailgate automatically opens, if an abnormality due
to people or objects is detected,
operation will stop.
● Cargo pushing on, or leaning on
the tailgate may cause it to open
quickly. Lift or reposition cargo to
prevent this risk prior to operating
power tailgate.
Also, if customer pushes down on
the tailgate with more than 99 lbf
(441 N, 45 kgf) force, the clutch in
the spindle will slip and the tailgate will open more quickly than
normal.
123
124
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
WARNING
● Use caution when using the tail-
gate closer as it still operates
when the power tailgate system
is canceled.
■ Power tailgate
Observe the following precautions
when operating the power tailgate.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure
there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of
your belongings to get caught.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make
sure they are safely away from
the tailgate so they will not be
contacted by the tailgate or by
cargo during opening and let
them know that the tailgate is
about to open or close.
● If the power tailgate system is
turned off while the tailgate is
operating automatically, the
automatic operation is stopped.
The tailgate then has to be
operated manually. Take extra
care when on upward inclines,
as the tailgate may open unexpectedly.
● If the operating conditions of the
power tailgate are no longer
met, a buzzer may sound and
the tailgate may stop opening or
closing. The tailgate then has to
be operated manually. Take
extra care when on upward
inclines, as the tailgate may
open abruptly.
● Do not apply a large load to the
edge of the tailgate during the
operation of the tailgate opening. Take extra care as the tailgate may open abruptly.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● In the following situations, the
power tailgate may detect an
abnormality and automatic
operation may be stopped. In
this case, the tailgate has to be
operated manually. Take extra
care when on upward inclines,
as the tailgate may open
abruptly.
• When the tailgate contacts an
obstacle.
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the
engine is turned to ON or the
engine is started during automatic operation
■ Jam protection function
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● Never use any part of your body
to intentionally activate the jam
protection function.
● The jam protection function may
not work if something gets
caught just before the tailgate
fully closes. Be careful to not
get fingers or anything else
caught.
● The jam protection function may
not work depending on the
shape of the object that is
caught. Be careful to not get fingers or anything else caught.
NOTICE
■ To prevent tailgate closer
malfunction
Do not apply excessive force to
the tailgate while the tailgate
closer is operating. Applying
excessive force may cause the
tailgate closer to malfunction.
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
power tailgate
● Make sure that there is no ice
between the tailgate and frame
that would prevent movement of
the tailgate. Operating the
power tailgate when excessive
load is present on the tailgate
may cause a malfunction.
● Take care not to damage the
setting screen of the multi-information display.
Removing the tailgate
■ Before removing the tail-
gate
Turn the tailgate open alert and
power tailgate system (if
equipped) off before removing
the tailgate. (P.120)
These connector covers* are
used when removing the tailgate, to prevent the wire harness connectors from being
contaminated.
*
: Contact a Toyota dealer to inquire
about connector covers.
Changing settings of the
power tailgate system
(vehicles with power tailgate)
The settings of the power tailgate system can be changed by
displaying the “
Settings” -
screen from the setting
screen of the multi-information
display.
The changed power tailgate settings are not reset by turning the
engine switch to OFF. In order to
restore the original settings, they
need to be changed back on the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Connector cover (Type A)
Connector cover (Type B)
Connector cover (Type C)
Connector cover (Type D)
Connector cover (Type E)
Connector cover (Type F)
Store the connector covers in
the glove box in a plastic bag
when not using.
3
Before driving
sensors (installed on the right
and left edges of the power tailgate) with a knife or other sharp
object. If the sensor is disconnected, the power tailgate will
not close automatically.
125
126
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
1 Open the tailgate.
4 Pull out the plastic wire protector located in the vehicle
bed by pressing the tabs and
pulling the protector.
2 To disconnect the wire harness connectors.
5 Pull out the wire harness
from the vehicle bed.
3 Install the connector cover
(Type A, B, and C) to the wire
harness connector of the
vehicle body frame.
The shape of each connector differs. Install connector cover to the
corresponding connector.
6 Install the connector cover
(Type D, E, and F) to the wire
harness connector of the tailgate.
The shape of each connector differs. Install connector cover to the
corresponding connector.
Connector cover (Type A)
Connector cover (Type B)
Connector cover (Type C)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Connector cover (Type D)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
Connector cover (Type E)
127
3 Tilt the tailgate up to 15°.
Connector cover (Type F)
■ Removing the tailgate
1 Open the tailgate to the angle
where you can release the
brackets on the support
cables from the lugs on both
sides.
Lift the support cable bracket
up and slide it off.
3
Before driving
To unhook the support cable
bracket, keep pulling up the clip on
the bracket and unhook the
bracket.
4 Slide the tailgate a little to the
right to unhook the left side.
To attach the tailgate, follow the
removal procedure in reverse order.
Support cable bracket
Clip
2 Tilt the tailgate to about 45°
from vertical and pull up the
right side of the tailgate to
unhook the right side.
WARNING
■ Before removing the tailgate
Disconnect the wire harness
between the back-up camera and
the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in serious personal injury or damage to
the vehicle components.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the tail-
gate wire harness
Do not pull out all of the tailgate
wire harness before opening the
tailgate.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
128
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
Power bed step*
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
camera lens
Store the removed tailgate with
the back-up camera lens facing
upward.
■ After removing the tailgate
While the tailgate is removed, an
open tailgate icon is displayed each
time the engine switch is turned ON.
This icon is removed by pressing
on meter control switches or
customize (P.120, 122).
■ Initializing the power tailgate
(vehicles with power tailgate)
P.123
Rear step bumper
For rear end protection and easier step-up loading.
To get on the rear step bumper, use
the shaded area in the illustration.
*
: If equipped
The power bed step deploys
when opening the tailgate,
operating the wireless
remote control, or by using
the switch inside the vehicle.
The power bed step stows
by closing the tailgate, operating the switch inside the
vehicle, or by driving above
3 mph (5 km/h).
■ Automatic stowing function
The step will be automatically
retracted, for safety, under the following condition:
● Vehicle speed is approximately 3
mph (5 km/h) or higher
■ If “Power Steps Unable to
Retract” is displayed on the
multi-Information display
The step may not be completely
stowed.
Check that nothing is caught
between the step and the vehicle.
■ If “Power Steps System Mal-
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the rear
step bumper
Do not allow more than one person to get on the rear step
bumper at a time.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
function See Owner’s Manual”
is displayed on the multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the power
bed step
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury.
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
WARNING
● Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers and people in the vehicle’s surrounding area do not
have a hand on the step or any
part of their body in a position
where it could be caught
between the step and the vehicle when the power bed step is
being operated.
● Confirm that the step has com-
pletely deployed or stowed
before getting in or out of the
vehicle. If someone gets in or
out of the vehicle during power
bed step operation, the step
may stop deploying or stowing.
129
Deploying and stowing
the power bed step with
wireless remote control
Press the switch.
The power bed step automatically deploys with the tailgate or
stows.
Before pressing the button,
make sure the power steps
switch is in “AUTO” position.
3
Before driving
● Take care when pressing the
power steps switch. The step
will deploy or stow and may hit
other people or objects.
● Always check that the power
steps switch is turned off when
cleaning the step, before jacking up or placing any object
under the vehicle, or if the step
is not operating correctly.
● Do not allow children to operate
the power bed step. Operating
power bed step so that a step
contacts someone can cause
serious injury, and in some
instances, even death.
Deploying and stowing
the power bed step from
inside
■ Jam protection function
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury.
Do not place any body part
between the power bed step and
vehicle. The jam protection function may not work depending on
the shape of the object that is
caught.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1 Deploys the bed step.
2 Stows the bed step.
Putting the switch in the neutral
position sets the power bed step
to AUTO mode. AUTO mode
allows the deploying and stow-
130
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
ing of the step to be linked to
opening/closing the tailgate.
Smart key system
Both power running boards and
power bed step are deployed
when “OUT” position is
selected. Operate only if the
steps are not already deployed
and if the vehicle speed is 3
mph (5 km/h) or less.
The following operations
can be performed simply by
carrying the electronic key
on your person, for example
in your pocket. The driver
should always carry the
electronic key.
Both power running boards and
power bed step are stowed
when “OFF” position is selected.
Operate only if the step is not
already stowed.
 Locks and unlocks the
doors (P.111)
 Locks and unlocks the tailgate (P.118)
 Starts the engine (P.204)
Tailgate linked operation
■ Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
1 Opening the tailgate: The
step deploys.
2 Closing the tailgate: The step
stows.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Antenna inside rear bumper
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
■ Effective range (areas within
which the electronic key is
detected)
When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as follows.
● When an exterior alarm sounds
once for 5 seconds
Situation
When locking or unlocking the
doors
When starting the engine or
changing engine switch modes
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
When opening the tailgate (vehicles without power tailgate) or
when opening/closing the power
tailgate (vehicles with power tailgate)
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is within about 2.3
ft. (0.7 m) of the tailgate release button.
■ Alarms and warning messages
An alarm sounds and warning messages are displayed on the multiinformation display to protect
against unexpected accidents or
theft of the vehicle resulting from
erroneous operation. When a warning message is displayed, take
appropriate measures based on the
displayed message. (P.529)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Correction
procedure
An attempt was
Close all of
made to lock the
the doors
vehicle while a door and lock the
was open.
doors again.
● When an interior alarm sounds
continuously
3
Situation
Correction
procedure
The engine switch
was turned to ACC
while the driver’s
door was open (The
driver’s door was
opened when the
engine switch was in
ACC).
Turn the
engine
switch off
and close
the driver’s
door.
The engine switch
was turned off while
the driver’s door was
open.
Close the
driver’s
door.
■ If “Smart Key System Malfunc-
tion See Owner’s Manual” is
displayed on the multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by Toyota dealer immediately.
■ If “Key Detected in Vehicle” is
shown on the multi-information
display
An attempt was made to lock the
doors using the smart key system
while the electronic key was still
inside the vehicle. Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock
the doors again.
Before driving
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is within about 2.3
ft. (0.7 m) of an outside door handle.
(Only the doors detecting the key
can be operated.)
131
132
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
■ Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be
activated in order to prevent the
electronic key battery and the battery from being discharged while the
vehicle is not in operation for a long
time.
● In the following situations, the
smart key system may take some
time to unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in
an area of approximately 6 ft. (2
m) of the outside of the vehicle for
10 minutes or longer.
• The smart key system has not
been used for 5 days or longer.
● If the smart key system has not
been used for 14 days or longer,
the doors cannot be unlocked at
any doors except the driver’s door.
In this case, take hold of the
driver’s door handle, or use the
wireless remote control or the
mechanical key, to unlock the
doors.
■ Turning an electronic key to
battery-saving mode
● When battery-saving mode is set,
battery depletion is minimized by
stopping the electronic key from
receiving radio waves.
Press
twice while pressing and
holding
. Confirm that the elec-
tronic key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is
set, the smart key system cannot be
used. To cancel the function, press
any of the electronic key buttons.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Electronic keys that will not be
used for long periods of time can
be set to the battery-saving mode
in advance.
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak
radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between
the electronic key and the vehicle
may be affected, preventing the
smart key system, wireless remote
control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways
of coping: P.545)
● When the electronic key battery is
depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power
plant, gas station, radio station,
large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio
waves or electrical noise
● When carrying a portable radio,
cellular phone, cordless phone or
other wireless communication
device
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is
attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that
emit radio waves) are being used
nearby
● When carrying the electronic key
together with the following devices
that emit radio waves
• Another electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal
digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
attached to the rear window
● When the electronic key is placed
near a battery charger or electronic devices
● When the vehicle is parked in a
pay parking spot where radio
waves are emitted.
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the
doors are not opened and closed.)
● If the wireless remote control is
used to lock the doors when the
electronic key is near the vehicle,
there is a possibility that the door
may not be unlocked by the entry
function. (Use the wireless remote
control to unlock the doors.)
● Touching the door lock sensor
while wearing gloves may delay or
prevent lock operation.
● When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up
to two consecutive times. After
this, no recognition signals will be
given.
● If the door handle becomes wet
while the electronic key is within
the effective range, the door may
lock and unlock repeatedly. In this
case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from
the vehicle. (Take care to ensure
that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to batterysaving mode to disable the smart
key system. (P.132)
● If the electronic key is inside the
vehicle and a door handle
becomes wet during a car wash, a
message may be shown on the
multi-information display and a
buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all
the doors.
● The lock sensor may not work
properly if it comes into contact
with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean
the lock sensor and attempt to
operate it again.
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being
3
Before driving
within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not
operate properly in the following
cases:
• The electronic key is too close to
the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high
place when the doors are locked
or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the
ground or in a high place, or too
close to the center of the rear
bumper.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, or floor, or in the door
pockets or glove box when the
engine is started or engine switch
modes are changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on
top of the instrument panel or near
the door pockets when exiting the
vehicle. Depending on the radio
wave reception conditions, it may
be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the doors will
become lockable from the outside,
possibly trapping the electronic
key inside the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is
within the effective range, the
doors may be locked or unlocked
by anyone. However, only the
doors detecting the electronic key
can be used to unlock the vehicle.
● Even if the electronic key is not
inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock or lock if a
large amount of water splashes on
the door handle, such as in the
rain or in a car wash, when the
133
134
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and tailgate
unlocked. In this case, return the
door handle to the original position
and check that the doors unlock
before pulling the door handle
again.
● If there is another electronic key in
the detection area, it may take
slightly longer to unlock the doors
after the door handle is gripped.
Use the wireless remote control or
mechanical key. (P.111, 119,
120, 545)
● Starting the engine and changing
engine switch modes: P.546
● Stopping the engine: P.205
■ Certification
P.631
■ When the vehicle is not driven
for extended periods
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do
not leave the electronic key within
6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.
● The smart key system can be
deactivated in advance.
● Setting the electronic key to battery-saving mode helps to reduce
key battery depletion. (P.132)
■ To operate the system properly
● Make sure to carry the electronic
key when operating the system.
Do not get the electronic key too
close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of
the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key,
the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off
accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)
■ If the smart key system does
not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors
and tailgate: P.545
● Starting the engine: P.546
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.578)
■ If the smart key system has
been deactivated in a customized setting
● Locking and unlocking the doors
and opening the tailgate:
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
WARNING
■ Caution regarding interfer-
ence with electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac
resynchronization therapypacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should
keep away from the smart key
system antennas. (P.130)
The radio waves may affect the
operation of such devices. If
necessary, the entry function
can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such as
the frequency of radio waves
and timing of the emitted radio
waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable
the entry function.
● Users of any electrical medical
device other than implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac
resynchronization therapypacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should
consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its
operation under the influence of
radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation
of such medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details
on disabling the entry function.
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats
3-3.Adjusting the seats
135
 Power seat
The seats can be adjusted
(longitudinally, vertically,
etc.). Adjust the seat to
ensure the correct driving
posture.
Adjustment procedure
 Manual seat
3
Seatback angle adjustment
Seat cushion (front) angle
adjustment
Vertical height adjustment
Seat cushion length adjustment (if equipped)
Seat position adjustment
Lumbar support height
adjustment (if equipped)
Seatback angle adjustment
Lumbar support adjustment
■ When adjusting the seat
● Make sure that any surrounding
passengers or objects are not
contact the seat.
● Take care when adjusting the seat
so that the head restraint does not
touch the ceiling.
■ Power easy access system (if
equipped)
The driver’s seat and steering wheel
move in accordance with engine
switch mode and the driver’s seat
belt condition. (P.141)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Before driving
Seat position adjustment
136
3-3. Adjusting the seats
WARNING
■ When adjusting the seat posi-
tion
● Take care when adjusting the
seat position to ensure that
other passengers are not
injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the
seat or near the moving parts to
avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become
jammed in the seat mechanism.
● Make sure to leave enough
space around the feet so they
do not get stuck.
■ Seat adjustment
● To reduce the risk of sliding
under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat
more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap
belt may slide past the hips and
apply restraint forces directly to
the abdomen, or your neck may
contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or
serious injury in the event of an
accident.
Adjustments should not be
made while driving as the seat
may unexpectedly move and
cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
● Manual seat only: After adjust-
ing the seat, make sure that the
seat is locked in position.
Front seat refresh system
(if equipped)
Pneumatic chambers built into
the front seat apply pressure to
the occupant’s body at different
modes and intensities.
1 Touch
on the main menu
of the multimedia system,
then touch “Seat controls” on
the sub menu.
2 Touch “Massage”.
3 Select driver’s seat or front
passenger’s seat.
4 Select the desired mode.
 “Centripetal”
Applies pressure sequentially from
the front of the seat cushion to top
of the seatback
 “Centrifugal”
Applies pressure sequentially from
the top of the seatback to the front
of the seat cushion
 “Upper body”
Applies pressure sequentially from
the bottom to the top of the seatback
 “Lower body”
Applies pressure sequentially from
the front to the back of the seat
cushion
 “Lumbar”
Applies pressure sequentially from
the bottom to the top of the lumbar
area of the seatback
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-3. Adjusting the seats
5 Select the desired intensity
and then select
(on).
The intensity can be adjusted in 5
steps.
To stop the operation, select
(off).
If a seat is not occupied, do not
operate the front seat refresh system for that seat.
■ Operating conditions
● The engine switch is in ON.
● For the front passenger’s seat:
■ Automatic stop function
The operation will be canceled automatically after approximately 15
minutes.
WARNING
■ Important points while driving
Do not adjust the driver’s seat
refresh system while driving.
Using it may affect your ability to
control the vehicle, possibly leading to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ Using the refresh system
● Those who are pregnant, have
recently given birth, or suffer
from ailments requiring rest
(heart disease etc.) should consult a doctor before use.
● Do not allow children to use the
refresh function.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Do not use immediately after
consuming a meal or alcohol, or
for an extended period of time.
● If you feel sick while using the
refresh function, immediately
discontinue use.
3
Before driving
The weight of an occupant is
detected on the front passenger’s
seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat,
the seat will be judged as occupied
until the front passenger’s door is
opened then closed or the engine
switch is turned off.
137
138
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Rear seats
The seatbacks of the rear
seats can be folded down.
The bottom cushion can be
raised.
6 Pull the seatback lock
release strap and fold the
seatback down.
Each seatback may be folded separately.
Folding down and returning the rear seatbacks
■ Folding down the rear seat-
backs
1 Move the front seats forward.
(P.135)
2 Stow the rear armrest. (if
equipped) (P.445)
3 Stow the rear seat belt buckles and the rear center seat
belt. (P.31, 32)
■ Returning the rear seat-
backs
1 Raise the rear seatback until
it locks.
Check that the seat belts are not
twisted or caught in the seatback.
4 Use the seat belt hangers to
prevent the belts from being
tangled.
2 Returning the head restraints
on the rear outboard seats to
the original position.(P.145)
5 Lower the head restraint on
the rear center seat to the
lowest position and fold the
head restraints on the rear
outboard seats. (P.145)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result
in death or serious injury.
■ When folding the rear seat-
backs down
● Do not fold the seatbacks down
while driving.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-3. Adjusting the seats
WARNING
● Stop the vehicle on level
ground, set the parking brake
and shift the shift lever to P.
● Do not allow anyone to sit on a
folded seatback while driving.
● Do not allow anyone to sit on
the rear center seat if the rear
right seat is folded down, as the
seat belt buckle for the rear center seat belt is then concealed
under the folded seat and cannot be used.
139
Raising and returning the
bottom cushions
■ Raising the bottom cush-
ions
1 Move the front seats forward.
(P.135)
2 Stow the rear armrest. (if
equipped) (P.445)
3 Stow the rear seat belt buckles.
3
● Be careful not to get your hand
Before driving
caught when folding the rear
seatbacks.
● Adjust the position of the front
seats before folding down the
rear seatbacks so that the front
seats do not interfere with the
rear seatbacks when folding
down the rear seatbacks.
■ After returning the rear seat-
back to the upright position
● Make sure that the seatback is
securely locked in position by
lightly pushing it back and forth.
If the seatback is not securely
locked, the red marking will be
visible on the seatback lock
release strap. Make sure that
the red mark is not visible.
4 Use the seat belt hangers to
prevent the belts from being
tangled.
5 Raise the bottom cushion
until it locks.
● Check that the seat belts are
not twisted or caught in the
seatback.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Each bottom cushion may be
140
3-3. Adjusting the seats
raised separately.
● Do not allow anyone to sit on
the storage box while driving.
● Do not allow anyone to sit on
the rear center seat if the rear
right seat is raised, as the seat
belt buckle for the rear center
seat belt is then concealed on
the bottom cushion and cannot
be used.
● Adjust the position of the front
■ Returning the bottom cush-
ions
Pull and release the strap, then
carefully lower the bottom cushion using your other hand.
Check that the seat belts are not
twisted or caught in the seatback.
seats before raising the bottom
cushions so that the front seats
do not interfere with the bottom
cushion when raising the bottom cushion.
■ When returning the bottom
cushions
● Be careful not to get your hands
or feet pinched in the seat.
● Check that the seat belts are
not twisted or caught in the bottom cushions.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result
in death or serious injury.
■ When raising the bottom
cushion
● Do not raise the bottom cushion
while driving.
● Stop the vehicle on level
ground, set the parking brake
and shift the shift lever to P.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Driving position memory*
*: If equipped
This feature automatically
adjusts the positions of the
driver’s seat, steering wheel
and outside rear view mirrors to make entering and
exiting the vehicle easier or
to suit your preferences.
Two different driving positions can be recorded.
Enabling easier driver
entry and exit (power easy
access system)
The driver’s seat and steering
wheel are automatically
adjusted to allow the driver to
enter and exit the vehicle easily.
and exit the vehicle easily.
 The shift lever has been
shifted to P.
 The engine switch has been
turned off.
 The driver’s seat belt has
been unfastened.
When any of the following has
been performed, the driver’s
seat and steering wheel automatically return to their original
positions.
• The engine switch has been
turned to ACC or ON.
• The driver’s seat belt has
been fastened.
■ Operation of the power easy
access system
When exiting the vehicle, the power
easy access system may not operate if the seat is already close to the
rearmost position, etc.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.578)
Recording/recalling a
driving position
■ Recording procedure
1 Check that the shift lever is in
P.
2 Turn the engine switch to
ON.
When all of the following have
been performed, the driver’s
seat and steering wheel are
automatically adjusted to a position that allows driver to enter
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3 Adjust the driver’s seat,
steering wheel and outside
rear view mirrors to the
desired positions.
3
Before driving
Each electronic key can be
registered to recall your preferred driving position.
141
142
3-3. Adjusting the seats
4 While pressing the “SET” button, or within 3 seconds after
the “SET” button is pressed,
press button “1” or “2” until
the buzzer sounds.
If the selected button has already
been preset, the previously
recorded position will be overwritten.
■ Recall procedure
1 Check that the shift lever is in
P.
2 Turn the engine switch to
ON.
3 Press one of the buttons for
the driving position you want
to recall until the buzzer
sounds.
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1” or “2”.
● Operate any of the seat adjust-
ment switches (only cancels seat
position recall).
● Operate the tilt and telescopic
steering control switch (only cancels steering wheel position
recall).
■ Seat positions that can be
memorized (P.135)
The positions adjusted by the following procedure can be recorded:
● Seat position adjustment
● Seatback angle adjustment
● Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment
● Vertical height adjustment
● Seat cushion length adjustment (if
equipped)
■ Operating the driving position
memory after turning the
engine switch off
Recorded seat positions can be
activated up to 180 seconds after
the driver’s door is opened and
another 60 seconds after it is closed
again.
■ In order to correctly use the
driving position memory function
If a seat position is already in the
furthest possible position and the
seat is operated in the same direction, the recorded position may be
slightly different when it is recalled.
■ When recalling the driving posi-
tion
Take care when recalling the driving
position so that the head restraint
does not touch the ceiling.
■ To stop the position recall oper-
ation part-way through
Perform any of the following operations:
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ When the recorded seat posi-
tion cannot be recalled
The seat position may not be
recalled in some situations when the
seat position is recorded in a certain
3-3. Adjusting the seats
range. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.
143
onds.
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment
so that the seat does not strike
the rear passenger or squeeze
your body against the steering
wheel.
Registering/recall/canceling a driving position to
an electronic key (memory recall function)
Record your driving position to
button “1” or “2” before performing the following:
Carry only the key you want to
register, and then close the
driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot
be recorded properly.
1 Check that the shift lever is in
P.
2 Turn the engine switch to
ON.
3 Recall the driving position
that you want to record.
4 While pressing the recalled
button, press and hold the
door lock switch (either lock
or unlock) until the buzzer
sounds.
If the driving position could not be
registered, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 sec-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1 Make sure that the doors are
locked before recalling the
driving position. Carry the
electronic key that has been
registered to the driving position, and then unlock and
open the driver’s door using
the smart key system wireless remote control.
The driving position will move to the
recorded position (not including the
steering wheel). However, the seat
will move to a position slightly
behind the recorded position in
order to make entering the vehicle
easier.
If the driving position is in a position
that has already been recorded, the
seat and outside rear view mirrors
will not move.
2 Turn the engine switch to
ACC or ON, or fasten a seat
belt.
The seat and steering wheel will
move to the recorded position.
■ Cancelation procedure
Carry only the key you want to
cancel and then close the
driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot
3
Before driving
■ Registering procedure
■ Recall procedure
144
3-3. Adjusting the seats
be canceled properly.
1 Check that the shift lever is in
P.
2 Turn the engine switch to
ON.
3 While pressing the “SET” button, press and hold the door
lock switch (either lock or
unlock) until the buzzer
sounds twice.
If the driving position could not be
canceled, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.
■ Recalling the driving position
using the memory recall function
● Different driving positions can be
registered for each electronic key.
Therefore, the driving position that
is recalled may be different
depending on the key being carried.
● If a door other than the driver’s
door is unlocked with the smart
key system, the driving position
cannot be recalled. In this case,
press the driving position button
which has been set.
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided
for all seats.
WARNING
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the head restraints.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints
designed for each respective
seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the
correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head
restraints, push down on them
and make sure they are locked
in position.
● Do not drive with the head
restraints removed.
Adjusting a head restraint
■ Front seats
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.578)
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button .
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-3. Adjusting the seats
■ Rear seats
 Center
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
 Outer
■ Adjusting the height of the head
restraints (front seat)
Make sure that the head restraints
are adjusted so that the center of
the head restraint is closest to the
top of your ears.
■ Adjusting the rear center seat
head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one
level from the stowed position when
using.
Removing the head
restraints
■ Front seats
Pull the head restraint up while
pressing the lock release button
.
1 To use
Lift up the head restraint back to
the neutral position and then push
the head restraint down.
2 To fold
Lift up the head restraint while
pressing the right lock release button , and fold it forward.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
If the head restraint touches the
ceiling, making the removal difficult, change the seat height or
angle. (P.135)
3
Before driving
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button .
145
146
3-3. Adjusting the seats
■ Rear seats
 Center
Pull the head restraint up while
pressing the lock release button
.
■ Rear seats
 Center
Align the head restraint with the
installation holes and push it
down to the lock position.
 Outer
Pull the head restraint up while
pressing both lock release buttons .
Press and hold the lock release
button
when lowering the
head restraint.
 Outer
Installing the head
restraints
■ Front seats
Align the head restraint with the
installation holes and push it
down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release
button
when lowering the
head restraint.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Align the head restraint with the
installation holes and push it
down to the lock position.
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
147
Steering wheel
3-4.Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Adjustment procedure
 Manual adjustment type
1 Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.
1 Up
2 Down
3 Toward the driver
4 Away from the driver
2 Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up
to secure the steering wheel.
adjusted when (power adjustment type)
The engine switch is in ACC or ON*.
*: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened,
the steering wheel can be
adjusted regardless of engine
switch mode.
■ Automatic tilt-away & returning
 Power adjustment type
Operating the switch moves the
steering wheel in the following
directions:
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
function (if equipped)
When the engine switch is turned
off, the steering wheel is automatically adjusted to a position that
allows driver to enter and exit the
vehicle easily.
When the engine switch has been
turned ACC or ON, the steering
wheel automatically returns to the
original position.
Before driving
■ The steering wheel can be
3
148
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
■ Automatic adjustment of the
steering position (if equipped)
A desired steering position can be
entered to memory and recalled
automatically by the driving position
memory system. (P.141)
■ Power easy access system (if
equipped)
The steering wheel and driver’s seat
move in accordance with engine
switch mode and the driver’s seat
belt condition. (P.141)
■ After adjusting the steering
wheel (manual adjustment type)
Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.578)
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to
mishandle the vehicle and cause
an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering
wheel (manual adjustment
type)
Make sure that the steering wheel
is securely locked. Otherwise, the
steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Sounding the horn
Press on or close to the
mark.
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Inside rear view mirror*
*: If equipped
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to
enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.
149
Anti-glare function
 Manual anti-glare inside rear
view mirror
Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be
reduced by operating the lever.
Adjusting the height of
rear view mirror
3
Adjust the height of the rear
view mirror by moving it up and
down.
1 Normal position
2 Anti-glare position
 Auto anti-glare inside rear
view mirror
Responding to the level of
brightness of the headlights of
vehicles behind, the reflected
light is automatically reduced.
Turn the automatic anti-glare
function mode on/off
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the
mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling
of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator
illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode
each time the engine switch is
turned to ON.
Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator
also turns off.)
Before driving
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your
driving posture.
150
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Digital Rear-view Mirror*
*: If equipped
■ To prevent sensor error (vehi-
cles with an auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror)
To ensure that the sensors operate
properly, do not touch or cover
them.
The Digital Rear-view Mirror
is a system that uses the
camera on the rear of the
vehicle and displays its
image on the display of the
Digital Rear-view Mirror.
The Digital Rear-view Mirror
can be changed between
optical mirror mode and digital mirror mode by operating the lever.
The Digital Rear-view Mirror
allows the driver to see the
rear view despite obstructions, such as the head
restraints or luggage, ensuring rear visibility. Also, the
rear seats are not displayed
and privacy of the passengers is enhanced.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ Before using the Digital Rear-
view Mirror
● Make sure to adjust the mirror
before driving. (P.152)
• Change to optical mirror mode
and adjust the position of the
Digital Rear-view Mirror so that
the area behind your vehicle
can be viewed properly.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
WARNING
• Change to digital mirror mode
and adjust the display settings.
● As the range of the image dis-
played by the Digital Rear-view
Mirror is different from that of
the optical mirror, make sure to
check this difference before
driving.
151
Changing modes
Operate the lever to change
between digital mirror mode and
optical mirror mode.
System components
3
Displays an image of the area
behind the vehicle.
will illuminate in this mode.
2 Optical mirror mode
Camera indicator
Indicates that the camera is operating normally.
Icon display area
Displays icons, adjusting gauge,
etc. (P.152)
Select button
Press to change the setting of the
item you want to adjust.
Menu button
Press to display the icon display
area and select the item you want
to adjust.
Lever
Operate to change between digital
mirror mode and optical mirror
mode.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Turns off the display of the Digital
Rear-view Mirror allows it to be
used as an optical mirror.
■ Digital mirror mode operating
condition
The engine switch is turned to ON.
When the engine switch is changed
from ON to OFF or ACC, the image
will disappear after several seconds.
■ When using the Digital Rear-
view Mirror in digital mirror
mode
● If it is difficult to see the displayed
image due to light reflected off the
Digital Rear-view Mirror, the camera being dirty, or if lights of a
vehicle behind your vehicle or the
displayed image are bothering
you, change to optical mirror
mode.
● If the display is difficult to see due
to reflected light, close the sunshade for the panoramic moon
roof (if equipped).
Before driving
1 Digital mirror mode
152
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
● Any of the following conditions
may occur when driving in the
dark, such as at night. None of
them indicates that a malfunction
has occurred.
• Colors of objects in the displayed
image may differ from their actual
color.
• Depending on the height of the
lights of the vehicle behind, the
area around the vehicle may
appear white and blurry.
• Automatic image adjustment for
brighter surrounding image may
cause flickering.
If it is difficult to see the displayed
image or flickering bothers you,
change to optical mirror mode.
Adjusting the mirror
■ Adjusting the mirror height
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your
driving posture.
Change to optical mirror mode,
adjusting the height of the rear
view mirror by moving it up and
down.
● The Digital Rear-view Mirror may
become hot while it is in digital
mirror mode.
This is not a malfunction.
● Depending on your physical condition or age, it may take longer
than usual to focus on the displayed image. In this case,
change to optical mirror mode.
● Do not let passengers stare at the
displayed image when the vehicle
is being driven, as doing so may
cause motion sickness.
■ When the system malfunctions
If the symbol shown in the illustration is displayed when using the
Digital Rear-view Mirror in digital
mirror mode, the system may be
malfunctioning. The symbol will disappear in a few seconds. Operate
the lever, change to optical mirror
mode and have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Display settings (digital mir-
ror mode)
Settings of the display in the digital mirror mode can be
changed.
1 Press the menu button.
The icons will be displayed.
2 Press the menu button
repeatedly and select the
item you want to adjust.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
153
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3 Press
or
to
change the setting.
The icons will disappear if a button
is not operated for approximately 5
seconds or more.
Icons
Settings
Select to adjust the brightness of the display.
Select to adjust the area
displayed up/down.
can also be changed while using
the digital mirror mode.
■ Enabling/disabling the
automatic anti-glare function (optical mirror mode)
The automatic anti-glare function in the optical mirror mode
can be enabled/disabled. The
setting can be changed in both
the digital mirror mode and the
optical mirror mode.
 When using the digital mirror
Select to adjust the angle of
the displayed image.
P.152
Select to zoom in/out the
displayed image.
mode
1 Press the menu button.
Select to enable/disable the
automatic anti-glare function.*
Responding to the brightness of the headlights of
vehicles behind, the
reflected light is automatically adjusted.
mode
 When using the optical mirror
The icons will be displayed.
2 Press the menu button
repeatedly and select
.
The setting display will be displayed.
The automatic anti-glare
function is enabled each
time the engine switch is
changed to ON.
Select to display HomeLink® Training Tutorial to
assist customers to train
their Garage Door Opener
System. (P.453)
Select to change the language of the HomeLink®
Training Tutorial.
*: This is a function for the optical
mirror mode, however, the setting
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3 Press
or
to
enable (“ON”)/disable
(“OFF”) the automatic antiglare function.
The icons will disappear if a button
is not operated for approximately 5
3
Before driving
Select to adjust the area
displayed to the left/right.
154
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
seconds or more.
■ Adjusting the display (digital
mirror mode)
● If the displayed image is adjusted,
it may appear distorted. This is not
a malfunction.
● If the brightness of the Digital
Rear-view Mirror is set too high, it
may cause eye strain. Adjust the
Digital Rear-view Mirror to an
appropriate brightness. If your
eyes become tired, change to
optical mirror mode.
● The brightness of the Digital Rearview Mirror will change automatically according to the brightness
of the area in front of your vehicle.
■ To prevent the light sensors
from malfunctioning
To prevent the light sensors from
malfunctioning, do not touch or
cover them.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ While driving
● Do not adjust the position of the
Digital Rear-view Mirror or
adjust the display settings while
driving.
Stop the vehicle and operate
the Digital Rear-view Mirror
control switches.
Failure to do so may cause a
steering wheel operation error,
resulting in an unexpected accident.
● Always pay attention to the
vehicle’s surroundings.
The size of the vehicles and other
objects may look different when in
digital mirror mode and optical
mirror mode.
When backing up, make sure to
directly check the safety of the
area around your vehicle, especially behind the vehicle.
Additionally, if a vehicle
approaches from the rear in the
dark, such as at night, the surrounding area may appear dim.
■ To prevent causes of fire
If the driver continues using the
Digital Rear-view Mirror while
smoke or odor comes from the
mirror, it may result in fire. Stop
using the system immediately and
contact your Toyota dealer.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Cleaning the Digital Rearview Mirror
■ Cleaning the mirror surface
155
● Do not smoke, use matches,
use cigarette lighters or allow
open flames near the mirror. It
may damage the mirror or
cause a fire.
If the mirror surface is dirty, the
image on the display may be difficult to see.
● Do not remove, disassemble or
Clean the mirror surface gently
using a soft dry cloth.
malfunctioning
● Observe the following precautions, otherwise the Digital
Rear-view Mirror may not operate properly.
■ Cleaning the camera
■ The camera
The camera for the Digital Rearview Mirror is located as shown.
■ To prevent the camera from
• Do not strike or hit the camera
or subject it to a strong impact,
as the camera installation position and angle may be changed.
• Do not remove, disassemble or
modify the camera.
• When washing the camera,
rinse it with a large quantity of
water and then wipe it clean
with a soft cloth dampened with
water.
Do not strongly rub the camera
lens, as it may be scratched and
will not be able to transmit a
clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent,
car wax, window cleaner or
glass coat to adhere to the camera cover. If this happens, wipe
it off as soon as possible.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the Digital Rear-
view Mirror from malfunctioning
● Do not use detergents, such as
thinner, benzene, and alcohol to
clean the mirror. They may discolor, deteriorate or damage the
mirror surface.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
• Do not apply hot water to the
camera in cold weather, as the
sudden change of temperature
may cause the camera to not
operate properly.
• When using a high pressure
washer to wash the vehicle, do
not directly spray the camera
and its surrounding area, as
doing so may cause the camera
to not operate properly.
3
Before driving
If the camera lens is dirty or covered with foreign matter, such as
water droplets, snow, mud, etc.,
the displayed image may not be
clear. In this case, rinse the
camera lens with a large quantity of water and then wipe it
clean with a soft cloth dampened with water.
modify the mirror.
156
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
NOTICE
● Do not subject the camera to a
strong impact as this could
cause a malfunction.
If this happens, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
● Do not block the vent holes of
the mirror. Otherwise, the mirror
may be hot, leading to a malfunction or a fire.
If you notice any symptoms
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the following
table for the likely cause and the solution.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Symptom
157
Likely cause
Solution
The mirror surface is dirty.
Clean the mirror surface
gently, using a soft dry
cloth.
Change to optical mirror
mode.
Sunlight or headlights are
(If the light is coming
shining directly into the Digithrough the panoramic
tal Rear-view Mirror.
moon roof [if equipped],
close the sunshade.)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3
Change to optical mirror
mode.
(Change back to digital
mirror mode when the
conditions have
improved.)
Before driving
The image is difficult to see.
 The vehicle is in a dark
area.
 The vehicle is near a TV
tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant,
or other location where
strong radio waves or
electrical noise may be
present.
 The temperature around
the camera is extremely
high/low.
 The ambient temperature
is extremely low.
 It is raining or humid.
 Sunlight or headlights are
shining directly into the
camera lens.
 The vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium
lights, mercury lights, etc.
 Water vapor from the tailpipe is obstructing the
camera.
158
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Symptom
The image is difficult to see.
Likely cause
Solution
Foreign matters (such as
water droplets, snow, mud,
etc.) is on the camera lens.
 Change to optical mirror mode.
 Rinse the camera
with a large quantity
of water, wipe it clean
with a soft cloth
dampened with water,
and then change back
to digital mirror mode.
Change to optical mirror
The camera or its surroundThe image is out of
mode and have the
ing area has received a
alignment.
vehicle inspected by
strong impact.
your Toyota dealer.
The display is dim
and
is dis-
played.
The system may be malfunctioning.
goes off.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Change to optical mirror
mode and have the
vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Symptom
Likely cause
159
Solution
Reducing the cabin
temperature is recommended to reduce the
temperature of the mirThe Digital Rear-view Mirror ror.
is displayed.
is extremely hot.
(The display will gradually
become more dim. If the
temperature continues to
increase, the Digital Rearview Mirror will turn off.)
(
will disappear
when the mirror
becomes cool.)
If
does not disap-
The lever cannot be The lever may be malfuncoperated properly. tioning.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Change to optical mirror
mode and have the
vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
(To change to optical
mirror mode, press and
hold the menu button
for approximately 10
seconds.)
3
Before driving
pear even though the
mirror is cool, have the
vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
160
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Outside rear view mirrors
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to
change the rear view.
Adjustment procedure
 Type A
1 To select a mirror to adjust,
turn the switch.
■ When using the outside rear
view mirrors in a cold weather
When it is cold and the outside rear
view mirrors are frozen, it may not
be possible to fold/extend them or
adjust the mirror surface. Remove
the ice, snow, etc. covering the outside rear view mirrors.
Left
WARNING
■ Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions
while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss
of control of the vehicle and cause
an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
Right
2 To adjust the mirror, operate
the switch.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while
driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors
folded.
● Both the driver and passenger
side mirrors must be unfolded
and properly adjusted before
driving.
Up
Right
Down
Left
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
 Type B
161
out by pushing the mirror surface.
Upper part mirror:
1 To select a mirror to adjust,
turn the switch.
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted
when
The engine switch is in ACC or ON.
Left
2 To adjust the mirror, operate
the switch.
The outside rear view mirrors can
be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window
defogger to turn on the outside rear
view mirror defoggers. (P.418)
■ Automatic adjustment of the
mirror angle (if equipped)
A desired mirror face angle can be
entered to memory and recalled
automatically by the driving position
memory. (P.141)
■ Auto anti-glare function* (if
*
Up
Right
Down
Left
Lower part mirror:
Adjust the mirror up and down, in or
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
equipped)
: Standard type mirror has auto
anti-glare function (left side only).
Extending type mirrors have auto
anti-glare function (left and right
side).
When the anti-glare inside rear view
mirror is set to automatic mode, the
outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the antiglare inside rear view mirror to
reduce reflected light. (P.149)
Before driving
Right
3
■ Defogging the mirrors
162
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
WARNING
■ When the mirror defoggers
are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror
surfaces, as they can become
very hot and burn you.
Folding and unfolding the
mirrors
 From outside
Push the mirror back in the
direction of the vehicle’s rear.
■ Using automatic mode in cold
weather
When automatic mode is used in
cold weather, the door mirror could
freeze up and automatic stowing
and return may not be possible. In
this case, remove any ice and snow
from the door mirror, then either
operate the mirror using manual
mode or move the mirror by hand.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.578)
WARNING
■ When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to
get your hand caught by the moving mirror.
Extending the mirrors (if
equipped)
 From inside (if equipped)
The mirror can be deployed to
the outer side in order to
improve rear visibility when towing a wide trailer.
Press the switch and extend the
mirror.
Press the switch again to return
the mirror to the original position.
1 Folds the mirrors
2 Unfolds the mirrors
Putting the switch in the neutral
position sets the mirrors to automatic mode. Automatic mode
allows the folding or unfolding of
the mirrors to be linked to locking/unlocking of the doors.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
163
upper mirror be filled with images
other than the vehicle and trailer.
2 Manually adjust the lower part of
the mirror until an appropriate
view of the towed object is
obtained. It is recommended that
the outer 2/3 of the lower mirror
be filled with images other than
the trailer.
■ Using the extending mirrors in
■ Recommended mirror angle
when towing a trailer (vehicles
with extending mirrors)
When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select switch is selected, the
outside rear view mirrors will
automatically angle downwards
when the vehicle is reversing in
order to give a better view of the
ground.
To disable this function, select
neither “L” nor “R”.
■ Adjusting the mirror angle
when the vehicle is reversing
With the shift lever in R, adjust
the mirror angle at a desired
position.
The adjusted angle will be memorized and the mirror will automatically tilt to the memorized
angle whenever the shift lever is
shifted to R from next time.
1 Power adjust the upper part of
the mirror until an appropriate
view is obtained. It is recommended that the outer 2/3 of the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
The memorized downward tilt position of the mirror is linked to the
normal position (angle adjusted
with the shift position in other than
R). Therefore, if the normal position
is changed after adjustment, the tilt
3
Before driving
cold weather
The door mirror extending & retracting functions could freeze up and
extending or retracting may not be
possible. In this case, remove any
ice and snow from the mirror, then
either operate the mirror by pressing
the extend or retract switch or move
the mirror by hand.
Linked mirror function
when reversing (if
equipped)
164
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
position will also change.
When the normal position is
changed, readjust the angle in
reversing.
Trailering light (if
equipped)
Improves reverse operation for
trailer parking by turning on the
outer mirror lights at night.
These lights can be used as
work lights.
When the shift lever is in P or R,
press the switch.
■ Automatic light off system
The lights will automatically turn off
when any of the following conditions
are satisfied:
● When the shift lever is in N or D
● When the outer mirror is folded
(P.162)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
dow frame while the window is closing, window movement is stopped
and the window is opened slightly.
Opening and closing the
power windows
■ Catch protection function
3-5.Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
The power windows can be
opened and closed using the
switches.
Operating the switch moves the
windows as follows:
2 One-touch closing*
3 Opening
4 One-touch opening*
: To stop the window partway,
operate the switch in the opposite
direction.
■ The power windows can be
operated when
The engine switch is in ON
■ Operating the power windows
after turning the engine off
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds
even after the engine switch is
turned to ACC or turned off. They
cannot, however, be operated once
either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes jammed
between the window and the win-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
If an object becomes caught
between the door and window while
the window is opening, window
movement is stopped.
■ When the side window cannot
be opened or closed
When the jam protection function or
catch protection function operates
unusually and the side window cannot be opened or closed, perform
the following operations with the
power window switch of that door.
● Stop the vehicle. With the engine
switch in ON, within 4 seconds of
the jam protection function or
catch protection function activating, continuously operate the
power window switch in the onetouch closing direction or onetouch opening direction so that the
side window can be opened and
closed.
● If the side window cannot be
opened and closed even when
performing the above operations,
perform the following procedure
for function initialization.
1 Turn the engine switch to ON.
2 Pull and hold the power window
switch in the one-touch closing
direction and completely close
the side window.
3 Release the power window
switch for a moment, resume
pulling the switch in the onetouch closing direction, and hold
it there for approximately 6 seconds or more.
4 Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch
opening direction. After the side
window is completely opened,
continue holding the switch for
an additional 1 second or more.
5 Release the power window
switch for a moment, resume
3
Before driving
1 Closing
*
165
166
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
pushing the switch in the onetouch opening direction, and
hold it there for approximately 4
seconds or more.
6 Pull and hold the power window
switch in the one-touch closing
direction again. After the side
window is completely closed,
continue holding the switch for a
further 1 second or more.
If you release the switch while the
window is moving, start again from
the beginning.
If the window reverses and cannot
be fully closed or opened, have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
■ Door lock linked window opera-
tion
● The power windows can be
opened and closed using the
mechanical key.* (P.545)
● The power windows can be
opened using the wireless remote
control.* (P.111)
● The alarm may be triggered if the
alarm is set and the power window
is closed using the door lock
linked power window operation
function. (P.74)
*
: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.
■ Power windows open warning
buzzer
A buzzer sounds and a message is
shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when
the engine switch is turned off and
the driver’s door is opened with the
power windows open.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.578)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● The driver is responsible for all
the power window operations,
including the operation for the
passengers. In order to prevent
accidental operation, especially
by a child, do not let a child
operate the power windows. It is
possible for children and other
passengers to have body parts
caught in the power window.
Also, when riding with a child, it
is recommended to use the window lock switch. (P.167)
● Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers do not have any part of
their body in a position where it
could be caught when a window
is being operated.
● When using the wireless remote
control or mechanical key and
operating the power windows,
operate the power window after
checking to make sure that
there is no possibility of any
passenger having any of their
body parts caught in the window. Also do not let a child
operate window by the wireless
remote control or mechanical
key. It is possible for children
and other passengers to get
caught in the power window.
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
WARNING
● When exiting the vehicle, turn
the engine switch off, carry the
key and exit the vehicle along
with the child. There may be
accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly
lead to an accident.
167
The passenger windows can still be
opened and closed using the
driver’s switch even if the lock
switch is on.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body
to intentionally activate the jam
protection function.
● The jam protection function may
■ Catch protection function
● Never use any part of your body
or clothing to intentionally activate the catch protection function.
● The catch protection function
may not work if something gets
caught just before the window is
fully opened. Be careful not to
get any part of your body or
clothing caught in the window.
Preventing accidental
operation (window lock
switch)
This function can be used to
prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
Press the switch.
The indicator
will come on and
the passenger windows will be
locked.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ The power windows can be
operated when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ When the battery is discon-
nected
The window lock switch is disabled.
If necessary, press the window lock
switch after reconnecting the battery.
3
Before driving
not work if something gets
jammed just before the window
is fully closed. Be careful not to
get any part of your body
jammed in the window.
168
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Power back window*
*
 Type B
: If equipped
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Keep the back window closed.
This not only keeps personal
belongings from being thrown out,
but also prevents exhaust gases
from entering the vehicle.
Opening and closing the
power back windows
 Type A
1 Opening
2 Closing
■ The power back window can be
operated when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ Operating the power back win-
dows after turning the engine
off
The power back windows can be
operated for approximately 43 seconds after the engine switch is
turned to ACC or off. They cannot,
however, be operated once either
front door is opened.
1 Opening
2 Closing
WARNING
■ Closing the back window
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Panoramic moon roof *
WARNING
● The driver is responsible for all
the power back window operations, including the operation for
the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a
child operate the power back
window. It is possible for children and other passengers to
have body parts caught in the
power back window.
● Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers do not have any part of
their body in a position where it
could be caught when a window
is being operated.
169
*
: If equipped
Use the overhead switches
to operate the panoramic
moon roof and electronic
sunshade.
Operating the electronic
sunshade and panoramic
moon roof
■ Opening and closing the
the engine switch off, carry the
key and exit the vehicle along
with the child. There may be
accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly
lead to an accident.
1 Opens the electronic sunshade*
Slide and hold the
switch back-
ward momentary and the sunshade
will automatically open. The electronic sunshade will fully open automatically.
2 Closes the electronic sunshade*
Slide and hold the
switch for-
ward. The electronic sunshade will
fully close automatically.
If the panoramic moon roof is not
fully closed, it will close fully before
the electronic sunshade closes.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Before driving
electronic sunshade
● When exiting the vehicle, turn
3
170
*
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
: Quickly slide and release the
switch in either direction to stop
the electronic sunshade partway.
■ Tilting the panoramic moon
roof up and down
Press the
switch to tilt the
panoramic moon roof up.*
automatically.
The panoramic moon roof can be
opened from the tilt-up position.
*: Quickly slide and release the
switch in either direction to stop
the panoramic moon roof partway.
When the panoramic moon roof is
tilted up, the electronic sunshade
will open to the half-open position
of the roof.
*: Lightly press the
switch again
to stop the panoramic moon roof
partway.
Press and hold the
switch to
tilt the panoramic moon roof
down.
The panoramic moon roof can be
tilted down only when it is in the tilt
up position.
■ Opening and closing the
panoramic moon roof
Opens the panoramic moon
roof*
Slide and hold the
switch back-
ward. The panoramic moon roof
and electronic sunshade will open
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Closes the panoramic moon
roof
Slide and hold the
switch for-
ward. The panoramic moon roof will
fully close automatically.
■ The panoramic moon roof can
be operated when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ Operating the panoramic moon
roof after turning the engine off
The panoramic moon roof and electronic sunshade can be operated for
approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to ACC or
OFF. They cannot, however, be
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
operated once either front door is
opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the
panoramic moon roof and the frame
in the following situations, travel is
stopped and the panoramic moon
roof opens slightly.
● The panoramic moon roof is closing or tilting down.
● The electronic sunshade is closing.
■ Closing both the panoramic
moon roof and electronic sunshade
Slide the
switch forward.
■ Door lock linked panoramic
moon roof operation
● The panoramic moon roof can be
opened and closed using the
mechanical key.* (P.545)
● The panoramic moon roof can be
opened using the wireless remote
control.* (P.109)
● The alarm may be triggered if the
alarm is set and the panoramic
moon roof is closed using the door
lock linked panoramic moon roof
operation function. (P.74)
*
: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.
■ When the panoramic moon roof
does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Operate the
switch forward
to close the panoramic moon
roof.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3 Slide the
switch forward and
hold it for 15 seconds. After
about 10 seconds the glass
should move forward toward the
hard stops and stall, then
reverse to close position.
4 Within 5 seconds, Slide and hold
the
switch forward again.
The sunshade will go to fully
open position and stop. The
moon roof will then follow, to fully
open then close. The sunshade
will then close.
If the panoramic moon roof does not
fully close even after performing the
above procedure correctly, have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
■ Panoramic moon roof open
reminder function
A buzzer sounds and a message is
shown on the multi-information display when the engine switch is
turned to OFF and the driver’s door
is opened with the panoramic moon
roof open.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.578)
3
Before driving
The electronic sunshade will close
to the half-open position and pause.
The panoramic moon roof will then
fully close. Then the electronic sunshade will fully close.
171
172
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers do not have any part of
their body in a position where it
could be caught when the panoramic moon roof is being operated.
■ Opening and closing the elec-
tronic sunshade
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of
their body in a position where it
could be caught when the electronic sunshade is being operated.
● When using the wireless remote
● Do not let a child operate the
electronic sunshade. Closing
the electronic sunshade on
someone can cause death or
serious injury.
■ Opening the panoramic moon
roof
● Do not allow any passengers to
put their hands or head outside
the vehicle while it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the pan-
oramic moon roof.
■ Opening and closing the pan-
oramic moon roof
● The driver is responsible for
panoramic moon roof opening
and closing operations.
In order to prevent accidental
operation, especially by a child,
do not let a child operate the
panoramic moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts
caught in the panoramic moon
roof.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
control or mechanical key and
operating the panoramic moon
roof, operate the panoramic
moon roof after checking to
make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having
any of their body parts caught in
the panoramic moon roof. Also,
do not let a child operate panoramic moon roof by the wireless remote control or
mechanical key. It is possible for
children and other passengers
to get caught in the panoramic
moon roof.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn
the engine switch to OFF, carry
the key and exit the vehicle
along with the child. There may
be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly
lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body
to intentionally activate the jam
protection function.
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
WARNING
● The jam protection function may
not work if something gets
caught just before the panoramic moon roof or electronic
sunshade is fully closed. Also,
the jam protection function is
not designed to operate while
the switch is being pressed.
Take care so that your fingers,
etc. do not get caught.
173
■ After the vehicle has been
washed or rained on
Before opening the panoramic
moon roof, wipe any water off the
panoramic moon roof. Otherwise,
water may enter the cabin when
the panoramic moon roof is
opened.
■ To prevent burns or injuries
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
panoramic moon roof
● Before opening the panoramic
moon roof, make sure that there
are no foreign objects, such as
stones or ice, around the opening.
● Do not hit the surface or edge of
the panoramic moon roof with
hard objects.
● The panoramic moon roof
opens outside the vehicle,
thereby increasing the height of
the vehicle. Please use caution
when opening or driving with the
panoramic moon roof open
(pulling into low garages, etc.)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3
Before driving
Do not touch the area between
the underside of the panoramic
moon roof and the electronic sunshade. Your hand may get caught
and you could injure yourself.
Also, if the vehicle is left in direct
sunlight for a long time, the underside of the panoramic moon roof
could become very hot and could
cause burns.
174
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
175
Driving
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle....... 177
Cargo and luggage ..... 184
Vehicle load limits ....... 187
Trailer towing............... 188
Dinghy towing ............. 203
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch 204
Automatic transmission208
Turn signal lever.......... 212
Brake Hold .................. 216
4-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch .......... 219
Fog light switch ........... 222
AHB (Automatic High
Beam)........................ 222
Windshield wipers and
washer....................... 226
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
.................................. 230
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Toyota Safety Sense 2.5
.................................. 232
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
.................................. 237
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
.................................. 248
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
.................................. 259
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
.................................. 262
Cruise control .............. 274
Stop & Start system .... 277
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
.................................. 284
Intuitive parking assist . 291
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert).......................... 298
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake)........................ 304
Parking Support Brake function (static objects) .... 309
Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)........................... 312
Toyota parking assist monitor .............................. 314
Panoramic view monitor
.................................. 327
Multi-terrain Monitor .... 362
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
Parking brake.............. 213
4
176
Electronically modulated air
suspension ................ 373
Driving mode select switch
.................................. 376
Four-wheel drive system
.................................. 379
AUTO LSD system...... 381
Rear differential lock system
.................................. 382
Crawl Control .............. 383
Multi-terrain Select ...... 387
Downhill assist control system ............................ 390
Driving assist systems 392
Trailer brake controller 398
Trailer Backup Guide .. 401
Active front spoiler ...... 406
4-6. Driving tips
Off-road precautions ... 408
Winter driving tips ....... 411
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle
4-1.Before driving
The following procedures
should be observed to
ensure safe driving:
Driving procedure
■ Starting the engine
P.204
■ Driving
1 With the brake pedal
depressed, shift the shift
lever to D.
If the parking brake is in automatic
mode, the parking brake is release
automatically when shifting the shift
lever to any position other than P.
(P.214)
3 Gradually release the brake
pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■ Stopping
1 With the shift lever in D,
depress the brake pedal.
If the Stop & Start system is
enabled, depressing the brake
pedal will stop the engine.
(P.277)
2 If necessary, set the parking
brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an
extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to P. (P.208)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Parking the vehicle
1 With the shift lever in D,
depress the brake pedal to
stop the vehicle completely.
2 Set the parking brake
(P.213), and shift the shift
lever to P. (P.208)
Check the parking brake indicator
is illuminated.
Do not press the shift release button after shifting the shift position to
P.
3 Turn the engine switch to
OFF to stop the engine.
4 Lock the door, making sure
that you have the electronic
key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels
as needed.
■ Starting off on a steep
uphill
1 With the brake pedal
depressed, shift the shift
lever to D.
The hill-start assist control will be
activated.
2 Pull the parking brake switch
and parking brake is set manually. (P.213)
3 Release the brake pedal and
gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the
vehicle.
4 Press the parking brake
switch and parking brake is
released manually. (P.213)
Parking brake automatic release
function. (P.215)
4
Driving
2 If the parking brake is set,
release the parking brake.
(P.213)
177
178
4-1. Before driving
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining,
because visibility will be reduced,
the windows may become foggedup, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to
rain, because the road surface will
be especially slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when
driving on an expressway in the
rain, because there may be a
layer of water between the tires
and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from
operating properly.
■ Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the
engine speed may become high
while driving.
This is due to automatic up-shifting
control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It
does not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving
uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is
released
● When the brake pedal is
depressed while “TOW HAUL”
mode or “TOW+” mode is selected
(if equipped)
■ Restraining the engine output
(Brake Override System)
● When the accelerator and brake
pedals are depressed at the same
time, the engine output may be
restrained.
● A warning message is displayed
on the multi-information display
while the system is operating.
(P.524)
■ Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle,
observing the following precautions
is recommended:
● For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
● For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high
speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low
gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed
for extended periods.
■ Operating your vehicle in a for-
eign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle
registration laws and confirm the
availability of the correct fuel.
(P.559)
■ Idling time before engine stop
To prevent damage to the turbocharger, allow the engine to idle
immediately after high-speed driving
or hill climbing.
To allow the engine to idle when the
vehicle is stopped, disable the Stop
& Start cancel switch. (P.278)
(With the Stop & Start system
enabled, the engine will be stopped
by the Stop & Start system when the
vehicle is stopped.)
Driving condition
Idling time
Normal city driving Not necessary
High-speed driving (Constant
Not necessary
speed of approx.
50 mph [80 km/h])
Steep hill driving or
continuous driving
at 62 mph (100 Approximately
1 minute
km/h) or more
(race track driving,
etc.)
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the
brake pedal while stopped with
the engine running. This prevents
the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamil-
iar with the location of the brake
and accelerator pedals to avoid
depressing the wrong pedal.
• When backing up, you may twist
your body around, leading to difficulty in operating the pedals.
Make sure to operate the pedals
properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct
driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This
allows you to depress the brake
and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using
your right foot. Depressing the
brake pedal using your left foot
may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or
stop the vehicle near flammable
materials.
The exhaust system and
exhaust gases can be
extremely hot. These hot parts
may cause a fire if there is any
flammable material nearby.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● During normal driving, do not
turn off the engine. Turning the
engine off while driving will not
cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist
to these systems will be lost.
This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should
pull over and stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an
emergency, such as if it
becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way:
P.512
● Use engine braking (downshift)
to maintain a safe speed when
driving down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously
may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness.
(P.208)
● Do not adjust the positions of
the steering wheel, the seat, or
the inside or outside rear view
mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of
vehicle control.
● Always check that all passen-
gers’ arms, heads or other parts
of their body are not outside the
vehicle.
● Do not drive in excess of the
speed limit. Even if the legal
speed limit permits it, do not
drive over 85 mph (140 km/h)
unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving
over 85 mph (140 km/h) may
result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure
to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your
vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at
such speeds.
4
Driving
• Accidentally depressing the
accelerator pedal instead of the
brake pedal will result in sudden
acceleration that may lead to an
accident.
179
180
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
● On vehicles with electronically
modulated air suspension, if
you drive through deep water
over about 20 in. (500 mm) in
depth, put the vehicle height in
the “HI” mode using the height
control switch and then change
to manual mode by pushing the
height control mode select
switch. Drive your vehicle at 18
mph (30 km/h) or less. Do not
drive through water deeper than
about 28 in. (700 mm) even if
the vehicle height is in “HI”
mode. (P.373)
■ When driving on slippery
road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration
and steering may cause tire
slippage and reduce your ability
to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine
braking due to shifting, or
changes in engine speed could
cause the vehicle to skid.
● After driving through a puddle,
lightly depress the brake pedal
to make sure that the brakes
are functioning properly. Wet
brake pads may prevent the
brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one
side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may
be affected.
■ When shifting the shift lever
● Do not let the vehicle roll back-
ward while a forward driving
position is selected, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine
to stall or lead to poor brake and
steering performance, resulting
in an accident or damage to the
vehicle.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Do not shift the shift lever to P
while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss
of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R
while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss
of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to a
driving position while the vehicle
is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss
of vehicle control.
● Moving the shift lever to N while
the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not
available when N is selected.
● Be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal
depressed. Shifting the shift
lever to any positions other than
P or N may lead to unexpected
rapid acceleration of the vehicle
that may cause an accident and
result in death or serious injury.
■ If you hear a squealing or
scraping noise (brake pad
wear indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and
replaced by your Toyota dealer, or
any reliable repairer as soon as
possible.
Rotor damage may result if the
pads are not replaced when
needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle
when the wear limits of the brake
pads and/or those of the brake
discs are exceeded.
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other
than P or N, the vehicle may
accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
● In order to prevent accidents
due to the vehicle rolling away,
always keep depressing the
brake pedal while the engine is
running, and apply the parking
brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an
incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always
depress the brake pedal and
securely apply the parking
brake as needed.
engine.
Running the engine at high
speed while the vehicle is
stopped may cause the exhaust
system to overheat, which could
result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette
lighters, spray cans, or soft
drink cans in the vehicle when it
is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette
lighter or spray can, and may
lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the
vehicle may cause the plastic
lenses and plastic material of
glasses to deform or crack.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
• Soft drink cans may fracture,
causing the contents to spray
over the interior of the vehicle,
and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical
components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in
the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter
is in a place such as the glove
box or on the floor, it may be lit
accidentally when luggage is
loaded or the seat is adjusted,
causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to
the windshield or windows. Do
not place containers such as air
fresheners on the instrument
panel or dashboard. Adhesive
discs or containers may act as
lenses, causing a fire in the
vehicle.
● Do not leave a door or window
open if the curved glass is
coated with a metallized film
such as a silver-colored one.
Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
● Always apply the parking brake,
shift the shift lever to P, stop the
engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
If the vehicle is parked with the
shift lever in P but the parking
brake is not set, the vehicle may
start to move, possibly leading
to an accident.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes
while the engine is running or
immediately after turning the
engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
4
Driving
● Avoid revving or racing the
181
182
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
● 4WD models: If the shift lever is
moved before the “4L” indicator
turns on/off, the transfer mode
may not be shifted completely.
The transfer mode disengages
both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and
allows the vehicle to move
regardless of the shift position.
(At this time, the indicator blinks
and the buzzer sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to
roll even if the automatic transmission is in P. You or someone
else could be seriously injured.
You must complete the shifting
of the transfer mode. (P.379)
■ When taking a nap in the vehi-
cle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the
shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an
accident or fire due to engine
overheating. Additionally, if the
vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may
collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health
hazard.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive
more cautiously.
Braking distance increases
when the brakes are wet, and
this may cause one side of the
vehicle to brake differently than
the other side. Also, the parking
brake may not securely hold the
vehicle.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● If the brake booster device does
not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid hills
or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal
should be depressed more
firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have
your brakes fixed immediately.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if
the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal
uses up the reserve for the
power-assisted brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2
individual hydraulic systems; if
one of the systems fails, the
other will still operate. In this
case, the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than
usual and the braking distance
will increase. Have your brakes
fixed immediately.
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck
Do not spin the wheels excessively when a driven wheel is up
in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, etc. This may damage
the driveline components or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.
4-1. Before driving
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator
and brake pedals at the same
time during driving, as this may
restrain the engine output.
● Do not use the accelerator
pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the
same time to hold the vehicle on
a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always set the parking brake and
shift the shift lever to P. Failure to
do so may cause the vehicle to
move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator
pedal is accidentally depressed.
parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel
fully in either direction and hold
it there for an extended period
of time.
Doing so may damage the
power steering.
● When driving over bumps in the
road, drive as slowly as possible
to avoid damaging the wheels,
underside of the vehicle, etc.
● Make sure to idle the engine
immediately after high-load driving. Stop the engine only after
the turbocharger has cooled
down. Failure to do so may
cause damage to the turbocharger
■ If you get a flat tire while driv-
ing
A flat or damaged tire may cause
the following situations. Hold the
steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to
slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your
vehicle.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● The vehicle will make abnormal
sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnor-
mally.
Information on what to do in case
of a flat tire (P.533)
■ When encountering flooded
roads
Do not drive on a road that has
flooded after heavy rain, etc.
Doing so may cause the following
serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by
water immersion
In the event that you drive on a
flooded road and the vehicle
becomes flooded or stuck in mud
or sand, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality
of oil and fluid used for the
engine, transmission, transfer
(4WD vehicles), differential, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the pro-
peller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where possible),
and the function of all joints,
bearings, etc.
4
Driving
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle
183
184
4-1. Before driving
Sudden start restraint
control (Drive-Start Control [DSC])
When the following unusual
operation is performed with the
accelerator pedal depressed,
the engine output may be
restrained.
• When the shift lever is shifted
to R*.
• When the shift lever is shifted
from P or R to forward drive
shift position such as D*.
When the system operates, a message appears on the multi-information display. Read the message and
follow the instruction.
*: Depending on the situation, the
shift position may not be
changed.
■ Drive-Start Control (DSC)
When the TRAC is turned off
(P.393), sudden start restraint
control also does not operate. If
your vehicle have trouble escaping
from the mud or fresh snow due to
sudden start restraint operation,
deactivate TRAC (P.393) so that
the vehicle may become able to
escape from the mud or fresh snow.
Also, sudden start restraint control
will not operate in the following conditions:
● When the front-wheel drive control
switch is in “4H” or “4L” position.
(4WD models only)
● When AUTO LSD mode, the drive
start control does not operate. (if
equipped)
● When Multi-terrain Select is
selected. (if equipped)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following
information about storage
precautions, cargo capacity
and load:
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the
total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load
capacity) — (Total weight of
occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit —
(1) Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined
weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 −
4-1. Before driving
185
750 (5  150) = 650 lbs.)
be C lb. (kg) as follows:
(5) Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb.
(kg)
(6) If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
(P.187)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D
lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo
and luggage load will be reduced E
lb. (kg) as follows:
*1
: A =Weight of people
*2
: B =Total load capacity
*3: C =Available cargo and luggage
load
C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb.
(kg)
*4: D =Additional weight of people
*5
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) (P.557)
When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a
total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) of B lb. (kg),
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity will
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
As shown in the example above,
if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an
amount that equals the
increased weight due to the
additional occupants. In other
words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity
(combined weight of occupants
plus cargo and luggage load),
you must reduce the cargo and
luggage on your vehicle.
WARNING
■ Things that must not be car-
ried in the luggage compartment
The following things may cause a
fire if loaded in the luggage compartment:
Driving
Calculation formula for
your vehicle
: E =Available cargo and luggage
load
4
186
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
● Receptacles containing gaso-
line
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
pedals from being depressed
properly, may block the driver’s
vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident.
● Do not stack anything behind
the front seats higher than the
seatbacks.
● Do not place cargo or luggage
in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear
seats (when stacking items)
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
• On the auxiliary box or tray that
has no lid
● Secure all items in the occupant
compartment.
● Never allow anyone to ride in
the rear deck. It is not designed
for passengers. They should
ride in their seats with their seat
belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely
to suffer death or serious bodily
injury, in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum
axle weight rating or the total
vehicle weight rating.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Even if the total load of occu-
pant’s weight and the cargo
load is less than the total load
capacity, do not apply the load
unevenly. Improper loading may
cause deterioration of steering
or braking control which may
cause death or serious injury.
4-1. Before driving
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include
total load capacity, seating
capacity, TWR (Trailer
Weight Rating) and cargo
capacity.
 Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight): P.557
Total load capacity means the
combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.
187
■ Total load capacity and seating
capacity
These details are also described on
the tire and loading information
label. (P.564)
WARNING
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to
the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in
an accident.
 Seating capacity: P.558
Even if the number of occupants are within the seating
capacity, do not exceed the
total load capacity.
 TWR (Trailer Weight Rating): P.192
TWR means the maximum
gross trailer weight (trailer
weight plus its cargo weight)
that your vehicle is able to tow.
 Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase
or decrease depending on the
weight and the number of
occupants.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
Seating capacity means the
maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg)
per person.
188
4-1. Before driving
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-andload-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an
adverse impact on handling,
performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption.
For your safety and the
safety of others, you must
not overload your vehicle or
trailer. You must also
ensure that you are using
appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equipment has been installed
correctly and used properly, and that you employ
the requisite driving habits.
Vehicle-trailer stability and
braking performance are
affected by trailer stability,
brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the hitch
and hitch systems (if
equipped).
To tow a trailer safely, use
extreme care and drive the
vehicle in accordance with
your trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions.
Toyota warranties do not
apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a
trailer for commercial purposes.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Contact your Toyota dealer for
further information about additional requirements such as a
towing kit, etc.
■ Trailer brake controller (if
equipped)
P.398
■ Before towing
Check that the following conditions
are met:
● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires
are properly inflated. (P.564)
● Trailer tires are inflated according
to the trailer manufacturer’s recommendation.
● All trailer lights work as required
by law.
● All lights work each time you connect them.
● The trailer ball is set at the proper
height for the coupler on the
trailer.
● The trailer is level when it is
hitched. Do not drive if the trailer
is not level, and check for
improper tongue weight, overloading, worn suspension, or other
possible causes.
● The trailer cargo is securely
loaded.
● The rear view mirrors conform to
all applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do
not, install rear view mirrors
appropriate for towing purposes.
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
■ Trailer towing precautions
189
● Do not make jerky, abrupt or
sharp turns.
To tow a trailer safely, use
extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer’s
characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so could
cause an accident resulting in
death or serious injury. Vehicle
stability and braking performance
are affected by trailer stability,
brake setting and performance,
and the hitch. Your vehicle will
handle differently when towing a
trailer.
● Do not apply the brakes sud-
■ To avoid accident or injury
● Do not exceed the TWR,
• PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if
equipped)
● If the gross trailer weight is over
• Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range (if
equipped)
unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR
or GAWR.
● Do not exceed the trailer hitch
assembly weight, gross vehicle
weight, gross axle weight and
trailer tongue weight capacities.
● Do not use the following sys-
tems when your vehicles is towing a trailer or another vehicle.
Except when the following conditions are all met,
● If the gross trailer weight is over
• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped)
● Adjust the tongue weight within
If the vehicle detects that a trailer
is being towed, the lane centering
function of LTA is automatically
turned off.
● Do not exceed 65 mph (104
• When the other vehicle is a
trailer properly attached and
connected to Toyota’s official
TBC ECU.
5000 lb. (2200 kg), a weight distributing hitch with sufficient
capacity is required.
the appropriate range. Place
heavier loads as close to the
trailer axle as possible.
km/h), the posted towing speed
limit or the speed limit for your
trailer as set forth in your trailer
owner’s manual, whichever is
lowest. Slow down sufficiently
before making a turn, in cross
winds, on wet or slippery surface, etc., to help avoid an accident. If you experience a
vehicle-trailer instability from
reducing a certain speed, slow
down and make sure you keep
your vehicle speed under the
speed of which you experience
the instability.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
• When the vehicle is not being
driven on a slippery surface
such as an icy road or a very
wet road.
● Slow down and downshift
before descending steep or long
downhill grades. Do not make
sudden downshifts while
descending steep or long downhill grades.
4
Driving
2000 lb. (900 kg), a sway control device with sufficient capacity is required.
denly as you may skid, resulting
in jackknifing and loss of vehicle
control. This is especially true
on wet or slippery surfaces.
190
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
● Vehicle-trailer instability is more
likely on steep long downhills.
Before descending steep or
long downhill grades, slow
down and downshift. Do not
make sudden downshifts when
descending steep or long downhill grades. Avoid holding the
brake pedal down too long or
applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat and result in
reduced braking efficiency.
● Do not tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is installed
on your vehicle.
Towing related terms
■ GCWR (Gross Combination
Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
combination weight. The gross
combination weight is the sum
of the total vehicle weight
(including the occupants, cargo
and any optional equipment
installed on the vehicle) and the
weight of the trailer being towed
(including the cargo in the
trailer).
■ When towing a trailer
Toyota recommends trailers with
brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial
regulations.
● If the gross trailer weight
exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer
brakes are required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes
that conform to all applicable
federal and state/provincial regulations.
● Never tap into your vehicle’s
hydraulic system, as this will
lower the vehicle’s braking
effectiveness.
● Never tow a trailer without using
a safety chain securely attached
to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the
coupling unit or hitch ball, there
is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
vehicle weight. The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of
the vehicle. When towing a
trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle
weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional
equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue weight.
4-1. Before driving
191
package (if available), hitch and
hitch systems (if required).
Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle
will reduce the trailer weight rating
so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR
and GAWR.
■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
If the gross trailer weight exceeds
3000 lb. (1360 kg), it is recommended to use a trailer with 2 or
more axles.
The maximum allowable gross
axle weight. The gross axle
weight is the load placed on
each axle (front and rear).
4
■ Unbraked TWR (Unbraked
Trailer Weight Rating)
The trailer weight rating for towing a trailer without a trailer service brake system.
Front GAWR
Rear GAWR
■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
trailer weight. The gross trailer
weight is the sum of the trailer
weight and the weight of the
cargo in the trailer.
TWR is calculated assuming
base vehicle with one driver,
one front passenger, towing
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Without brakes
■ Tongue Weight
The load placed on the trailer
hitch ball. (P.194)
Driving
With brakes
192
4-1. Before driving
(P.192)
 The gross combination weight
must never exceed the
GCWR described in the table.
(P.192)
■ Kingpin Weight
The load placed on the 5th
wheel mount or the gooseneck
ball. (P.194)
 The gross vehicle weight
must never exceed the
GVWR indicated on the Certification Label. (P.558)
 The gross axle weight on
each axle must never exceed
the GAWR indicated on the
Certification Label. (P.558)
 If the gross trailer weight is
over the unbraked TWR,
trailer service brakes are
required.
Weight limits
 The gross trailer weight must
never exceed the TWR
described in the table.
 If the gross trailer weight is
over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway
control device with sufficient
capacity is required.
 If the gross trailer weight is
over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a
weight distributing hitch with
sufficient capacity is required.
GCWR, TWR, Unbraked TWR, Fifth wheel and Gooseneck towing TWR
Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight,
gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all
within the limits.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-1. Before driving
193
■ GCWR* and TWR*
 Double Cab models
Model code*1
VXKA70L-CRUSZA
VXKA72L-CHUSZA
VXKA75L-CRUSZA
VXKA77L-CHUSZA
GCWR
TWR
15250 lb. (6915 kg)*2
8300 lb. (3760 kg)*2
17770 lb. (8030 kg)*3
12000 lb. (5440 kg)*3
15380 lb. (6975 kg)*2
8300 lb. (3760 kg)*2
17250 lb. (7825 kg)*3
11370 lb. (5155 kg)*3
15480 lb. (7020 kg)*2
8300 lb. (3760 kg)*2
17250 lb. (7825 kg)*3
11200 lb. (5080 kg)*3
15590 lb. (7070 kg)*2
8300 lb. (3760 kg)*2
17250 lb. (7825 kg)*3
11090 lb. (5030 kg)*3
: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (P.558)
*2
: Vehicles with SR Package
*3: Vehicles without SR Package
 CrewMax models
Model code*1
GCWR
TWR
15205 lb. (6895 kg)*2
8300 lb. (3760 kg)*2
17250 lb. (7825 kg)*3
11400 lb. (5170 kg)*3
VXKA70L-PSULZA
17250 lb. (7825 kg)
11350 lb. (5145 kg)
VXKA70L-PSUZZA
17250 lb. (7825 kg)
11310 lb. (5125 kg)
VXKA71L-PRUSZA
17250 lb. (7825 kg)
11270 lb. (5110 kg)
VXKA71L-PRULZA
17250 lb. (7825 kg)
11230 lb. (5090 kg)
15430 lb. (7000 kg)*2
8300 lb. (3760 kg)*2
17250 lb. (7825 kg)*3
11160 lb. (5060 kg)*3
VXKA75L-PSULZA
17250 lb. (7825 kg)
11120 lb. (5040 kg)
VXKA75L-PSUZZA
17250 lb. (7825 kg)
11050 lb. (5010 kg)
VXKA76L-PRUSZA
17250 lb. (7825 kg)
11010 lb. (4990 kg)
VXKA70L-PSUSZA
VXKA75L-PSUSZA
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
*1
4
194
4-1. Before driving
Model code*1
GCWR
TWR
VXKA76L-PRULZA
17250 lb. (7825 kg)
10970 lb. (4975 kg)
VXKA76L-PRUZZA
17250 lb. (7825 kg)
10870 lb. (4930 kg)
*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (P.558)
*2
: Vehicles with SR Package
*3
: Vehicles without SR Package
■ Unbraked TWR*
1000 lb. (453 kg)
*
: These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE International per SAE J2807.
Trailer Tongue Weight and
Trailer Kingpin Weight
 A recommended tongue
weight or kingpin weight varies in accordance with the
types of trailers or towing as
described below.
 To ensure the recommended
values shown below, the
trailer must be loaded by
referring to the following
instructions.
1.Conventional Towing
The gross trailer weight should
be distributed so that the tongue
weight is 9% to 11%. (Tongue
Weight/Gross trailer weight x
100 = 9% to 11%)
Gross trailer weight
Tongue Weight
If using a weight distributing hitch
when towing, return the front axle to
the same weight as before the
trailer connection.
If front axle weight cannot be measured directly, measure the front
fender height above the front axle
before connection. Adjust weight
distributing hitch torque until front
fender is returned to the same
height as before connection.
Do not reduce front fender height
below original measurement.
The gross trailer weight, gross axle
weight and tongue weight can be
measured with platform scales
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-1. Before driving
found at a highway weighing station, building supply company,
trucking company, junk yard, etc.
2.Fifth wheel Towing or Gooseneck Towing
The gross trailer weight should
be distributed so that the kingpin
weight is 14% to 16%. (Kingpin
weight/Gross trailer weight x
100 = 14% to 16%)
195
NOTICE
■ When towing a fifth wheel
trailer
Be careful not to hit the cabin or
bed with the trailer while making a
sharp turn.
Hitch
Kingpin weight
The gross trailer weight and kingpin
weight can be measured with platform scales found at a highway
weighing station, building supply
company, trucking company, junk
yard, etc.
CrewMax models: Current fifth
wheel trailer designs are not compatible with short bed.
 If you wish to install a trailer
hitch, contact your Toyota
dealer.
 Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer
weight requirement of your
vehicle.
 Follow the directions supplied
by the hitch manufacturer.
 Lubricate the hitch ball and
kingpin with a light coating of
grease.
 Remove the hitch ball whenever you are not towing a
trailer. Remove the trailer
hitch if you do not need it.
After removing the hitch, seal
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
Gross trailer weight
Trailer hitch assemblies have
different weight capacities. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota hitch/bracket for your
vehicle. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
196
4-1. Before driving
any mounting holes in the
vehicle body to prevent entry
of any substances into the
vehicle.
WARNING
■ Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer.
Even though the vehicle may be
physically capable of towing a
higher weight, the operator must
determine the maximum weight
rating of the particular hitch
assembly and never exceed the
maximum weight rating specified
for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the
maximum weight rating set by the
trailer-hitch manufacturer can
cause an accident resulting in
death or serious personal injuries.
NOTICE
■ When installing a trailer hitch
Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer.
Do not install the trailer hitch on
the bumper; this may cause body
damage.
Trailer ball load rating
Matches or exceeds the gross
trailer weight rating of the trailer.
Shank length
Protrudes beyond the bottom of the
lock washer and nut at least 2
threads.
Shank diameter
Matches the ball mount hole diameter size.
Ball diameter
Matches the size of the trailer coupler. Most couplers are stamped
with the required trailer ball size.
Trailer class
Typical trailer
ball size
IV
2 5/16 in.
II and III
2 in.
I
1 7/8 in.
Positions for towing hitch
receiver
Selecting trailer ball
Use the correct trailer ball for
your application.
Weight carrying ball position:
58.3 in. (1481 mm)
Hitch receiver pin hole position: 46.4 in. (1178.9 mm)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-1. Before driving
■ Matching trailer ball height to
trailer coupler height
No matter which class of tow hitch
applies, for a more safer trailer
hookup, the trailer ball setup must
be the proper height for the coupler
on the trailer.
197
 Vehicles without trailer brake
controller
 Vehicles with trailer brake
controller
4
Driving
Coupler
Trailer ball
Connecting trailer lights
Use the wire harness located in
the rear end of the vehicle.
The tow lighting system is
designed for 64 watts/5 amps of
electrical current per side (right
and left) for the trailer brake/turn
light functions.
Please contact your Toyota
dealer with any questions or
concerns.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Service connector for towing
brake controllers (vehicles
without trailer brake controller)
Your vehicle is equipped with a service connector for supplemental
trailer brake controllers.
Access the service connector.
198
4-1. Before driving
● If the left-side stop/turn signal light
does not come on, put the turn
signal in the off position or remove
foot from the brake pedal.
If the emergency flashers do not
operate, press the emergency
flasher switch to turn them off.
After the light system is reset, operate the light switches again to see if
the lights operate normally.
If the lights do not operate normally,
have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ Trailer lights operation check
1 Remove the driver side under
cover.
function
Use the meter control switches to
start the function. (P.94)
2 Remove the connector.
1 Press
■ Auto current cut-off function
2 Press
or
to select “Trailer
Light Check”, and then press
.
In case of over current, the auto cutoff function stops the power flowing
to the trailer lights to prevent damage to the vehicle’s electrical system.
This function is activated when the
rated current of any of the following
trailer light circuit components is
exceeded:
● Stop/turn signal light (right): maximum 5 A
● Stop/turn signal light (left): maximum 5 A
■ When the auto current cut func-
tion is activated
If a trailer light does not come on
due to the activation of the auto current cut function, the light system
will need to be reset.
Follow the reset procedure shown
below.
● If a tail light does not come on,
turn off the headlight switch.
● If the right-side stop/turn signal
light does not come on, put the
turn signal in the off position or
remove foot from the brake pedal.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
or
to select
.
3 Press
to start the trailer light
check.
The light check operates in the cycle
of Brake lights  Left turn lights 
Right turn lights.
■ The trailer light check is opera-
tional when
The trailer light check operates
when all of the following conditions
are met:
● The vehicle is stopped.
● The shift lever is shifted to P.
NOTICE
■ Do not directly splice trailer
lights
Do not directly splice trailer lights.
Directly splicing trailer lights may
damage your vehicle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction.
4-1. Before driving
Connecting and disconnecting a trailer (vehicles
with electronically modulated air suspension)
If a height control system is
installed in your vehicle, you
have to connect and disconnect
your trailer more carefully.
 Connecting
1 Set the height control of electronically modulated air suspension system to “N” mode.
3 Connect the trailer.
4 Restart the engine.
5 Press the height control
mode select switch to cancel
the manual mode condition
that was set on step 2.
6 Check that the “MAN.” indicator turns off. Set the height
control of electronically modulated air suspension system to “N” mode.
 Disconnecting
1 Set the height control of electronically modulated air suspension system to “N” mode.
2 Set the electronically modulated air suspension system
to manual mode.
3 Turn off the engine.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4 Set the supporting leg of the
trailer on the ground and
raise the hitch by 4 in. (100
mm).
5 Restart the engine.
6 Press the height control
mode select switch to cancel
the manual mode condition
that was set on step 2.
Check that the “MAN.” indicator turns off.
7 Wait until vehicle height is
stabilized.
8 Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If the hitch does
not disconnect, raise the
hitch higher and repeat steps
2 through 7. Move the vehicle forward in “LO” mode
where the hitch does not
touch anything in “N” mode.
Set the height control of electronically modulated air suspension system to “N” mode.
Trailer towing tips
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. To
help avoid an accident, death or
serious injury, keep the following
in mind when towing:
 Speed limits for towing a
trailer vary by state or province. Do not exceed the
posted towing speed limit.
 Toyota recommends that the
vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65
4
Driving
2 Turn off the engine, or set the
electronically modulated air
suspension system to manual mode. (P.373)
199
200
4-1. Before driving
mph (104 km/h) on a flat,
straight, dry road. Do not
exceed this limit, the posted
towing speed limit or the
speed limit for your trailer as
set forth in your trailer owner’s
manual, whichever is lowest.
Instability of the towing vehicle-trailer combination (trailer
sway) increases as speed
increases. Exceeding speed
limits may cause loss of control.
 As stopping distance is
increased when towing a
trailer, vehicle-to-vehicle distance should be increased.
For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of
speed, allow at least one
vehicle and trailer length.
 Before starting out, check the
trailer lights, tires and the
vehicle-trailer connections.
Recheck after driving a short
distance.
 Avoid jerky starts or sudden
acceleration.
 Practice turning, stopping and
reversing with the trailer
attached in an area away
from traffic until you become
accustomed to the feel of the
vehicle-trailer combination.
 Reversing with a trailer
attached is difficult and
requires practice. Grip the
bottom of the steering wheel
and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the
left. Move your hand to the
right to move the trailer to the
right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a
trailer attached.) Avoid sharp
or prolonged turning. Have
someone guide you when
reversing to reduce the risk of
an accident.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
 Avoid sudden braking as you
may skid, resulting in the
trailer jackknifing and a loss of
vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery
surfaces.
 Avoid jerky steering and
sharp turns, and slow down
before making a turn.
 Note that when making a turn,
the trailer wheels will be
closer than the vehicle wheels
to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a wider
than normal turning radius.
 Slow down before making a
turn, in crosswinds, on wet or
slippery surfaces, etc.
Increasing vehicle speed can
destabilize the trailer.
 Take care when passing other
vehicles. Passing requires
considerable distance. After
passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer,
and be sure you have plenty
of room before changing
lanes.
 Instability happens more fre-
4-1. Before driving
quently when descending
steep or long downhill grades.
Before descending, slow
down and downshift. Do not
make sudden downshifts
while descending steep or
long downhill grades.
 Avoid holding the brake pedal
down too long or applying the
brakes too frequently. This
could cause the brakes to
overheat and result in
reduced braking efficiency.
 Always place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle’s and
the trailer’s wheels when
parking. Apply the parking
brake firmly, and put the
transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after
performing the following:
1 Apply the brakes and keep
them applied.
2 Have someone place wheel
blocks under both the vehicle’s and trailer’s wheels.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3 When the wheel blocks are in
place, release the brakes
slowly until the blocks absorb
the load.
4 Apply the parking brake
firmly.
5 Shift into P and turn off the
engine.
 When restarting after parking
on a slope:
1 With the transmission in P,
start the engine. Be sure to
keep the brake pedal
pressed.
2 Shift into a forward gear. If
reversing, shift into R.
4
3 If the parking brake is in manual mode, release the parking brake. (P.213)
Driving
 Due to the added load of the
trailer, your vehicle’s engine
may overheat on hot days (at
temperatures over 85°F
[30°C]) when driving up a long
or steep grade. If the engine
coolant temperature gauge
indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your
vehicle off the road and stop
in a safe spot. (P.551)
201
4 Release the brake pedal, and
slowly pull or back away from
the wheel blocks. Stop and
apply the brakes.
5 Have someone retrieve the
blocks.
■ Break-in schedule
If your vehicle is new or equipped
with any new power train components (such as an engine, transmission, transfer [4WD models], rear
differential or wheel bearing), Toyota
recommends that you do not tow a
trailer until the vehicle has been
driven for over 500 miles (800 km).
After the vehicle has been driven for
over 500 miles (800 km), you can
start towing. However, for the next
500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed of less than 50 mph
(80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and
202
4-1. Before driving
avoid full throttle acceleration.
■ Maintenance
● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle
will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load.
(See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” / “Owner’s Manual
Supplement”.)
● Retighten the fixing bolts of the
towing ball and bracket after
approximately 600 miles (1000
km) of trailer towing.
■ If trailer sway occurs
One or more factors (crosswinds,
passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.)
can adversely affect handling of
your vehicle and trailer, causing
instability.
● If trailer swaying occurs:
• Firmly grip the steering wheel.
Steer straight ahead. Do not try to
control trailer swaying by turning
the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator
pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce speed. Do not
increase speed. Do not apply
vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction
with the steering or brakes, your
vehicle and trailer should stabilize.
(if enabled, Trailer Sway Control can
also help to stabilize the vehicle and
trailer.)
● After the trailer swaying has
stopped:
• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and
the trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer. Make
sure the load has not shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is
appropriate, if possible.
• Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the
speed at which trailer swaying
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
occurred is beyond the limit of your
particular vehicle-trailer combination. Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that
swaying of the towing vehicle-trailer
increases as speed increases.
4-1. Before driving
203
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed
to be dinghy towed (with 4
wheels on the ground)
behind a motor home.
4
NOTICE
your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with the
four wheels on the ground.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
■ To avoid serious damage to
204
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition)
switch
4-2.Driving procedures
engine switch mode.
Performing the following
operations when carrying
the electronic key on your
person starts the engine or
changes engine switch
modes.
Starting the engine
1 Pull the parking brake switch
to check that the parking
brake is set. (P.213)
The parking brake indicator will
come on.
2 Check that the shift lever is in
P.
3 Firmly depress the brake
pedal.
and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the engine
cannot be started.
4 Press the engine switch
shortly and firmly.
When operating the engine switch,
one short, firm press is enough. It is
not necessary to press and hold the
switch.
The engine will crank until it starts
or for up to 30 seconds, whichever
is less.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is completely
started.
The engine can be started from any
■ If the engine does not start
● The engine immobilizer system
may not have been deactivated.
(P.73)
Contact your Toyota dealer.
● If a message related to start-up is
shown on the multi-information
display, read the message and follow the instructions.
■ If the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started using
the smart key system. Refer to
P.547 to restart the engine.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P.108
■ Conditions affecting operation
P.132
■ Notes for the entry function
P.133
■ If “Smart Key System Malfunc-
tion See Owner’s Manual” is
displayed on the multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
■ When “Check Fuel Cap” is dis-
played on the multi-information
display
P.231
■ Electronic key battery
P.501
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-2. Driving procedures
■ Operation of the engine switch
● If the switch is not pressed shortly
and firmly, the engine switch
mode may not change or the
engine may not start.
● If attempting to restart the engine
immediately after turning the
engine switch to OFF, the engine
may not start in some cases. After
turning the engine switch to OFF,
please wait a few seconds before
restarting the engine.
■ Customization
If the smart key system has been
deactivated in a customized setting,
refer to P.545.
WARNING
■ When starting the engine
NOTICE
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, have
your vehicle checked by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
■ Symptoms indicating a mal-
function with the engine
switch
If the engine switch seems to be
operating somewhat differently
than usual, such as the switch
sticking slightly, there may be a
malfunction. Contact your Toyota
dealer immediately.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Stopping the engine
1 Stop the vehicle completely.
2 Set the parking brake
(P.213), and shift the shift
lever to P.
Check the parking brake indicator
is illuminated.
Do not press the shift release button after shifting the shift position to
P.
3 Press the engine switch
shortly and firmly.
The engine will stop, and the meter
display will be extinguished.
4 Release the brake pedal and
check that “ACCESSORY” or
“IGNITION ON” is not shown
on the meter.
■ Automatic engine shut off fea-
ture (except for New Caledonia)
● The vehicle is equipped with a
feature that automatically shuts off
the engine when the shift lever is
in P with the engine running for an
extended period.
● The engine will automatically shut
off after approximately 1 hour if it
has been left running while the
shift lever is in P.
● The timer for the automatic engine
shut off feature will reset if the
brake pedal is depressed or if the
shift lever is in a position other
than P.
● After the vehicle is parked, if the
door is locked with the door lock
switch (P.114) from the inside or
the mechanical key from the outside, the automatic engine shut off
feature will be disabled. The timer
for the automatic engine shut off
feature will be re-enabled if the
driver’s door is opened.
4
Driving
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not
depress the accelerator pedal
while starting the engine under
any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
205
206
4-2. Driving procedures
WARNING
■ Stopping the engine in an
emergency
● If you want to stop the engine in
an emergency while driving the
vehicle, press and hold the
engine switch for more than 2
seconds, or press it briefly 3
times or more in succession.
(P.512)
However, do not touch the
engine switch while driving
except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving
will not cause loss of steering or
braking control, but the power
assist to these systems will be
lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you
should pull over and stop the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so.
● If the engine switch is operated
while the vehicle is running, a
warning message will be shown
on the multi-information display
and a buzzer sounds.
● Do not leave the vehicle with
the engine running for a long
time. If such a situation cannot
be avoided, park the vehicle in
an open space and ensure that
exhaust fumes do not enter the
vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the engine running
in an area with snow build-up,
or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect and
enter the vehicle.
Changing engine switch
modes
Modes can be changed by
pressing the engine switch with
the brake pedal released. (The
mode changes each time the
switch is pressed.)
● To restart the engine after per-
forming an emergency shutdown, shift the shift lever to N
and then press the engine
switch.
■ When parking (except for New
Caledonia)
Exhaust gases include harmful
carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Observe
the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle
and may lead to an accident
caused by light-headedness, or
may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly venti-
lated area or a closed area,
such as a garage, stop the
engine.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
“ACCESSORY”
“IGNITION ON”
1 OFF*
The emergency flashers can be
used.
The multi-information display will
4-2. Driving procedures
not be displayed.
2 ACC
Some electrical components such
as the audio system can be used.
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed
on the meter.
3 ON
All electrical components can be
used.
“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on
the meter.
*
■ Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACC for more
than 20 minutes or ON (with engine
is not running) for more than an
hour with the shift lever is in P or the
shift release button is not pressed,
the engine switch will automatically
turn to OFF. However, this function
cannot entirely prevent the battery
discharge. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine switch in ACC or ON
for long periods of time when the
engine is not running.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Do not leave the engine switch
in ACC or ON for long periods of
time without the engine on.
● If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION
ON” is displayed on the meter,
the engine switch is not off. Exit
the vehicle after turning the
engine switch off.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
When stopping the engine
with the shift lever in a
position other than P
If the engine is stopped when
the shift lever is in a position
other than P or the shift release
button is pressed, the engine
switch will not be turned to OFF.
Perform the following procedure to turn the switch to OFF:
1 Check that the parking brake
is set.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
Do not press the shift release button after shifting the shift position to
P.
4
3 Check that “IGNITION ON” is
displayed on the multi-information display and press the
engine switch shortly and
firmly.
Driving
: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P or the shift release
button is pressed when turning off
the engine, the engine switch will
be remained to ON, not to OFF.
207
4 Check that “ACCESSORY”
or “IGNITION ON” on the
multi-information display is
off.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not stop the engine with the
shift lever in a position other P or
the shift release button pressed. If
the engine is stopped with the
shift lever in a position other than
P or the shift release button
pressed, the engine switch will not
be turned OFF and remained to
ON. If the vehicle is left in ON,
battery discharge may occur.
208
4-2. Driving procedures
Automatic transmission
Select the shift position
depending on your purpose and situation.
Shift position purpose
and functions
Shift position
Objective or function
P
Parking the vehicle/starting the engine
R
Reversing
N
Neutral (Condition in
which the power is not
transmitted)
D
Normal driving*1
S
S mode driving*2
(P.210)
*1
*2
: Shifting to the D position allows
the system to select a gear suitable for the driving conditions.
Setting the shift lever to the D
position is recommended for normal driving.
: Selecting shift ranges using S
mode restricts the upper limit of
the possible gear ranges, controls engine braking force, and
prevents unnecessary upshifting.
■ Driving on a downhill
On declines, there may be case
where the vehicle shifts down automatically to obtain engine braking.
As a result of the downshifting, the
engine speed may increase.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ To protect the automatic trans-
mission
● If the tires spin continually when
the vehicle becomes stuck in mud,
dirt or snow, or if the accelerator
pedal is depressed and released
repeatedly while driving, the automatic transmission temperature
may become too high and the
automatic transmission may be
damaged.
To avoid damaging the automatic
transmission, the system may
temporarily lock the gear. If the
automatic transmission temperature falls, the gear locking is canceled and the automatic
transmission is returned to the
normal operation.
● If the automatic transmission fluid
temperature is high, “Transmission Oil Temp. High Stop in a Safe
Place and See Owner’s Manual”
will be displayed on the multiinformation display. Immediately
stop the vehicle in a safe place,
shift the shift lever to P and wait
until the warning message go off.
If the warning message go off, you
may start the vehicle again. If the
warning message do not go off,
contact your Toyota dealer.
■ When driving with dynamic
radar cruise control with fullspeed range (if equipped) or
cruise control (if equipped) activated
Even when performing the following
actions with the intent of enabling
engine braking, engine braking will
not activate because dynamic radar
cruise control with full-speed range
or cruise control will not be canceled.
● While driving in S mode, downshifting to 9, 8, 7, 6, 5 or 4.
(P.210)
■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-
Start Control)
P.184
4-2. Driving procedures
■ AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically selects
the suitable gear according to driver
operation and driving conditions.
AI-SHIFT automatically operates
when the shift lever is in D or S.
WARNING
■ When driving on slippery
road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift gears
suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin
or skid, resulting in an accident.
Shifting the shift lever
on the shift knob.
Shift the shift lever normally.
When shifting the shift lever
between P and D, make sure that
the vehicle is completely stopped.
*: For the vehicle to be able to be
shifted from P, the brake pedal
must be depressed before the
shift release button is pushed. If
the shift release button is pushed
first, the shift lock will not be
released.
■ Shift lock system
Shift the shift lever while
pushing the shift release button
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
shifted from P
First, check whether the brake pedal
is being depressed.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
even though the brake pedal is
depressed and the shift release button is pushed, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as
an emergency measure to ensure
that the shift lever can be shifted.
Releasing the shift lock:
1 Set the parking brake.
2 Turn the engine switch off.
3 Depress the brake pedal.
4 Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
4
Driving
The shift lock system is a system to
prevent accidental operation of the
shift lever in starting.
The shift lever can be shifted from P
only when the engine switch is in
ON, the brake pedal is depressed
and the shift release button is
pushed.
■ If the shift lever cannot be
While the engine switch is in
ON and the brake pedal
depressed*, shift the shift lever
while pushing the shift release
button on the shift knob.
209
210
4-2. Driving procedures
Changing shift ranges in
S mode
When the shift lever is in the S
position, the shift lever can be
operated as follows:
5 Press and hold the shift lock
override button and then push
the button on the shift knob.
The shift lever can be shifted
while both buttons are pressed.
1 Upshifting
2 Downshifting
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident when
releasing the shift lock
Before pressing the shift lock
override button, make sure to set
the parking brake and depress the
brake pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the
brake pedal when the shift lock
override button is pressed and the
shift lever is shifted out of P, the
vehicle may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Selecting the driving
mode
■ Drive mode
P.376
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
The selected shift range, from S1 to
S10 will be displayed on the multiinformation display.
The initial shift range in S mode is
set automatically to 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8
according to vehicle speed.
However, the initial shift range may
be set to 4 if AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the
D position. (P.209)
■ S mode
● You can choose from 10 levels of
accelerating force and engine
braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide
greater accelerating force and
engine braking force than a higher
shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.
● To prevent the engine from overrevving, upshifting may automatically occur.
● To protect the automatic transmission, a function is adopted that
automatically selects a higher shift
4-2. Driving procedures
211
range when the fluid temperature
is high.
● When the shift range is 9 or lower,
holding the shift lever toward “+”
sets the shift range to 10.
■ Downshifting restriction warn-
ing buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving
performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In
some circumstances, downshifting
may not be possible even when the
shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will
sound twice.)
■ If the S indicator does not come
on even after shifting the shift
lever to S
This may indicate a malfunction in
the automatic transmission system.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
Use “TOW HAUL” or “TOW+”
mode when pulling a trailer or
hauling a heavy load. Activating
“TOW HAUL” or “TOW+” mode
is changes engine, transmission, and steering to be more
suitable when pulling a trailer.
“TOW+” indicator
“TOW HAUL” switch
Mode select switch
1 Press the “TOW HAUL”
switch
The “TOW HAUL” indicator will
come on.
Press the switch once more to cancel the mode.
2 Turn the mode select switch
to change between “TOW
HAUL” or “TOW+” modes.
When more towing power is
needed than is available in “TOW
HAUL” mode, use “TOW+” mode.
(P.212)
The “TOW+” indicator will come on.
■ Automatic deactivation of
“TOW HAUL” and “TOW+”
mode
“TOW HAUL” and “TOW+” mode is
deactivated the following conditions:
● When the front-wheel drive control
switch is in “4L”
● When driving mode select or
Multi-terrain Select (if equipped) is
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
“TOW HAUL” switch (if
equipped)
“TOW HAUL” indicator
212
4-2. Driving procedures
selected
■ Differences with “TOW HAUL”
mode and “TOW+” mode
It is recommended to use each
mode according to the weight of the
trailer to be towed.
● “TOW HAUL” mode is used when
towing trailers that weigh less than
5000 lb. (2268 kg).
● “TOW+” mode is used when towing trailers that weigh more than
5000 lb. (2268 kg).
Turn signal lever
Operating instructions
1 Right turn
2 Lane change to the right
(move the lever partway and
release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3
times.
3 Lane change to the left
(move the lever partway and
release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3
times.
4 Left turn
■ Turn signals can be operated
when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ If the indicator flashes faster
than usual
Check that the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-2. Driving procedures
■ If the turn signals stop flashing
before a lane change has been
performed
Operate the lever again.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.578)
213
Parking brake
The parking brake can be
set or released automatically or manually. In automatic mode, the parking
brake can be set or released
automatically according to
shift lever operation.
Also, even in automatic
mode, the parking brake can
be set or released manually.
Operating instructions
4
■ Using the manual mode
U.S.A.
Canada
1 Pull the switch to set the
parking brake.
The parking brake indicator light
will turn on.
Pull and hold the parking brake
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
The parking brake can be set
and released manually.
214
4-2. Driving procedures
switch if an emergency occurs and
it is necessary to operate the parking brake while driving.
2 Push the switch to release
the parking brake.
• Operate the parking brake switch
while depressing the brake pedal
or the accelerator pedal. When
using this function, slowly
depress the accelerator pedal.
• Parking brake automatic release
function (P.215)
Make sure that the parking brake
indicator light turn off.
If the parking brake indicator
light flashes, operate the switch
again. (P.524)
■ Turning the automatic
mode on
While the vehicle is stopped,
pull and hold the parking brake
switch until a buzzer sounds and
message is displayed on the
multi-information display.
from P, the parking brake will
be released, and the parking
brake indicator light will turn
off.
 When the shift lever is shifted
to P, the parking brake will be
set, and the parking brake
indicator light will turn on.
Operate the shift lever with the
vehicle stopped and the brake
pedal depressed.
■ Turning the automatic
mode off
While the vehicle is stopped and
depressing the brake pedal,
press and hold the parking
brake switch until a buzzer
sounds and message is displayed on the multi-information
display.
“EPB Shift Interlock Function
Deactivated”
“EPB Shift Interlock Function
Activated”
When the automatic mode is
turned on, the parking brake
operates as follows.
 When the shift lever is shifted
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Parking brake operation
● When the engine switch is not in
ON, the parking brake cannot be
released using the parking brake
switch.
● When the engine switch is not in
ON, automatic mode (automatic
brake setting and releasing) is not
4-2. Driving procedures
available.
■ Parking brake automatic
release function
The parking brake will be released
automatically when the accelerator
pedal is slowly depressed under the
following conditions:
● The driver’s door is closed
● The driver is wearing the seat belt
● The shift lever is in a forward or
reverse position.
● The malfunction indicator lamp or
brake system warning light is not
illuminated
If the automatic release function
does not operate, release the parking brake manually.
■ Parking brake automatic lock
■ If “Parking Brake Temporarily
Unavailable” is displayed on
the multi-information display
If the parking brake is operated
repeatedly over a short period of
time, the system may restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this
happens, refrain from operating the
parking brake. Normal operation will
return after about 1 minute.
■ If “Parking Brake Unavailable”
is displayed on the multi-information display
Operate the parking brake switch. If
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
the message does not disappear
after operating the switch several
times, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
■ Parking brake operation sound
When the parking brake operates, a
motor sound (whirring sound) may
be heard. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
■ Parking brake indicator light
● Depending on the engine switch
mode, the parking brake indicator
light will turn on and stay on as
described below:
ON: Comes on until the parking
brake is released.
Not in ON: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds.
● When the engine switch is turned
to OFF with the parking brake set,
the parking brake indicator light
will stay on for about 15 seconds.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ When the parking brake switch
malfunctions
Automatic mode (automatic brake
setting and releasing) will be turned
on automatically.
■ Parking the vehicle
P.177
■ Parking brake engaged warning
buzzer
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is
driven with the parking brake
engaged. “Parking Brake ON” is displayed on the multi-information display (with the vehicle reaching a
speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
■ If the brake system warning
light comes on
P.519
■ Usage in winter time
P.412
4
Driving
function
The parking brake will be set automatically under the following conditions:
● The driver does not operate the
brake pedal
● The driver’s door is not closed
● The driver is not wearing the seat
belt
● The shift lever position is not in P
or N
● The malfunction indicator lamp or
brake system warning light is not
illuminated
215
216
4-2. Driving procedures
WARNING
■ When parking the vehicle
Do not leave a child in the vehicle
alone. The parking brake may be
released unintentionally by a child
and there is the danger of the
vehicle moving that may lead to
an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
■ Parking brake switch
Do not set any objects near the
parking brake switch. Objects
may interfere with the switch and
may lead the parking brake to
unexpectedly operate.
Brake Hold
The brake hold system
keeps the brake applied
when the shift lever is in D,
S or N with the system on
and the brake pedal has
been depressed to stop the
vehicle. The system
releases the brake when the
accelerator pedal is
depressed with the shift
lever in D or S to allow
smooth start off.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
Before you leave the vehicle, shift
the shift lever to P, set the parking
brake and make sure that the
vehicle does not move.
■ When the system malfunc-
tions
Stop the vehicle in a safe place
and check the warning messages.
■ When the parking brake can-
Enabling the system
Turns the brake hold system on
The brake hold standby indicator (green)
comes on. While
the system is holding the brake,
the brake hold operated indicator (yellow)
comes on.
not be released due to a malfunction
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake
components overheating, which
may affect braking performance
and increase brake wear. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this
occurs.
■ Brake hold system operating
conditions
The brake hold system cannot be
turned on in the following conditions:
● The driver’s door is not closed.
● The driver is not wearing the seat
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-2. Driving procedures
belt.
● The parking brake is engaged.
If any of the conditions above are
detected when the brake hold system is enabled, the system will turn
off and the brake hold standby indicator light will go off. In addition, if
any of the conditions are detected
while the system is holding the
brake, a warning buzzer will sound
and a message will be shown on the
multi-information display. The parking brake will then be set automatically.
■ Brake hold function
● If the brake pedal is left released
■ When the parking brake is set
automatically while the system
is holding the brakes
Perform any of the following operations to release the parking brake:
● Depress the accelerator pedal.
(The parking brake is not released
if the seat belt is not fastened,
door is open, and/or the shift lever
is in P or N.)
● Operate the parking brake switch
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
with the brake pedal depressed.
Make sure that the parking brake
indicator light goes off. (P.213)
■ When an inspection at your
Toyota dealer is necessary
When the brake hold standby indicator (green) does not illuminate
even when the brake hold switch is
pressed with the brake hold system
operating conditions met, the system may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected at your Toyota
dealer.
■ If “Brake Hold Malfunction
Press Brake to Deactivate Visit
Your Dealer” or “Brake Hold
Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”
is displayed on the multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ Warning messages and buzzers
Warning messages and buzzers are
used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the
need for caution. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and
follow the instructions.
■ When another control activates
with the brake hold system
A message is displayed on the
multi-information display in any of
the following cases.
● “Brake Hold Unavailable, See the
Owner’s Manual”
• When the brake hold switch is
pressed while the downhill assist
control system is activated.
• When the brake hold switch is
pressed while the front-wheel
drive control switch is turned to
“4L” mode.
● “Brake Hold Unavailable, Press
Brake to Deactive.”
• When the “DAC/CRAWL” switch is
operated while the brake hold system is activated.
4
Driving
for a period of about 3 minutes
after the system has started holding the brake, the parking brake
will be set automatically. In this
case, a warning buzzer sounds
and a message is shown on the
multi-information display.
● To turn the system off while the
system is holding the brake, firmly
depress the brake pedal and
press the button again.
● The brake hold function may not
hold the vehicle when the vehicle
is on a steep incline. In this situation, it may be necessary for the
driver to apply the brakes. A warning buzzer will sound and the
multi-information display will
inform the driver of this situation. If
a warning message is shown on
the multi-information display, read
the message and follow the
instructions.
217
218
4-2. Driving procedures
• When the four-wheel drive control
switch is turned to “4L” mode
while the brake hold system is
activated.
The brake hold system and downhill
assist control system or transfer
“4L” mode cannot be activated at
the same time.
Please press the brake hold switch
with the brake pedal depressed to
turn off the brake hold system.
■ If the brake hold operated indi-
cator flashes
P.524
WARNING
■ When the vehicle is on a
steep incline
Take care when using the brake
hold system on a steep incline,
exercise caution. The brake hold
function may not hold brakes in
such situations.
Also, the system may not activate
depending on the angle of the
slope.
■ When stopped on a slippery
road
The system cannot stop the vehicle when the gripping ability of the
tires has been exceeded. Do not
use the system when stopped on
a slippery road.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
The brake hold system is not
designed for use when parking
the vehicle for a long period of
time. Turning the engine switch off
while the system is holding the
brake may release the brake,
which would cause the vehicle to
move. When operating the engine
switch, depress the brake pedal,
shift the shift lever to P and set
the parking brake.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
4-3.Operating the lights and wipers
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
Operating the
switch turns
on the lights as follows:
219
time running lights (P.219)
and all the lights listed above
turn on and off automatically.
4
(if equipped) Off
■ AUTO mode can be used when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ Daytime running light system
● On some models: The daytime
*
: When the surroundings are bright
● The daytime running lights remain
U.S.A.
Canada
1
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, and
daytime running lights
(P.219) turn on.
2
■ Headlight control sensor
The headlights and all
lights listed above (except
daytime running lights) turn
on.
3
on after they illuminate, even if the
parking brake is set again.
● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running
lights can be turned off by operating the switch.
The headlights, day-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the
sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light
4
Driving
running lights illuminate using the
same lights as the headlights but
at a lower intensity.
● To make your vehicle more visible
to other drivers during daytime
driving, the daytime running lights
turn on automatically when all of
the following conditions are met.
(The daytime running lights are
not designed for use at night.)
• The engine is running
• The parking brake is released
• The headlight switch is in the
*
position
or
220
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.
■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights are on: The
headlights and tail lights turn off
30 seconds after the driver’s door
is opened and closed if the engine
switch is turned to ACC or off.
(The lights turn off immediately if
on the key is pressed after all
the doors are closed.)
● When only the tail lights are on:
The tail lights turn off automatically if the engine switch is turned
to ACC or OFF and the driver’s
door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the
engine switch to ON, or turn the light
switch off once and then back to
or
.
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the engine
switch is turned to ACC or OFF and
the driver’s door is opened while the
lights are turned on.
■ When unlock the doors (wel-
come lamp) (If equipped)
When the doors are unlocked using
the entry function or wireless remote
control, the front parking lights and
tail lights turn on automatically.
When the light switch is in the AUTO
position and the surrounding area is
dark, this function will operate.
■ Automatic headlight leveling
system (if equipped)
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the
number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to
ensure that the headlights do not
interfere with other road users.
■ Windshield wiper linked head-
light illumination
When driving during daytime with
the headlight switch turned to
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
, if the windshield wipers are
used, the headlights will turn on
automatically after several seconds
to help enhance the visibility of your
vehicle.
■ Battery-saving function
In order to prevent the battery of the
vehicle from discharging, if the
headlights and/or tail lights are on
when the engine switch is turned to
OFF the battery saving function will
operate and automatically turn off all
the lights after approximately 20
minutes. When the engine switch is
turned to ON, the battery-saving
function will be disabled.
When any of the following are performed, the battery-saving function
is canceled once and then reactivated. All the lights will turn off automatically 20 minutes after the
battery-saving function has been
reactivated:
● When the headlight switch is operated
● When a door is opened or closed
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.578)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer
than necessary when the engine
is not running.
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
221
Turning on the high beam
headlights
1 With the headlights on, push
the lever away from you to
turn on the high beams.
2 Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams with
the headlights on or off.
Manual headlight leveling
dial (if equipped)
The vehicle is equipped with
manual leveling of the headlamps. The aim of the headlamps can be adjusted by
adjusting the dial settings based
on your vehicle loading condition.
It is recommended that the
headlamps remain adjusted as
close to “0” position so not to
interfere with other road users.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
1 Raises the level of the headlights
2 Lowers the level of the headlights
222
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Fog light switch*
*
: If equipped
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in
rain and fog.
Operating instructions
AHB (Automatic High
Beam)*
*: If equipped
The Automatic High Beam
uses an in-vehicle front
camera to assess the brightness of streetlights, the
lights of vehicles ahead etc.,
and automatically turns the
high beam on or off as necessary.
WARNING
■ Limitations of the Automatic
High Beam
Do not overly rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive
safely, taking care to observe your
surroundings and turning the high
beams on or off manually if necessary.
■ To prevent incorrect opera*1 or
1
*2 Turns the
front fog lights off
2
Turns the front fog lights
on
*1
: U.S.A.
*2
: Canada
■ Fog lights can be used when
The parking lights are on or the
headlights are on in low beam.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
tion of the Automatic High
Beam system
Do not overload the vehicle.
Activating the Automatic
High Beam
1 Press the Automatic High
Beam switch.
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2 Turn the headlight switch to
the
or
position.
When the headlight switch lever is
in the low beam position, the AHB
system will be enabled and the
AHB indicator will illuminate.
■ High beam automatic turning
■ Front camera detection infor-
mation
● The high beam may not be automatically turned off in the following
situations:
• When oncoming vehicles sud-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
denly appear from a curve
• When the vehicle is cut in front of
by another vehicle
• When vehicles ahead are hidden
from sight due to repeated curves,
road dividers or roadside trees
• When vehicles ahead appear from
the faraway lane on a wide road
• When vehicles ahead have no
lights
● The high beam may be turned off
if a vehicle ahead that is using fog
lights without using the headlights
is detected.
● House lights, street lights, traffic
signals, and illuminated billboards
or signs may cause the high beam
to switch to the low beams, or the
low beams to remain on.
● The following factors may affect
the amount of time taken to turn
the high beam on or off:
• The brightness of headlights, fog
lights, and tail lights of vehicles
ahead
• The movement and direction of
vehicles ahead
• When a vehicle ahead only has
operational lights on one side
• When a vehicle ahead is a twowheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road
surface etc.)
• The number of passengers and
amount of luggage
● The high beam may be turned on
or off when the driver does not
expect it.
● Bicycles or similar objects may not
be detected.
● In the situations shown below, the
system may not be able to accurately detect surrounding brightness levels. This may cause the
low beams to remain on or the
high beams to cause problems for
pedestrians, vehicles ahead or
other parties. In these cases,
manually switch between the high
and low beams.
• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog,
4
Driving
on or off conditions
● When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam
will be automatically turned on
(after approximately 1 second):
• Vehicle speed is above approximately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more.
• The area ahead of the vehicle is
dark.
• There are no vehicles ahead with
headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are few streetlights on the
road ahead.
● If any of the following conditions
are fulfilled, the high beam will be
automatically turned off:
• Vehicle speed drops below
approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is
not dark.
• Vehicles ahead have headlights or
tail lights turned on.
• There are many streetlights on the
road ahead.
223
224
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
sandstorms, etc.)
• The windshield is obscured by
fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.
• The windshield is cracked or damaged
• The front camera is deformed or
dirty
• When the temperature of the front
camera is extremely high
• Surrounding brightness levels are
equal to those of headlights, tail
lights or fog lights
• When headlights or tail lights of
vehicles ahead are turned off,
dirty, changing color, or not aimed
properly
• When the vehicle is hit by water,
snow, dust, etc. from a preceding
vehicle
• When driving through an area of
intermittently changing brightness
and darkness
• When frequently and repeatedly
driving ascending/descending
roads, or roads with rough, bumpy
or uneven surfaces (such as
stone-paved roads, gravel roads,
etc.)
• When frequently and repeatedly
taking curves or driving on a winding road
• There is a highly reflective object
ahead of the vehicle, such as a
sign or mirror
• The back of a vehicle ahead is
highly reflective, such as a container on a truck
• The vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed
properly
• The vehicle is listing or titling due
to a flat tire, a trailer being towed,
etc.
• The high beam and low beam are
repeatedly being switched
between in an abnormal manner
• The driver believes that the high
beam may be causing problems
or distress to other drivers or
pedestrians nearby
■ Temporarily lowering sensor
sensitivity
The sensitivity of the sensor can be
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
temporarily lowered.
1 Turn the engine switch off while
the following conditions are met.
● The headlight switch is in
or
.
● The headlight switch lever is in
low beam position.
● Automatic High Beam switch is
on.
2 Turn the engine switch to ON.
3 Within 60 seconds after step 2,
repeat pushing the headlight
switch lever to the high beam
position then pulling it to the original position quickly 10 times,
then leave the lever in the original position.
4 If the sensitivity is changed, the
AHB indicator is turn on and off 3
times.
Automatic High Beam (headlights)
may turn on even when the vehicle
is stopped.
Turning the high beams
on/off manually
■ Switching to the high
beams
Push the lever away from you.
The AHB indicator will turn off and
the high beam indicator will turn on.
Pull the lever to its original position
to activate the Automatic High
Beam system.
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ Switching to the low beams
Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The AHB indicator will turn off.
Press the switch to activate the
Automatic High Beam system
again.
225
■ Temporarily switching to the
low beams
It is recommended to switch to the
low beams when the high beam
may cause problems or distress to
other drivers or pedestrians nearby.
4
Driving
■ Temporarily switching to
the low beams
Pull the lever toward you and
then return it to its original position.
The high beams are on while
the lever is pulled toward you.
However, after the lever is
returned to its original position,
the low beams remain on for a
certain period of time. Afterwards, the Automatic High
Beam system will be activated
again.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
226
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and
washer
Operating the lever can
switch between automatic
operation and manual operation, or can use the
washer.
Off
2
Operating the wiper lever
Operate the
*1 or
*2
Low speed wiper operation
*1 or
4
*2
High speed wiper operation
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they
may damage the windshield.
*2
or
Intermittent operation
3
5
NOTICE
*1
*1
*2
or
Temporary operation
Wiper intervals can be adjusted
when intermittent operation is
selected.
lever operates
the wipers or washer as follows:
 Intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster
When intermittent windshield
wiper operation is selected, the
wiper interval can be also
adjusted.
6 Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
7 Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
8
1
*1 or
*2
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Washer/wiper dual operation
Pulling the lever operates the wip-
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
ers and washer.
(After operating several times, the
wipers operate once more time
after a short delay to prevent dripping. However, the dripping prevention does not operate while the
vehicle is moving.)
*1
adjusts wiper timing in accordance
with rain volume and vehicle speed.
3
*1
*2
or
Low speed wiper operation
*1 or
4
*1 or
5
When
When
is selected, the
is selected, the
sensor sensitivity can be
adjusted by turning the switch
ring.
4
Driving
wipers will operate automatically
when the sensor detects falling
rain. The system automatically
adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and
vehicle speed.
*2
Temporary operation
 Rain-sensing windshield wip-
ers
*2
High speed wiper operation
: U.S.A.
*2: Canada
227
6 Increases the sensitivity
7 Decreases the sensitivity
*1
1
or
*2
Off
2
Rain-sensing wiper
operation
The wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
8
Washer/wiper dual operation
Pulling the lever operates the wipers and washer.
(After operating several times, the
228
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
wipers operate once more time
after a short delay to prevent dripping. However, the dripping prevention does not operate while the
vehicle is moving.)
*1
: U.S.A.
*2: Canada
■ The windshield wiper and
washer can be operated when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ Effects of vehicle speed on
wiper operation (vehicles with
rain-sensing windshield wipers)
Even when the wipers are not in
AUTO mode, vehicle speed affects
the time until the drip prevention
wiper sweep occurs.
With low speed windshield wiper
operation selected, wiper operation
will be switched from low speed to
intermittent wiper operation only
when the vehicle is stationary.
(However, when the sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the highest level,
the mode cannot be switched.)
mode while the engine switch is in
ON, the wipers will operate once
to show that AUTO mode is activated.
● If the temperature of the raindrop
sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher,
or 5°F (-15°C) or lower, automatic
operation may not occur. In this
case, operate the wipers in any
mode other than AUTO mode.
■ If no windshield washer fluid
sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are
not blocked if there is washer fluid in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
WARNING
■ Caution regarding the use of
■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles with
windshield wipers in AUTO
mode (vehicles with rainsensing windshield wipers)
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is
touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode.
Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught
in the windshield wipers.
● The raindrop sensor judges the
■ Caution regarding the use of
rain-sensing windshield wipers)
amount of raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It
may not operate properly when
sunlight from the rising or setting
of the sun intermittently strikes the
windshield, or if bugs, etc., are
present on the windshield.
washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the
washer fluid until the windshield
becomes warm. The fluid may
freeze on the windshield and
cause low visibility. This may lead
to an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When there is no washer fluid
spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump
may be caused if the lever is
pulled toward you and held continually.
● If the wiper is turned to AUTO
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
229
NOTICE
■ When a nozzle becomes
blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or
other object. The nozzle will be
damaged.
4
Driving
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
230
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap
4-4.Refueling
Perform the following steps
to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
 Turn the engine switch off and
ensure that all the doors and
windows are closed.
 Confirm the type of fuel.
■ Fuel types
P.559
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded
gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling,
your vehicle has a fuel tank opening
that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
WARNING
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions
while refueling the vehicle. Failure
to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and
before opening the fuel door,
touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static
electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before
refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can
cause fuel vapors to ignite while
refueling.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Always hold the grips on the
fuel tank cap and turn it slowly
to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be
heard when the fuel tank cap is
loosened. Wait until the sound
cannot be heard before fully
removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may
spray out of the filler neck and
cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has
not discharged static electricity
from their body to come close to
an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that
are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling
the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to
ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or
touch any person or object that
is statically charged. This may
cause static electricity to build
up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■ When refueling
Observe the following precautions
to prevent fuel overflowing from
the fuel tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle
into the fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the fuel tank.
4-4. Refueling
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission
control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system
components or the vehicle’s
painted surface.
231
Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
Opening the fuel tank cap
1 Open the fuel filler door.
■ When “Check Fuel Cap” is dis-
2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open it and put it into the
holder on the fuel filler door.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
WARNING
■ When replacing the fuel tank
cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed
for your vehicle. Doing so may
cause a fire or other incident
which may result in death or serious injury.
Driving
played on the multi-information
display
The fuel tank cap may be unfastened or loose. Turn the engine
switch to OFF, check the cap and
tighten it securely. If the message
remains, wait a few seconds and
then turn the engine switch to OFF
once again.
4
232
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Toyota Safety Sense
2.5*
4-5.Using the driving support systems
*: If equipped
The Toyota Safety Sense 2.5
consists of the following
drive assist systems and
contributes to a safe and
comfortable driving experience:
Driving assist system
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)
P.237
■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
P.248
■ AHB (Automatic High
Beam)
P.222
■ RSA (Road Sign Assist)*
WARNING
■ Toyota Safety Sense 2.5
The Toyota Safety Sense 2.5 is
designed to operate under the
assumption that the driver will
drive safely, and is designed to
help reduce the impact to the
occupants and the vehicle in the
case of a collision or assist the
driver in normal driving conditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of
recognition accuracy and control
performance that this system can
provide, do not overly rely on this
system. The driver is always
responsible for paying attention to
the vehicle’s surroundings and
driving safely.
Sensors
Two types of sensors, located
behind the front grille and windshield, detect information necessary to operate the drive assist
systems.
P.259
*
: If equipped
■ Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range
P.262
Radar sensor
Front camera
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the
radar sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may
not operate properly, possibly
leading to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Keep the radar sensor and the
radar sensor cover clean at all
times.
233
● Do not disassemble the radar
sensor.
● Do not modify or paint the radar
sensor or radar sensor cover.
● In the following cases, the radar
sensor must be recalibrated.
Contact your Toyota dealer for
details.
• When the radar sensor or front
grille are removed and installed,
or replaced
• When the front bumper is
replaced
■ To avoid malfunction of the
Radar sensor cover
● Keep the windshield clean at all
If the front of the radar sensor or
the front or back of the radar sensor cover is dirty or covered with
water droplets, snow, etc., clean
it.
Clean the radar sensor and radar
sensor cover with a soft cloth to
avoid damaging them.
● Do not attach accessories,
stickers (including transparent
stickers) or other items to the
radar sensor, radar sensor
cover or surrounding area.
● Do not subject the radar sensor
or its surrounding area to a
strong impact.
If the radar sensor, front grille,
or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact, have
the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
times.
• If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water
droplets, snow, etc., clean the
windshield.
• If a glass coating agent is
applied to the windshield, it will
still be necessary to use the
windshield wipers to remove
water droplets, etc., from the
area of the windshield in front of
the front camera.
• If the inner side of the windshield where the front camera is
installed is dirty, contact your
Toyota dealer.
4
Driving
Radar sensor
front camera
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the front camera may
not operate properly, possibly
leading to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
234
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Do not attach objects, such as
stickers, transparent stickers,
etc., to the outer side of the
windshield in front of the front
camera (shaded area in the
illustration).
● Do not allow liquids to contact
the front camera.
● Do not allow bright lights to
shine into the front camera.
● Do not dirty or damage the front
camera.
When cleaning the inside of the
windshield, do not allow glass
cleaner to contact the lens of
the front camera. Also, do not
touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged,
contact your Toyota dealer.
● Do not subject the front camera
to a strong impact.
From the top of the windshield
to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm)
below the bottom of the front
camera
Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm)
(Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm]
to the right and left from the
center of the front camera)
● If the part of the windshield in
front of the front camera is
fogged up or covered with condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the
fog, condensation or ice.
(P.418)
● If water droplets cannot be
properly removed from the area
of the windshield in front of the
front camera by the windshield
wipers, replace the wiper insert
or wiper blade.
● Do not attach window tint to the
windshield.
● Replace the windshield if it is
damaged or cracked.
After replacing the windshield,
the front camera must be recalibrated. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Do not change the installation
position or direction of the front
camera or remove it.
● Do not disassemble the front
camera.
● Do not modify any components
of the vehicle around the front
camera (inside rear view mirror,
etc.) or ceiling.
● Do not attach any accessories
to the hood, front grille or front
bumper that may obstruct the
front camera. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.
● If a surfboard or other long
object is to be mounted on the
roof, make sure that it will not
obstruct the front camera.
● Do not modify the headlights or
other lights.
■ Certification
P.632
4-5. Using the driving support systems
235
■ If a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display
A system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in
the system.
● In the following situations, perform the actions specified in the table. When
the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear
and the system will become operational.
If the message does not disappear, contact your Toyota dealer.
Situation
Actions
When the area around a camera is
covered with dirt, moisture (fogged
up, covered with condensation, ice,
etc.), or other foreign matter
Using the wiper and A/C function,
remove the dirt and other attached
matter. (P.418)
If the front camera is hot, such as
after the vehicle had been parked in
the sun, use the air conditioning system to decrease the temperature
around the front camera.
If the front camera is cold, such after
the vehicle is parked in an extremely
cold environment, use the air conditioning system to increase the temperature around the front camera.
The area in front of the front camera
is obstructed, such as when the
Close the hood, remove the sticker,
hood is open or a sticker is attached
etc., to clear the obstruction.
to the part of the windshield in front
of the front camera.
When “Pre-Collision System Radar
In Self Calibration Unavailable See
Owner’s Manual” is displayed.
Check whether there is attached
materials on the radar sensor and
radar sensor cover, and if there is,
remove it.
● In the following situations, if the situation has changed (or the vehicle has
been driven for some time) and the normal operating conditions are
detected, the message will disappear and the system will become operational.
If the message does not disappear, contact your Toyota dealer.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
If a sunshade was used when the
When the temperature around the
vehicle was parked, depending on its
front camera is outside of the operatype, the sunlight reflected from the
tional range, such as when the vehisurface of the sunshade may cause
cle is in the sun or in an extremely
the temperature of the front camera
cold environment
to become excessively high.
4
236
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• When the temperature around the radar sensor is outside of the operational range, such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold
environment
• When the front camera cannot detect objects in front of the vehicle, such
as when driving in the dark, snow, or fog, or when bright lights are shining
into the front camera
• Depending on the conditions in the vicinity of the vehicle, the radar may
judge the surrounding environment can not be properly recognized. In that
case, “Pre-Collision System Unavailable See Owner’s Manual” is displayed.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
PCS (Pre-Collision System)*
*: If equipped
The pre-collision system can
be disabled/enabled and the
warning timing can be
changed. (P.241)
Detectable objects
The system can detect the following (The detectable objects
differs depending on the function.):
 Vehicles
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
 Bicyclists
 Pedestrians
System functions
■ Pre-collision warning
When the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal
collision is high, a buzzer will
sound and a warning message
will be displayed on the multiinformation display to urge the
driver to take evasive action.
4
Driving
The pre-collision system
uses a radar sensor and
front camera to detect
objects (P.237) in front of
the vehicle. When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision with an object is high, a
warning operates to urge
the driver to take evasive
action and the potential
brake pressure is increased
to help the driver avoid the
collision. If the system
determines that the possibility of a frontal collision
with an object is extremely
high, the brakes are automatically applied to help
avoid the collision or help
reduce the impact of the collision.
237
“BRAKE!”
■ Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal
collision is high, the system
applies greater braking force in
relation to how strongly the
brake pedal is depressed.
■ Pre-collision braking
If the system determines that
the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, the
brakes are automatically applied
to help avoid the collision or
reduce the impact of the collision.
238
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Emergency steering assist
If the system determines that
the possibility of a collision with
a pedestrian is high and that
there is sufficient space for the
vehicle to be steered into within
its lane, and the driver has
begun evasive maneuver or
steering, emergency steering
assist will assist the steering
movements to help enhance the
vehicle stability and for lane
departure prevention. During
operation, the indicator will illuminate in green.
■ Intersection right/left turn
assistance
If the system determines that
there is a high possibility of a
collision in the following situations, it will assist with Pre-collision warning and, if necessary
Pre-collision braking.
Depending on the configuration
of the intersection, it may not be
possible to support.
 When you turn right/left at an
intersection and cross the
path of an oncoming vehicle
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
 When you turn right/left,
pedestrian is detected in the
forward direction and estimated to enter your vehicle’s
path (bicyclists are not
detected.)
■ Suspension control (vehi-
cles with Adaptive Variable
Suspension System)
When the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal
collision is high, the Adaptive
Variable Suspension System
(P.393) will control the damping force of the shock absorbers
to help maintain an appropriate
vehicle posture.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Limitations of the pre-colli-
sion system
● The driver is solely responsible
for safe driving. Always drive
safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking
operations under any circumstances. This system will not
prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or injury in every
situation. Do not overly rely on
this system. Failure to do so
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Although this system is
• Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is
no possibility of a collision:
P.244
• Conditions under which the system may not operate properly:
P.246
● Do not attempt to test the oper-
ation of the pre-collision system
yourself.
Depending on the objects used
for testing (dummies, cardboard objects imitating detectable objects, etc.), the system
may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Pre-collision braking
● When the pre-collision braking
function is operating, a large
amount of braking force will be
applied.
● If the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of the pre-collision
braking function, the pre-collision braking function operation
will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds. Depress the
brake pedal as necessary.
● The pre-collision braking func-
tion may not operate if certain
operations are performed by the
driver. If the accelerator pedal is
being depressed strongly or the
steering wheel is being turned,
the system may determine that
the driver is taking evasive
action and possibly prevent the
pre-collision braking function
from operating.
● In some situations, while the
pre-collision braking function is
operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the
accelerator pedal is depressed
strongly or the steering wheel is
turned and the system determines that the driver is taking
evasive action.
● If the brake pedal is being
depressed, the system may
determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly
delay the operation timing of the
pre-collision braking function.
■ Emergency steering assist
● As emergency steering assist
operation will be canceled when
the system determines that lane
departure prevention function
has been completed.
4
Driving
designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact
of the collision, its effectiveness
may change according to various conditions, therefore the
system may not always be able
to achieve the same level of
performance.
Read the following conditions
carefully. Do not overly rely on
this system and always drive
carefully.
239
240
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Emergency steering assist may
not operate or may be cancel in
the following cases as the system may determine the driver is
taking actions.
• If the accelerator pedal is being
depressed strongly, the steering
wheel is being operated sharply,
the brake pedal is being
depressed or the turn signal
lever is being operated. In this
case, the system may determine that the driver is taking
evasive action and the emergency steering assist may not
operate.
• The emergency steering assist
will be disabled automatically
when the system judges that a
trailer is connected.
• In some situations, while the
emergency steering assist is
operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the
accelerator pedal is depressed
strongly, the steering wheel is
operated sharply or the brake
pedal is being depressed and
the system determines that the
driver is taking evasive action.
• When the emergency steering
assist is operating, if the steering wheel is held firmly or is
operated in the opposite direction to that which the system is
generating torque, the function
may be canceled.
■ When to disable the pre-colli-
sion system
In the following situations, disable
the system, as it may not operate
properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● When the vehicle is being towed
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● When your vehicles is towing a
trailer or another vehicle, except
when the following conditions
are all met
• When the other vehicle is a
trailer properly attached and
connected to Toyota’s official
TBC ECU. (P.188)
• When the vehicle is not being
driven on a slippery surface
such as an icy road or a very
wet road.
● When transporting the vehicle
via truck, boat, train or similar
means of transportation
● When the vehicle is raised on a
lift with the engine running and
the tires are allowed to rotate
freely
● When inspecting the vehicle
using a drum tester such as a
chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or when using an
on vehicle wheel balancer
● When a strong impact is applied
to the front bumper or front
grille, due to an accident or
other reasons
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in
a stable manner, such as when
the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning
● When the vehicle is driven in a
sporty manner or off-road
● When the tires are not properly
inflated
● When the tires are very worn
● When tires of a size other than
specified are installed
● When tire chains are installed
● When a compact spare tire or
an emergency tire puncture
repair kit is used
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● If equipment (snow plow, etc.)
that may obstruct the radar sensor or front camera is temporarily installed to the vehicle
241
■ Changing the pre-collision
warning timing
The pre-collision warning timing
can be changed on
● When the vehicle is lifted up,
(P.585) of the multi-information display.
• When using a Toyota official lift
kit up to 4 in. (101 mm), including tire height. Aftermarket lift
kits may degrade system performance.
The warning timing setting is
retained when the engine switch is
turned off. However, if the pre-collision system is disabled and reenabled, the operation timing will
return to the default setting (middle).
except in the following cases
Changing settings of the
pre-collision system
■ Enabling/disabling the pre-
collision system
enabled/disabled on
(P.585) of the multi-information display.
If late is selected, emergency
steering assist would not operate in case of an emergency.
The system is automatically
enabled each time the engine
switch is turned to ON.
If the system is disabled, the
PCS warning light will turn on
and a message will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
1 Early
2 Middle
This is the default setting.
3 Late
“Pre-Collision System OFF”
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
The pre-collision system can be
If the pre-collision warning timing is changed, emergency
steering assist timing will also
be changed accordingly.
242
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Operational conditions for each pre-collision function
The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a detected object is high.
The system may not operate in the following situations:
• If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the
vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
• If the shift lever is in R
• When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning
function will be operational)
The operation speeds and operation cancelation for each function is listed
below.
● Pre-collision warning
Vehicle speed
Relative speed between
your vehicle and object
Approx. 7 to 110 mph
(10 to 180 km/h)
Approx. 7 to 110 mph
(10 to 180 km/h)
Detectable objects
Vehicles
Bicyclists and pedestri- Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10
ans
to 80 km/h)
to 80 km/h)
While the pre-collision warning function is operating, if the steering wheel is
operated heavily or suddenly, the pre-collision warning may be canceled.
● Pre-collision brake assist
Vehicle speed
Relative speed between
your vehicle and object
Approx. 20 to 110 mph
(30 to 180 km/h)
Approx. 20 to 110 mph
(30 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestri- Approx. 20 to 50 mph
ans
(30 to 80 km/h)
Approx. 20 to 50 mph
(30 to 80 km/h)
Detectable objects
Vehicles
● Pre-collision braking
Vehicle speed
Relative speed between
your vehicle and object
Approx. 7 to 110 mph
(10 to 180 km/h)
Approx. 7 to 110 mph
(10 to 180 km/h)
Detectable objects
Vehicles
Bicyclists and pedestri- Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10
ans
to 80 km/h)
to 80 km/h)
If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled:
• The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
243
• The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.
● Emergency steering assist
When the turn signal lights are flashing, emergency steering assist will not
operate in case of an emergency.
The emergency steering assist will be disabled automatically when the system judges that a trailer is connected.
Detectable objects
Vehicle speed
Relative speed between
your vehicle and object
Pedestrians
Approx. 31 to 50 mph
(50 to 80 km/h)
Approx. 31 to 50 mph
(50 to 80 km/h)
When the system judges that a trailer is detected, intersection support is disabled for vehicles and pedestrians.
Detectable
objects
Vehicles
Vehicle speed
Oncoming vehicle
speed
Relative speed
between your vehicle and object
Approx. 7 to 15 mph Approx. 20 to 35
Approx. 25 to 50
(10 to 25 km/h)
mph (30 to 55 km/h) mph (40 to 80 km/h)
Pedestri- Approx. 7 to 15 mph
ans
(10 to 25 km/h)
-
Approx. 7 to 15 mph
(10 to 25 km/h)
● Intersection right/left turn assistance (pre-collision braking)
When the turn signal lights are not flashing, support for turning left or right at
an intersection which targets oncoming vehicles does not work.
When the system judges that a trailer is detected, intersection support is disabled for vehicles and pedestrians.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
If any of the following occur while the emergency steering assist function is
operating, it will be canceled:
• The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
• The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.
• The brake pedal is depressed.
● Intersection right/left turn assistance (pre-collision warning)
When the turn signal lights are not flashing, support for turning left or right at
an intersection which targets oncoming vehicles does not work.
244
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Detectable
objects
Vehicles
Vehicle speed
Oncoming vehicle
speed
Relative speed
between your vehicle and object
Approx. 10 to 15
Approx. 20 to 28
Approx. 28 to 43
mph (15 to 25 km/h) mph (30 to 45 km/h) mph (45 to 70 km/h)
Pedestri- Approx. 7 to 15 mph
ans
(10 to 25 km/h)
-
Approx. 7 to 15 mph
(10 to 25 km/h)
■ Object detection function
The system detects objects based
on their size, profile, motion, etc.
However, an object may not be
detected depending on the surrounding brightness and the motion,
posture, and angle of the detected
object, preventing the system from
operating properly. (P.246)
The illustration shows an image of
detectable objects.
• When rapidly closing on a detectable object, etc.
• When approaching objects on the
roadside, such as detectable
objects, guardrails, utility poles,
trees, or walls
• When there is a detectable object
or other object by the roadside at
the entrance of a curve
■ Conditions under which the
system may operate even if
there is no possibility of a collision
● In some situations such as the following, the system may determine
that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.
• When passing a detectable object,
etc.
• When changing lanes while overtaking a detectable object, etc.
• When approaching a detectable
object in an adjacent lane or on
the roadside, such as when
changing the course of travel or
driving on a winding road
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
• When there are patterns or paint
in front of your vehicle that may be
mistaken for a detectable object
• When the front of your vehicle is
hit by water, snow, dust, etc.
• When overtaking a detectable
object that is changing lanes or
making a right/left turn
4-5. Using the driving support systems
245
objects that may contact your
vehicle, such as thick grass, tree
branches, or a banner
• When passing a detectable object
in an oncoming lane that is
stopped to make a right/left turn
• When approaching an electric toll
gate barrier, parking area barrier,
or other barrier that opens and
closes
• When using an automatic car
wash
• When driving through or under
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
• While steering into the direction of
4
Driving
• When a detectable object
approaches very close and then
stops before entering the path of
your vehicle
• If the front of your vehicle is raised
or lowered, such as when on an
uneven or undulating road surface
• When driving on a road surrounded by a structure, such as in
a tunnel or on an iron bridge
• When there is a metal object
(manhole cover, steel plate, etc.),
steps, or a protrusion in front of
your vehicle
• When passing under an object
(road sign, billboard, etc.)
• When driving through steam or
smoke
• When driving near an object that
reflects radio waves, such as a
large truck or guardrail
• When driving near a TV tower,
broadcasting station, electric
power plant, radar equipped vehicles, etc., or other location where
strong radio waves or electrical
noise may be present
• When there are many things
which can reflect the radio waves
of the radar in the vicinity (tunnels,
truss bridges, gravel roads, snow
covered road that have tracks,
etc.)
• While making a right/left turn,
when an oncoming vehicle or a
crossing pedestrian has already
exited the path of your vehicle
• While making a right/left turn,
closely in front of an oncoming
vehicle or a crossing pedestrian.
• While making a right/left turn,
when an oncoming vehicle or a
crossing pedestrian stops before
entering the path of your vehicle
• While making a right/left turn,
when an oncoming vehicle turns
right/left in front of your vehicle
246
4-5. Using the driving support systems
oncoming traffic
• When the vehicle is lifted up using
an aftermarket lift kit
• When the vehicle is lifted up more
than 4 in. (101 mm)
■ Situations in which the system
may not operate properly
● In some situations such as the fol-
lowing, an object may not be
detected by the radar sensor and
front camera, preventing the system from operating properly:
• When a detectable object is
approaching your vehicle
• When your vehicle or a detectable
object is wobbling
• If a detectable object makes an
abrupt maneuver (such as sudden
swerving, acceleration or deceleration)
• When your vehicle approaches a
detectable object rapidly
• When a detectable object is not
directly in front of your vehicle
• When a detectable object is near
a wall, fence, guardrail, manhole
cover, vehicle, steel plate on the
road, etc.
• When a detectable object is under
a structure
• When part of a detectable object
is hidden by an object, such as
large baggage, an umbrella, or
guardrail
• When there are many things
which can reflect the radio waves
of the radar in the vicinity (tunnels,
truss bridges, gravel roads, snow
covered road that have tracks,
etc.)
• When there is an effect on the
radio waves to the radar that is
installed on another vehicle
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
• When multiple detectable objects
are close together
• If the sun or other light is shining
directly on a detectable object
• When a detectable object is a
shade of white and looks
extremely bright
• When a detectable object appears
to be nearly the same color or
brightness as its surroundings
• If a detectable object cuts or suddenly emerges in front of your
vehicle
• When the front of your vehicle is
hit by water, snow, dust, etc.
• When a very bright light ahead,
such as the sun or the headlights
of oncoming traffic, shines directly
into the front camera
• When approaching the side or
front of a vehicle ahead
• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle
• If a vehicle ahead is narrow, such
as a personal mobility vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small
rear end, such as an unloaded
truck
• If a preceding vehicle has a low
rear end, such as a low bed trailer
• If a vehicle ahead has extremely
high ground clearance
• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a
load which protrudes past its rear
bumper
• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
• If the wheels are misaligned
• If a wiper blade is blocking the
front camera
• The vehicle is being driven at
extremely high speeds
• When driving on a hill
• If the radar sensor or front camera
is misaligned
• When driving in a traffic lane separated by more than one lane
where oncoming vehicles are driving while making a right/left turn
• When largely out of place with the
opposite facing targeted oncoming vehicle during a right/left turn
• While making a right/left turn,
when a pedestrian approaches
from behind or side of your vehicle
• When the vehicle is lifted up using
an aftermarket lift kit
• When the vehicle is lifted up more
than 4 in. (101 mm)
● In addition to the above, in some
situations, such as the following,
the emergency steering assist
4
Driving
shaped, such as a tractor or side
car
• If a vehicle ahead is a child sized
bicycle, a bicycle that is carrying a
large load, a bicycle ridden by
more than one person, or a
uniquely shaped bicycle (bicycle
with a child seat, tandem bicycle,
etc.)
• If a pedestrian/or the riding height
of a bicyclist ahead is shorter than
approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller
than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)
• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is wearing
oversized clothing (a rain coat,
long skirt, etc.), making their silhouette obscure
• If a pedestrian is bending forward
or squatting or bicyclist is bending
forward
• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is moving
fast
• If a pedestrian is pushing a
stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or
other vehicle
• When driving in inclement weather
such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a
sandstorm
• When driving through steam or
smoke
• When the surrounding area is dim,
such as at dawn or dusk, or while
at night or in a tunnel, making a
detectable object appear to be
nearly the same color as its surroundings
• When driving in a place where the
surrounding brightness changes
suddenly, such as at the entrance
or exit of a tunnel
• After the engine has started the
vehicle has not been driven for a
certain amount of time
• While making a left/right turn and
for a few seconds after making a
left/right turn
• While driving on a curve and for a
few seconds after driving on a
curve
• If your vehicle is skidding
• If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered
247
248
4-5. Using the driving support systems
may not operate.
• When the white (yellow) lane lines
are difficult to see, such as when
they are faint, diverging/merging,
or a shadow is cast upon them
• When the lane is wider or narrower than normal
• When there is a light and dark pattern on the road surface, such as
due to road repairs
• When a pedestrian is detected
near the centerline of the vehicle
• When the target is too close
• When there is insufficient safe or
unobstructed space for the vehicle
to be steered into
• If oncoming vehicle is present
• If VSC function is operating
● In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force or
steering force may not be
obtained, preventing the system
from performing properly:
• If the braking functions cannot
operate to their full extent, such as
when the brake parts are
extremely cold, extremely hot, or
wet
• If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn, improper tire inflation
pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven
on a gravel road or other slippery
surface
• When the road surface has deep
wheel tracks
• When driving on a hill road
• When driving on a road that has
inclines to the left or right
• When your vehicles is towing a
trailer or another vehicle
• When your vehicle is lifted up
■ If VSC is disabled
● If VSC is disabled (P.394), the
pre-collision brake assist and precollision braking functions are also
disabled.
● The PCS warning light will turn on
and “VSC Turned OFF Pre-Collision Brake System Unavailable”
will be displayed on the multiinformation display.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
LTA (Lane Tracing
Assist)*
*: If equipped
Summary of functions
While driving on a road with
clear white (yellow) lane lines,
the LTA system warns the driver
if the vehicle may deviate from
the current lane*, and also can
slightly operate the steering
wheel to help avoid deviation
from the lane. Also, while the
dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range is operating, this system will operate the
steering wheel to maintain the
vehicle’s lane position.
The LTA system recognizes
white (yellow) lane lines* using
the front camera. Additionally, it
detects preceding vehicles
using the front camera and
radar.
*
: May recognize the boundaries
between the asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or
the curb, to be road lanes
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Before using LTA system
● Do not rely solely upon the LTA
system. The LTA system does
not automatically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of
attention that must be paid to
the area in front of the vehicle.
The driver must always assume
full responsibility for driving
safely by paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering
wheel to correct the path of the
vehicle. Also, the driver must
take adequate breaks when
fatigued, such as from driving
for a long period of time.
● Failure to perform appropriate
● When connecting a trailer which
can be connected with Toyota’s
official TBC ECU, the lane centering function will be disabled
automatically when LTA detects
a trailer connection. When other
trailer is connected, turn off the
lane centering function if a
trailer is connected and it is not
automatically disabled. After
trailer disconnect and engine
switch is turned off, lance centering function can be turned on.
● This vehicle has Automatic
Trailer Detection feature that
can detect certain trailers under
certain conditions. After trailer is
detected, lane centering function will be disabled. In certain
conditions, there is a possibility
of falsely detecting trailer when
there is no actual trailer. In that
case, lane centering function
will be disabled. To activate lane
centering function, turn engine
switch to off and then turn it on
again.
● Following scenes has possibility
of false detection of trailer:
Crowded environments such as
parking lots or camping
grounds, closely following vehicles such traffic jam, drive
through, parallel parking, etc.
● Do not use the lane centering
system and steering assist function when the vehicle is lifted
unless using a Toyota official lift
up kit up to 4 in. (101 mm),
including tire height. Aftermarket lift kits may degrade system
performance.
■ Situations unsuitable for LTA
system
In the following situations, use the
LTA switch to turn the system off.
Failure to do so may lead to an
accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Vehicle is driven on a road sur-
face which is slippery due to
rainy weather, fallen snow,
freezing, etc.
● Vehicle is driven on a snow-cov-
ered road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult
to see due to rain, snow, fog,
dust, etc.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to an
accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
249
250
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Vehicle is driven in a temporary
lane or restricted lane due to
construction work.
● Vehicle is driven in a construc-
tion zone.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc.,
are equipped.
● When the tires have been
excessively worn, or when the
tire inflation pressure is low.
● When your vehicles is towing a
trailer or another vehicle, except
when the following condition is
met.
■ Conditions in which functions
may not operate properly
In the following situations, the
functions may not operate properly and the vehicle may depart
from its lane. Drive safely by
always paying careful attention to
your surroundings and operate
the steering wheel to correct the
path of the vehicle without relying
solely on the functions.
● When the follow-up cruising dis-
play is displayed (P.255) and
the preceding vehicle changes
lanes. (Your vehicle may follow
the preceding vehicle and also
change lanes.)
• When the other vehicle is a
trailer properly attached and
connected to Toyota’s official
TBC ECU. (P.188)
● When the vehicle is lifted up,
except in the following cases.
• When using a Toyota official lift
kit up to 4 in. (101 mm), including tire height. Aftermarket lift
kits may degrade system performance.
■ Preventing LTA system mal-
functions and operations performed by mistake
● Do not modify the headlights or
place stickers, etc., on the surface of the lights.
● Do not modify the suspension,
etc. If the suspension, etc.,
needs to be replaced, contact
your Toyota dealer.
● Do not install or place anything
on the hood or grille. Also, do
not install a grille guard (bull
bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
● If your windshield needs
repairs, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● When the follow-up cruising dis-
play is displayed (P.255) and
the preceding vehicle is swaying. (Your vehicle may sway
accordingly and depart from the
lane.)
● When the follow-up cruising dis-
play is displayed (P.255) and
the preceding vehicle departs
from its lane. (Your vehicle may
follow the preceding vehicle and
depart from the lane.)
● When the follow-up cruising dis-
play is displayed (P.255) and
the preceding vehicle is being
driven extremely close to the
left/right lane line. (Your vehicle
may follow the preceding vehicle and depart from the lane.)
● Vehicle is being driven around a
sharp curve.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Objects or patterns that could
be mistaken for white (yellow)
lines are present on the side of
the road (guardrails, reflective
poles, etc.).
251
● There are shadows on the road
that run parallel with, or cover,
the white (yellow) lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area
without white (yellow) lines,
such as in front of a tollgate or
checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are
cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised
pavement marker” or stones are
present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot
● Vehicle is driven where the road
diverges, merges, etc.
be seen or are difficult to see
due to sand, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road
surface that is wet due to rain,
puddles, etc.
(which may be more difficult to
recognize than lines that are
white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross
over a curb, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright
surface, such as concrete.
● The vehicle is driven on a sur-
face that is bright due to
reflected light, etc.
● Repair marks of asphalt, white
(yellow) lines, etc., are present
due to road repair.
● The vehicle is driven in an area
where the brightness changes
suddenly, such as at the
entrances and exits of tunnels,
etc.
● Light from the headlights of an
oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc.,
enters the camera.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road
which tilts left or right, or a winding road.
● The vehicle is driven on an
unpaved or rough road.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
● The traffic lines are yellow
4
252
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● The traffic lane is excessively
• When the other vehicle is a
trailer properly attached and
connected to Toyota’s official
TBC ECU. (P.188)
● The vehicle is extremely tilted
● When the vehicle is lifted up,
● The distance to the preceding
• When using a Toyota official lift
kit up to 4 in. (101 mm), including tire height. Aftermarket lift
kits may degrade system performance.
WARNING
narrow or wide.
due to carrying heavy luggage
or having improper tire pressure.
vehicle is extremely short.
● The vehicle is moving up and
except in the following cases.
down a large amount due to
road conditions during driving
(poor roads or road seams).
Functions included in LTA
system
● When driving in a tunnel or at
night with the headlights off or
when a headlight is dim due to
its lens being dirty or it being
misaligned.
● The vehicle is struck by a cross-
wind.
● The vehicle is affected by wind
from a vehicle driven in a
nearby lane.
● The vehicle has just changed
lanes or crossed an intersection.
● Tires which differ by structure,
manufacturer, brand or tread
pattern are used.
● When tires of a size other than
specified are installed.
● Snow tires, etc., are equipped.
● The vehicle is being driven at
extremely high speeds.
● When your vehicles is towing a
trailer or another vehicle, except
when the following condition is
met.
■ Lane departure alert func-
tion
When the system determines
that the vehicle might depart
from its lane*, a warning is displayed on the multi-information
display, and either a warning
buzzer will sound or the steering
wheel will vibrate to alert the
driver.
When the warning buzzer sounds
or the steering wheel vibrates,
check the area around your vehicle
and carefully operate the steering
wheel to move the vehicle back to
the center of the lane.
Vehicle with BSM: When the system determines that the vehicle
might depart from its lane and that
the possibility of a collision with an
overtaking vehicle in the adjacent
lane is high, the lane departure
alert will operate even if the turn
signals are operating.
*
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
: May recognize the boundaries
between the asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or
4-5. Using the driving support systems
253
the curb, to be road lanes
4
■ Steering assist function
When the system determines
that the vehicle might depart
from its lane, the system provides assistance as necessary
by operating the steering wheel
in small amounts for a short
period of time to keep the vehicle in its lane.
Vehicle with BSM: When the system determines that the vehicle
might depart from its lane and that
the possibility of a collision with an
overtaking vehicle in the adjacent
lane is high, the steering assist
function will operate even if the turn
signals are operating.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
tion
When the vehicle is swaying
within a lane, the warning
buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the
multi-information display to alert
the driver.
Driving
■ Vehicle sway warning func-
254
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Lane centering function
This function is linked with
dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range and provides the required assistance by
operating the steering wheel to
keep the vehicle in its current
lane.
When dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range is not operating, the lane centering function
does not operate.
In situations where the white (yellow) lane lines are difficult to see or
are not visible, such as when in a
traffic jam, this function will operate
to help follow a preceding vehicle
by monitoring the position of the
preceding vehicle.
Turning LTA system on
Press the LTA switch to turn the
LTA system on
The LTA indicator illuminates and a
message is displayed on the multiinformation display.
Press the LTA switch again to
turn the LTA system off.
When the LTA system is turned on
or off, operation of the LTA system
continues in the same condition the
next time the engine started.
“LTA Steering Assist Active
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lane Centering Active”
Indications on multi-information display
255
played: Indicates that steering
wheel assist of the steering assist
function is operating.
Both outer sides of the lane are
flashing: Alerts the driver that their
input is necessary to stay in the
center of the lane (lane centering
function).
Follow-up cruising display
LTA indicator
Operation display of steering
wheel operation support
Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving support system information
screen.
Indicates that steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function
or lane centering function is operating.
Both outer sides of the lane are displayed: Indicates that steering
wheel assist of the lane centering
function is operating.
One outer side of the lane is dis-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Lane departure alert function
display
Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving support system information
screen.
 Inside of displayed lines is
white
4
Driving
The illumination condition of the
indicator informs the driver of the
system operation status.
Illuminated in white: LTA system is
operating.
Illuminated in green: Steering wheel
assistance of the steering assist
function or lane centering function
is operating.
Flashing in orange: Lane departure
alert function is operating.
Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving support system information
screen.
Indicates that steering assist of the
lane centering function is operating
by monitoring the position of a preceding vehicle.
When the follow-up cruising display
is displayed, if the preceding vehicle moves, your vehicle may move
in the same way. Always pay careful attention to your surroundings
and operate the steering wheel as
necessary to correct the path of the
vehicle and ensure safety.
256
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Indicates that the system is recognizing white (yellow) lines*.
When the vehicle departs from
its lane, the white line displayed
on the side the vehicle departs
from flashes orange.
 Inside of displayed lines is
black
the side where the turn signal was
operated)
• Vehicle is not being driven around
a sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are
detected. (P.258)
*1
: The function operates even if the
vehicle speed is less than
approximately 32 mph (50 km/h)
when the lane centering function
is operating.
*2: May recognize the boundaries
between the asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or
the curb, to be road lanes
● Steering assist function
Indicates that the system is not
able to recognize white (yellow)
lines* or is temporarily canceled.
*
: May recognize the boundaries
between the asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or
the curb, to be road lanes
■ Operation conditions of each
function
● Lane departure alert function
This function operates when all of
the following conditions are met.
• LTA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32
mph (50 km/h) or more.*1
• System recognizes white (yellow)
lane lines*2. (When a white [yellow] line*2 is recognized on only
one side, the system will operate
only for the recognized side.)
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
(Vehicle with BSM: Except when
another vehicle is in the lane on
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
This function operates when all of
the following conditions are met in
addition to the operation conditions
for the lane departure alert function.
• Vehicle is not accelerated or
decelerated by a fixed amount or
more.
• Steering wheel is not operated
with a steering force level suitable
for changing lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are
not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel warning
is not displayed. (P.258)
● Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of
the following conditions are met.
• Setting for “Sway Warning” in
of the multi-information display is
set to “ON”. (P.585)
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32
mph (50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are
detected. (P.258)
● Lane centering function
This function operates when all of
the following conditions are met.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• LTA is turned on.
■ Temporary cancelation of func-
tions
● When operation conditions are no
longer met, a function may be
temporarily canceled. However,
when the operation conditions are
met again, operation of the function is automatically restored.
(P.256)
● If the operation conditions
(P.256) are no longer met while
the lane centering function is
operating, the steering wheel may
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
vibrate and the buzzer may sound
to indicate that the function has
been temporarily canceled. However, if the “Alert” customization
setting is set to
, the system
will notify the driver by vibrating
the steering wheel instead of
sounding the buzzer.
■ Steering assist function/lane
centering function
● Depending on the vehicle speed,
lane departure situation, road conditions, etc., the driver may not
feel the function is operating or
the function may not operate at
all.
● The steering control of the function is overridden by the driver’s
steering wheel operation.
● Do not attempt to test the operation of the steering assist function.
■ Lane departure alert function
● The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise,
audio playback, etc. Also, it may
be difficult to feel steering wheel
vibrations due to the road conditions, etc.
● Vehicle with BSM: It may not be
possible for the system to determine if there is a danger of a collision with a vehicle in an adjacent
lane.
● Do not attempt to test the operation of the lane departure alert
function.
■ Hands off steering wheel warn-
ing
In the following situations, a warning
message urging the driver to hold
the steering wheel and the symbol
shown in the illustration are displayed on the multi-information display to warn the driver. The warning
stops when the system determines
that the driver holds the steering
wheel. Always keep your hands on
the steering wheel when using this
system, regardless of warnings.
4
Driving
• Setting for “Lane Center” in
of
the multi-information display is set
to “ON”. (P.585)
• This function recognizes white
(yellow) lane lines or the position
of a preceding vehicle (except
when the preceding vehicle is
small, such as a motorcycle).
• The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range is operating
in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 10 to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m).
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is not being driven around
a sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are
detected. (P.258)
• Vehicle does not accelerate or
decelerate by a fixed amount or
more.
• Steering wheel is not operated
with a steering force level suitable
for changing lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are
not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel warning
is not displayed. (P.258)
• The vehicle is being driven in the
center of a lane.
• Steering assist function is not
operating.
• When your vehicle is not towing a
trailer or during emergency towing.
257
258
4-5. Using the driving support systems
of the buzzer becomes longer.
The buzzer also sounds even if the
alert type is set to
.
■ Vehicle sway warning function
● When the system determines that
the driver is driving without holding the steering wheel while the
system is operating
If the driver continues to keep their
hands off of the steering wheel, the
buzzer sounds, the driver is warned
and the function is temporarily canceled. This warning also operates in
the same way when the driver continuously operates the steering
wheel only a small amount.
When the system determines that
the vehicle is swaying while the
vehicle sway warning function is
operating, a buzzer sounds and a
warning message urging the driver
to rest and the symbol shown in the
illustration are simultaneously displayed on the multi-information display.
The buzzer also sounds even if the
alert type is set to
.
● When the system determines that
the vehicle may deviate from the
lane while driving around a curve
while the lane centering function is
operating.
Depending on the vehicle condition
and road conditions, the warning
may not operate. Also, if the system
determines that the vehicle is driving around a curve, warnings will
occur earlier than during straightlane driving.
● When the system determines that
the driver is driving without holding the steering wheel while the
steering wheel assist of the steering assist function is operating.
If the driver continues to keep their
hands off of the steering wheel and
the steering wheel assist is operating, the buzzer sounds and the
driver is warned. Each time the
buzzer sounds, the continuing time
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Depending on the vehicle and road
conditions, the warning may not
operate.
■ Warning message
If the following warning message is
displayed on the multi-information
display and the LTA indicator illuminates in orange, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure. Also,
if a different warning message is
displayed, follow the instructions
displayed on the screen.
● “LTA Malfunction Visit Your
Dealer”
The system may not be operating
properly. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
● “LTA Unavailable”
The system is temporarily canceled
due to a malfunction in a sensor
other than the front camera. Turn
the LTA system off, wait for a little
while, and then turn the LTA system
back on.
● “LTA Unavailable at Current
Speed”
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The function cannot be used as the
vehicle speed exceeds the LTA
operation range. Drive slower.
■ Customization
Function settings can be changed.
(Customizable features: P.585)7
259
RSA (Road Sign
Assist)*
*: If equipped
Summary of function
The RSA system recognizes
specific road signs using the
front camera and/or navigation
system (when speed limit information is available) to provide
information to the driver via the
display.
4
Driving
If the system judges that the
vehicle is being driven over the
speed limit, performing prohibited actions, etc., according to
the recognized road signs, it
notifies the driver through a
visual notification and notification buzzer.
WARNING
■ Before using the RSA
Do not rely solely upon the RSA
system. RSA is a system which
supports the driver by providing
information, but it is not a replacement for a driver’s own vision and
awareness. Drive safely by
always paying careful attention to
the traffic rules.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
260
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Indication on the multiinformation display
When the front camera recognizes a sign and/or information
of a sign is available from the
navigation system, the sign will
be displayed on the multi-information display.
 When the driving support system information is selected, a
maximum of 3 signs can be
displayed. (P.93)
are recognized, they will be displayed in an overlapping stack
under the current speed limit sign.
Supported types of road
signs
The following types of road
signs, including electronic signs
and blinking signs, are recognized.
A non-official or a recently introduced traffic sign may not be recognized.
Speed limit
Do Not Enter
Stop
 When a tab other than the
driving support system information is selected, the following types of road signs will be
displayed. (P.93)
• Speed limit sign
• Do Not Enter sign (when notification is necessary)
Yield
Notification function
In the following situations, the
RSA system will notify the
driver.
 When the vehicle speed
exceeds the speed notification threshold of the speed
limit sign displayed, the sign
display will be emphasized
and a buzzer will sound.
If signs other than speed limit signs
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
 When the RSA system recognizes a do not enter sign and
4-5. Using the driving support systems
determines that your vehicle
has entered a no-entry area,
the displayed sign will flash
and a buzzer will sound.
Depending on the situation, a
notification function may not
operate properly.
■ Setting procedure
1 Press
or
of the meter
control switches and select
.
2 Press
or
of the meter
control switches and select
“
RSA”, then press
.
■ Automatic turn-off of RSA sign
■ Conditions in which the func-
tion may not operate or detect
correctly
In the following situations, RSA
does not operate normally and may
not recognize signs, display the
incorrect sign, etc. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
● The front camera is misaligned
due to a strong impact being
applied to the sensor, etc.
● Dirt, snow, stickers, etc., are on
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
the windshield near the front camera.
● In inclement weather such as
heavy rain, fog, snow or sand
storms
● Light from an oncoming vehicle,
the sun, etc., enters the front camera.
● The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or
bent.
● The contrast of electronic sign is
low.
● All or part of the sign is hidden by
the leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.
● The sign is only visible to the front
camera for a short amount of time.
● The driving scene (turning, lane
change, etc.) is judged incorrectly.
● If a sign not appropriate for the
currently traveled lane, but the
sign exists directly after a freeway
branches, or in an adjacent lane
just before merging.
● Stickers are attached to the rear of
the preceding vehicle.
● A sign resembling a system compatible sign is recognized.
● Side road speed signs may be
detected and displayed (if positioned in sight of the front camera)
while the vehicle is traveling on
the main road.
● Roundabout exit road speed signs
may be detected and displayed (if
positioned in sight of the front
camera) while traveling on a
roundabout.
● The front of the vehicle is raised or
lowered due to the carried load.
● The surrounding brightness is not
sufficient or changes suddenly.
● When a sign intended for trucks,
etc., is recognized.
● The navigation system map data
is outdated.
● The navigation system is not operating.
4
Driving
display
In the following situations, a displayed speed limit sign and/or do
not enter sign will stop being displayed automatically:
● No sign has been recognized for a
certain distance.
● The road changes due to a left or
right turn, etc.
In the following situations, stop and
yield signs will stop being displayed
automatically:
● The system determines that your
vehicle has passed the sign.
● The road changes due to a left or
right turn, etc.
261
262
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● The speed information displayed
Dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed
range*
on the meter and on the navigation system may be different due
to the navigation system using
map data.
■ Speed limit sign display
If the engine switch was last turned
off while a speed limit sign was displayed on the multi-information display, the same sign displays again
when the engine switch is turned to
ON.
■ If “RSA Malfunction Visit Your
Dealer” is shown
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(Customizable features: P.585)
*
: If equipped
Summary of functions
In vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates, decelerates and stops to match the
speed changes of the preceding
vehicle even if the accelerator
pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode, the
vehicle runs at a fixed speed.
Use the dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range on
freeways and highways.
 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode (P.266)
 Constant speed control mode
(P.270)
System Components
■ Meter display
Multi-information display
Set speed
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Indicators
■ Operation switches
263
• Conditions under which the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly: P.273
● Set the speed appropriately
depending on the speed limit,
traffic flow, road conditions,
weather conditions, etc. The
driver is responsible for checking the set speed.
● Even when the system is func-
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch
“+RES” switch
Cancel switch
Cruise control main switch
WARNING
■ Before using dynamic radar
cruise control with full-speed
range
● Driving safely is the sole
responsibility of the driver. Do
not rely solely on the system,
and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings.
● The dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range provides driving assistance to
reduce the driver’s burden.
However, there are limitations to
the assistance provided.
Read the following conditions
carefully. Do not overly rely on
this system and always drive
carefully.
• When the sensor may not be
correctly detecting the vehicle
ahead: P.272
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Switch the dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range
setting to off, using the cruise
control main switch when not in
use.
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the driv-
ing assist systems
Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to
the assistance provided by the
system. Failure to do so may
cause an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
4
Driving
“-SET” switch
tioning normally, the condition of
the preceding vehicle as
detected by the system may differ from the condition observed
by the driver. Therefore, the
driver must always remain alert,
assess the danger of each situation and drive safely. Relying
solely on this system or assuming the system ensures safety
while driving can lead to an
accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
264
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Assisting the driver to measure
following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range is only
intended to help the driver in
determining the following distance
between the driver’s own vehicle
and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead. It is not a mechanism that
allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can
assist the driver in low-visibility
conditions.
It is still necessary for driver to
pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver to judge
proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range determines
whether the following distance
between the driver’s own vehicle
and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead is within a set range. It is
not capable of making any other
type of judgement. Therefore, it is
absolutely necessary for the
driver to remain vigilant and to
determine whether or not there is
a possibility of danger in any
given situation.
● Assisting the driver to operate
the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range does not
include functions which will prevent or avoid collisions with vehicles ahead of your vehicle.
Therefore, if there is ever any
possibility of danger, the driver
must take immediate and direct
control of the vehicle and act
appropriately in order to ensure
the safety of all involved.
■ Situations unsuitable for
dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range
Do not use dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range in
any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could
cause an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Roads where there are pedes-
trians, cyclists, etc.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
265
WARNING
● On slippery roads, such as
those covered with rain, ice or
snow
● On steep downhills, or where
there are sudden changes
between sharp up and down
gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the
set speed when driving down a
steep hill.
● At entrances to freeways and
highways
● When weather conditions are
bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from detecting
correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
on the front surface of the radar
or front camera
● In traffic conditions that require
frequent repeated acceleration
and deceleration
● When your vehicles is towing a
trailer or another vehicle, except
when the following condition is
met.
• When the other vehicle is a
trailer properly attached and
connected to Toyota’s official
TBC ECU. (P.188)
● When an approach warning
buzzer is heard often
● When the vehicle is lifted up,
except in the following cases.
• When using a Toyota official lift
kit up to 4 in. (101 mm), including tire height. Aftermarket lift
kits may degrade system performance.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
● When there is rain, snow, etc.,
4
266
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar to detect the presence of vehicles up to
approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicleto-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance switch.
When driving on downhill slopes, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance may
become shorter.
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver.
Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising
When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed
appears
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically
decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this
time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle
ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is
stopped by system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pressing the
“+RES” switch or depressing the accelerator pedal (start-off operation) will
resume follow-up cruising. If the start-off operation is not performed, system
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
267
control continues to keep your vehicle stopped.
When the turn signal lever is operated and your vehicle moves to an overtaking lane while driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle will accelerate to help to overtake a passing vehicle.
The system’s identification of what is an overtaking lane may be determined
solely based on the location of the steering wheel in the vehicle (left side
driver position versus right side driver position.) If the vehicle is driven to a
region where the overtaking lane is on a different side from where the vehicle is normally driven, the vehicle may accelerate when the turn signal lever
is operated in the opposite direction to the overtaking lane (e.g., if the driver
normally operates the vehicle in a region where the overtaking lane is to the
right but then drives to a region where the overtaking lane is to the left, the
vehicle may accelerate when the right turn signal is activated).
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower
than the set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then
returns to constant speed cruising.
(P.270)
1 Press the cruise control main
switch to activate the cruise
control.
Dynamic radar cruise control indicator will come on and a message
will be displayed on the multi-information display. Press the switch
again to deactivate the cruise control.
If the cruise control main switch is
pressed and held for 1.5 seconds
or more, the system turns on in
constant speed control mode.
“Radar Ready”
2 Accelerate or decelerate,
with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle
speed (at or above approximately 20 mph [30 km/h])
and press the “-SET” switch
to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will
come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the switch is released becomes the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
Setting the vehicle speed
(vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
4
268
4-5. Using the driving support systems
set speed.
speed will be increased or
decreased as follows:
 For the U.S. mainland, Hawaii
Adjusting the set speed
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6
km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6mph)*2 each
time the switch is pressed
Large adjustment: Increases or
decreases in 1mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or
1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 increments for
as long as the switch is held
 Except for the U.S. mainland
and Hawaii
■ Adjusting the set speed by
the switch
To change the set speed, press
the “+RES” or “-SET” switch
until the desired set speed is
displayed.
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6
km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6mph)*2 each
time the switch is pressed
Large adjustment: Increases or
decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h)*1 or 5
km/h (3.1 mph)*2 increments for as
long as the switch is held
In the constant speed control
mode (P.270), the set speed
will be increased or decreased
as follows:
1 Increases the speed (Except
when the vehicle has been
stopped by system control in
vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)
2 Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Press the switch.
Large adjustment: Press and hold
the switch to change the speed,
and release when the desired
speed is reached.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6
km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each
time the switch is pressed
Large adjustment: The speed will
continue to change while the switch
is held.
*1
: When the set speed is shown in
“MPH”
*2: When the set speed is shown in
“km/h”
■ Increasing the set speed by
the accelerator pedal
1 Accelerate with accelerator
pedal operation to the
desired vehicle speed
4-5. Using the driving support systems
2 Press the “-SET” switch
Changing the vehicle-tovehicle distance (vehicleto-vehicle distance control mode)
Pressing the switch changes the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as
follows:
If a vehicle is running ahead of you,
the preceding vehicle mark
will
also be displayed.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-tovehicle distance control
mode)
Select a distance from the table
below. Note that the distances
shown correspond to a vehicle
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed. When
the vehicle is stopped by system
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
control, the vehicle stops at a
certain vehicle-to-vehicle distance depending on the situation.
Distance
options
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Approximately 160 ft.
(50 m)
Medium
Approximately 130 ft.
(40 m)
Short
Approximately 100 ft.
(30 m)
Resuming follow-up
cruising when the vehicle
has been stopped by system control (vehicle-tovehicle distance control
mode)
After the vehicle ahead of you
starts off, press the “+RES”
switch.
Your vehicle will also resume
follow-up cruising if the accelerator pedal is depressed after the
vehicle ahead of you starts off.
“Operate Cruise switch or
Accelerator Pedal to
4
Driving
1 Long
2 Medium
3 Short
269
270
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Resume”
pedal to ensure an appropriate
vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
Canceling and resuming
the speed control
■ Warnings may not occur
when
1 Pressing the cancel switch
cancels the speed control.
The speed control is also canceled
when the brake pedal is depressed.
(When the vehicle has been
stopped by system control,
depressing the brake pedal does
not cancel the setting.)
In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
small.
 When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or
exceeds your vehicle speed
2 Pressing the “+RES” switch
resumes the cruise control
and returns vehicle speed to
the set speed.
 When the preceding vehicle is
traveling at an extremely slow
speed
Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)
 When depressing the accelerator pedal
When your vehicle is too close
to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via
the cruise control is not possible, the display will flash and the
buzzer will sound to alert the
driver. An example of this would
be if another driver cuts in front
of you while you are following a
vehicle. Depress the brake
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
 Immediately after the cruise
control speed was set
Selecting constant speed
control mode
When constant speed control
mode is selected, your vehicle
will maintain a set speed without
controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode
only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not
function correctly due to a dirty
4-5. Using the driving support systems
radar, etc.
1 With the cruise control off,
press and hold the cruise
control main switch for 1.5
seconds or more.
Immediately after the switch is
pressed, the dynamic radar cruise
control indicator will come on. Afterwards, it switches to the cruise control indicator.
Switching to constant speed control
mode is only possible when operating the switch with the cruise control off.
271
setting: P.270
■ Dynamic radar cruise control
■ Accelerating after setting the
2 Accelerate or decelerate,
with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle
speed (at or above approximately 20 mph [30 km/h])
and press the “-SET” switch
to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will
come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the switch is released becomes the
set speed.
Adjusting the speed setting:
P.268
Canceling and resuming the speed
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After
accelerating, the set speed
resumes. However, during vehicleto-vehicle distance control mode,
the vehicle speed may decrease
below the set speed in order to
maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.
■ When the vehicle stops while
follow-up cruising
● Pressing the “+RES” switch while
the vehicle ahead stops will
resume follow-up cruising if the
vehicle ahead starts off within
approximately 3 seconds after the
switch is pressed.
● If the vehicle ahead starts off
within 3 seconds after your vehicle
stops, follow-up cruising will be
resumed.
4
Driving
with full-speed range can be set
when
● The shift lever is in D.
● The desired set speed can be set
when the vehicle speed is approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.
(However, when the vehicle speed
is set while driving at below
approximately 20 mph [30 km/h],
the set speed will be set to
approximately 20 mph [30 km/h].)
272
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Automatic cancelation of vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control
mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode is automatically canceled in
the following situations.
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of
time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is
turned off.
● The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in
some way.
● When the brake control or output
restriction control of a driving support system operates. (For example: Pre-Collision System, DriveStart Control)
● The center differential lock/unlock
is not completed within 5 seconds
while the cruise control system is
on.
● The parking brake is operated.
● The vehicle is stopped by system
control on a steep incline.
● The following are detected when
the vehicle has been stopped by
system control:
• The driver is not wearing a seat
belt.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The vehicle has been stopped for
about 3 minutes.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode is automatically canceled for
any reasons other than the above,
there may be a malfunction in the
system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Automatic cancelation of con-
stant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode is
automatically canceled in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than
approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)
below the set vehicle speed.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of
time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is
turned off.
● When the brake control or output
restriction control of a driving support system operates. (For example: Pre-Collision System, DriveStart Control)
● The center differential lock/unlock
is not completed within 5 seconds
while the cruise control system is
on.
● The parking brake is operated.
If constant speed control mode is
automatically canceled for any reasons other than the above, there
may be a malfunction in the system.
Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Brake operation
A brake operation sound may be
heard and the brake pedal response
may change, but these are not malfunctions.
■ Warning messages and buzzers
for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
Warning messages and buzzers are
used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the
need for caution while driving. If a
warning message is shown on the
multi-information display, read the
message and follow the instructions.(P.235, 529)
■ When the sensor may not be
correctly detecting the vehicle
ahead
In the case of the following and
depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal when deceleration of the system is insufficient or
operate the accelerator pedal when
acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to
correctly detect these types of vehi-
4-5. Using the driving support systems
cles, the approach warning
(P.270) may not be activated.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in the
same lane
● Vehicles with small rear ends
(trailers with no load on board,
etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same
273
● When the vehicle is lifted up,
except in the following cases.
• When using a Toyota official lift kit
up to 4 in. (101 mm), including tire
height. Aftermarket lift kits may
degrade system performance.
■ Conditions under which the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly
In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or
accelerator pedal, depending on the
situation) as necessary.
As the sensor may not be able to
correctly detect vehicles ahead, the
system may not operate properly.
● When the road curves or when the
lanes are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or
your position in the lane is unstable
● Preceding vehicle has an
extremely high ground clearance
● When the vehicle ahead of you
● When the vehicle is towing a
trailer or during emergency towing.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
lane
● When water or snow thrown up by
the surrounding vehicles hinders
the detecting of the sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing
upwards (caused by a heavy load
in the luggage compartment, etc.)
decelerates suddenly
● When driving on a road surrounded by a structure, such as in
a tunnel or on a bridge
● While the vehicle speed is
decreasing to the set speed after
the vehicle accelerates by
depressing the accelerator pedal
● When your vehicles is towing a
274
4-5. Using the driving support systems
trailer or another vehicle, except
when the following condition is
met.
• When the other vehicle is a trailer
properly attached and connected
to Toyota’s official TBC ECU.
(P.188)
● When the vehicle is lifted up,
except in the following cases.
• When using a Toyota official lift kit
up to 4 in. (101 mm), including tire
height. Aftermarket lift kits may
degrade system performance.
Cruise control*
*
: If equipped
Use the cruise control to
maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
System Components
■ Meter display
Set speed
Indicators
■ Operation switches
Cruise control main switch
“+RES” switch
Cancel switch
“-SET” switch
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
275
vate the cruise control.
■ To avoid operating the cruise
control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using
the cruise control main switch
when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for
cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of
the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of
control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
those covered with rain, ice or
snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the
set speed when driving down a
steep hill.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will
be displayed.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the switch is released becomes the
set speed.
● When your vehicle is towing a
trailer or during emergency towing
Setting the vehicle speed
1 Press the cruise control main
switch to activate the cruise
control.
Cruise control indicator will be displayed.
Press the switch again to deacti-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the “+RES” or “-SET” switch
until the desired set speed is
obtained.
4
Driving
● On slippery roads, such as
2 Accelerate or decelerate,
with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired speed (at
or above approximately 20
mph [30 km/h]) and press the
“-SET” switch to set the
speed.
276
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Canceling and resuming
the constant speed control
1 Increases the speed
2 Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Press the switch.
Large adjustment: Press and hold
the switch to change the speed,
and release when the desired
speed is reached.
1 Pressing the cancel switch
cancels the constant speed
control.
The set speed will be increased
or decreased as follows:
The speed setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied.
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6
km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2
each time the switch is operated.
Large adjustment: The set
speed can be increased or
decreased continually until the
switch is released.
*1
: When the set speed is shown in
“MPH”
*2: When the set speed is shown in
“km/h”
2 Pressing the “+RES” switch
resumes the constant speed
control.
Resuming is available when the
vehicle speed is more than approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D.
● Vehicle speed is above approxi-
mately 20 mph (30 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the
vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated
normally. After acceleration, the
set speed resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise
control, the set speed can be
increased by first accelerating the
vehicle to the desired speed and
then pushing the “-SET” switch to
set the new speed.
■ Automatic cancelation of cruise
control
Cruise control will stop maintaining
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more
than approximately 10 mph (16
km/h) below the preset vehicle
speed.
● Actual vehicle speed is below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of
time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is
turned off.
■ If the warning message for the
Stop & Start system
The Stop & Start system
stops and starts the engine
according to brake pedal or
shift lever operation when
the vehicle is stopped, such
as at a stoplight, intersection, etc., in order to
improve fuel economy and
reduce noise pollution
caused by the engine idling.
Stop & Start system operation
■ Stopping the engine
While driving with the D shift
position selected, depress the
brake pedal and stop the vehicle. The engine will stop automatically.
When the engine stops, the Stop &
Start indicator will illuminate.
■ Restarting the engine
Release the brake pedal. The
engine will start automatically.
When the engine starts, the Stop &
Start indicator will turn off.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
cruise control is shown on the
multi-information display
Press the cruise control main switch
once to deactivate the system, and
then press the switch again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be
set or if the cruise control cancels
immediately after being activated,
there may be a malfunction in the
cruise control system. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
277
278
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ When the brake hold sys-
tem is operating
stop by the dynamic radar
cruise control with full-speed
range, the controlled stop will
continue.
 When the engine is stopped
by the Stop & Start system, if
the brake pedal is released
the engine will remain
stopped.
Disabling the Stop & Start
system
 If the accelerator pedal is
depressed while the engine is
stopped by the Stop & Start
system, the engine will
restart.
Press the Stop & Start cancel
switch to disable the Stop &
Start system.
The Stop & Start cancel indicator will illuminate.
 While the engine is stopped
by the Stop & Start system, if
the engine is restarted, the
brake hold system will continue to apply the brakes,
unless the operation conditions of the brake hold system
are no longer met. (P.216)
Pressing the switch again will
enable the Stop & Start system and
the Stop & Start cancel indicator will
turn off.
■ When the dynamic radar
cruise control with fullspeed range is operating
(vehicles with a dynamic
radar cruise control with
full-speed range)
 When the vehicle is stopped
by the dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range,
the engine will stop automatically even though the brake
pedal is not depressed.
 When the preceding vehicle
starts off, the engine will
restart automatically.
 If the engine is restarted automatically by the Stop & Start
system during a controlled
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Automatic enabling of the Stop
& Start system
If the Stop & Start system is disabled using the Stop & Start cancel
switch, it will be automatically reenabled once the engine switch is
turned off and then the engine is
started.
Hill-start assist control
When the engine is stopped by
the Stop & Start system when
the vehicle is on an incline,
when the brake pedal is
released, brake force is tempo-
4-5. Using the driving support systems
rarily maintained to prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards
before the engine is restarted
and drive force is generated.
When drive force is generated,
the maintained brake force is
automatically canceled.
 This function operates on flat
surfaces as well as steep
inclines.
 Sound may be generated
from the brake system, but
this does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Points for use
● If the engine switch is pressed
when the engine is stopped by the
Stop & Start system, the engine
will not be able to be restarted by
the automatic engine start function. In this case, restart the
engine using the normal engine
starting procedure. (P.204)
● When the engine is being
restarted by the Stop & Start system, the power outlets may be
temporarily unusable, but this
does not indicate a malfunction.
● Installation and removal of electrical components and wireless
devices may affect the Stop &
Start system. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
● When stopping the vehicle for a
longer period of time, turn the
engine switch off to stop the
engine completely.
● When the engine is restarted by
the Stop & Start system, the steer-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
ing wheel may temporarily feel
heavy.
■ Operating conditions
● The Stop & Start system is opera-
tional when all of the following
conditions are met:
• The vehicle has been driven a certain amount of time.
• Vehicles with dynamic radar
cruise control with full-speed
range: The brake pedal is being
depressed firmly. (Except when
the vehicle is stopped by the
dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range when in vehicleto-vehicle distance control mode)
• Vehicles without dynamic radar
cruise control with full-speed
range: The brake pedal is being
depressed firmly.
• The D shift position is selected.
• The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
• The driver’s door is closed.
• The selected driving mode is not
“4H” or “4L” mode. (4WD models
only)
• The Multi-terrain Select is not
operated (if equipped)
• The windshield defogger is off.
• The accelerator pedal is not being
depressed.
• The engine is adequately warmed
up.
• The outside temperature is 23°F (5°C) or higher.
• The hood is closed. (P.280)
• “TOW HAUL” or “TOW+” mode is
not operated (if equipped)
● In the following situations the
engine may not be stopped by the
Stop & Start system. This is not a
malfunction of the Stop & Start
system.
• When the air conditioning system
is being used.
• When the battery is undergoing a
periodic recharge.
• When the battery is not sufficiently
charged, such as if the vehicle
has been parked for a long time
and the battery charge has
decreased, the electric load is
large, the battery fluid tempera-
4
Driving
 Brake pedal response may
change and vibration may
occur, but this does not indicate a malfunction.
279
280
4-5. Using the driving support systems
ture is excessively low or the battery has deteriorated.
• When the brake booster vacuum
is low.
• When the elapsed time since the
engine was restarted is short.
• When the vehicle is stopped frequently, such as when in a traffic
jam.
• When the engine coolant temperature or transmission fluid temperature is extremely low or high.
• When the vehicle is stopped on a
steep incline.
• When the steering wheel is being
operated.
• When the vehicle is being driven
in a high altitude area.
• When the battery fluid temperature is extremely low or high.
• For a while after the battery terminals have been disconnected and
reconnected.
● When the engine is stopped by
the Stop & Start system, the
engine will be restarted automatically if any of the following conditions are met:
(To enable the engine to be
stopped by the Stop & Start system again, drive the vehicle.)
• The air conditioning system is
turned on.
• The windshield defogger is turned
on.
• The shift lever is shifted from D or
P.
• The shift lever is shifted from P.
(When the engine is stopped by
the Stop & Start system when the
shift lever is in P.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The selected driving mode is “4H”
or “4L” mode. (4WD models only)
• The Multi-terrain Select is operated (if equipped)
• “TOW HAUL” or “TOW+” mode is
operated (if equipped)
• The Stop & Start cancel switch is
pressed.
• The steering wheel is operated.
• The accelerator pedal is
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
depressed.
• The vehicle starts to roll on an
incline.
● When the engine is stopped by
the Stop & Start system, the
engine may restart automatically
in the following situations: (To
enable the engine to be stopped
by the Stop & Start system again,
drive the vehicle.)
• When the brake pedal is pumped
or strongly depressed.
• When the air conditioning system
is being used.
• When a switch of the air conditioning system is operated (windshield
defogger switch, etc.).
• If the battery charge becomes low.
■ When the hood is opened
● If the hood is opened while the
engine is stopped by the Stop &
Start system, the engine will stall
and will not be able to be restarted
by the automatic engine start
function. In this case, restart the
engine using the normal engine
starting procedure. (P.204)
● If the hood is closed after the
engine is started with the hood
open, the Stop & Start system will
not operate. Close the hood, turn
the engine switch off, wait 30 seconds or more, and then start the
engine.
■ Air conditioning system opera-
tion while the engine is stopped
by the Stop & Start system
When the air conditioning is in automatic mode and the engine is
stopped by the Stop & Start system,
the fan may operate at a low speed
in order to prevent the temperature
in the cabin from increasing or
decreasing or may be stopped.
To prioritize air conditioning system
performance when the vehicle is
stopped, disable the Stop & Start
system by pressing the Stop & Start
cancel switch.
● If the windshield is fogged up
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Turn the windshield defogger on.
(P.418)
If the windshield fogs up frequently,
press the Stop & Start cancel switch
to disable the Stop & Start system.
● If an odor is emitted from the air
conditioning system
• Press the Stop & Start cancel
switch to deactivate the Stop &
Start system.
■ Changing the idling stop time
with the air conditioning system
on
The length of time the Stop & Start
system will operate when the air
conditioning system is on can be
changed in
of the multi-informa-
■ Multi-information display mes-
sages
If the following situations,
and a message may be displayed
on the multi-information display.
● When the engine cannot be
stopped by the Stop & Start system
“Press Brake More to Activate”
• The brake pedal is not sufficiently
depressed.
 If the brake pedal is depressed
further, the system will operate.
“Non-Dedicated Battery”
• A battery not designed for use
with a Stop & Start system may
have been installed.
 Have the vehicle inspected by
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
your Toyota dealer.
“Battery Charging”
• The battery charge may be low.
 Stopping of the engine is temporarily prohibited to prioritize charging
of the battery. After the engine runs
for a certain amount of time, the system will be enabled.
• A refresh charge may be occurring
 After a refresh charge for up to
an hour completes, the system can
be operated.
• If displayed continuously for a
long time (more than an hour)
 The battery may be deteriorated.
Contact your Toyota dealer for
details.
“Stop & Start Unavailable”
• The Stop & Start system is temporarily disabled.
 Allow the engine to run for some
time.
• The engine may have been
started with the hood open.
 Close the hood, turn the engine
switch off, wait for 30 seconds or
more, and then start the engine.
“In Preparation”
• The vehicle is being driven in a
high altitude area.
• The brake booster vacuum is low.
 When the brake booster vacuum
reaches a predetermined level, the
system will be enabled.
“For Climate Control”
• The air conditioning system is
being used when the ambient
temperature is high or low.
If the difference between the set
temperature and cabin temperature
becomes small, the system will be
enabled.
• The windshield defogger is on.
4
Driving
tion display (P.586). (The length of
time the Stop & Start system will
operate when the air conditioning
system is off cannot be changed.)
■ Displaying the Stop & Start system status
P.100
281
282
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● When the engine automatically
restarts while stopped by the Stop
& Start system
“In Preparation”
• The brake pedal has been
depressed further or pumped.
 The system will be enabled after
the engine runs and the brake
booster vacuum reaches a predetermined level.
“For Climate Control”
• The air conditioning system has
been turned on or is being used.
• The windshield defogger has
been turned on.
“Battery Charging”
• The battery charge may be low.
The system will be enabled after
the engine runs to sufficiently
charge the battery.
■ When the buzzer sounds
If the driver’s door is opened when
the engine is stopped by the Stop &
Start system and the shift lever is in
D, a buzzer will sound and the Stop
& Start system indicator will flash. To
stop the buzzer, close the driver’s
door.
■ The Stop & Start system protec-
tion function
● When the volume of the audio
system is excessively high, sound
output from the audio system may
suddenly be cut off in order to
reduce battery consumption. To
prevent the audio system from
being cut off, keep the volume of
audio system at a moderate level.
If the audio system has been cut
off, turn the engine switch off, wait
for 3 seconds or more and then
turn it to ACC or ON to re-enable
the audio system.
● The audio system may not be activated if the battery terminals are
disconnected and then reconnected. If this occurs, turn the
engine switch off and then repeat
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
the following operation twice to
activate the audio system normally.
• Turn the engine switch to ON and
then to off.
■ Replacing the battery
P.549
■ If the Stop & Start cancel indica-
tor flashes continuously
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ If “Stop & Start System Mal-
function Visit Your Dealer” is
displayed on the multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■ When the Stop & Start system
is operating
Make sure to disable the Stop &
Start system while the vehicle is in
a poorly ventilated area.
If not disabled, the engine may be
automatically restarted unexpectedly, causing exhaust gases to
collect and enter the vehicle, possibly resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
● Do not leave the vehicle while
the engine is stopped by the
Stop & Start system (while the
Stop & Start indicator is on). An
accident may occur due to the
automatic engine start function.
● Depress the brake pedal and
apply the parking brake when
necessary while the engine is
stopped by the Stop & Start system (while the Stop & Start indicator is on).
4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system oper-
ates correctly
If any of the following situations
occur, the Stop & Start system
may not operate correctly. Have
your vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
● While the driver’s seat belt is
fastened, the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat belt reminder
light flashes.
● Even though the driver’s seat
belt is not fastened, the driver’s
and front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light does not illuminate.
● Even though the driver’s door is
● Even though the driver’s door is
open, the open door warning
light does not illuminate or the
interior light does not illuminate
when the interior light switch is
in the door position.
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)*
*: If equipped
The Blind Spot Monitor is a
system that uses rear side
radar sensors installed on
the inner side of the rear
bumper on the left and right
side to assist the driver for
lane changing decision.
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of
the system
● The driver is solely responsible
for safe driving. Always drive
safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor is a supplementary function which alerts
the driver that a vehicle is in a
blind spot of the outside rear view
mirrors or is approaching rapidly
from behind into a blind spot. Do
not overly rely on the Blind Spot
Monitor. As the function cannot
judge if it is safe to change lanes,
over reliance could lead to an
accident resulting in death or serious injury.
As the system may not function
correctly under certain conditions, the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
● When the vehicle is lifted up,
except in the following cases.
• When using a Toyota official lift
kit up to 4 in. (101 mm), including tire height. Aftermarket lift
kits may degrade system performance.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
closed, the open door warning
light is illuminated or the interior
light is illuminated when the
interior light switch is in the door
position.
283
284
4-5. Using the driving support systems
System components
■ When “Blind Spot Monitor Mal-
function Visit Your Dealer” is
shown on the multi-information
display
There may be a sensor malfunction
or misaligned. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.586)
■ Certification
P.634
Meter control switches
Turning the Blind Spot Monitor
on/off.
Outside rear view mirror indicators
When a vehicle is detected in a
blind spot of the outside rear view
mirrors or approaching rapidly from
behind into a blind spot, the outside
rear view mirror indicator on the
detected side will illuminate. If the
turn signal lever is operated toward
the detected side, the outside rear
view mirror indicator flashes.
■ Outside rear view mirror indica-
tor visibility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear
view mirror indicator may be difficult
to see.
■ When “Blind Spot Monitor
Unavailable” is shown on the
multi-information display
Ice, snow, mud, etc., may be
attached to the rear bumper around
the sensors. (P.285) The system
should return to normal operation
after removing the ice, snow, mud,
etc., from the rear bumper. Additionally, the sensors may not operate
normally when driving in extremely
hot or cold environments.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
WARNING
■ To ensure the system can
operate properly
Blind Spot Monitor sensors are
installed behind the left and right
sides of the rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to
ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can
operate correctly.
285
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Keep the sensors and the sur-
rounding areas on the rear
bumper clean at all times.
If a sensor or its surrounding area
on the rear bumper is dirty or covered with snow, the Blind Spot
Monitor may not operate and a
warning message (P.284) will
be displayed. In this situation,
clear off the dirt or snow and drive
the vehicle with the operation conditions of the BSM function
(P.289) satisfied for approximately 10 minutes. If the warning
message does not disappear,
have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
WARNING
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not modify the sensor or sur-
rounding area on the rear
bumper.
● If a sensor or the rear bumper
needs to be removed/installed
or replaced, contact your Toyota
dealer.
● Do not paint the rear bumper
any color other than an official
Toyota color.
Changing settings of the
Blind Spot Monitor
■ Turning the Blind Spot Mon-
Driving
itor on/off
Use the meter control switches
to turn on/off the function.
(P.94)
● Do not attach accessories,
stickers (including transparent
stickers), aluminum tape, etc.,
to a sensor or its surrounding
area on the rear bumper.
● Do not subject a sensor or its
surrounding area on the rear
bumper to a strong impact.
If a sensor is moved even
slightly off position, the system
may malfunction and vehicles
may not be detected correctly.
In the following situations, have
your vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
• A sensor or its surrounding area
is subject to a strong impact.
• If the surrounding area of a sensor is scratched or dented, or
part of them has become disconnected.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1 Press
or
to select
2 Press
or
to select “
BSM” and then press
.
.
When the BSM function is disabled,
the BSM OFF indicator (P.82) illuminates. (Each time the engine
switch is turned off then changed to
ON, the Blind Spot Monitor will be
enabled automatically.)
■ Setting the trailer type
Use the meter control switches
to select the trailer type.
(P.94)
1 Press
or
to select
4
.
286
4-5. Using the driving support systems
2 Press
or
to select
“Trailer Settings” and then
press and hold
.
3 According to the display,
select the desired setting and
then press
. (P.98)
■ Auto Trailer Detection (ATD)
Auto Trailer Detection (ATD) detects
if a trailer is attached by using the
Trailer Brake Controller (TBC) or the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) sensors.
● Trailers that use TBC can be
detected by using the 7-pin trailer
brake connectors.
● Other types of trailers can be
detected using the BSM sensors.
● When a trailer is detected via BSM
or TBC, RCTA function will be disabled.
● As soon as the trailer is detected,
the detection area will be
extended to a maximum length of
approximately 16 ft. (15 m) from
the rear bumper of the truck.
● If the trailer does not have a 7-pin
connector, or the 7-pin connector
is not engaged, the trailer is
detected via the BSM sensor. In
this case PKSB and Intuitive parking assist functions will not be disabled.
● For trailer auto detection without
engagement of 7-pin connector,
the vehicle should be moving forward at speed of above 0.6 mph
(1 km/h) for at least 10 seconds.
● ATD function is triggered at every
engine switch on/off cycle or if the
vehicle is stopped in shift the shift
lever is in P or N for more than 90
seconds.
● Trailer detection vis BSM sensors
may be delayed if the vehicle is in
a crowded environment such as
busy parking lot, area surrounded
with trees (camping ground) or in
an environment with objects in the
immediate environment that prevent sensors from sufficiently
detecting the trailer.
■ Trailer Length Detection (TLD)
● Once a trailer is detected and if
the trailer length in the meter is
selected as “Auto”, the TLD function will estimate the trailer length
using the Blind Spot Monitor sensors.
In order to estimate the trailer length
with TLD function and detection
area, make at least two 90 degree
turns.
If the trailer length is entered manually via multi-information display
input, the detection area is also
adjusted to exceed the length of the
trailer.
● Depending on some trailer types
and the dimensions of the trailer
TMW performance may be
degraded.
Blind Spot Monitor operation
■ Vehicles that can be detected by the Blind Spot Monitor
The Blind Spot Monitor uses rear side radar sensors to detect the following vehicles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of
the presence of such vehicles via the indicators on the outside rear
view mirrors.
 When not towing a trailer
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
287
Vehicles approaching in adjacent lanes that may not be visible
using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)
Vehicles that are approaching rapidly in adjacent lanes that are
not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)
4
Driving
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
288
4-5. Using the driving support systems
 When towing a trailer
Vehicles approaching in adjacent lanes that may not be visible
using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)
■ The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
 When not towing a trailer
The range of each detection area is:
Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of
the vehicle*1
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear
bumper*2
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
289
 When towing a trailer
The range of each detection area is:
Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of
the vehicle*1
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper
Trailer overall length*3
4
*1
: The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side
of the vehicle cannot be detected.
*2
: The outer mirror indicator warning may be delayed. The delay increases
in proportion to the speed differential with vehicles approaching in the
adjacent lane.
*3: The system does not support trailers wider than 8.5 ft. (2.59 m) and/or
longer than 39 ft. (12.0 m). For box trailers and certain other trailer types
that are up to 8.5 ft. (2.59 m) wide and/or 39 ft. (12.0 m) long, the indicator warning in the outer mirror may be delayed if the vehicle in the adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle at a high-speed differential.
■ The Blind Spot Monitor is oper-
ational when
The Blind Spot Monitor is operational when all of the following conditions are met:
● The Blind Spot Monitor is on.
● The shift position is in a position
other than R.
● The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
■ The Blind Spot Monitor will
detect a vehicle when
The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
vehicle present in the detection area
in the following situations:
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.
● You overtake a vehicle in an adjacent lane slowly.
● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.
■ Conditions under which the
system will not detect a vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor is not
designed to detect the following
types of vehicles and/or objects:
● Small motorcycles, bicycles,
Driving
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear end of trailer*3
290
4-5. Using the driving support systems
pedestrians, etc.*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite
direction
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked
vehicles and similar stationary
objects*
● Following vehicles that are in the
same lane*
● Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away
from your vehicle*
● Vehicles which are being overtaken rapidly by your vehicle*
*: Depending on the conditions,
detection of a vehicle and/or
object may occur.
■ Conditions under which the
system may not function correctly
● The Blind Spot Monitor may not
detect vehicles correctly in the following situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned
due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,
etc., is covering the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface
that is wet with standing water
during bad weather, such as
heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are
approaching with only a small gap
between each vehicle
• When the distance between your
vehicle and a following vehicle is
short
• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the
detection area
• When the difference in speed
between your vehicle and another
vehicle is changing
• When a vehicle enters a detection
area traveling at about the same
speed as your vehicle
• As your vehicle starts from a stop,
a vehicle remains in the detection
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
area
• When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as
hills, dips in the road, etc.
• When driving on roads with sharp
bends, consecutive curves, or
uneven surfaces
• When vehicle lanes are wide, or
when driving on the edge of a
lane, and the vehicle in an adjacent lane is far away from your
vehicle
• When an accessory (such as a
bicycle carrier) is installed to the
rear of the vehicle
• When driving with tailgate in the
open position or when cargo (such
as lumber) is loaded on the open
tailgate.
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the
detection area
• Immediately after the Blind Spot
Monitor is turned on
● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase in
the following situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned
due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
• When the distance between your
vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc.,
that enters the detection area is
short
• When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as
hills, dips in the road, etc.
• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or
when driving on the edge of a
lane, and a vehicle traveling in a
lane other than the adjacent lanes
enters the detection area
• When driving on roads with sharp
bends, consecutive curves, or
uneven surfaces
• When the tires are slipping or
spinning
• When the distance between your
vehicle and a following vehicle is
short
• When an accessory (such as a
bicycle carrier) is installed to the
4-5. Using the driving support systems
rear of the vehicle
• When turning at an intersection
with a trailer is being towed and
an adjacent vehicle continues
traveling straight
291
Intuitive parking
assist*
*: If equipped
The distance from your
vehicle to objects, such as a
wall, when parallel parking
or maneuvering into a
garage is measured by the
sensors and communicated via the multi-information display and/or
multimedia display and a
buzzer. Always check the
surrounding area when
using this system.
■ Types of sensors
Front corner sensors
Front center sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors
■ Display
When the sensors detect an
object, such as a wall, a graphic
is shown on the multi-informa-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
System components
4
292
4-5. Using the driving support systems
tion display and/or multimedia
display depending on the position and distance to the object.
(As the distance to the object
becomes short, the distance
segments may blink.)
2 Press
or
and then press
to select
.
When the intuitive parking assist
function is disabled, the intuitive
parking assist OFF indicator
(P.82) illuminates.
 Multi-information display
To re-enable the system when it
was disabled, select
on the
multi-information display, select
and then On. If disabled using
this method, the system will not be
re-enabled by turning the engine
switch off and then to ON.
■ When towing a trailer
When the 7-pin connector is connected and Auto Trailer Detection
(ATD) (P.286) is activated, the
rear sensor automatically turns off.
 Multimedia display
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of
Front center sensor detection
the system
There is a limit to the degree of
recognition accuracy and control
performance that this system can
provide, do not overly rely on this
system. The driver is always
responsible for paying attention to
the vehicle’ surroundings and
driving safely.
Rear corner sensor detection
■ To ensure the system can
Front corner sensor detection
Rear center sensor detection
Turning intuitive parking
assist on/off
Use the meter control switches
to enable/disable the intuitive
parking assist. (P.94)
1 Press
or
to select
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
operate properly
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the
vehicle being unable to be driven
safely and possibly cause an accident.
● Do not damage the sensors,
and always keep them clean.
.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Do not attach a sticker or install
an electronic component, such
as a backlit license plate (especially fluorescent type), fog
lights, fender pole or wireless
antenna near a radar sensor.
293
● When using steam to clean the
vehicle, do not direct steam too
close to the sensors as doing so
may cause a sensor to malfunction.
■ The system can be operated
● Do not subject the surrounding
area of the sensor to a strong
impact. If subjected to an
impact, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota
dealer. If the front or rear
bumper needs to be
removed/installed or replaced,
contact your Toyota dealer.
when
● The engine switch is in ON.
● Intuitive parking assist function is
on.
● The vehicle speed is less than
about 6 mph (10 km/h).
● A shift position other than P is
selected.
● Do not modify, disassemble or
■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable
paint the sensors.
● Do not attach a license plate
● Keep your tires properly
inflated.
■ When to disable the function
In the following situations, disable
the function as it may operate
even though there is no possibility
of a collision.
● Failing to observe the warnings
above.
● A non-genuine Toyota suspen-
sion (lowered suspension, etc.)
is installed.
■ Notes when washing the vehi-
cle
Do not apply intensive bursts of
water or steam to the sensor
area.
Doing so may result in the sensor
malfunctioning.
● When using a high pressure
washer to wash the vehicle, do
not spray the sensors directly,
as doing so may cause a sensor
to malfunction.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable”
is displayed on the multi-information display
Water may be continuously flowing
4
Driving
cover.
Clean Parking Assist Sensor” is
displayed on the multi-information display
A sensor may be covered with water
drops, ice, snow, dirt, etc. Remove
the water drops, ice, snow, dirt, etc.,
from the sensor to return the system
to normal.
Also, due to ice forming on a sensor
at low temperatures, a warning
message may be displayed or the
sensor may not be able to detect an
object. Once the ice melts, the system will return to normal.
If a warning message is displayed
even if the sensor is clean, there
may be a sensor malfunction. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
294
4-5. Using the driving support systems
over the sensor surface, such as in
a heavy rain. When the system
determines that it is normal, the system will return to normal.
■ Sensor detection information
● The sensor’s detection areas are
limited to the areas around the
vehicle’ front and rear bumpers.
● The following situations may occur
during use.
• Depending on the shape of the
object and other factors, the
detection distance may shorten, or
detection may be impossible.
• Detection may be impossible if
static objects draw too close to the
sensor.
• There will be a short delay
between static object detection
and display (warning buzzer
sounds). Even at low speeds,
there is a possibility that the object
will come within 11.9 in. (30 cm)
before the display is shown and
the warning buzzer sounds.
• It might be difficult to hear the
buzzer due to the volume of the
audio system or air flow noise of
the air conditioning system.
• It may be difficult to hear the
sound of this system due to the
buzzers of other systems.
■ Objects which the system may
not be properly detected
The shape of the object may prevent the sensor from detecting it.
Pay particular attention to the following objects:
● Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
● Cotton, snow and other materials
that absorb sound waves
● Sharply-angled objects
● Low objects
● Tall objects with upper sections
projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle
■ Situations in which the system
may not operate properly
Certain vehicle conditions and the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
surrounding environment may affect
the ability of a sensor to correctly
detect objects. Particular instances
where this may occur are listed
below.
● There is dirt, snow, water drops or
ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the
sensors will resolve this problem.)
● A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the
area will resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a
sensor is frozen the sensor display may be displayed abnormally,
or objects, such as a wall, may not
be detected.
● When a sensor or the area around
a sensor is extremely hot or cold.
● On an extremely bumpy road, on
an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
● When vehicle horns, vehicle
detectors, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, the clearance sonar of other vehicles or
other devices which produce ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle
● A sensor is coated with a sheet of
spray or heavy rain.
● If objects draw too close to the
sensor.
● When a pedestrian is wearing
clothing that does not reflect ultrasonic waves (ex. skirts with gathers or frills).
● When objects that are not perpendicular to the ground, not perpendicular to the vehicle traveling
direction, uneven, or waving are in
the detection range.
● Strong wind is blowing
● When driving in inclement weather
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Situations in which the system
may operate even if there is no
possibility of a collision
In some situations, such as the following, the system may operate
even though there is no possibility of
a collision.
● When driving on a narrow road
● When driving toward a banner,
flag, low-hanging branch or boom
barrier (such as those used at railroad crossings, toll gates and
parking lots)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● When there is a rut or hole in the
surface of the road
● When driving on a metal cover
(grating), such as those used for
drainage ditches
● When driving up or down a steep
slope
● If a sensor is hit by a large amount
of water, such as when driving on
a flooded road
● There is dirt, snow, water drops or
ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the
sensors will resolve this problem.)
● A sensor is coated with a sheet of
spray or heavy rain
● When driving in inclement weather
such as fog, snow or a sandstorm
● When strong winds are blowing
4
Driving
such as fog, snow or a sandstorm
● When an object that cannot be
detected is between the vehicle
and a detected object
● If an object such as a vehicle,
motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian
cuts in front of the vehicle or runs
out from the side of the vehicle
● If the orientation of a sensor has
been changed due to a collision or
other impact
● When equipment that may
obstruct a sensor is installed, such
as a towing eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip,
etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
● If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered due to the carried load
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a
stable manner, such as when the
vehicle has been in an accident or
is malfunctioning
● When a tire chains, compact
spare tire or an emergency tire
puncture repair kit is used
● When the tailgate is opened
295
● When vehicle horns, vehicle
detectors, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, the clearance sonar of other vehicles or
other devices which produce ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle
● If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered due to the carried load
● If the orientation of a sensor has
been changed due to a collision or
other impact
● The vehicle is approaching a tall
or curved curb
● Driving close to columns (Hshaped steel beams, etc.) in multistory parking garages, construction sites, etc.
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a
stable manner, such as when the
vehicle has been in an accident or
is malfunctioning
296
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● On an extremely bumpy road, on
an incline, on gravel, or on grass
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150
cm)
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
● When a tire chains, compact
spare tire or an emergency tire
puncture repair kit is used
■ When towing a trailer
Rear sensors turn off when the
trailer connection is detected.
When reversing, the rear sensors
turn off, but the front corner sensors
operate.
■ Certification
P.635
Sensor detection display,
object distance
■ Detection range of the sen-
sors
Approximately 3.3 ft. (100
cm)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors cannot detect objects that
are extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object, etc.
297
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ The distance and buzzer
Approximate distance to obstacle
Buzzer
Front sensor:
3.3 ft. to 2.0 ft. (100 cm to 60 cm)*
Rear sensor:
Slow
4.9 ft. to 2.0 ft. (150 cm to 60 cm)*
2.0 ft. to 1.5 ft. (60 cm to 45 cm)*
Medium
1.5 ft. to 1.0 ft. (45 cm to 30 cm)*
Fast
1.0 ft. to 0.5 ft. (30 cm to 15 cm)
Less than 0.5 ft. (15 cm)
*
Continuous
: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (P.297)
■ Buzzer operation and dis-
tance to an object
4
adjusted on the multi-information display.
Use the meter control switches
to change settings. (P.94)
 The buzzer beeps faster as
the vehicle approaches an
object.
When the vehicle comes
within approximately 1.0 ft.
(30 cm) of the object, the
buzzer sounds continuously.
1 Press
 When 2 or more sensors
simultaneously detect a static
object, the buzzer sounds for
the nearest object.
 Even when the sensors are
operating, the buzzer will be
muted in some situations.
(automatic buzzer mute function)
■ Adjusting the buzzer vol-
ume
The buzzer volume can be
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
or
of the meter
control switch to select
2 Press
or
.
of the meter
control switch to select
and then press and hold
.
3 Select the volume and then
press
.
Each time the switch is pressed,
the volume level will change
between 1, 2, and 3.
■ Muting a buzzer
A mute button will be displayed
on the multi-information display
when an object is detected. To
mute the buzzer, press
.
Driving
A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.
298
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The buzzers for the intuitive
parking assist and RCTA function (if equipped) will be muted
simultaneously.
Mute will be canceled automatically in the following situations:
 When the shift position is
changed.
 When the vehicle speed
exceeds a certain speed.
 When there is a malfunction
in a sensor or the system is
temporarily unavailable.
 When the operating function
is disabled manually.
 When the engine switch is
turned off.
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)*
*: If equipped
The RCTA function uses the
BSM rear side radar sensors installed behind the
rear bumper. This function
is intended to assist the
driver in checking areas
that are not easily visible
when backing up.
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of
the system
● There is a limit to the degree of
recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly
rely on this system. The driver is
always responsible for paying
attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving safely.
(P.284)
● When the vehicle is lifted up,
except in the following cases.
• When using a Toyota official lift
kit up to 4 in. (101 mm), including tire height. Aftermarket lift
kits may degrade system performance.
■ To ensure the system can
operate properly
P.285
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
System components
299
The buzzer also sounds for approximately 1 second immediately after
the RCTA function is turned on.
Turning the RCTA function on/off
Use the meter control switches
to enable/disable the RCTA
function. (P.94)
1 Press
or
to select
2 Press
or
to select
“RCTA” and then press
Turning the RCTA function on/off.
Outside rear view mirror indicators
When a vehicle approaching from
the right or left at the rear of the
vehicle is detected, both outside
rear view mirror indicators will flash.
Multimedia display
If a vehicle approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle
is detected, the RCTA icon
(P.300) for the detected side will
be displayed on the multimedia display. This illustration shows an
example of a vehicle approaching
from both sides of the vehicle.
RCTA buzzer
If a vehicle approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle
is detected, a buzzer will sound.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
.
When the RCTA function is disabled, the “RCTA OFF” indicator
(P.82) illuminates. (Each time the
engine switch is turned off then
changed to ON, the RCTA function
will be enabled automatically.)
■ When towing a trailer
When Auto Trailer Detection (ATD)
(P.286) is activated, the function
automatically turns off.
■ Outside rear view mirror indica-
tor visibility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear
view mirror indicator may be difficult
to see.
■ Hearing the RCTA buzzer
The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to
hear over loud noises, such as high
audio volume.
■ When “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Unavailable” is shown on the
multi-information display
The sensor voltage has become
abnormal, or water, snow, mud, etc.,
may be built up in the vicinity of the
sensor area of the rear bumper.
(P.285)
Removing the water, snow, mud,
etc., from the vicinity of the sensor
4
Driving
Meter control switches
.
300
4-5. Using the driving support systems
area should return it to normal. Also,
the sensor may not function normally when used in extremely hot or
cold weather.
of the vehicle is detected, the
following will be displayed on
the multimedia display.
■ When “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
This illustration shows an example of a vehicle approaching
from both sides of the vehicle.
Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”
is shown on the multi-information display
There may be a sensor malfunction
or misaligned. Have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer.
■ Radar sensors
P.285
RCTA function
■ Operation of the RCTA
function
The RCTA function uses radar
sensors to detect vehicles
approaching from the right or left
at the rear of the vehicle and
alerts the driver of the presence
of such vehicles by flashing the
outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.
■ RCTA function detection
areas
The areas that vehicles can be
detected in are outlined below.
The buzzer can alert for faster
vehicles approaching from farther away.
Example:
Approaching vehicles
Detection areas of approaching vehicles
■ RCTA icon display
When a vehicle approaching
from the right or left at the rear
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
301
■ Muting a buzzer temporarily
Approaching vehicle
Speed
Approximate alert
distance
Fast
17 mph
(28 km/h)
66 ft. (20
m)
Slow
5 mph (8
km/h)
18 ft. (5.5
m)
■ The RCTA function is opera-
■ Adjusting the buzzer volume
The buzzer volume can be adjusted
on the multi-information display.
Use the meter control switches to
change settings. (P.94)
1 Press
or
system will not detect a vehicle
The RCTA function is not designed
to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:
● Vehicles approaching from directly
behind
● Vehicles backing up in a parking
space next to your vehicle
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot
detect due to obstructions
of the meter
control switch to select
.
2 Press
or
of the meter
control switch to select “RCTA”
and then press and hold
.
3 Press
■ Conditions under which the
to select the volume.
Each time the switch is pressed, the
volume level will change between 1,
2, and 3.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked
vehicles and similar stationary
objects*
● Small motorcycles, bicycles,
pedestrians, etc.*
● Vehicles moving away from your
4
Driving
tional when
The RCTA function operates when
all of the following conditions are
met:
● The engine switch is in ON.
● The RCTA function is on.
● The shift position is in R.
● The vehicle speed is less than
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
● The approaching vehicle speed is
between approximately 5 mph (8
km/h) and 17 mph (28 km/h).
● The 7-pin connector for Trailer
Brake controller is not engaged. (if
equipped)
A mute button will be displayed on
the multi-information display when a
vehicles or an object is detected. To
mute the buzzer, press
.
The buzzers for the RCTA function
and intuitive parking assist will be
muted simultaneously.
Mute will be canceled automatically
in the following situations:
● When the shift lever is changed.
● When the vehicle speed exceeds
a certain speed.
● When there is a malfunction in a
sensor or the system is temporarily unavailable.
● When the operating function is
disabled manually.
● When the engine switch is turned
off.
302
4-5. Using the driving support systems
vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the
parking spaces next to your vehicle*
● The distance between the sensor
and approaching vehicle gets too
close
*
: Depending on the conditions,
detection of a vehicle and/or
object may occur.
■ Situations in which the system
may not operate properly
The RCTA function may not detect
vehicles correctly in the following
situations:
● When the sensor is misaligned
due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
● When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,
etc.,is covering the sensor or surrounding area on the position
above the rear bumper
● When driving on a road surface
that is wet with standing water
during bad weather, such as
heavy rain, snow, or fog
● When multiple vehicles are
approaching with only a small gap
between each vehicle
● When a vehicle is approaching at
high speed
● When equipment that may
obstruct a sensor is installed, such
as a towing eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip,
etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
● When backing up on a slope with
a sharp change in grade
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● When backing out of a sharp
angle parking spot
● Immediately after the RCTA func-
tion is turned on
● Immediately after the engine is
started with the RCTA function on
● When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the
detection area
● When a sensor or the area around
a sensor is extremely hot or cold
● If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than
specified are installed
● If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered due to the carried load
● When turning while backing up
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● When a vehicle turns into the
detection area
303
● When equipment that may
obstruct a sensor is installed, such
as a towing eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip,
etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
● When a vehicle passes by the
side of your vehicle
4
■ Situations in which the system
● When a detected vehicle turns
while approaching the vehicle
● When there are spinning objects
● When the distance between your
vehicle and metal objects, such as
a guardrail, wall, sigh, or parked
vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves toward the rear of the
vehicle, is short
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
near your vehicle such as the fan
of an air conditioning unit
● When water is splashed or
sprayed toward the rear bumper,
such as from a sprinkler
● Moving objects (flags, exhaust
fumes, large rain droplets or
snowflakes, rain water on the road
surface, etc.)
● When the distance between your
vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc.,
that enters the detection area is
short
● Gratings and gutters
Driving
may operate even if there is no
possibility of a collision
Instances of the RCTA function
unnecessary detecting a vehicle
and/or object may increase in the
following situations:
● When the parking space faces a
street and vehicles are being
driven on the street
304
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● When a sensor or the area around
a sensor is extremely hot or cold
● If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than
specified are installed
● If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered due to the carried load
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)*
*: If equipped
The Parking Support Brake
system consists of the following functions that operate when driving at a low
speed or backing up, such
as when parking. When the
system determines that the
probability of a collision
with a detected object or
pedestrian is high, a warning operates to urge the
driver to take evasive
action. If the system determines that the possibility of
a collision with a detected
object or pedestrian is
extremely high, the brakes
are automatically applied to
help avoid the collision or
help reduce the impact of
the collision.
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) system
■ Parking Support Brake
function (static objects)
P.309
■ Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing
vehicles)
P.312
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of
the system
Do not overly rely on the system,
as doing so may lead to an accident.
Always drive while checking the
safety of the surroundings of the
vehicle.
Depending on the vehicle and
road conditions, weather, etc., the
system may not operate.
The detection capabilities of sensors and radars are limited.
Always drive while checking the
safety of the surroundings of the
vehicle.
● The driver is solely responsible
● The Parking Support Brake sys-
tem is not designed to stop the
vehicle completely. Additionally,
even if the system has stopped
the vehicle, it is necessary to
depress the brake pedal immediately as brake control will be
canceled after approximately 2
seconds.
● It is extremely dangerous to
check the system operations by
intentionally driving the vehicle
into the direction of a wall, etc.
Never attempt such actions.
■ When to disable the Parking
Support Brake
In the following situations, disable
the Parking Support Brake as the
system may operate even though
there is no possibility of a collision.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● When inspecting the vehicle
using a chassis roller, chassis
dynamo or free roller
● When loading the vehicle onto a
boat, truck or other transport
vessel
● If the suspension has been
modified or tires of a size other
than specified are installed
● If the front of the vehicle is
raised or lowered due to the
carried load
● When equipment that may
obstruct a sensor is installed,
such as a towing eyelet, bumper
protector (an additional trim
strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or
snow plow
● When using automatic car
washing devices
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in
a stable manner, such as when
the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning
● When the vehicle is driven in a
sporty manner or off-road
● When the tires are not properly
inflated
● When the tires are very worn
● When a tire chains, compact
spare tire or an emergency tire
puncture repair kit is used
4
Driving
for safe driving. Always drive
carefully, taking care to observe
your surroundings. The Parking
Support Brake system is
designed to provide support to
lessen the severity of collisions.
However, it may not operate in
some situations.
305
306
4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE
■ If “PKSB Unavailable” is dis-
played on the multi-information display and the PKSB
OFF indicator is on
If this message is displayed
immediately after the engine
switch is changed to ON, operate
the vehicle carefully, paying attention to your surroundings. It may
be necessary to drive the vehicle
for a certain amount of time
before the system returns to normal. (If the system does not return
to normal after driving for a while,
clean the sensors and their surrounding area on the bumpers.)
Enabling/Disabling the
Parking Support Brake
Press the switch to enable/disable the parking support brake.
All of the Parking Support Brake
functions (static objects and
rear-crossing vehicles) are
enabled/disabled simultaneously.
enabled by turning the engine
switch off and then to ON.
■ When towing a trailer
When the 7-pin connector is connected and Auto Trailer Detection
(ATD) (P.286) is activated, the
function automatically turns off.
■ When “4L” mode selected (4WD
models)
The parking support brake is automatically disabled.
Display and buzzer for
engine output restriction
control and brake control
If the engine output restriction control or brake control operates, a
buzzer will sound and a message
will be displayed on the multi-information display and head-up display
(if equipped), multimedia display, to
alert the driver.
Depending on the situation, engine
output restriction control will operate to either limit acceleration or
restrict output as much as possible.
 Engine output restriction control is operating (acceleration
restriction)
Acceleration greater than a certain
amount is restricted by the system.
Multi-information display: “Object
Detected Acceleration Reduced”
When the Parking Support Brake is
disabled, the PKSB OFF indicator
(P.82) illuminates.
To enable the system, press the
switch again. If disabled using this
method, the system will not be re-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Multimedia display and head-up
display (if equipped): No warning
displayed
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated
Buzzer: Does not sound
4-5. Using the driving support systems
 Engine output restriction control is operating (output
restricted as much as possible)
The system has determined that
stronger-than-normal brake operation is necessary.
Multimedia display: “BRAKE!”
Multi-information display and headup display (if equipped): “BRAKE!”
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated
Buzzer: Short beep
 Brake control is operating
The system determined that emergency braking is necessary.
System overview
If the Parking Support Brake
determines that a collision with a
detected object is possible, the
engine output will be restricted
to restrain any increase in the
vehicle speed. (Engine output
restriction control: See figure 2.)
Additionally, if the accelerator
pedal continues to be
depressed, the brakes will be
applied automatically to reduce
the vehicle speed. (Brake control: See figure 3.)
 Figure 1 When the PKSB
(Parking Support Brake) is not
operating
Multi-information display and headup display (if equipped): “BRAKE!”
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated
Buzzer: Short beep
 Vehicle stopped by system
operation
The vehicle has been stopped by
brake control operation.
Multimedia display: “Press Brake
Pedal”
Multi-information display and headup display (if equipped): “Switch to
Brake” (If the accelerator pedal is
not depressed, “Press Brake Pedal”
will be displayed.)
PKSB OFF indicator: Illuminated
Buzzer: Short beep
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Engine output
Braking force
Time
 Figure 2 When engine output
restriction control operates
4
Driving
Multimedia display: “BRAKE!”
307
308
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Brake control begins operating (System determines that
possibility of collision with
detected object is extremely
high)
■ If the Parking Support Brake
Engine output
Braking force
Time
Engine output restriction control begins operating (System
determines that possibility of
collision with detected object
is high)
 Figure 3 When engine output
restriction control and brake
control operates
Engine output
Braking force
Time
Engine output restriction control begins operating (System
determines that possibility of
collision with detected object
is high)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
has operated
If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of the Parking Support Brake,
the Parking Support Brake will be
disabled and the PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate. If the Parking Support Brake operates unnecessarily,
brake control can be canceled by
depressing the brake pedal or waiting for approximately 2 seconds for
it to automatically be canceled.
Then, the vehicle can be operated
by depressing the accelerator pedal.
■ Re-enabling the Parking Sup-
port Brake
To re-enable the Parking Support
Brake when it has been disabled
due to operation of the Parking Support Brake, either enable the system
again (P.306), or turn the engine
switch off and then back to ON.
Additionally, if any of the following
conditions are met, the system will
be re-enabled automatically and the
PKSB OFF indicator will turn off:
● The P shift position is selected
● The object is no longer detected in
the traveling direction of the vehicle
● The traveling direction of the vehicle changes
■ If “PKSB Unavailable” is dis-
played on the multi-information
display and the PKSB OFF indicator is on
If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of the Parking Support Brake,
the Parking Support Brake will be
disabled and the PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● A sensor may be covered with
water drops, ice, snow, dirt, etc.
Remove the water drops, ice,
snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to
return the system to normal.
Also, due to ice forming on a sensor at low temperatures, a warning message may be displayed or
the sensor may not be able to
detect an object. Once the ice
melts, the system will return to
normal.
● If this message continues to be
displayed even after cleaning the
sensor, or is displayed even
though the sensor is clean, have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ If a battery terminal has been
Parking Support Brake
function (static
objects)*
*
: If equipped
If the sensors detect a static
object, such as a wall, in the
traveling direction of the
vehicle and the system
determines that a collision
may occur due to the vehicle suddenly moving forward due to an accidental
accelerator pedal operation,
the vehicle moving the
unintended direction due to
the wrong shift position
being selected, or while
parking or traveling at low
speeds, the system will
operate to lessen the impact
with the detected static
object and reduce the
resulting damage.
Examples of function
operation
This function will operate in situations such as the following if an
object is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
disconnected and reconnected
The system needs to be initialized.
To initialize the system, drive the
vehicle straight ahead for 5 seconds
or more at a speed of approximately
22 mph (35 km/h) or more.
309
310
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ When traveling at a low
speed and the brake pedal
is not depressed, or is
depressed late
■ When the accelerator pedal
is depressed excessively
■ When the vehicle moves in
the unintended direction
due to the wrong shift position being selected
Types of sensors
P.291
WARNING
■ To ensure the system can
operate properly
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the
vehicle being unable to be driven
safely and possibly cause an accident.
● Do not damage the sensors,
and always keep them clean.
● Do not attach a sticker or install
an electronic component, such
as a backlit license plate (especially fluorescent type), fog
lights, fender pole or wireless
antenna near a radar sensor.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Do not subject the surrounding
area of the sensor to a strong
impact. If subjected to an
impact, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota
dealer. If the front or rear
bumper needs to be
removed/installed or replaced,
contact your Toyota dealer.
● Do not modify, disassemble or
paint the sensors.
● Do not attach a license plate
cover.
● Keep your tires properly
inflated.
311
■ Notes when washing the vehi-
cle
Do not apply intensive bursts of
water or steam to the sensor
area.
Doing so may result in the sensor
malfunctioning.
● When using a high pressure
washer to wash the vehicle, do
not spray the sensors directly,
as doing so may cause a sensor
to malfunction.
● When using steam to clean the
vehicle, do not direct steam too
close to the sensors as doing so
may cause a sensor to malfunction.
4
■ Handling the suspension
■ If the Parking Support Brake
function (static objects) operates unnecessarily, such as
at a railroad crossing
In the event that the Parking Support Brake function (static objects)
operates unnecessarily, such as
at a railroad crossing, brake control will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds, allowing you to
proceed forward and leave the
area, brake control can also be
canceled by depressing the brake
pedal. Depressing the accelerator pedal after brake control is
canceled will allow you to proceed
forward and leave the area.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ The Parking Support Brake
function (static object) will
operate when
The function will operate when the
PKSB OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing (P.82, 523) and
all of the following conditions are
met:
● Engine output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is
enabled.
• The vehicle speed is approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.
• There is a static object in the traveling direction of the vehicle and
approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m)
away.
• The Parking Support Brake determines that a stronger-than-normal brake operation is necessary
to avoid a collision.
● Brake control
• Engine output restriction control is
operating.
• The Parking Support Brake determines that an immediate brake
operation is necessary to avoid a
collision.
Driving
Do not modify the suspension, as
changes to the height or inclination of the vehicle may prevent
the sensors from detecting
objects correctly or cause the system to not operate or operate
unnecessarily.
312
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ The Parking Support Brake
function (static objects) will
stop operating when
The function will stop operating if
any of the following conditions are
met:
● Engine output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• The system determines that the
collision has become avoidable
with normal brake operation.
• The static object is no longer
approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m)
away from the vehicle or in the
traveling direction of the vehicle.
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• Approximately 2 seconds have
elapsed since the vehicle was
stopped by brake control.
• The brake pedal is depressed
after the vehicle is stopped by
brake control.
• The static object is no longer
approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m)
away from the vehicle or in the
traveling direction of the vehicle.
■ Detection range of the Parking
Support Brake function (static
objects)
The detection range of the Parking
Support Brake function (static
objects) differs from the detection
range of the intuitive parking assist.
(P.296) Therefore, even if the intuitive parking assist detects an object
and provides a warning, the Parking
Support Brake function (static
objects) may not start operating.
■ Situations in which the system
may not operate properly
P.294
■ Situations in which the system
may operate even if there is no
possibility of a collision
P.295
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing
vehicles)*
*
: If equipped
If a rear radar sensor
detects a vehicle approaching from the right or left at
the rear of the vehicle and
the system determines that
the possibility of a collision
is high, this function will
perform brake control to
reduce the likelihood of an
impact with the approaching vehicle.
Examples of function
operation
This function will operate in situations such as the following if a
vehicle is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle.
■ When reversing, a vehicle is
approaching and the brake
pedal is not depressed, or
is depressed late
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Types of sensors
P.285
WARNING
■ To ensure the system can
operate properly
Observe the following precautions
regarding the rear radar sensors
(P.285). Failure to do so may
cause a sensor to not operate
properly, and may cause an accident.
● Do not modify, disassemble or
paint the sensors.
● Do not replace a rear radar sen-
sor with a part other than a genuine part.
sensors, and always keep the
radar sensors and their surrounding area on the bumper
clean.
● If the area around a rear radar
sensor is subjected to an
impact, the system may not
operate properly due to a sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
● Observe the rear radar sensor
handling precautions. (P.285)
■ The Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing vehicles) will operate when
The function will operate when the
PKSB OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing (P.82, 523) and
all of the following conditions are
met:
● Engine output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is
enabled.
• The vehicle speed is approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
• Vehicles are approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a traveling speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.
• The shift position is in R.
• The Parking Support Brake determines that a stronger than normal
brake operation is necessary to
avoid a collision with an approaching vehicle.
● Brake control
• Engine output restriction control is
operating.
• The Parking Support Brake determines that an emergency brake
operation is necessary to avoid a
collision with an approaching vehicle.
■ The Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing vehicles) will stop operating when
The function will stop operating if
any of the following conditions are
met:
● Engine output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• The collision becomes avoidable
with normal brake operation.
• A vehicle is no longer approaching
from the right or left at the rear of
the vehicle.
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• Approximately 2 seconds have
elapsed since the vehicle was
stopped by brake control.
• The brake pedal is depressed
after the vehicle is stopped by
brake control.
• A vehicle is no longer approaching
from the right or left at the rear of
the vehicle.
■ Detection area of the Parking
Support Brake function (rearcrossing vehicles)
The detection area of the Parking
Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) differs from the detection area of the RCTA function
4
Driving
● Do not damage the rear radar
313
314
4-5. Using the driving support systems
(P.300). Therefore, even if the
RCTA function detects a vehicle and
provides an alert, the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing
vehicles) may not start operating.
■ Situations in which the system
may not operate properly
P.302
■ Situations in which the system
may operate even if there is no
possibility of a collision
P.303
Toyota parking assist
monitor*
*: If equipped
The parking assist monitor
assists the driver by displaying an image of the
view behind the vehicle
while backing up, for example while parking.
When the display is
changed to the wide rear
view mode, a wider lateral
view behind the vehicle will
be displayed.
● The screen illustrations used in
this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the
image that is actually displayed on
the screen.
Driving precautions
The parking assist monitor is a
supplemental device intended to
assist the driver when backing
up. When backing up, be sure to
visually check all around the
vehicle both directly and using
the mirrors before proceeding. If
you do not, you may hit another
vehicle, and could possibly
cause an accident.
Pay attention to the following
precautions when using the
parking assist monitor.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Never depend on the parking
assist monitor entirely when
backing up. The image and the
position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may differ
from the actual state.
Use caution, just as you would
when backing up any vehicle.
● Be sure to back up slowly,
depressing the brake pedal to
control vehicle speed.
● If you seem likely to hit nearby
vehicles, obstacles, people or
mount the shoulder, depress the
brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
● The instructions given are only
● When parking, be sure to check
that the parking space will
accommodate your vehicle
before maneuvering into it.
● In low temperatures, the screen
may darken or the image may
become faint. The image could
distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable
to see the image on the screen.
Be sure to visually check all
around the vehicle both directly
and using the mirrors before
proceeding.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the
position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may
change.
● The camera uses a special lens.
The distances between objects
and pedestrians that appear in
the image displayed on the
screen will differ from the actual
distances. (P.321)
Screen display
The parking assist monitor
screen will be displayed if the
shift lever is shifted to R while
the engine switch is in ON.
monitor in the following cases:
Each time the display mode
switching button is selected, the
mode will change as follows:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or
in snow
Rear view: Displays the rear view of
the vehicle.
• When using tire chains or emergency tires
Wide rear view: Displays a near
180° image from the rear view camera.
● Do not use the parking assist
• When the tailgate is not closed
completely
• On roads that are not flat or
straight, such as curves or
slopes
• If the suspension has been
modified or tires of a size other
than specified are installed
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
guidelines. When and how
much to turn the steering wheel
will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc.,
when parking. It is necessary to
be fully aware of this before
using the parking assist system.
315
316
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Display mode switching button
Each time the button is selected,
the rear view mode and the wide
rear view mode are switched.
Guide line switching button
Select to switch the guide line
mode. (P.316)
• Each time the button is selected,
the display mode changes in the
following order:
Canceling Toyota parking
assist monitor
The parking assist monitor is
canceled when the shift lever is
shifted into any position other
than R.
Using the system
Use any of the following modes.
Estimated course line display mode
 Parking assist guide line display
mode  Distance guide line display
mode  Center guide line display
mode.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert*
When a sensor detects a vehicle
approaching from the rear, the
direction of the vehicle approaching
from the rear is displayed and the
buzzer sounds.
Intuitive parking assist*
When a sensor detects a stationary
object, the direction of and the
approximate distance to the a stationary object are displayed and the
buzzer sounds.
 Estimated course line display
mode (P.317)
Estimated course lines are displayed which move in accordance with the operation of the
steering wheel.
*: If equipped
● For details about the Rear Cross
Traffic Alert function (P.298) and
intuitive parking assist. (P.291)
WARNING
● As the Rear Cross Traffic Alert
display is displayed over the
camera view, it may be difficult
to see the Rear Cross Traffic
Alert display depending on the
color and brightness of the surrounding area.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
 Parking assist guide line dis-
play mode (P.318)
The steering wheel return points
(parking assist guide lines) are
displayed.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
317
This mode is recommended for
those who are comfortable with
parking the vehicle without the
aid of the estimated course
lines.
Estimated course line display mode
Screen description
 Distance guide line display
mode (P.319)
4
Driving
Distance guide lines only are
displayed.
This mode is recommended for
those who are comfortable with
parking the vehicle without the
aid of the guide lines.
Vehicle width guide line
Displays a guide path when the
vehicle is being backed straight up.
Estimated course lines
Show an estimated course when
the steering wheel is turned.
Distance guide lines
 Center guide line display
mode (P.319)
Estimated course lines and
vehicle center line are displayed
which move in accordance with
the operation of the steering
wheel.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Show distance behind the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned.
• The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated course
lines.
• The guide lines display points
approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red)
and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the center of the edge
of the bumper.
318
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Distance guide line
Shows distance behind the vehicle.
• Displays a point approximately
1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue) from the
edge of the bumper.
Vehicle center guide line
Indicates the estimated vehicle
center on the ground.
WARNING
Shows distance behind the vehicle.
• Displays points approximately 1.5
ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of
the bumper.
Vehicle center guide line
Indicates the estimated vehicle
center on the ground.
Distance guide line display mode
● If the steering wheel is straight
and the vehicle width guide
lines and the estimated course
lines are not in alignment, have
the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
Screen description
Parking assist guide line
display mode
Screen description
Distance guide line
Shows distance behind the vehicle.
• Displays points approximately 1.5
ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of
the bumper.
Vehicle width guide line
Displays a guide path when the
vehicle is being backed straight up.
• The displayed width is wider than
the actual vehicle width.
Parking assist guide lines
Show the path of the smallest turn
possible behind the vehicle.
Distance guide line
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Center guide line display
mode
319
 Rear view
Screen description
Center guide line
4
Indicates the estimated vehicle
center.
Area displayed on screen
Corners of bumper
• The area around both corners of
the bumper will not be displayed.
 Wide rear view
The parking assist monitor displays an image of the view from
the bumper of the rear area of
the vehicle.
Corners of bumper
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
Toyota parking assist
monitor precautions
320
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• The area around both corners of
the bumper will not be displayed.
● The image adjustment procedure
for the parking assist monitor
screen is the same as the procedure for adjusting the screen display. (Refer to the “MULTIMEDIA
OWNER’S MANUAL”.)
● The area displayed on the screen
may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions.
● Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper cannot be displayed.
● The camera uses a special lens.
The distance of the image that
appears on the screen differs from
the actual distance.
● Items which are located higher
than the camera may not be displayed on the monitor.
The camera
The camera for the parking
assist monitor is located as
shown in the illustration.
camera lens clean with a soft
and wet cloth.
NOTICE
● The parking assist monitor may
not operate properly in the following cases.
• If the back of the vehicle is hit,
the position and mounting angle
of the camera may change.
• As the camera has a water
proof construction, do not
detach, disassemble or modify
it. This may cause incorrect
operation.
NOTICE
• When cleaning the camera lens,
flush the camera with a large
quantity of water and wipe it
with a soft and wet cloth.
Strongly rubbing the camera
lens may cause the camera lens
to be scratched and unable to
transmit a clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent,
car wax, window cleaner or a
glass coating to adhere to the
camera. If this happens, wipe it
off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is
poured on the vehicle in cold
weather, the system may not
operate normally.
■ Using the camera
If dirt or foreign matter (such as
water droplets, snow, mud, etc.)
is adhering to the camera, it
cannot transmit a clear image.
In this case, flush it with a large
quantity of water and wipe the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
• When washing the vehicle, do
not apply intensive bursts of
water to the camera or camera
area. Doing so may result in the
camera malfunctioning.
● Do not expose the camera to
strong impact as this could
cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Differences between the
screen and the actual road
321
on the road.
 The distance guide lines and
the vehicle width guide lines
may not actually be parallel
with the dividing lines of the
parking space, even when
they appear to be so. Be sure
to check visually.
 The distances between the
vehicle width guide lines and
the left and right dividing lines
of the parking space may not
be equal, even when they
appear to be so. Be sure to
check visually.
■ When the ground behind
the vehicle slopes up
sharply
The distance guidelines are projected on a horizontal surface,
distances on an upward sloping
surface appear farther from the
vehicle than the actual distance.
Because of this, objects will
appear to be farther away than
they actually are. In the same
way, there will be a margin of
error between the guidelines
and the actual distance/course
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ When the ground behind
the vehicle slopes down
sharply
The distance guidelines are projected on a horizontal surface,
distances on an downward sloping surface appear closer to the
vehicle than the actual distance.
Because of this, objects will
appear to be closer than they
actually are. In the same way,
there will be a margin of error
between the guidelines and the
actual distance/course on the
road.
Driving
 The distance guide lines give
a distance guide for flat road
surfaces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the guide
lines on the screen and the
actual distance/course on the
road.
4
322
4-5. Using the driving support systems
When approaching threedimensional objects
The estimated course lines target flat surfaced objects (such
as the road). It is not possible to
determine the position of threedimensional objects (such as
vehicles) using the estimated
course lines and distance guide
lines. When approaching a
three-dimensional object that
extends outward (such as the
flatbed of a truck), be careful of
the following.
■ When any part of the vehi-
cle sags
When the vehicle posture tilts
due to the number of passengers or the distribution of the
load, there is a margin of error
between the guide lines on the
screen and the actual distance/course on the road.
A margin of error
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Estimated course lines
Visually check the surroundings
and the area behind the vehicle.
In the case shown below, the
truck appears to be outside of
the estimated course lines and
the vehicle does not look as if it
hits the truck. However, the rear
body of the truck may actually
cross over the estimated course
lines. In reality if you back up as
guided by the estimated course
lines, the vehicle may hit the
truck.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
up to point
323
, you will hit the
truck. On the screen, it appears
that
is closest and
is farthest away. However, in reality,
the distance to
and
is the
same, and
and
is farther than
.
4
Distance guide lines
Visually check the surroundings
and the area behind the vehicle.
On the screen, it appears that a
truck is parking at point .
However, in reality if you back
Things you should know
If you notice any symptoms
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause
and the solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
Estimated course lines
324
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Symptom
Likely cause
Solution
 The vehicle is in a dark
area
 The temperature
Back up while visually
around the lens is
checking the vehicle’s
either high or low
surroundings. (Use the
 The outside tempera- monitor again once conture is low
ditions have been
 There are water drop- improved.)
lets on the camera
The image is difficult to  It is raining or humid The procedure for
see
 Foreign matter (mud, adjusting the picture
etc.) is adhering to the quality of the parking
assist monitor is the
camera
 Sunlight or headlights same as the procedure
for adjusting the screen
are shining directly
display. (Refer to the
into the camera
“MULTIMEDIA
 The vehicle is under
OWNER’S MANUAL”.)
fluorescent lights,
sodium lights, mercury lights, etc.
The image is blurry
Flush the camera with a
Dirt or foreign matter
large quantity of water
(such as water droplets,
and wipe the camera
snow, mud, etc.) is
lens clean with a soft
adhering to the camera.
and wet cloth.
The image is out of
alignment
The camera or surrounding area has
received a strong
impact.
Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The camera position is
out of alignment.
Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The guide lines are
very far out of alignment
If this happens due to
 The vehicle is tilted
(there is a heavy load these causes, it does
not indicate a malfuncon the vehicle, tire
pressure is low due to tion.
a tire puncture, etc.)
Back up while visually
 The vehicle is used on checking the vehicle’s
an incline.
surroundings.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Symptom
The estimated course
lines move even
though the steering
wheel is straight
Likely cause
325
Solution
There is a malfunction in Have the vehicle
the signals being output inspected by your Toyby the steering sensor. ota dealer.
Close the tailgate.
Guide lines are not disThe tailgate is open.
played
is displayed
If this does not resolve
the symptom, have the
vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
 Battery has been reinstalled.
 The steering wheel
Stop the vehicle, and
has been moved while turn the steering wheel
the battery was being as far as it will go to the
reinstalled.
left and right.
 Battery power is low.
If this does not resolve
 The steering sensor
has been reinstalled. the symptom, have the
 There is a malfunction vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
in the signals being
output by the steering
sensor.
326
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Panoramic view monitor*
*: If equipped
Panoramic view monitor
assists the driver in viewing
the surroundings, when
operating at low speeds, by
combining the front, side
and rear cameras and displaying a complete vehicle
overhead image on the
screen.
When you press the camera
switch or shift the shift lever
to R while the engine switch
is in ON, the panoramic
view monitor operates.
The monitor displays various views of the position
and surroundings of the
vehicle.
● The screen illustrations used in
this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the
image that is actually displayed on
the screen.
Driving precautions
The panoramic view monitor is a
supplemental device intended to
assist the driver when checking
around the vehicle. When using,
be sure to visually check all
around the vehicle both directly
and using the mirrors before
proceeding. If you do not, you
may hit another vehicle or possi-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
bly cause an accident.
Pay attention to the following
precautions when using the
panoramic view monitor.
WARNING
● Never depend on the panoramic
view monitor entirely. The
image and the position of the
guide lines displayed on the
screen may differ from the
actual state. Use caution just as
you would when driving any
other vehicle.
● Always make sure to check all
around the vehicle with your
own eyes when driving.
● Never drive while looking only at
the screen as the image on the
screen is different from actual
conditions. If you are driving
while looking only at the screen,
you may hit a person or an
object, resulting in an accident.
When driving, be sure to check
the vehicle’s surroundings with
your own eyes and the vehicle’s
mirrors.
● Depending on the circum-
stances of the vehicle (number
of passengers, amount of luggage, etc.), the position of the
guide lines displayed on the
screen may change. Be sure to
check visually around the vehicle before proceeding.
● Do not use the panoramic view
monitor system in the following
cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or
in snow
• When using tire chains or emergency tires
• When the front door or the tailgate is not closed completely
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
• On roads that are not flat or
straight, such as curves or
slopes
• If the suspension has been
modified or tires of a size other
than specified are installed
● In low temperatures, the screen
may darken or the image may
become faint. The image could
distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable
to see the image on the screen.
Be sure to visually check all
around the vehicle both directly
and using the mirrors before
proceeding.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the
● The camera uses a special lens.
The distances between objects
and pedestrians that appear in
the image displayed on the
screen will differ from the actual
distances. (P.354)
● When an aftermarket part is
installed in the display area of
the screen.
NOTICE
● In panoramic view/moving
view/see-through view, the system combines images taken
from the front, back, left and
right side cameras into a single
image. There are limits to the
range and content that can be
displayed. Familiarize yourself
with the characteristics of the
panoramic view monitor system
before using it.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Image clarity may decline at the
four corners of the panoramic
view/moving view/see-through
view. However, this is not a malfunction, as these are the
regions along the border of
each camera image where the
images are combined.
● Depending on lighting condi-
tions near each of the cameras,
bright and dark patches may
appear on the panoramic
view/moving view/see-through
view.
● The panoramic view/moving
view/see-through view display
does not extend higher than the
installation position and image
capture range of each camera.
4
● There are blind spots around
the vehicle. Accordingly, there
are regions not displayed in
panoramic view.
● Three-dimensional objects dis-
played in wide front view, rear
view or side view may not be
displayed in panoramic
view/moving view/see-through
view.
● People and other three-dimen-
sional obstacles may appear
differently when displayed on
the panoramic view monitor.
(These differences include,
among others, cases in which
displayed objects appear to
have fallen over, disappear near
image processing areas, appear
from image processing areas,
or when the actual distance to
an object differs from the displayed position.)
Driving
position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may
change.
327
328
4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE
● When the tailgate, which is
equipped with the back camera,
or front doors, which are
equipped with door mirrors that
have built-in side cameras, are
open, images will not be displayed properly on the panoramic view monitor.
Camera switch
The camera switch is located as
shown in the illustration.
● The vehicle icon displayed in
panoramic view/moving
view/see-through view is a computer generated image. Accordingly, properties such as the
color, shape and size will differ
from the actual vehicle. For this
reason, nearby three-dimensional objects may appear to be
touching the vehicle, and actual
distances to three-dimensional
objects may differ from those
displayed.
Menu button
The screens which are displayed from the following buttons can be
selected. Also, the display can be changed to various screens from
button combinations.
The button display changes due to the situation of the vehicle, such
as the screen and speed being displayed, shift position, vehicle
equipment, etc.
The menu button is displayed when the shift lever is in D, N, or R.
Front view button
Front split view button
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
329
Panoramic view on/off button
Guide line select button (P.336,340)
Auto mode on/off button (P.337)
Multi-terrain Monitor on/off button (P.362)
Center guide line on/off button (P.340)
Bed view button (P.347)
Rear split view button
Rear view button
Display
4
Checking around the vehicle
Driving
When the shift lever is in P.
 Moving view
Press
.
Checking the front and
around the vehicle
When the shift lever is in a position other than P.
 Panoramic view & front view
 See-through view
Press
.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Select the front view button and
then turn ON the panoramic
view button.
330
4-5. Using the driving support systems
 Wide front view
Select the front view button and
then turn OFF the panoramic
view button.
 Wide rear view
Select the rear view button and
then turn OFF the panoramic
view button.
 Front split view
Select the front split view button.
 Rear split view
Select the rear split view button.
Checking the rear and
around the vehicle
When the shift lever is in a position other than P.
 Panoramic view & rear view
Select the rear view button and
then turn ON the panoramic
view button.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
331
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Checking the bed
Select the bed view button.
Checking around the
vehicle
To display the moving view/seethrough view screen, press
when the shift lever is in P and
the intuitive parking assist is
enabled.
 Moving view
 See-through view
4
Driving
The moving view screen and the
see-through view screen provide support when checking the
areas of around the vehicle
while parking. These screens
display an image of the vicinity
of the vehicle combined from the
4 cameras. The screen will display a 360° view around the
vehicle from either inside the
vehicle or from a birds-eye view
at an angle.
Screen display
Display mode switching button
Select to change the display mode
between the moving view and the
see-through view.
Rotation pause switch
Select to pause the rotation of the
screen.
To resume rotation, select
.
Body color setting switch
Select to display the body color setting screen and change the color of
the vehicle displayed on the panoramic view monitor. (P.348)
● Pressing
on the screen or
again changes the screen back to
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
332
4-5. Using the driving support systems
the previously displayed screen,
such as the navigation screen.
Checking the front and around the vehicle
The panoramic view & front view/wide front view/front split view
screen provides support when checking the areas in front of the
vehicle and around the vehicle when taking-off at T-intersections or
other intersections during poor visibility.
To display the screen, press
when the shift lever is in D or N with
the vehicle moving approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
This screen will be displayed if the intuitive parking assist detects an
object in front of your vehicle (intuitive parking assist linked display).
Screen display
Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode
will change as follows:
 Panoramic view & front view
Distance guide lines
Shows distance in front of the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate
distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
Estimated course lines
Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned.
• This line will be displayed when the steering wheel is turned by 90° or
more from the center (straight-line) position.
Guide line switching button
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
333
Select to change the guide line mode between the distance guide line mode
and the estimated course line mode. (P.336)
Automatic display button
Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. (P.337)
Display mode switching buttons
The display can be changed to various screens from button combinations.
 Wide front view
4
Shows distance in front of the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate
distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
Automatic display button
Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. (P.337)
Display mode switching buttons
The display can be changed to various screens from button combinations.
 Front split view
Distance guide lines
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
Distance guide lines
334
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Shows distance in front of the vehicle.
• Split view: Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the edge of
the bumper.
• Panoramic view: Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of
the bumper.
Vehicle width guide lines
Shows guide lines of the vehicle’s width including the outside rear view mirrors.
Front tire guide lines
Shows guide lines of where the front tire touches the ground.
Automatic display button
Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. (P.337)
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate
distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
● Pressing
on the screen or
changes the screen to the previously
displayed screen, such as the navigation screen.
● For details about the intuitive parking assist (P.291).
● The display position of the intuitive parking assist and the position of
obstacles displayed in the camera image do not match.
WARNING
● When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illumi-
nates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area
around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until
safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.
● As the intuitive parking assist display is displayed over the camera view,
it may be difficult to see the intuitive parking assist display depending on
the color and brightness of the surrounding area.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Switching the guide line
mode (panoramic view &
front view mode)
Each time the guide line switching button is selected, the mode
will change as follows:
335
view mirror. This screen is
designed to support the driver in
safe driving in situations such as
when driving on a narrow road,
by allowing them to check the
areas around the sides of the
vehicle.
 Distance guide line
4
Driving
 Only the distance guide lines
are displayed.
 Estimated course line
 Check the positions and distance between the vehicle
width guide line and a target
object such as the obstacle or
curb of the road.
 Estimated course lines will be
added to the distance guide
lines.
Using the vehicle width
guide line (front split view
mode)
The front split view screen displays images from the cameras
installed on each outside rear
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
336
4-5. Using the driving support systems
play images in the following situations:
 When the shift lever is shifted
to D or N.
 When vehicle speed is
reduced to approximately 10
mph (16 km/h) or less.
 Pull over to the curb as shown
in the illustration above, taking care not to let the vehicle
width guide line overlap the
target object.
 Ensure that the vehicle width
guide line is parallel to the target object.
Automatic display mode
In addition to screen switching
by operating
, automatic dis-
play mode is available. In this
mode, the screen is switched
automatically in response to
vehicle speed.
Each time the “AUTO” button is
selected, automatic display
mode is enabled/disabled.
In automatic display mode, the
monitor will automatically dis-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
337
Checking the rear and around the vehicle
The panoramic view & rear view/wide rear view/rear split view
screen provide support when checking the areas of behind the vehicle and around the vehicle while backing up, for example while parking.
The screens will be displayed when the shift lever is in R.
Screen display
Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode
will change as follows:
 Panoramic view & rear view
4
Driving
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate
distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of obstacle is displayed
and the buzzer sounds.
Guide line switching button
Select to switch the guide line mode. (P.340)
Display mode switching buttons
The display can be changed to various screens from button combinations.
Center guide line on/off button
Select to on/off the center guide line. (P.340)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
338
4-5. Using the driving support systems
 Wide rear view
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate
distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of obstacle is displayed
and the buzzer sounds.
Guide line switching button
Select to switch the guide line mode. (P.340)
Display mode switching buttons
The display can be changed to various screens from button combinations.
Center guide line on/off button
Select to on/off the center guide line. (P.340)
Zoom button
Each time press the button, the mode will change between the wide rear
view mode, narrow rear view mode and hitch view mode. (P.344)
 Rear split view
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
339
distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of obstacle is displayed
and the buzzer sounds.
Guide line switching button
Select to switch the guide line mode. (P.340)
Camera angle adjustment (P.344)
Zoom button (P.344)
● The monitor is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any position
other than R.
● For details about the intuitive parking assist (P.291) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert function. (P.298)
● The display position of the intuitive parking assist and the position of
obstacles displayed in the camera image do not match.
● When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illumi-
nates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area
around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until
safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.
● As the intuitive parking assist display and Rear Cross Traffic Alert dis-
play are displayed over the camera view, it may be difficult to see the
intuitive parking assist display and Rear Cross Traffic Alert display
depending on the color and brightness of the surrounding area.
Guide lines displayed on the screen
Each time the guide line switching button is selected, the mode will
change as follows:
 Estimated course line
Estimated course lines are displayed which move in accordance with
the operation of the steering wheel.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
WARNING
4
340
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Distance guide lines
Shows distance in front of the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.
Estimated course lines
Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned.
Distance guide lines
Shows the distance behind the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned.
• The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated course lines.
• The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) and
approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the center of the edge of the
bumper.
Distance guide line
Shows the distance behind the vehicle.
• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue) from the edge of the
bumper.
Vehicle width guide lines
Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.
Vehicle center guide line
Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
 Parking assist guide line
The steering wheel return points (parking assist guide lines) are displayed.
This mode is recommended for those who are comfortable with parking the vehicle without the aid of the estimated course lines.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
341
Distance guide lines
Shows distance in front of the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.
Distance guide line
Shows the distance behind the vehicle.
• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the
bumper.
4
Vehicle center guide line
Vehicle width guide lines
Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.
Parking assist guide lines
Shows the path of the smallest turn possible behind the vehicle.
 Distance guide line
Only distance guide line is displayed.
This mode is recommended for those who are comfortable with parking the vehicle without the aid of the guide lines.
Distance guide lines
Shows distance in front of the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
342
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Distance guide line
Shows the distance behind the vehicle.
• Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the
bumper.
 Center guide line
When the display is turned ON, the center guide line simultaneously
displays the each of the guide lines for the estimated course line,
parking assist guide line or distance guide line.
Vehicle center line is displayed which move in accordance with the
operation of the steering wheel.
Vehicle center guide line
Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
● The display position of the intuitive parking assist and the position of
obstacles displayed in the camera image do not match.
WARNING
● Depending on the circumstances of the vehicle (number of passengers,
amount of luggage, etc.), the position of the guide lines displayed on the
screen may change. Be sure to check visually around the vehicle before
proceeding.
● If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the
estimated course lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
● Do not use the system if the display is incorrect due to an uneven (hilly)
road or a non-straight (curvy) road.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
343
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Changing the rear view mode
Each time press the zoom button, the mode will change as follows:
4
Wide rear view
Driving
Narrow rear view
Hitch zoom view
● The hitch zoom view can be displayed for a certain time when
is
pressed while the driving at speeds of 10 mph (16 km/h) or more.
● The hitch zoom view and bed zoom view (P.347) can be switched when
the switch is pressed while the displaying the screen.
Using the rear split view
If towing a trailer, magnify the difficult to see section of the vehicle
rear or change the screen display and use when checking.
Zoom button
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
344
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The rear split view, which is currently displayed, can be magnified.
Camera angle adjustment button
The direction of the camera can be changed from left to right in 5 stages.
Parking
Using the estimated course
line
When parking in a space which
is in the reverse direction to the
space described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.
1 Shift the shift lever to R.
3 When the rear position of the
vehicle has entered the parking space, turn the steering
wheel so that the vehicle
width guide lines are within
the left and right dividing lines
of the parking space.
2 Turn the steering wheel so
that the estimated course
lines are within the parking
space, and back up slowly.
Vehicle width guide line
4 Once the vehicle width guide
lines and the parking space
lines are parallel, straighten
the steering wheel and back
up slowly until the vehicle
has completely entered the
parking space.
Parking space
Estimated course lines
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Using parking assist guide
line
When parking in a space which
is in the reverse direction to the
space described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.
1 Shift the shift lever to R.
345
vehicle has completely
entered the parking space.
5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.
2 Back up until the parking
assist guide line meets the
edge of the dividing line of
the parking space.
4
Driving
Parking assist guide line
3 Turn the steering wheel all
the way to the left, and back
up slowly.
4 Once the vehicle is parallel
with the parking space,
straighten the steering wheel
and back up slowly until the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
346
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Checking the bed
Use to check the state of the load in the carrier bed.
Screen display
Bed view button
Zoom button
● The bed zoom view can be displayed for a certain time when
is
pressed while the driving at speeds of 9 mph (16 km/h) or more.
● The bed zoom view and hitch zoom view (P.344) can be switched when
the switch is pressed while the displaying the screen.
Magnifying function
If displayed objects are too
small to see clearly when the
panoramic view is displayed, the
area around any of the 4 corners of the vehicle can be magnified.
2 Select the area on the panoramic view display you wish
to magnify.
Magnifying the display
1 Turn the intuitive parking
assist on.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
 Touching one of the 4 areas
within the dotted lines will
magnify that area. (Dotted
lines are not displayed on the
actual display.)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
 To return to the normal view,
touch the panoramic view display again.
played on the panoramic view
monitor can be changed.
Changing the body color
displayed in the panoramic view monitor
● The magnifying function is
1 Display the moving view/seethrough view screen.
(P.332)
2 Select
.
3 Select the desired color.
Customizing the panoramic view monitor
The color of the vehicle dis-
Panoramic view monitor precautions
Area displayed on screen
Area of image of panoramic view
The panoramic view monitor displays an image of the surrounding
view of the vehicle.
Since the panoramic view processes and displays images based on
flat road surfaces, it cannot depict the position of three-dimension
objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) that are in positions higher
than the surface of the road. Even if there is room between the bumpers of the vehicles and it seems not likely to collide in the image, in
reality, the both vehicles are on a collision course.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
enabled when all of the following
conditions are met:
• The panoramic view & front view
or the panoramic view & rear view
is displayed.
• The vehicle speed is below
approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
• The intuitive parking assist is
available.
● In the following situations, the
magnified display will be canceled automatically:
• The vehicle speed is approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) or
higher.
• The intuitive parking assist is
unavailable.
● When the display is magnified, the
guide lines will not be displayed.
347
348
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Check the safety of the surroundings directly.
Objects located in the shaded areas will not be displayed on the
screen.
Parts of objects which extend above a certain height cannot be
displayed on the screen.
● As the images obtained from four cameras are processed and displayed
on the standard of a flat road surface; the panoramic view/moving
view/see through view may be displayed as follows.
• Objects may look collapsed; thinner or bigger than usual.
• An object with a higher position than the road surface may look farther
away than it actually is or may not appear at all.
• Tall objects may appear protruding from the non-displayed areas of the
image.
● Variations in the brightness of the image may appear for every camera.
● The displayed image may be shifted by inclination of the vehicle body,
change in vehicle height, etc., depending on the number of passengers,
amount of luggage, fuel quantity, etc.
● If the front doors or tailgate are not completely closed; neither the image
nor the guide lines are displayed.
● The position relations of the vehicle icon and the road surface or obstacle
may differ from the actual positions.
● The black areas of the vicinity of the vehicle icon are areas that are not
captured by the camera.
● Images like the following are combined, thus some areas may be difficult
to view.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
349
WARNING
● When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illumi-
nates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area
around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until
safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.
Area of the image captured
by the camera
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
 Panoramic view & front view
 Front split view
350
4-5. Using the driving support systems
 Panoramic view & rear view
ners of the bumper will not be
displayed.
 Rear split view
The area around both corners of the bumper will not be
displayed.
 Wide rear view
The area able to be seen changes
depending on the camera angle
adjustments.
When the camera angle is in
the middle (Left: 50%/Right:
50%)
When the camera angle is at
the MAX on the left side (Left:
100%)
The area around both cor-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
 Hitch zoom view
351
● The area displayed on the screen
may vary depending on vehicle
orientation or road conditions.
● The camera uses a special lens.
The distance in the image displayed on the screen will differ
from the actual distance.
● In the rear split view, there is a
blind spot due to the size (length
and height) of the trailer.
● In the hitch zoom view, if a backlit
license plate is equipped it may be
reflected in the screen.
● In the bed zoom view, the section
near the cabin is a blind spot.
The camera
 Front camera
 Side cameras
● The area covered by the camera
is limited. Objects which are close
to either corner of the bumper or
under the bumper cannot be seen
on the screen.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
 Bed view
The cameras for the panoramic
view monitor are located as
shown in the illustrations.
352
4-5. Using the driving support systems
 Rear camera
NOTICE
● The panoramic view monitor
may not operate properly in the
following cases.
• If the camera is hit, the position
and mounting angle of the camera may change.
 Bed camera
• As the camera has a water
proof construction, do not
detach, disassemble or modify
it. This may cause incorrect
operation.
• When cleaning the camera lens,
flush the camera with a large
quantity of water and wipe it
with a soft and wet cloth.
Strongly rubbing the camera
lens may cause the camera lens
to be scratched and unable to
transmit a clear image.
Using the camera
If dirt or foreign matter (such as
water droplets, snow, mud, etc.)
is adhering to the camera, it
cannot transmit a clear image.
In this case, flush it with a large
quantity of water and wipe the
camera lens clean with a soft
and wet cloth.
• Do not allow an organic solvent,
car wax, window cleaner or a
glass coating to adhere to the
camera. If this happens, wipe it
off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is
poured on the vehicle in cold
weather, the system may not
operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do
not apply intensive bursts of
water to the camera or camera
area. Doing so may result in the
camera malfunctioning.
● Do not expose the camera to
strong impacts as this could
cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Difference between the
screen and the actual road
353
on the road.
 The distance guide lines and
the vehicle width guide lines
may not actually be parallel
with the dividing lines of the
parking space, even when
they appear to be so. Be sure
to check visually.
 The distances between the
vehicle width guide lines and
the left and right dividing lines
of the parking space may not
be equal, even when they
appear to be so. Be sure to
check visually.
When the ground behind the
vehicle slopes up sharply
The distance guidelines are projected on a horizontal surface,
distances on an upward sloping
surface appear farther from the
vehicle than the actual distance.
Because of this, objects will
appear to be farther away than
they actually are. In the same
way, there will be a margin of
error between the guidelines
and the actual distance/course
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
When the ground behind the
vehicle slopes down sharply
The distance guidelines are projected on a horizontal surface,
distances on an downward sloping surface appear closer to the
vehicle than the actual distance.
Because of this, objects will
appear to be closer than they
actually are. In the same way,
there will be a margin of error
between the guidelines and the
actual distance/course on the
road.
Driving
 The distance guide lines give
a distance guide for flat road
surfaces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the guide
lines on the screen and the
actual distance/course on the
road.
4
354
4-5. Using the driving support systems
When any part of the vehicle
sags
When the vehicle posture tilts
due to the number of passengers or the distribution of the
load, there is a margin of error
between the guide lines on the
screen and the actual distance/course on the road.
A margin of error
Distortion of three-dimensional objects on the screen
When there are three-dimensional objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) nearby in positions higher than the surface of the road,
take extra care when using the following.
Panoramic view display (including magnified display)
Since the panoramic view processes and displays images based on
flat road surfaces, it cannot depict the position of three-dimension
objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) that are in positions higher
than the surface of the road. For example, even though it appears
that there is space between the bumpers of the two vehicles in the
illustration below and they are not likely to collide, in reality, a collision is about to occur.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
355
WARNING
● When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illumi-
nates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area
around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until
safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.
The estimated course lines target flat surfaced objects (such as the
road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the estimated course lines
and distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional
object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.
WARNING
● When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illumi-
nates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area
around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until
safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected accident may occur.
Estimated course lines
Since the estimated course line
is displayed for a flat road surface, it cannot depict the position of three-dimensional objects
(such as vehicle bumpers, etc.)
that are in positions higher than
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
the surface of the road. Even if
the bumpers of the vehicle is on
the outside of the estimated
course line in the image, in reality, the vehicles are on a collision course.
Driving
When approaching three-dimensional objects
4
356
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Estimated course line
Three-dimensional objects
(such as the overhang of a wall
or loading platform of a truck) in
high positions may not be projected on the screen. Check the
safety of the surroundings
directly.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
The pillar that is diagonal to the
parking spot may be displayed
perpendicular on the screen.
Even if it seems like there will
not be a collision, the pillar is
diagonal, so there may be collision with the upper part of the
pillar.
Check the safety of the surroundings directly.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
357
4
Estimated course lines
Distance guide lines
Visually check the surroundings
and the area behind the vehicle.
On the screen, it appears that a
truck is parking at point .
However, in reality if you back
up to point , you will hit the
truck. On the screen, it appears
that
is closest and
is farthest away. However, in reality,
the distance to
and
is the
same, and
and
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
.
is farther than
Driving
Visually check the surroundings
and the area behind the vehicle.
In the case shown below, the
truck appears to be outside of
the estimated course lines and
the vehicle does not look as if it
hits the truck. However, the rear
body of the truck may actually
cross over the estimated course
lines. In reality if you back up as
guided by the estimated course
lines, the vehicle may hit the
truck.
358
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Things you should know
If you notice any symptoms
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause
and the solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Symptom
Likely cause
359
Solution
The image is blurry
Flush the camera with a
Dirt or foreign matter
large quantity of water
(such as water dropand wipe the camera
lets, snow, mud, etc.) is
lens clean with a soft
adhering to the camera.
and wet cloth.
The image is out of
alignment
The camera or surrounding area has
received a strong
impact.
Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The camera position is
out of alignment.
Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
The guide lines are very
far out of alignment
 The vehicle is tilted.
If this happens due to
(There is a heavy load these causes, it does
on the vehicle, tire
not indicate a malfuncpressure is low due to tion.
a tire puncture, etc.) Back up while visually
 The vehicle is used on checking the vehicle’s
an incline.
surroundings.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
 The vehicle is in a
dark area
Back up while visually
 The temperature
checking the vehicle’s
around the lens is
surroundings. (Use the
either high or low
 The outside tempera- monitor again once conditions have been
ture is low
 There are water drop- improved.)
The procedure for
lets on the camera
The image is difficult to  It is raining or humid adjusting the picture
see
 Foreign matter (mud, quality of the panetc.) is adhering to the oramic view monitor
system is the same as
camera
 Sunlight or headlights the procedure for
adjusting the screen disare shining directly
play. (Refer to the
into the camera
 The vehicle is under “MULTIMEDIA
OWNER’S MANUAL”.)
fluorescent lights,
sodium lights, mercury lights, etc.
360
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Symptom
Likely cause
Solution
The estimated course
There is a malfunction
Have the vehicle
lines move even though in the signals being outinspected by your Toythe steering wheel is
put by the steering senota dealer.
straight
sor.
Guide lines are not disThe tailgate is open.
played
is displayed
Close the tailgate.
If this does not resolve
the symptom, have the
vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
 Battery has been reinstalled.
 The steering wheel
has been moved while
the battery was being
Have the vehicle
reinstalled.
 Battery power is low. inspected by your Toy The steering sensor ota dealer.
has been reinstalled.
 There is a malfunction
in the signals being
output by the steering
sensor.
The panoramic view display cannot be magniThe intuitive parking
fied
assist may be malfuncThe see-through
tioning or dirty.
view/moving view cannot be displayed
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Follow the correction
procedures for malfunctions of the intuitive
parking assist. (P.291)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Multi-terrain Monitor*
*
: If equipped
The Multi-terrain Monitor
helps the driver to check the
vehicle surroundings. It
assists in determining the
conditions around the
driver in a variety of situations, such as when judging
conditions during off-road
driving or checking for
obstacles when parking.
WARNING
■ When using the Multi-terrain
● In low temperatures, the screen
may darken or the images may
become faint. Images of moving
objects in particular may distort
or disappear from the screen.
Therefore, make sure to drive
carefully while directly visually
confirming the safety of your
surroundings.
● Do not use the Multi-terrain
Monitor system in the following
cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or
in snow
• When using tire chains or emergency tires
• When the front door or the tailgate is not closed completely
• If the suspension has been
modified or tires of a size other
than specified are installed
Monitor system
● Never rely solely on the Multi-
terrain Monitor. As with
unequipped vehicles, drive
carefully while directly confirming the safety of your surroundings and the area to the rear of
the vehicle. Take particular care
to avoid parked cars and other
obstacles.
Camera switch
The camera switch is located as
shown in the illustration.
● Due to the characteristics of the
camera lens, the actual position
and distance of people and
other obstacles will differ from
those shown on the Multi-terrain
Monitor screen. Directly confirm the safety of your surroundings before driving.
● Do not drive while only looking
at the screen. When driving,
make sure to directly confirm
the safety of your surroundings,
such as by visually checking the
area and using the vehicle’s
mirrors.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● The Multi-terrain Monitor is dis-
played by operating
when
vehicle speed is approximately 10
mph (16 km/h) or less. If the vehicle speed exceeds approximately
10 mph (16 km/h), the Multi-terrain Monitor display is canceled.
4
Driving
Observe the following precautions
to avoid an accident that could
result in death or serious injuries.
361
362
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Menu button
The screens that are displayed can be selected by the following buttons.
Front view & dual side view
Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view
Rear view & dual side view
Wide rear view
Auto mode on/off button (P.365)
Multi-terrain Monitor on/off button
Panoramic View Monitor is displayed when the Multi-terrain Monitor is
turned OFF. (P.327)
When the front-wheel
drive control switch is in
“4L”, or “4H” and Multiterrain select is ON
The Multi-terrain Monitor is display a screen suitable for offroad.
 The driver can drive while
confirming the following
guidelines with a front view
• Distance with the obstacle in the
front
• Estimated course line
 The driver can drive while
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
confirming the obstacle in the
flank of tire neighborhood and
the vehicle with a side screen
Checking the area to the
front and sides of the vehicle
 Front view & dual side view
Select the front view & dual side
view button.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
363
 Under vehicle terrain view &
dual side view (front magnified)
When the front view and side view
screens are touched, each of the
display sizes can be changed.
Checking the condition of
the road surface under the
vehicle
 Under vehicle terrain view &
Select the under vehicle terrain
view & dual side view button.
Checking the area to the
rear of the vehicle
 Rear view & dual side view
Select the rear view & dual side
view button.
 Wide rear view
Select the wide rear view button.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
dual side view
When the under vehicle terrain
view and side view screens are
touched, each of the display sizes
can be changed.
364
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Automatic display mode
When automatic display mode is
turned on, the Multi-terrain Monitor screen is displayed in the
following conditions, even if
The rear view & dual side view
and the wide rear displays can
be switched by touching the
screen.
has not been operated.
• When the shift lever is shifted
to D or N.
• When vehicle speed is
reduced to approximately 10
mph (16 km/h) or less.
When the front-wheel
drive control switch is in
“2H”, or “4H” and Multiterrain select is OFF
● The automatic display mode
The panoramic view monitor is
displayed. (P.327)
● Even when automatic display
switches between on and off each
time
is selected. When automatic display mode is on, an indicator illuminates on the icon.
mode is on, the display can still be
switched by pressing
.
Screen display and functions
The front-wheel drive control switch in the case of “4L”, or “4H” and
Multi-terrain select is ON, the Multi-terrain Monitor can display a
screen suitable for off-road.
Front view & dual side view
Front view & dual side view can be used to check the area around
the front of the vehicle.
 In addition to an image of the front of the vehicle, guide lines are
displayed in a composite view to provide reference for when
deciding a direction to move forward in.
 If the steering wheel is turned 270° or more, guide lines and other
features to support turning are automatically displayed.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
365
Front view & dual side view button
Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view button (P.368)
Clinometer/slip display
Automatic display button
Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. (P.365)
Vehicle width lines (blue)
Shows guide lines of the vehicle’s width including the outside rear view mirrors.
1.5 ft. (0.5 m) distance guide line (red)
Show distance in front of the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the edge of the bumper.
3 ft. (1 m) distance guide line (blue)
6 ft. (2 m) distance guide line (blue)
Front tire course line (yellow)
Shows the estimated course of the front tires according to steering wheel
position.
Forward movement guide line (blue)
Shows the estimated tire course of the tightest possible turn.
Front tire contact line (blue)
Shows guide lines of where the front tire touches the ground.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
Displays the vehicle’s estimated degree of incline or indicates a tire slippage. (P.367, 368)
4
366
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Rear tire contact line (blue)
Shows guide lines of where the rear tire touches the ground.
Rear tire course line (yellow)
Shows the estimated course of the rear tires.
When the steering wheel is turned by 270° or more
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate
distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
● The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in a position other
than R.
● When the intuitive parking assist detects an obstacle or another vehicle, a
warning message pops up in the clinometer/slip display area.
Clinometer
Clinometer displays the vehicle inclination to the front, rear, left and
right within a range of 0° to approximately 30°.
Degree markers of incline to the front and rear
Indicates the vehicle inclination in degrees in the front and rear directions.
Degree markers of incline to the left and right
Indicates the vehicle inclination in degrees in the left and right directions.
Pointer
Indicates the degree of the vehicle inclination in comparison to a parallel
line.
● The display indicates the incline of the vehicle in degrees shown by the
movement of the pointer and the rotation of the vehicle image.
● The color of the degree markers of incline to the front, rear, left and right
changes according to the current incline of the vehicle.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
367
● After the engine switch is in ON, the degree of incline is not displayed until
such information is determined.
● The degree of incline showed on the clinometer is only an approximate
indication, and may differ from the degree of incline measured using other
equipment.
Slip display
When tire slippage is detected,
the clinometer display area is
automatically switched to the
slip display.
Tire display
Indicates the position of freely spinning tires in yellow if the tire spins.
(During Crawl Control is operating,
all of the tires are indicated in yellow.)
Pop-up display of the intuitive
parking assist
Displayed if an obstacle is detected
while the intuitive parking assist is
turned on.
4
Driving
Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view
Lines indicating current vehicle and tire position are displayed in a
composite view on an image taken approximately 32 ft. (10 m)
behind the current vehicle position and assists the driver to check
conditions underneath the vehicle or determine the position of the
front tires.
Current vehicle position
Image displayed in the under vehicle terrain view (image taken
approximately 32 ft. (10 m) behind the current vehicle position)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
368
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Vehicle position at the time the image was taken (approximately
32 ft. (10 m) behind the current vehicle position)
Displaying the under vehicle terrain view
 Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view
 Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view (front magnified)
Front view & dual side view button (P.365)
Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view button
Clinometer/slip display
Displays the vehicle’s estimated degree of incline or indicates a tire slippage. (P.367, 368)
Automatic display button
Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. (P.365)
Tire position indicator lines (black or white)
Indicates the estimated position of the front tires.
Vehicle position indicator lines (blue)
Indicates the estimated position of the vehicle.
1.5 ft. (0.5 m) distance guide line (red or black)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
369
Show distance in front of the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the edge of the bumper.
Front tire contact line (blue)
Shows guide lines of where the front tire touches the ground.
Vehicle width lines (blue)
Shows guide lines of the vehicle’s width including the outside rear view mirrors.
Rear tire contact line (blue)
Shows guide lines of where the rear tire touches the ground.
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate
distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
● The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in a position other
WARNING
● The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may
differ from actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers, cargo weight, road grade, road surface conditions, brightness of
the surrounding environment, etc. Always drive the vehicle while confirming the safety of your surroundings.
● The image displayed is one that was previously taken at a point approx-
imately 32 ft. (10 m) behind the current vehicle position. In cases such
as when objects move after the image is taken, the image displayed on
the screen may differ from the actual state.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
than R.
● While the under vehicle terrain view is displayed, if the vehicle speed
reaches or exceeds approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), the screen automatically returns to the front view display.
● In the following situations, the under vehicle terrain view selection button
cannot be operated.
• The vehicle is not completely stopped
• After the engine starts, a fixed distance or more has not been driven
• After the front-wheel drive control switch is shifted to “4L”, a fixed distance
or more has not been driven
● In the following situations, the system may not operate normally, or it may
not be possible to switch to the under vehicle terrain view.
• The road is covered with snow
• It is nighttime and the road has no illumination
• Dirt or foreign matter is adhering to the camera lens
• There is water in front of the vehicle (a river, puddle, sea water, etc.)
370
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Rear view & dual side view/wide rear view
The rear view & dual side view/wide rear view screen provide support when checking the areas of behind the vehicle and around the
vehicle while backing up, for example while parking.
The screens will be displayed when the shift lever is in R.
 Rear view & dual side view
 Wide rear view
Rear view & dual side view
Wide rear view button
Clinometer/slip display
Displays the vehicle’s estimated degree of incline or indicates a tire slippage. (P.367, 368)
1.5 ft. (0.5 m) distance guide line (red)
Show distance in rear of the vehicle.
• Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the edge of the bumper.
Vehicle width guide lines (blue)
Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.
Front tire contact line (blue)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
371
Shows guide lines of where the front tire touches the ground.
Rear tire contact line (blue)
Shows guide lines of where the rear tire touches the ground.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
When a sensor detects a vehicle approaching from the rear, the direction of
the vehicle approaching from the rear is displayed and the buzzer sounds.
Intuitive parking assist
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate
distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
● The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in R.
● For details about the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function. (P.298)
● If the tailgate is not closed, guide lines will not be displayed. If the guide
lines do not display even when the tailgate is closed, have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer.
● The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may
differ from actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers, cargo weight, road grade, road surface conditions, brightness of
the surrounding environment, etc. Always drive the vehicle while confirming the safety of your surroundings.
Multi-terrain Monitor precautions
P.348
Things you should know
P.359
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
WARNING
4
372
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Electronically modulated air suspension*
*: If equipped
The electronically modulated air suspension allows
the driver to control the
vehicle’s height in order to
adjust for driving conditions.
Lower
Higher
Select the desired height
with the height control
switch.
Vehicle height can be adjusted
only when the engine is running.
Height control switch
The selected height mode will
be shown on the electronically
modulated air suspension display.
The selected mode will flash
while the height mode is being
changed.
■ Height modes
 “N” mode (normal mode): For
ordinary driving
Height control switch
Height control mode select
switch
Selecting vehicle height
Operating the switch change
vehicle rear height as follows:
Normal height
 “HI” mode (high mode): For
driving on bumpy roads 1.6 in.
(40 mm) higher than the normal height
The “HI” mode is unavailable when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 18
mph (30 km/h).
When the vehicle’s speed exceeds
18 mph (30 km/h), the height will be
adjusted to the normal height automatically.
 “LO” mode (low mode): For
the ease of egress/ingress
and loading luggage
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
1.2 in. (30 mm) lower than the normal height
The “LO” mode is unavailable when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph
(12 km/h).
When the vehicles speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the height will be
adjusted to the normal height automatically.
Disabling the height control
When the height control mode
select switch is pressed, the
vehicle height is fixed at the current height.
■ Automatic leveling function
Regardless of the number of occupants or the luggage load, vehicle
height in any mode is always
adjusted to a fixed height by the
automatic leveling function.
■ When “HI” mode is selected
The vehicle height will change to “N”
mode when driving at the speeds of
18 mph (30 km/h).
■ When “LO” mode is selected
● The vehicle height will change to
“N” mode when vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h).
● This mode allows for easy access
to the vehicle (getting in and out)
and easy loading and unloading.
■ The electronically modulated
air suspension will not operate
in the following cases:
● The underbody of the vehicle is
touching the surface of the road.
● The area around the suspension
is covered with ice.
The height control indicators will
blink, turn off and then turn on continuously to indicate that the electronically modulated air suspension
is not operational.
To re-enable operation, turn off the
engine and then restart it.
■ Even if you hear an operating
The height can be adjusted by
pressing the height control
switch.
Press the switch again or when the
vehicle’s speed exceeds 18 mph
(30 km/h), the height will be
adjusted to the normal height automatically.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
noise
This does not indicate a problem in
the electronically modulated air suspension.
■ The electronically modulated
air suspension failure warning
The warning message is displayed
on the multi-information display, and
the electronically modulated air suspension cannot be activated until
the malfunction is corrected.
Stop the engine and start again. If
the warning message turns off, the
system operating correctly. If the
warning message continues to be
4
Driving
The “MAN.” indicator is displayed
on the multi-information display and
the automatic leveling function
turned off.
373
374
4-5. Using the driving support systems
displayed, have your vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
■ When the
indicator turns on
Indicates a malfunction in the air
suspension system.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately. (P.80,
526)
WARNING
■ The electronically modulated
air suspension must be
turned off in the following circumstances:
Otherwise, the automatic leveling
function may cause the vehicle’s
height to change, and you may
catch part of your body in the
vehicle, resulting in an unexpected accident or injury:
● When driving through water
such as shallow streams (Put
the vehicle height in “HI” mode
and turn off the electronically
modulated air suspension. Drive
at 18 mph [30 km/h] or slower.)
● When jacking up the vehicle,
installing tire chains or tying the
vehicle with chains/wires for
transportation via flat bed truck
(Turn the system to the manual
mode and stop the engine.)
● When the vehicle must be
towed (Put the vehicle height in
“N” mode and turn the system to
the manual mode.)
● When the vehicle gets stuck
(Turn the system to the manual
mode.)
● When disconnecting a trailer
(Put the vehicle height in “N”
mode and turn the system to the
manual mode.)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Selecting the correct height
mode
Observe the following precautions
to prevent accidents or injury.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the vehicle, as well
as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to fatal or
injury accidents.
● Before you lower the vehicle’s
height, check under the vehicle
to make sure that no one is
there.
● “HI” mode should only be used
when driving on rough roads, for
example when driving off-road.
Because the vehicle’s center of
gravity will become higher when
in the mode, the vehicle may
become unstable when turning
abruptly, resulting in an accident.
● Do not select “HI” mode when
you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier.
Because the vehicle’s center of
gravity will become higher when
in the mode, the vehicle may
become unstable when turning
abruptly, resulting in an accident.
NOTICE
■ Be careful in any place where
overhead space is limited.
When changing to a higher mode
or after unloading, the vehicle
height will rise. This may cause
damage to the vehicle.
■ Do not select “LO” mode
when driving on bumpy
roads.
If the underbody of the vehicle
touches a rugged road surface,
the vehicle may be damaged.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE
■ Do not change the vehicle
height frequently.
The compressor might overheat
and cause the operation to stop.
■ When on the extremely
uneven roads with rocks
Sometimes the vehicle height is
not adjusted because it is judged
as uneven road driving.
375
Driving mode select
switch*
*: If equipped
The driving modes can be
selected to suit driving condition.
System components
4
Driving
“DRIVE MODE” switch
Mode select switch
Multi-information display
(P.93)
Selecting the driving
mode
1 Press the “DRIVE MODE”
switch.
The indicator
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
on the switch will
376
4-5. Using the driving support systems
turn on.
• “ECO” mode
Helps the driver accelerate in an
eco-friendly manner and improve
fuel economy through moderate
throttle characteristics and by controlling the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling).
The “ECO” indicator comes on.
• “SPORT” mode
2 Select the driving modes on
the multi-information display
while turning the mode select
switch left and right.
 Vehicles without Adaptive
Variable Suspension system
Assists acceleration response by
controlling the transmission, engine
and steering. Suitable for when precise handling is desirable, for
example when driving on mountain
roads. The “SPORT” indicator
comes on.
 Vehicles with Adaptive Vari-
able Suspension system
Multi-information display
(4.2-inch display type)
Multi-information display (full
LCD type)
• “NORMAL” mode
Provides an optimal balance of fuel
economy, quietness, and dynamic
performance. Suitable for city driving.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Multi-information display
• “NORMAL” mode
Provides an optimal balance of fuel
economy, quietness, and dynamic
performance. Suitable for city driving.
• “COMFORT” mode
By controlling the suspension, riding comfort is further enhanced.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Suitable for city driving. The “COMFORT” indicator comes on.
• “ECO” mode
Helps the driver accelerate in an
eco-friendly manner and improve
fuel economy through moderate
throttle characteristics and by controlling the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling).
The “ECO” indicator comes on.
• “SPORT S” mode
Assists acceleration response by
controlling the transmission, engine
and steering. Suitable for when precise handling is desirable, for
example when driving on mountain
roads. The “SPORT S” indicator
comes on.
Helps to ensure the controllability
and stability of the vehicle by integrally controlling the steering wheel
and suspensions as well as the
transmission and engine, making it
suitable for sporty driving. The
“SPORT S+” indicator comes on.
• “CUSTOM” mode
Allows you to drive with the power
train, chassis and air conditioning
system functions set to your preferred settings. Custom mode settings can only be changed on the
drive mode customization display of
multimedia system. The “CUSTOM”
indicator comes on.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ The driving mode select switch
can be operated when
The front-wheel drive control switch
is in “2H” and “4H”.
■ Operation of the air condition-
ing system in Eco mode
Eco mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the
air conditioning system to enhance
fuel efficiency. To improve air conditioning performance, perform the
following operations:
● Adjust the fan speed (P.417)
● Turn off Eco drive mode (P.376)
■ Automatic deactivation of driv-
ing modes:
Driving mode is deactivated or the
driving mode will be changed to normal mode in the following conditions:
● After turning the engine switch off
and then turning it to on
● When the front-wheel drive control
switch is in “4L” (4WD models
only)
● When the Multi-terrain Select is
turned on (if equipped)
● When the Downhill assist control
system is turned on (if equipped)
● When the “TOW HAUL” mode or
“TOW+” mode is turned on (if
equipped)
■ Customization
The Custom mode can be changed.
(Customizable features: P.588)
4
Driving
• “SPORT S+” mode
377
378
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Four-wheel drive system*
*: If equipped
Use the front-wheel drive
control switch to select the
following transfer modes:
Front-wheel drive control
switch
four-wheel drive)
Use this for maximum power and
traction. Use “4L” for climbing or
descending steep hills, off-road
driving, and hard pulling in sand,
mud or deep snow.
The “4L” indicator will come on.
Shifting between “2H”
and “4H”
■ Shifting from “2H” to “4H”
1 Reduce vehicle speed to less
than 62 mph (100 km/h).
2 Push and shift the frontwheel drive control switch to
“4H”.
The “4H” indicator will come on.
■ Shifting from “4H” to “2H”
1 Reduce vehicle speed to less
than 62 mph (100 km/h).
“2H” (high speed position,
two-wheel drive)
Use this for normal driving on dry
hard-surfaced roads. This position
gives greater economy, quietest
ride and least wear.
“4H” (high speed position,
four-wheel drive)
Use this for driving only on tracks
that permit the tires slide, like offroad, icy or snow-covered roads.
This position provides greater traction than two-wheel drive.
The “4H” indicator will come on.
“4L” (low speed position,
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
2 Push and shift the frontwheel drive control switch to
“2H”.
The “4H” indicator will go off.
Shifting between “4H”
and “4L”
■ Shifting from “4H” to “4L”
1 Stop the vehicle completely
and continue to depress the
brake pedal.
2 Shift the shift lever to N.
3 Push and shift the frontwheel drive control switch to
“4L”.
The “4L” indicator will come on.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Shifting from “4L” to “4H”
1 Stop the vehicle completely
and continue to depress the
brake pedal.
2 Shift the shift lever to N.
3 Push and shift the frontwheel drive control switch to
“4H”.
The “4L” indicator will go off.
■ When the front-wheel drive con-
trol switch is shifted to “4L”
VSC is automatically turned off.
■ If the “4H” indicator flashes
■ If the “4H” indicator is ON and
■ If the “4H” indicator continues
to flash and the “4L” indicator
is ON and a buzzer sounds
The shift lever is not in N and/or the
vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle
completely, shift the shift lever to N
and make sure that the indicator
stops flashing
■ If the “4H” and “4L” indicator
flashes rapidly
There may be a malfunction in the
four-wheel drive system. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
■ Four-wheel drive usage fre-
quency
You should drive in four-wheel drive
for at least 10 miles (16 km) each
month. This will assure that the front
drive components are lubricated.
WARNING
the “4L” indicator continues to
flash
A message will be displayed in the
multi-information display. Follow a
message, shift the shift lever to D or
R and drive the vehicle slowly, then
stop.
■ Shifting the front-wheel drive
■ If the “4H” indicator continues
■ When the vehicle is parked
to flash and the “4L” indicator
is ON
A message will be displayed in the
multi-information display. Follow a
message, shift the shift lever to D or
R and drive the vehicle slowly, then
stop.
■ If the “4H” indicator is ON and
the “4L” indicator continues to
flash and a buzzer sounds
The shift lever is not in N and/or the
vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle
completely, shift the shift lever to N
and make sure that the indicator
stops flashing.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
control switch from “2H” to
“4H” while driving
Never operate the front-wheel
drive control switch if the wheels
are slipping. Stop the slipping or
spinning before shifting.
If the shift lever is moved before
the “4L” indicator turns on/off, the
transfer mode may not be shifted
completely. The transfer mode
disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to
move regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator
blinks and the buzzer sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to
roll even if the automatic transmission is in P. You or someone
else could be seriously injured.
You must complete the shifting of
the transfer mode before placing
transmission in P.
4
Driving
The transfer mode may not successfully change. Drive straight
ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
379
380
4-5. Using the driving support systems
AUTO LSD system*
*
: If equipped
The AUTO LSD system aids
traction by using the traction control system to control engine performance and
braking when one of the
drive wheels begins to spin.
The system should be used
only when one of the drive
wheels spinning occurs in a
ditch or rough surface.
System operation
The system can be used only on
2WD models. The system is
activated when driving at a
speed under 62 mph (100
km/h). The AUTO LSD system
will be activated with the following two procedures.
To turn the AUTO LSD system
on, quickly press and release
.
The “AUTO LSD” indicator light
will come on.
Press
again to turn the sys-
tem off.
■ If the brake system overheats
The system will cease operation
and a buzzer will alert the driver. At
this time, the “Traction Control
Turned OFF” displayed in the multiinformation display. Stop the vehicle
in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)
The system will be automatically
restored after a short time.
WARNING
■ To avoid an accident
● Do not use the AUTO LSD sys-
tem in conditions other than
when one of the drive wheels
spinning occurs in a ditch or
rough surface.
● Do not drive with the AUTO
LSD system continuously
turned on.
Failure to do so, a much greater
steering effort and more careful
cornering control will be required.
NOTICE
■ Activating while driving
Do not activate the AUTO LSD
system if the wheel is slipping.
Stop the slipping or spinning
before activating.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Rear differential lock
system*
*: If equipped
Use the rear differential lock
system only when wheel
spinning occurs in a ditch
or on a slippery or ragged
surface. This system is
effective in case one of the
rear wheels is spinning.
Rear differential lock
switch
At this time, the rear differential lock
indicator and indicator in the differential lock/unlock display will blink.
Wait a few seconds for the system
to complete operation. After the
rear differential is locked, the indicators will stop blinking and remain
on.
To unlock the rear differential, push
the switch again.
■ Operating tips
● Be sure to stop the wheels before
locking the differential.
● Unlock the differential as soon as
the vehicle moves out.
■ Unlocking the rear differential
If the rear differential lock indicator
still flashes even after unlocking the
rear differential, check the safety of
the surrounding area and slightly
turn the steering wheel in either
direction while the vehicle is in
motion.
■ Automatic unlocking feature
The rear differential lock is also
unlocked in any of the following situations:
● When the front-wheel drive control
switch is turned to “2H” or “4H”
● When the engine switch is turned
off
■ After unlocking the rear differ-
ential
Check that the indicators go off.
■ The rear differential lock indica-
tor and indicator in the differential lock/unlock display
● The indicators blink while locking/unlocking the rear differential.
● If the indicators continue to blink
when you operate the rear differential lock switch, stop the vehicle
completely and operate the switch
again.
If the indicators continue to blink
even if doing so, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible. There may be a
trouble in the four-wheel drive system.
■ Locking the rear differential
The following systems do not operate when the rear differential is
locked.
• ABS
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
Press the switch to turn the system on/off.
381
382
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• Brake assist system
• VSC
• Downhill assist control system (if
equipped)
• TRAC
WARNING
■ When using the rear differen-
tial lock system
Failure to observe the following
precautions may result in an accident.
● Do not lock the rear differential
in the conditions other than
above.
● Do not lock the rear differential
until the wheels have stopped
spinning.
● Do not drive over 5 mph (8
km/h) when the differential is
locked.
● Do not keep driving with the
rear differential lock state
Crawl Control*
*
: If equipped
Allows travel on extremely
rough off-road surfaces at a
fixed low speed without
pressing the accelerator or
brake pedal. Minimizes loss
of traction or vehicle slip
when driving on slippery
road surfaces, allowing for
stable driving.
WARNING
■ When using Crawl Control
function
Do not rely solely on the Crawl
Control function. This function
does not extend the vehicle’s performance limitations. Always thoroughly check the road conditions,
and drive safely.
■ These conditions may cause
the system not to operate
properly
When driving on the following surfaces, the system may not be able
to maintain a fixed low speed,
which may result in an accident:
● Extremely steep inclines.
● Extremely uneven surfaces.
● Snow-covered roads, or other
slippery surfaces.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
System components
383
2 Turn the mode select switch
left or right to select a mode
on the multi-information display.
“DAC/CRAWL” switch
Mode select switch
4
Multi-information display
(4.2-inch display type)
Turning Crawl Control on
Multi-information display (full
LCD type)
1 Press the “DAC/CRAWL”
switch.
Selectable modes
The indicator light
and the Crawl
Control indicator on the multi-information display will come on, and
the slip indicator will flash.
A mode which matches the road
conditions can be selected from
among the following 5 modes.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
Indicators (P.82)
384
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Multi-information display
(4.2-inch display type)
Multi-information display (full
LCD type)
1 “Lo” / “LOW 2”
Suitable for driving on rocky roads
or decline
2 “Lo-Mid” / “LOW 1”
Suitable for driving on rocky roads,
decline or bumpy incline
3 “Mid” / “MID”
Suitable for driving on bumpy
inclines
4 “Mid-Hi” / “HIGH 1”
Suitable for driving on bumpy
inclines, debris roads, snow-covered roads, muddy roads, gravel
roads and grass roads
5 “Hi” / “HIGH 2”
Suitable for driving on bumpy
inclines, debris roads, snow-covered roads, muddy roads, gravel
roads and grass roads
Turning Crawl Control off
 When the “DAC/CRAWL”
switch indicator illuminates
Press the “DAC/CRAWL” switch
again.
 When the “DAC/CRAWL”
switch indicator does not illuminate
Press the “DAC/CRAWL” switch
to turn the indicator on. Press
the “DAC/CRAWL” switch again
with the indicator turned on.
If Crawl Control is turned off, the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Crawl Control indicator and the
slip indicator will go off and a
message, stating that Crawl
Control has been turned off will
be displayed on the multi-information display for several seconds.
When turning off Crawl Control
while driving, drive extremely
carefully.
■ Operating tips
Crawl Control can be used with
Multi-terrain Select (if equipped) ON
or OFF. (P.387)
■ Operation conditions of the
Crawl Control
● The engine is running.
● The shift lever is in any gear other
than P or N.
● The front-wheel drive control
switch is in “4L”.
● The driver’s door is closed.
■ Automatic system cancelation
of Crawl Control
In the following situations, the
buzzer will sound intermittently and
the Crawl Control will be canceled
automatically. In this event, the
Crawl Control indicator will flash and
then go off, and a message stating
that Crawl Control has been turned
off will be displayed on the multiinformation display for several seconds.
● When the shift lever is moved to P
or N.
● When the front-wheel drive control
switch is in “4H”.
● When the driver’s door is opened.
■ Function limitations of Crawl
Control
● On vehicles with rear differential
lock system, in the following situa-
4-5. Using the driving support systems
tions, brake control can be used to
drive downhill at a constant
speed. However, engine control is
not available when driving uphill at
a constant speed.
• When the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
● In the following situation, engine
control and brake control will stop
temporarily. In this event, the
Crawl Control indicator will flash.
• With the rear differential is locked:
when the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
• With the rear differential is
unlocked: when the vehicle speed
exceeds approximately 15 mph
(25 km/h).
385
vehicle begins to move. This
sound does not indicate that a
malfunction has occurred in Crawl
Control system.
● Either of the following conditions
may occur when the Crawl Control
system is operating. None of
these are indicators that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the
vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after
the vehicle comes to a stop.
■ When there is a malfunction in
the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on. (P.519, 529)
■ When the Crawl Control sys-
■ Sounds and vibrations caused
by the Crawl Control system
● A sound may be heard from the
engine compartment when the
engine is started or just after the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
tem is operated continuously
● If Crawl Control is used continuously for a long time, the brake
system overheats. In this case, a
buzzer will sound, a message
stating a malfunction will be displayed on the multi-information
display, and the Crawl Control
indicator will flash and then go off.
In this event, as Crawl Control will
be temporarily inoperable, stop
the vehicle immediately in a safe
place, and allow the brake system
to cool down sufficiently until the
message goes off. (In the meantime, normal driving is possible.)
● If Crawl Control is used continuously for a long time, the automatic transmission overheats. In
this case, a buzzer will sound, the
system will be temporarily canceled, and a message stating a
malfunction may be displayed on
the multi-information display. In
this event, stop the vehicle in a
safe place until the message goes
off.
386
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Multi-terrain Select*
*
: If equipped
Multi-terrain Select is a system that improves drivability in off-road situations.
Select a mode that most
closely matches the type of
terrain on which you are driving from several modes.
NOTICE
■ Precaution for use
The Multi-terrain Select is
intended for use during off-road
driving. Do not use the system at
any other time.
System components
Brake control, steering feel
and drive force control can be
optimized in accordance with
the selected mode.
WARNING
■ When using the Multi-terrain
Select
Observe the following precautions
to avoid an accident that could
result in death or serious injuries:
● Check that the selected mode
indicators are illuminated before
driving. Multi-terrain Select will
not operate when the indicators
are off.
● The road conditions listed
(P.387) are for reference only.
There is a chance that the function may not be the most appropriate in terms of road
conditions such as pitch, slipperiness, undulation, etc. Thoroughly check the road
conditions before driving.
● Multi-terrain Select is not
intended to expand the limits of
the vehicle. Check the road conditions thoroughly beforehand,
and drive safely and carefully.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
“MTS” switch
Mode select switch
Multi-information display
Selected mode is displayed.
Switching modes
1 Press the “MTS” switch.
The indicator
on the switch will
4-5. Using the driving support systems
turn on.
Road Conditions
Mode
2 Select the Multi-terrain Select
modes on the multi-information display while turning the
mode select switch left and
right.
“MUD”
Suitable for
muddy roads
and other slippery conditions
“ROCK”
Suitable for
rocky terrain
If the brake control has activated,
the slip indicator light will flash.
 Front-wheel drive control
switch is in “4H”
Mode
“DIRT”
Road Conditions
Suitable for
bumpy road
conditions,
such as dirt
roads
Suitable for
sandy roads
“SAND”
and other slippery conditions
 Front-wheel drive control
switch is in “4L”
Mode
Road Conditions
Suitable for
“MOGU bumpy roads
L”
with large
inclines
Suitable for
sandy roads
“SAND”
and other slippery conditions
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
“MUD”
Suitable for
muddy roads
and other slippery conditions
Suitable for
“DEEP
deep snow
SNOW”
roads
If the brake control has activated,
the slip indicator light will flash.
When the vehicle is in “SAND”,
“MUD” or “DEEP SNOW” mode,
VSC is automatically turned off.
(VSC OFF indicator light come on.)
4
Driving
Depending on the positions of the
front-wheel drive control switch, a
mode can be selected from among
the following modes.
387
388
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Multi-terrain Select
Multi-terrain Select controls the
vehicle so that it can maximize the
drive force and improve drivability
on rough roads. As a result, fuel efficiency may diminish when compared to driving in normal mode.
■ Automatic system cancelation
In the following situations, Multi-terrain Select will be canceled automatically.
● When the engine switch is turned
off
● When the front-wheel drive control
switch is in “2H”
● When “TOW HAUL” mode and
“TOW+” mode is selected while
the front-wheel drive control
switch is in “4H”
● When drive mode select is
selected while the front-wheel
drive control switch is in “4H”
■ Turning off Multi-terrain Select
Performing the following turns Multiterrain Select off, and then the display on the multi-information display
will disappear.
 When the “MTS” switch indicator
is illuminated
Press the “MTS” switch while the
system is in operation.
 When the “MTS” switch indicator
is not illuminated
Press the “MTS” switch to turn the
indicator on.
Press the “MTS” switch again with
the Multi-terrain Select indicator illuminated.
■ When the vehicle is stuck
Switching the transfer and differential For the operation of the following
functions, refer to the following
pages. (If equipped)
● Four-wheel drive system
(P.379)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Rear differential lock (P.382)
■ Driving in Multi-terrain Select
The following types of situations
may occur, but they are not malfunctions.
● Vibrations may be felt throughout
the vehicle or steering wheel.
● Operating noise may be heard
from the engine compartment.
■ When an inspection at your
Toyota dealer is necessary
In the following situations, the system may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
● When the slip indicator light illuminates.
● When the indicator for each mode
does not illuminate on the multiinformation display even though
Multi-terrain Select is selected.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Downhill assist control system*
*: If equipped
The downhill assist control
system helps to prevent
excessive speed on steep
downhill slopes. The system will operate when the
vehicle is traveling under 18
mph (30 km/h) and transfer
mode is in “4H”.
WARNING
■ When using downhill assist
389
Multi-information display
System operation
Press the “DAC/CRAWL”
switch.
The downhill assist control system
indicator will comes on and the system will operate.
When the system is in operation,
the slip indicator will flash, and the
stop lights/high mounted stop lights
will be lit. A sound may also occur
during the operation. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
4
Driving
control system
Do not rely overmuch on the
downhill assist control system.
This function does not extend the
vehicle’s performance limitations.
Always thoroughly check the road
conditions, and drive safely.
System components
Setting the speed of the
downhill assist control
system
Turn the mode select switch to
set the desired speed (approx. 3
mph [4 km/h] to 18 mph [30
km/h]). The set speed is displayed on the multi-information
display.
“DAC/CRAWL” switch
Mode select switch
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
390
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Press the “DAC/CRAWL” switch
while the downhill assist control
system indicator is flashing to start
the system again.
■ Operating tips
● Downhill assist control system can
Multi-information display
(4.2-inch display type)
Multi-information display (full
LCD type)
Decreases the speed
Increases the speed
Turning off the system
 When the “DAC/CRAWL”
switch indicator illuminates
Press the “DAC/CRAWL” switch
again.
 When the “DAC/CRAWL”
switch indicator does not illuminate
Press the “DAC/CRAWL” switch
to turn the indicator on.
Press the “DAC/CRAWL” switch
again with the indicator turned
on.
The downhill assist control system
indicator will flash as the system
gradually ceases operation, and will
turn off when the system is fully off.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
be used with “TOW HAUL” mode
and “TOW+” mode, drive mode
select, or Multi-terrain Select ON
or OFF.
● The system will operate when the
shift lever is in a position other
than P, however to make effective
use of the system it is recommended to select a lower shift
range.
■ If the downhill assist control
system indicator flashes
● In the following situations, the indi-
cator flashes and the system will
not operate:
• The front-wheel drive control
switch is changed to a position
other than “4H”.
• The shift lever is in P.
• The vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake system overheats.
● In the following situations, the indicator flashes to alert the driver,
but the system will operate:
• The shift lever is in N.
• The “DAC/CRAWL” switch is
pressed while the “DAC/CRAWL”
switch indicator illuminates.
The system will gradually ceases
operation. The indicator will flash
during operation, and then go off
when the system is fully off.
■ When the downhill assist con-
trol system is operated continuously
If the downhill assist control system
is operated for a long period of time,
the brake system may abnormally
overheat. To prevent that, a buzzer
will sound and the function is temporarily stopped. In this case, the
4-5. Using the driving support systems
downhill assist control system indicator will flash. (The vehicle an be
driven normally during this time)
When the downhill assist control
system indicator switches to steadily
illuminated after a short while and
the system will become available.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused
■ System malfunction
In the following cases, have your
vehicle checked by your Toyota
dealer.
● The downhill assist control system
indicator does not come on when
the “DAC/CRAWL” switch is
pressed.
● The slip indicator light comes on.
WARNING
■ The system may not operate
on the following surfaces,
which may lead to an accident causing death or serious
injury
● Slippery surfaces such as wet
or muddy roads
● Icy surface
● Very bumpy and rough roads
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving assist systems
To keep driving safety and
performance, the following
systems operate automatically in response to various
driving situations. Be
aware, however, that these
systems are supplementary
and should not be relied
upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
Summary of the driving
assist systems
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
tem)
Helps to prevent wheel lock
when the brakes are applied
suddenly, or if the brakes are
applied while driving on a slippery road surface, or in off-road
conditions (such as rough
roads, sand and mud)
The ABS operates in synchronization with the Multi-terrain
Select
■ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of
braking force after the brake
pedal is depressed when the
system detects a panic stop situation
■ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced
Vehicle Stability Control)
Provides cooperative control of
the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.
4
Driving
by the downhill assist control
system
● A sound may be heard from the
engine compartment when the
engine is started or just after the
vehicle begins to move. This
sound does not indicate that a
malfunction has occurred in downhill assist control system.
● Either of the following conditions
may occur when the downhill
assist control system is operating.
None of these are indicators that a
malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the
vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after
the vehicle comes to a stop.
391
392
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Helps to maintain directional
stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling steering performance.
■ Trailer Sway Control
mode select (P.376), and driving comfort can be ensured
during off-road driving by setting
the front-wheel drive control
switch to “4L”.(P.379)
■ EPS (Electric Power Steer-
Helps the driver to control trailer
sway by selectively applying
brake pressure for individual
wheels and reducing driving
torque when trailer sway is
detected.
Employs an electric motor to
reduce the amount of effort
needed to turn the steering
wheel.
■ TRAC (Traction Control)
■ The Secondary Collision
Helps to maintain drive power
and prevent the drive wheels
from spinning when starting the
vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
■ Hill-start assist control
Helps to reduce the backward
movement of the vehicle when
starting on an uphill
■ AVS (Adaptive Variable
Suspension System) (if
equipped)
The damping force of the shock
absorbers are independently
controlled for the 4 wheels
according to factors including
the road surface conditions and
driving operation, contributing
toward enhancing smooth driving comfort and superior stability, and helping to maintain
vehicle posture.
In addition, the damping force
can be changed by selecting the
drive mode with the driving
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
ing)
Brake
When the SRS airbag sensor
detects a collision and the system operates, the brakes and
brake lights are automatically
controlled to reduce the vehicle
speed and help reduce the possibility of further damage due to
a secondary collision.
■ When the
TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer Sway
Control systems are operating
The slip indicator light will flash
while the TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer
Sway Control systems are operating.
■ Disabling the TRAC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt
or snow, the TRAC system may
4-5. Using the driving support systems
reduce power from the engine to the
wheels. Pressing
to turn the
system off may make it easier for
you to rock the vehicle in order to
free it.
To turn the TRAC system off, quickly
press and release
.
“Traction Control Turned OFF” is
displayed in the multi-information
display.
Press
again to turn the system
back on.
TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems
To turn the TRAC, VSC and Trailer
Sway Control systems off, press
and hold
for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.
The “Traction Control Turned OFF”
is displayed in the multi-information
display and the VSC OFF indicator
light will come on.*
Press
again to turn the system
back on.
*
: On vehicles with PCS will also be
disabled (only Pre-Collision warning is available). The PCS warning
light will come on and a message
will be displayed on the multiinformation display. (P.248, 521)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ When the message is dis-
played on the multi-information
display showing that TRAC has
been disabled even if
has
not been pressed
● TRAC is temporary deactivated. If
the information continues to show,
contact your Toyota dealer.
● When using Multi-terrain Select,
the “VSC OFF” indicator will turn
on depending on the mode, even
if the VSC OFF switch has not
been pressed.
■ Operating conditions of hill-
start assist control
When the following five conditions
are met, the hill-start assist control
will operate:
● The shift lever is in a position
other than P or N (when stating off
forward/backward on an upward
incline)
● The vehicle is stopped
● The accelerator pedal is not
depressed
● The parking brake is not engaged
● The engine switch is turned to ON
■ Automatic system cancelation
of hill-start assist control
The hill-start assist control will turn
off in any of the following situations:
● The shift lever is shifted to P or N
● The accelerator pedal is
depressed
● The parking brake is engaged
● A maximum of 2 seconds have
elapsed after the brake pedal is
released
● The engine switch is turned to
OFF
■ Sounds and vibrations caused
by the ABS, brake assist, VSC,
Trailer Sway Control, TRAC and
hill-start assist control systems
● A sound may be heard from the
4
Driving
■ Turning off the
393
394
4-5. Using the driving support systems
engine compartment when the
brake pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or
just after the vehicle begins to
move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has
occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions
may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these
indicates that a malfunction has
occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the
vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard also
after the vehicle comes to a stop.
■ Automatic reactivation of
TRAC, Trailer Sway Control and
VSC systems
After turning the TRAC, Trailer
Sway Control and VSC systems off,
the systems will be automatically reenabled in the following situations:
● When the engine switch is turned
off
● If only the TRAC system is turned
off, the TRAC will turn on when
vehicle speed increases
If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic reenabling will not occur when vehicle speed increases.
■ Reduced effectiveness of the
EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is
frequent steering input over an
extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a
result. Should this occur, refrain
from excessive steering input or
stop the vehicle and turn the engine
off. The EPS system should return
to normal within 10 minutes.
■ Secondary Collision Brake
operating conditions
The system operates when the SRS
airbag sensor detects a collision
while the vehicle is in motion. How-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
ever, the system does not operate
when the components are damaged.
■ Secondary Collision Brake
automatic cancelation
The system is automatically canceled in any of the following situations.
● The vehicle speed drops to
approximately 0 mph (0 km/h).
● A certain amount of time elapses
during operation
● The accelerator pedal is
depressed a large amount
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ The ABS does not operate
effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded
(such as excessively worn tires
on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while
driving at high speed on wet or
slick roads.
■ Stopping distance when the
ABS is operating may exceed
that of normal conditions
The ABS is not designed to
shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of
you, especially in the following situations:
snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the
road
● When driving over roads with
potholes or uneven surfaces
■ TRAC/VSC may not operate
effectively when
Directional control and power may
not be achievable while driving on
slippery road surfaces, even if the
TRAC/VSC system is operating.
Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power
may be lost.
■ Hill-start assist control does
not operate effectively when
● Do not overly rely on hill-start
assist control. Hill-start assist
control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and
roads covered with ice.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Unlike the parking brake, hill-
start assist control is not
intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period
of time. Do not attempt to use
hill-start assist control to hold
the vehicle on an incline, as
doing so may lead to an accident.
■ When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer
Sway Control is activated
The slip indicator light flashes.
Always drive carefully. Reckless
driving may cause an accident.
Exercise particular care when the
indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer
Sway Control systems are
turned off
Be especially careful and drive at
a speed appropriate to the road
conditions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn
the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems off unless necessary.
Trailer Sway Control is part of the
VSC system and will not operate
if VSC is turned off or experiences
a malfunction.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the
specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In
addition, make sure that the tires
are inflated to the recommended
tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC, Trailer Sway
Control and VSC systems will not
function correctly if different tires
are installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing
tires or wheels.
4
Driving
● When driving on dirt, gravel or
395
396
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Handling of tires and the sus-
pension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension
will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to
malfunction.
■ Trailer Sway Control precau-
tion
The Trailer Sway Control system
is not able to reduce trailer sway
in all situations. Depending on
many factors such as the conditions of the vehicle, trailer, road
surface and driving environment,
the Trailer Sway Control system
may not be effective. Refer to
your trailer owner’s manual for
information on how to tow your
trailer properly.
■ If trailer sway occurs
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● Firmly grip the steering wheel.
Steer straight ahead. Do not try
to control trailer sway by turning
the steering wheel.
● Begin releasing the accelerator
pedal immediately but very
gradually to reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not
apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction
with the steering or brakes, your
vehicle and trailer should stabilize. (P.188)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Secondary Collision Brake
Do not rely solely upon the Secondary Collision Brake. This system is designed to help reduce
the possibility of further damage
due to a secondary collision, however, that effect changes according to various conditions. Overly
relying on the system may result
in death or serious injury.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Trailer brake controller*
*: If equipped
This vehicle comes
equipped with a Toyota
Genuine Trailer Brake Controller. Use of a third-party
trailer brake controller
along with the Toyota Genuine Trailer Brake Controller
may have unexpected
effects on the system. Toyota does not recommend
the use of a third-party
brake controller with this
vehicle.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
WARNING
■ When driving on slippery
road surfaces
When stopping with ABS activated, output to the trailer might
be reduced in order to reduce the
likelihood of trailer wheels to lock.
The trailer is not equipped with
ABS. Drive safely on slippery road
surfaces.
System operation
4
Driving
The trailer brakes can be
controlled by the Trailer
brake controller via the 7pin connector. By selecting
the type of brakes that are
being used on the trailer
(electric or electric-overhydraulic) and setting the
“gain” for the controller, the
manual brake slider is used
to slow just the trailer. The
vehicle brake pedal will also
slow down as well as stop
the trailer when applied,
also via the same connector. “Gain” values, manual
brake outputs, trailer brake
types, and the trailer connection status are displayed
in the multi-information display.
397
“GAIN” (+/-) selection button
Pressing the “GAIN” (+/-) buttons
will adjust the amount of power that
can be outputted to the trailer
brakes. The “gain” can be adjusted
from 0 (no trailer braking) to 10
(maximum output) in 0.5 increments. Each press of the button will
increase or decrease the “gain” setting by one step. The “gain” value
will appear in the multi-information
display.
Trailer brake type
Trailer brake type can be selected
by using the multi-information. The
combination meter will show which
398
4-5. Using the driving support systems
trailer brake type is selected in the
multi-information display.
Manual brake slider
Adjusting this slider position will
engage the trailer’s brakes only. If
the manual brake slider is used
while the vehicle brake is applied,
the greater of the two outputs will
be sent to the trailer brakes.
Changing settings of the
trailer brake type
Select the item desired to be
setup and select as follows on
the multi-information screen
(P.98):
1 Press
or
on the meter
control switch and then select
.
2 Press
or
on the meter
control switch, select “Trailer
Settings”, and then press and
hold
on the meter control
switch.
3 According to the display,
select the desired setting and
then press
.
Changing trailer brake type or
trailer ID will cause the current
“gain” setting to reset to zero.
Make sure to set the “gain” as
described in the following section.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Setting the “Gain”
“Gain” setting on trailer brake
controller should be set for a
specific towing condition. “Gain”
setting should be adjusted each
time the vehicle load, trailer
load, road conditions, or
weather changes. Setting the
“gain” value to 0 will disable the
trailer brake controller output.
1 Make sure the trailer brakes
are in good working condition
and functioning normally. See
trailer dealer if necessary.
2 Hook up the trailer and make
proper electrical connections.
3 Select the correct type of
trailer brakes that are
equipped on the trailer by
using the multi-information
display.
4 Drive vehicle with trailer
attached on a level road surface similar to towing condition and in traffic-free
environment. Driving speed
should be approximately 20 25 mph [35 - 40 km/h].
4-5. Using the driving support systems
5 Using the “GAIN” (+/-) selection buttons, set a starting
“gain” of 5.0.
399
brakes.
■ If the Trailer brake warning light
comes on
Indicates a malfunction in the Trailer
brake control system or Trailer connector circuit.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
6 While driving 20 - 25 mph [35
- 40 km/h], fully apply the
manual brake slider.
8 For confirmation, repeat
steps 6 and 7 until desired
“gain” setting is reached (just
below point of trailer wheel
lock-up).
■ When setting the “gain”
Wheel lock-up occurs when the
trailer wheel squeals or tire smoke
occurs. Trailer wheels may not lockup while driving heavily loaded
trailer. During this case, adjust the
Trailer “gain” to the highest allowable setting for the towing condition.
■ When disconnecting and recon-
necting battery terminals
The “gain” setting data will be reset.
■ Trailer Sway Control Function
Helps suppress trailer sway at an
early stage by using the trailer brake
control system to operate the trailer
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
WARNING
■ Trailer brake type setting
It is the responsibility of the driver
to make sure the trailer brakes
are functioning normally and
adjusted appropriately. Failure to
check and maintain trailer brakes
may result in loss of vehicle control, crash, or serious injury.
Trailer brake control system will
work with most electric and electric-overhydraulic trailer braking
systems up to 3 axles (24A output
to trailer brakes). Please be sure
to test compatibility with the system at low speeds and in a safe
area. If a warning message
appears in the multi-information
display (P.529), have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately. Some electric-over-hydraulic trailer brakes
will take some minimum output to
activate. Trailer brake control system will not work with trailer
hydraulic surge brakes.
4
Driving
7 Adjust the “gain” setting,
using the “GAIN” (+/-) selection buttons, to either
increase or decrease to just
below the point of trailer
wheel lock-up.
400
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Trailer Backup Guide*
*
2 Press the switch to turn the
system ON.
: If equipped
Trailer Backup Guide is a
system to assist when backing up a trailer by providing
either (1) steering control to
assist backing up straight
(Straight Path Assist) or (2)
guidance for manual steering backup (Guidance
mode).
Trailer Backup Guide uses
the rear camera to detect
the trailer and a trailer hitch
light, which allows the
driver to use the system at
night time.
The system calculates the
trailer angle by image processing from the rear camera and calculates trailer
length and hitch length
during the trailer setup (calibration) maneuver.
Procedure
1 Select “Trailer Settings” from
(P.94) on the multiinformation display and add a
trailer according to the display.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3 Continue or reselect the
trailer in the message displayed on the multi-information display.
When the selected trailer is being
used for the first time, setup (calibration) is necessary (P.402).
Once calibration is completed, it is
retained for future use and the system will automatically detect the
trailer.
The driver needs to change the
trailer selection when using a different trailer. The system does not
automatically recognize the trailer
from the saved trailers list.
4 Once trailer is detected, shift
the shift lever to R to activate
Guidance mode.
5 Touch the switch at the bottom right on multimedia to
activate Straight Path Assist.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
401
“Trailer Direction”
When using Straight Path Assist,
the driver can override the system
using the steering wheel to adjust
the trailer direction. Upon release of
the steering wheel, Straight Path
Assist re-activates with a revised
straight back target direction.
■ When adding the trailer
Use the meter control switches to
select the trailer type. (P.94)
1 Press
or
to select
.
2 Press
or
to select “Trailer
Settings” and then press and
hold
.
Trailer Settings are not available
while Trailer Backup Guide system
is active.
The system is designed to support
trailers with single or multi-axles
using a ball hitch. The system does
not support fifth wheel or gooseneck
trailers.
Setup (Calibration)
Bring the vehicle and trailer to a
large open space like an empty
parking lot. Activate Trailer
Backup Guide system and follow the instructions displayed on
the multi-information display/multimedia.
For best calibration results, do
not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h).
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ When calibrating the system
● Please check whether the blue
line appropriately aligns with the
center of the trailer in the camera
view, such as in the following diagram, with regards to procedure
2.
4
Driving
3 According to the display, select
the desired setting and then
press
. (P.98)
1 Drive straight forward slowly
(5 mph [8 km/h] or less) while
holding the steering wheel
straight.
2 Stop vehicle with trailer
straight and confirm blue line
is aligned with trailer center
in Camera view.
3 Drive forward slowly making
a left or right turn that
changes vehicle direction 90
degrees or more.
4 After completing the turn,
continue straight forward
slowly to align trailer.
5 Stop vehicle to complete calibration.
402
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Trailer length
Ball mount length
● For best calibration results, cali-
State where the blue line aligns
with the center of the trailer.
(Select “Yes” in the multi-information display)
State where the blue line does
not align with the center of the
trailer. (Select “No” in the multiinformation display)
Blue line
● The system is designed to support
most trailers 6.6 ft. (2 m) to 26.2 ft.
(8 m) in length (length is defined
from the coupler center point for
the ball to the wheel axle [single
axle] or center of the wheel axles
[2 or more axles]) with ball mount
lengths between 4.5 in. (114.3
mm) and 18.5 in. (469.9 mm). Do
not attempt to use trailers or ball
mounts that have a length outside
of this range as the system performance degrades and could cause
improper system function.
brate in daytime on a smooth and
level road.
● It may be necessary at times to recalibrate the trailer to improve performance.
● The system is designed to be
used with the same trailer connection every time. If the ball mount
position is changed or reconfigured or items are added to the
trailer tongue after calibration, recalibration may be required.
Using Guidance mode
Guidance mode provides a
“Trailer Direction” arrow that
indicates the direction the trailer
will swing, based on calculations
from the steering wheel angle
information. Guidance mode
provides a “BRAKE Extreme
Trailer Angle” (jackknife) warning with warning buzzer to alert
the driver that the trailer angle is
near the jackknife condition.
Using Straight Path
Assist
Touch the switch at the bottom
right on multimedia to activate
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Straight Path Assist. Straight
Pass Assist controls steering to
back up the trailer in a straightline. The system can be overridden by using steering wheel to
adjust trailer direction.
The driver is always responsible
for paying attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving
safely. This system does not
control braking. Driver needs to
control vehicle speed, control
braking, and stop the vehicle to
avoid any collision.
For best results, reverse slowly
when using Straight Path Assist.
 Trailer Backup Guide system
is canceled when the trailer
cannot be detected (e.g. dirty
camera lens, insufficient lighting condition, obstruction of
the trailer in the rear camera
view, incorrectly selected
trailer, etc.)
• Shift the shift lever out of R
• There is a system malfunction*
*
: Includes Trailer Backup Guide
system cancel
 Straight Path Assist is canceled when any of the following occurs:
• Any of the events, above, that
cancel Guidance mode occur
• Press the Straight Path Assist
switch on the multimedia screen
• The system temperature preservation function operates (to prevent power steering equipment
from overheating)
Trailer hitch light
• Press the Trailer Backup Guide
switch*
This light’s usage for Trailer
Backup Guide is controlled by
the Trailer Backup Guide system and the driver does not
need to activate the light separately.
• Press the Camera switch*
For other usage: P.426
 Guidance mode is canceled
when any of the following
occurs:
• Vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 4.7 mph (7.6 km/h)
• VSC or ABS is operated*
• Tailgate is opened*
• Trailer tracking is lost
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4
Driving
Canceling the system
403
404
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of
the system
In order for this system to perform
as designed, the vehicle must be
driven safely and the driver must
control the speed to keep it within
operating parameters and to
avoid a collision.
As there is a limit to the degree of
control performance that this system can provide, do not overly
rely on this system. The driver is
always responsible for paying
attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving safely. This
system does not control braking
(or steering when in Guidance
mode). Driver needs to control
vehicle speed, control braking,
(and steering when in Guidance
mode,) and stop the vehicle to
avoid any collision. Failure to follow this warning could result in
property damage, serious injury
or death.
■ When using the Trailer
Backup Guide
For proper system performance,
observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may lead to an
accident resulting in property
damage, serious injury, or death.
● Keep the tailgate fully latched.
● Keep the rear camera clean at
all times.
● Do not change the installation
position or direction of the rear
camera or remove it.
● Do not modify the trailer hitch
light. (P.404)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Make sure nothing can obstruct
the rear camera view of the
trailer.
The system is designed to operate in various weather and lighting
conditions and on different ground
surfaces (asphalt, grass, gravel,
etc.), however performance can
still be affected by various environmental factors (e.g. shadow
passing over the trailer or diminished contrast between trailer and
the ground leading to trailer
detection being lost, etc.) so
always drive carefully, remain
alert and aware of your surroundings, and do not overly rely on the
system.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
*
405
Active front spoiler*
● Do not modify or disassemble
: If equipped
● Do not subject the active front
The equipped active front
spoiler operates automatically while the vehicle is
being driven. This active
front spoiler enhances aerodynamic performance especially at high speeds,
contributing to a more stable ride.
the active front spoiler.
spoiler to severe impacts.
Manually deploying the
active front spoiler
It is necessary to deploy the
Active front spoiler to remove
the engine under cover for maintenance.
■ Lowering the active front
spoiler to the service position
■ Automatic operating conditions
● The active front spoiler will acti-
vate automatically as follows
according:
Speed mph (km/h)
Deploy
Over 37 (60)
Retract
Under 25 (40)
Always observe the legal speed limit
when driving on public roads.
● Automatically operates when the
outside temperature is 40°F (5°C)
and above.
● Automatically stows when in Tow
mode.
● Automatically stows when in “4H”
mode or “4L” mode. (If equipped)
When there is a malfunction in the
system, avoid high speed driving
and have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■ To prevent system damage
● Do not attach any accessories
or other foreign objects to the
active front spoiler.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving
Conditions
4
Within approximately 45 seconds of turning the engine
switch off, move the wiper lever
to the
*1 or
*2 position
and hold it for approximately 2
seconds or more.
The active front spoiler will
move to the service position.
*1
: U.S.A.
*2
: Canada
406
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Raising the active front
spoiler to the retracted
position
Turn the engine switch to ON,
and when the shift lever is put in
R or D, the active front spoiler
will retract to the stowed position.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
active front spoiler
Before manually deploying or
stowing the active front spoiler,
make sure there are no obstacles
or foreign objects in the surrounding area.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-6. Driving tips
Off-road precautions
407
4-6.Driving tips
This vehicle belongs to the
utility vehicle class, which
has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in
relation to the height of its
center of gravity to make it
capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road
applications.
Off-road vehicle features
 An advantage of the higher
ground clearance is a better
view of the road allowing you
to anticipate problems.
 It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
ordinary passenger cars any
more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds
may cause the vehicle to rollover.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Off-road vehicle precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of
death, serious injury or damage to
your vehicle:
● In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the
driver and all passengers
should always fasten their seat
belts.
● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers, if at all possible.
Failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of
control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.
● Avoid loading any items on the
roof that will raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity.
● Always slow down in gusty
crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity,
your vehicle is more sensitive to
side winds than an ordinary
passenger car.
Slowing down will allow you to
have better control.
● Do not drive horizontally across
steep slopes. Driving straight up
or straight down is preferred.
Your vehicle (or any similar offroad vehicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than
forward or backward.
Off-road driving
When driving your vehicle offroad, please observe the following precautions to ensure your
driving enjoyment and to help
prevent the closure of areas to
4
Driving
 Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of
gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design
feature causes this type of
vehicle to be more likely to
rollover. And, utility vehicles
have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types
of vehicles.
WARNING
408
4-6. Driving tips
off-road vehicles:
 Drive your vehicle only in
areas where off-road vehicles
are permitted to travel.
WARNING
■ Off-road driving precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of
death, serious injury or damage to
your vehicle:
 Respect private property. Get
owner’s permission before
entering private property.
● Drive carefully when off the
 Do not enter areas that are
closed. Honor gates, barriers
and signs that restrict travel.
● Do not grip the steering wheel
 Stay on established roads.
When conditions are wet,
driving techniques should be
changed or travel delayed to
prevent damage to roads.
■ Additional information for
off-road driving
 For owners in U.S. mainland,
Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
road. Do not take unnecessary
risks by driving in dangerous
places.
spokes when driving off-road. A
bad bump could jerk the wheel
and injure your hands. Keep
both hands and especially your
thumbs on the outside of the
rim.
● Always check your brakes for
effectiveness immediately after
driving in sand, mud, water or
snow.
● After driving through tall grass,
 State and Local Parks and
Recreation Departments
mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc.,
check that there is no grass,
bush, paper, rags, stone, sand,
etc. adhering or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such
matter from the underbody. If
the vehicle is used with these
materials trapped or adhering to
the underbody, a breakdown or
fire could occur.
 State Motor Vehicle Bureau
● In a rollover crash, an unbelted
To obtain additional information
pertaining to driving your vehicle
off-road, consult the following
organizations.
 Recreational Vehicle Clubs
 U.S. Forest Service and
Bureau of Land Management
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the
driver and all passengers
should fasten their seat belts
whenever the vehicle is moving.
4-6. Driving tips
WARNING
● When driving off-road or in rug-
ged terrain, do not drive at
excessive speeds, jump, make
sharp turns, strike objects, etc.
This may cause loss of control
or vehicle rollover causing
death or serious injury. You are
also risking expensive damage
to your vehicle’s suspension
and chassis.
NOTICE
■ To prevent water damage
Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or other
components does not occur.
intake will cause severe engine
damage.
● Water entering the automatic
transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up
of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately
damage.
● Water can wash the grease
from wheel bearings, causing
rusting and premature failure,
and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer
case, reducing the gear oil’s
lubricating qualities.
■ When you drive through
water
If driving through water, such as
when crossing shallow streams,
first check the depth of the water
and the bottom of the riverbed for
firmness. Press the Stop & Start
cancel switch to disable the Stop
& Start system. Drive slowly and
avoid deep water.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Inspection after off-road driv-
ing
● Sand and mud that has accu-
mulated around brake discs
may affect braking efficiency
and may damage brake system
components.
● Always perform a maintenance
inspection after each day of offroad driving that has taken you
through rough terrain, sand,
mud, or water. For scheduled
maintenance information, refer
to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement”.
4
Driving
● Water entering the engine air
409
410
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary
preparations and inspections before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always
drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Preparation for winter
 Use fluids that are appropriate
to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
 Have a service technician
inspect the condition of the
battery.
 Have the vehicle fitted with
four snow tires or purchase a
set of tire chains for the rear
tires*.
*: Tire chains cannot be mounted
on 285/65R18 tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same
size and brand, and that chains
match the size of the tires.
WARNING
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a
loss of vehicle control and cause
death or serious injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended
level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75
mph (120 km/h), regardless of
the type of snow tires being
used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just
some wheels.
● 4WD models: Do not mix tires of
different makes, models, tread
patterns or treadwear.
■ Driving with tire chains (vehi-
cles without 285/65R18 tires)
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the
vehicle being unable to be driven
safely, and may cause death or
serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the
speed limit specified for the tire
chains being used, or 30 mph
(50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road
surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration,
abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that
cause sudden engine braking.
● Slow down sufficiently before
entering a curve to ensure that
vehicle control is maintained.
● Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing
Assist) (if equipped) system.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4-6. Driving tips
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow
tires
Request repairs or replacement of
snow tires from Toyota dealers or
legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and
attachment of snow tires affects
the operation of the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters.
Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according
to the driving conditions:
 To ensure proper operation of
the climate control system
fan, remove any snow that
has accumulated on the air
inlet vents in front of the windshield.
 Check for and remove any
excess ice or snow that may
have accumulated on the
exterior lights, outside rear
view mirrors, windows, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the
tires or on the brakes.
 Remove any snow or mud
from the bottom of your shoes
before getting in the vehicle.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly,
keep a safe distance between
you and the vehicle ahead, and
drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
When parking the vehicle
 Park the vehicle and move
the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The
parking brake may freeze up,
preventing it from being
released. If the vehicle is
parked without setting the
parking brake, make sure to
block the wheels.
Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an
accident.
 If the vehicle is parked without
setting the parking brake,
confirm that the shift lever
cannot be moved out of P*.
*: The shift lever will be locked if it is
attempted to be shifted from P to
any other position without
depressing the brake pedal. If the
shift lever can be shifted from P,
there may be a problem with the
shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
4
Driving
 Do not try to forcibly open a
window or move a wiper that
is frozen. Pour warm water
over the frozen area to melt
the ice. Wipe away the water
immediately to prevent it from
freezing.
411
412
4-6. Driving tips
Selecting tire chains
 Vehicles without 285/65R18
tires
Use the correct tire chain size
when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each
tire size.
■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions
when installing and removing
chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a
safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires.
Do not install tire chains on the
front tires.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires
as tightly as possible. Retighten
chains after driving 1/41/2 mile
(0.51.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the
instructions provided with the tire
chains.
NOTICE
■ Fitting tire chains
Side chain (0.2 in. [5 mm] in
diameter)
Cross chain (0.25 in. [6.3
mm] in diameter)
 Vehicles with 285/65R18 tires
Tire chains cannot be mounted
as the space between the tire
and body is too narrow.
Snow tires should be used
instead.
Regulations on the use of
tire chains (vehicles without 285/65R18 tires)
Regulations regarding the use
of tire chains vary depending on
location and type of road.
Always check local regulations
before installing chains.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
The tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters may not function
correctly when tire chains are fitted.
415
Interior features
5
5-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system....................... 416
Heated steering wheel/seat
heaters/seat ventilators
.................................. 423
5-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list .......... 425
5-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features 428
Luggage compartment features .......................... 433
Other interior features . 436
Garage door opener.... 453
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
5
Interior features
5-4. Using the other interior
features
416
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
5-1.Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Air conditioning controls
 Type A
 Type B
Temperature control toggle
Fan speed control toggle
Air flow mode control toggle
Outside air mode switch
Recirculated air mode switch
“A/C” switch
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch
Windshield defogger switch
“OFF” switch
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
417
“AUTO” switch
Left-hand side temperature control toggle
“AUTO” toggle
“SYNC” toggle
Right-hand side temperature control toggle
■ Adjusting the temperature
setting
Operate the temperature control toggle upwards to increase
the temperature and downwards
to decrease the temperature.
If the “A/C” switch is not pressed,
the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air.
■ Setting the fan speed
Press the “OFF” switch to turn the
fan off.
■ Change the airflow mode
Operate the air flow mode control toggle
The airflow mode changes as follows each time the toggle is operate.
5
1 Air flows to the upper body.
2 Air flows to the upper body
and feet.
3 Air flows to the feet.
4 Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
■ Switching between outside
air and recirculated air
modes
 To change to recirculated air
mode, press the recirculated
air mode switch.
The indicator illuminates on the
recirculated air mode switch.
 To change to outside air
mode, press the outside air
mode switch.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Interior features
Operate the fan speed control
toggle upwards to increase the
fan speed and downwards to
decrease the fan speed.
418
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
The indicator illuminates on the outside air mode switch.
■ Set cooling and dehumidifi-
cation function
Press the “A/C” switch.
When the function is on, “A/C ON”
indicator will illuminate. When the
function is off, “A/C OFF” indicator
will illuminate.
■ Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the
windshield and front side windows.
Press the windshield defogger
switch.
Press the outside air mode switch if
the recirculated air mode is used. (It
may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the
side windows quickly, turn the air
flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode,
press the windshield defogger
switch again when the windshield is
defogged.
When the windshield defogger
switch is on, the indicator illuminates on the windshield defogger
switch.
■ Defogging the rear window
and outside rear view mirrors
Defoggers are used to defog the
rear window and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the
outside rear view mirrors.
Press the rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
switch.
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after 15 minutes.
When the rear window and outside
rear view mirror defoggers switch is
on, the indicator illuminates on the
rear window and outside rear view
mirror defoggers switch.
■ When the outside temperature
exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air
conditioning system is on
● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air
conditioning system may switch to
recirculated air mode automatically.
This may also reduce fuel consumption.
● Recirculated air mode is selected
as a default mode when the
engine switch is turned to ON.
It is possible to switch to outside air
mode at any time by pressing the
outside air mode switch.
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up
when the humidity in the vehicle is
high. Turning the cooling and
dehumidification function on will
dehumidify the air from the outlets
and defog the windshield effectively.
● If you turn the cooling and dehumidification function off, the windows may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the
recirculated air mode is used.
■ When driving on dusty roads
Close all windows. If dust thrown up
by the vehicle is still drawn into the
vehicle after closing the windows, it
is recommended that the air intake
mode be set to outside air mode and
the fan speed to any setting except
off.
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● Setting to the recirculated air
mode temporarily is recommended in preventing dirty air
from entering the vehicle interior
and helping to cool the vehicle
when the outside air temperature
is high.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may
automatically switch depending on
the temperature setting or the
inside temperature.
419
attached to the hood at the location shown in the following illustration.
■ When the outside temperature
falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may
not operate even when “A/C” switch
is pressed.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning
odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air condi-
■ Air conditioning filter
P.499
■ Air conditioning system refrig-
erant
● A label regarding the refrigerant of
the air conditioning system is
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
the label are as follows:
Caution
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning system lubricant type
5
Requires registered
technician to service
air conditioning system
Interior features
tioning system to the outside air
mode.
● During use, various odors from
inside and outside the vehicle may
enter into and accumulate in the
air conditioning system. This may
then cause odor to be emitted
from the vents.
● In order to suppress odors that
occur when the air conditioning
system starts, the air flow mode
may change to blow air to the feet
or air may stop blowing for a short
period of time immediately after
the air conditioning system is
started in automatic mode.
● When parking, the system automatically switches to outside air
mode to encourage better air circulation throughout the vehicle,
helping to reduce odors that occur
when starting the vehicle.
● The meaning of each symbol on
Flammable refrigerant
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(Customizable features: P.587)
420
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield
from fogging up
Do not use the windshield defogger switch during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the temperature of the outside air and
that of the windshield can cause
the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your
vision.
■ When the outside rear view
mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror
surfaces when the outside rear
view mirror defoggers are on.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning
system on longer than necessary
when the engine is off.
Using automatic mode
 Type A
1 Press the “AUTO” switch.
2 Adjust the temperature setting.
3 To stop the operation, press
the “OFF” switch.
 Type B
1 Operate the “AUTO” toggle.
2 Adjust the temperature setting.
3 To stop the operation, press
the “OFF” switch.
If the fan speed setting or air
flow modes are operated, the
automatic mode indicator goes
off. However, automatic mode
for functions other than that
operated is maintained.
■ When repairing/replacing
parts of the air conditioning
system
Have repair/replacement performed by your Toyota dealer.
When a part of the air conditioning
system, such as the evaporator, is
to be replaced, it must be
replaced with a new one.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature
setting and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a
while until warm or cool air is ready
to flow immediately after the automatic mode switch is pressed.
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the temperature
for driver and front passenger seats simultaneously (“SYNC” mode) (if
equipped)
To turn on the “SYNC” mode,
operate the “SYNC” toggle
upwards or downwards.
The driver’s side temperature control toggle can be used to adjust the
temperature for the driver’s and
front passenger’s side. To enter
individual mode, operate the front
passenger’s side temperature control toggle or press the “SYNC” toggle again.
421
mirror defoggers switch.
WARNING
■ To prevent burns
Do not touch the glass at lower
part of the windshield or to the
side of the front pillars when the
windshield wiper deicer is on.
Air outlet layout and operations
■ Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
change according to the
selected air flow mode.
When the “SYNC” mode is on, the
“SYNC” indicator is illuminate.
5
This feature is used to prevent
ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.
Press the rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
switch.
The windshield wiper de-icer will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
Turning the rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers on
will turn the windshield wiper deicer on.
When the rear window and outside
rear view mirror defoggers switch is
on, the indicator illuminates on the
rear window and outside rear view
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Adjusting the air flow direc-
tion and opening/closing
the air outlets
 Front
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Interior features
Windshield wiper de-icer
(if equipped)
422
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
WARNING
■ To not interrupt the wind-
1 Open the vent
2 Close the vent
 Rear (if equipped)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
1 Open the vent
2 Close the vent
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
shield defogger from operating
Do not place anything on the
instrument panel which may cover
the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow
may be obstructed, preventing the
windshield defoggers from defogging.
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Heated steering
wheel*/seat heaters*/seat ventilators*
*
: If equipped
 Heated steering wheel
Warms up the grip of the
steering wheel
 Front seat heaters/Rear
seat heaters
423
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
seat heaters and seat ventilators
Do not put heavy objects that
have an uneven surface on the
seat and do not stick sharp
objects (needles, nails, etc.) into
the seat.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the functions when the
engine is off.
Warm up the seat upholstery
 Front seat ventilators/Rear
seat ventilators
Maintain good ventilation by
pulling air through the seat
upholstery
WARNING
■ Heated steering wheel
Turns heated steering wheel
on/off When the heated steering
wheel is on, the indicator illuminates on the heated steering
wheel switch.
ries
Care should be taken if anyone in
the following categories comes in
contact with the steering wheel or
seats when the heater is on:
● Babies, small children, the
elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
● Persons with sensitive skin
● Persons who are fatigued
● Persons who have taken alco-
hol or drugs that induce sleep
(sleeping drugs, cold remedies,
etc.)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
5
Interior features
■ To prevent minor burn inju-
Operating instructions
■ Front seat heaters/seat ven-
tilators
424
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjust the front seat heater
temperature level
Each time the switch is pressed,
the operation condition changes as
follows.
Hi (3 segments lit)  Mid (2 segments lit)  Lo (1 segment lit) 
Off
The level indicator (red) light up
during operation.
Adjust the front seat ventilator fan speed level
Each time the switch is pressed,
the operation condition changes as
follows.
Hi (3 segments lit)  Mid (2 segments lit)  Lo (1 segment lit) 
Off
The level indicator (blue) light up
during operation.
■ Rear seat heaters/seat ven-
tilators
during operation.
Adjust the rear seat ventilator
fan speed level
Each time the switch is pressed,
the operation condition changes as
follows.
Hi (3 segments lit)  Mid (2 segments lit)  Lo (1 segment lit) 
Off
The level indicator (blue) light up
during operation.
■ The heated steering wheel, seat
heaters and seat ventilators can
be used when
The engine switch is in ON.
WARNING
■ To prevent overheating and
minor burn injuries
Observe the following precautions
when using the seat heaters.
● Do not cover the seat with a
blanket or cushion when using
the seat heater.
● Do not use seat heater more
than necessary.
Adjust the rear seat heater
temperature level
Each time the switch is pressed,
the operation condition changes as
follows.
Hi (3 segments lit)  Mid (2 segments lit)  Lo (1 segment lit) 
Off
The level indicator (red) light up
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
5-2. Using the interior lights
425
Interior lights list
5-2.Using the interior lights
Location of the interior lights
5
Door courtesy lights (if equipped)
Ambient lights (if equipped) (P.426)
Shift lever light (if equipped)
Engine switch light
Glove box light (if equipped)
Footwell lights (if equipped)
Front tray light
Console box light (if equipped)
Cargo lamp (P.426)
Bed lamp (if equipped) (P.426)
Trailer hitch light (if equipped) (P.404, 426)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Interior features
Personal/interior lights (P.426)
426
5-2. Using the interior lights
Personal/interior lights
main switch
Ambient lights (if
equipped)
“OFF”
The personal/interior lights can be
individually turned on or off.
Each time the “MOOD” switch is
pressed, the brightness level
changes.
“DOOR”
The personal/interior lights come
on when a door is opened. They
turn off when the doors are closed.
On
The personal/interior lights cannot
be individually turned off.
Operating the personal/interior lights
Cargo lamp main switch
 Front
Turns the lights on/off
“OFF”
Turns the lights off
 Rear
Turns the lights on/off
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
“DOOR”
The cargo lamp and bed lamp turns
on/off when the door or tailgate is
5-2. Using the interior lights
opened or closed while the shift
lever is in P, D or R.
The trailer hitch light turns on when
the door or tailgate is opened or
closed while the shift lever is in P or
R. trailer hitch light will turn off
when shift lever in D.
“ON”
The cargo lamp, bed lamp, trailer
hitch light turns on while the shift
lever is in P or R. Only cargo lamp
and bed lamp turns on while shift
lever is in D.
■ Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off
according to the engine switch
mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are
locked/unlocked, and whether the
doors are open/closed.
427
be left on until safety can be
ensured.
(The personal/interior lights may not
turn on automatically depending on
the force of the impact and conditions of the collision.)
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.578)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer
than necessary when the engine
is off.
■ Removing light lenses
Never remove the lens for the
personal/interior lights. Otherwise,
the lights will be damaged. If a
lens needs to be removed, contact your Toyota dealer.
5
■ To prevent the battery from
■ The personal/interior lights may
turn on automatically when
If any of the SRS airbags deploy
(inflate) or in the event of a strong
rear impact, the personal/interior
lights will turn on automatically.
The personal/interior lights will turn
off automatically after approximately
20minutes.
The personal/interior lights can be
turned off manually. However, in
order to help prevent further collisions, it is recommended that they
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Interior features
being discharged
If the following lights remain on
when the door is not fully closed and
the main switch is in the “DOOR”
position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes:
● Personal/interior lights
● Cargo lamp
● Bed lamp
● Trailer hitch light
428
5-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features
5-3.Using the storage features
Location of the storage features
Auxiliary boxes
Glove box
Cup holders
Console box
Bottle holders
Storage box
WARNING
■ Items that should not be left
in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or
spray cans in the storage spaces,
as this may cause the following
when cabin temperature becomes
high:
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Glasses may be deformed by
heat or cracked if they come
into contact with other stored
items.
● Lighters or spray cans may
explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the
lighter may catch fire or the
spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
5-3. Using the storage features
Glove box
429
Cup holders
Pull up the lever to open.
 Front (Type A)
1 Unlock with the mechanical
key
2 Lock with the mechanical key
 Front (Type B)
Press in and release the button.
■ Tray within glove box
The tray can be removed by lifting
the tray and then sliding it out.
5
1 Lift the tray to disengage clip
2 Slide to remove tab from hole
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed. In the
event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may
occur due to an occupant being
struck by the open glove box or
the items stored inside.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
 Rear (Type B)
Pull the armrest down for use.
Interior features
 Rear (Type A)
430
5-3. Using the storage features
 Rear (if equipped)
WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the cup
holder
Do not place anything other than
cups or beverage cans in the cup
holders.
Inappropriate items must not be
stored in the cup holders even if
the lid is closed.
Other items may be thrown out of
the holders in the event of an
accident or sudden braking and
cause injury. If possible, cover hot
drinks to prevent burns.
■ When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of
an accident or sudden braking.
Bottle holders
 Front
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Bottle holders
● When storing a bottle, close the
cap.
● The bottle may not be stored
depending on its size or shape.
WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the bottle
holders
Do not place anything other than
a bottle in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of
the holders in the event of an
accident or sudden braking and
cause injury.
NOTICE
■ Items that should not be
stowed in the bottle holders
Put the cap on before stowing a
bottle. Do not place open bottles
in the bottle holders, or glasses
and paper cups containing liquid.
The contents may spill and
glasses may break.
5-3. Using the storage features
Console box
Press either button to open the
console box.
431
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of
an accident or sudden braking.
Auxiliary boxes
 Type A
Push in and release the auxiliary
box.
This box is useful for temporarily
storing the small items.
■ Console box
When the auxiliary box is slid, the
console box can be accessed.
■ Console box partition
The partition of the console box can
be removed.
5
Pull the auxiliary box out.
The removed partition can be
stowed in the position as shown in
the illustration.
 Type C (if equipped)
Pull the lid to open.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Interior features
 Type B
432
5-3. Using the storage features
Storage box
 Type D (if equipped)
Folding down the rear seatbacks. (P.138)
■ Open the storage box
Raising the bottom cushions.
(P.139)
■ Close the storage box
Returning the bottom cushions.
(P.140)
■ Storage box
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not leave the auxiliary box
open while driving.
Items may fall out and cause
death or serious injury in case of
an accident or sudden stop.
■ Items unsuitable for storing
(type A)
Do not store items heavier than
0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary
box to open and the items inside
may fall out, resulting in an accident.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
The partition of the storage box can
be removed or its position can be
changed.
5-3. Using the storage features
Luggage compartment features
433
 Type A
Bed hooks
Bed hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
 Type B
5
Deck divider
■ Vertical position
The plank can be inserted in the
deck side groove.
Dimensions of the wood that is
prepared:
Prepare a 2  8 wood plank with
the following dimensions.
Insertion position:
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Interior features
 Type C
434
5-3. Using the storage features
 Type A
62.2 in (1580 mm)
 Type B
60.7 in (1541 mm)
6 degree
Measure dimension
and
on
your vehicle to ensure accurate
length based on vehicle variation.
■ Horizontal position
A 2  8 wood plank can be
placed in the deck board
grooves.
 Type C
Prepare the board by measuring
the length with the actual vehicle
according to the position it is to
be placed.
Dimensions:
Insertion position:
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
5-3. Using the storage features
435
NOTICE
■ When using the deck divider
● Boards in board slots alone may
not guarantee that the cargo be
held sufficiently, other means
may be necessary.
● Board dimensions are for refer-
ence due to variations in bed
size manufacturing. The board
size may require minor adjustment due to variation. If board is
forced into slot, it could result in
damage to bed.
Width 61.9 in. (1573 mm)
Width 55.5 in. (1409 mm)
Width 61.9 in. (1573 mm)
Measure dimension
,
and
on your vehicle to ensure accurate
length based on vehicle variation.
■ When using and operating
the deck divider
● Do not use deck divider boards
when off-roading or crossing
rough terrain. The boards could
come out of the cargo bed area,
causing damage to other vehicles or causing injury or death.
● Ensure that deck divider boards
are prepared to the proper
dimensions, including the edge
angle. Failure to do so could
cause the boards to could come
out of the cargo bed area, causing damage to other vehicles or
causing injury or death.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Interior features
WARNING
5
436
5-4. Using the other interior features
Other interior features
5-4.Using the other interior features
USB charging ports
The USB charging ports are
used to supply 2.5 A (USB
Type-A) or 3.0 A (USB Type-C)
of electricity at 5 V to external
devices.
Use the appropriate terminal for
each charging port type.
The USB charging ports are for
charging only. They are not
designed for data transfer or
other purposes.
Depending on the external
device, it may not charge properly. Refer to the manual
included with the device before
using a USB charging port.
■ Using the USB charging
ports
 In the console box
USB Type-A
USB Type-C
■ The USB charging ports can be
used when
The engine switch is in ACC or ON.
■ Situations in which the USB
charging ports may not operate
correctly
● USB Type-A: If a device which
consumes more than 2.5 A at 5 V
is connected
USB Type-C: If a device which
consumes more than 3.0 A at 5 V
is connected
● If a device designed to communicate with a personal computer,
such as a USB memory device, is
connected
● If the connected external device is
turned off (depending on device)
● If the temperature inside the vehicle is high, such as after the vehicle has been parked in the sun
■ About connected external
USB Type-A
USB Type-C
 Rear of console box (if
equipped)
Open the lid.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
devices
Depending on the connected external device, charging may occasionally be suspended and then start
again. This is not a malfunction.
5-4. Using the other interior features
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
USB charging ports
● Do not insert foreign objects into
the ports.
● Do not spill water or other liq-
uids into the ports.
● Rear of console box: When the
USB charging ports are not in
use, close the lids. If a foreign
object or liquid enters a port
may cause a short circuit.
● Do not apply excessive force to
or impact the USB charging
ports.
● Do not disassemble or modify
the USB charging ports.
■ To prevent damage to exter-
● Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary force to an external device or the cable of an
external device while it is connected.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the USB charging
ports for a long period of time with
the engine stopped.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Wireless charger (if
equipped)
A portable device can be
charged by just placing Qi standard wireless charge compatible
portable devices according to
the Wireless Power Consortium,
such as smartphones and
mobile batteries, etc., on the
charge area.
The compatible portable devices
can be found on the following
Wireless Power Consortium
website.
https://www.
wirelesspowerconsortium.com/
This function cannot be used
with portable devices that are
larger than the charging tray.
Also, depending on the portable
device, it may not operate as
normal. Please read the operation manual for portable devices
to be used.
■ The “Qi” logo
The “Qi” logo is a trademark of
the Wireless Power Consortium.
Qi ID: 11277
5
Interior features
nal devices
● Do not leave external devices in
the vehicle. The temperature
inside the vehicle may become
high, resulting in damage to an
external device.
437
438
5-4. Using the other interior features
■ Name for all parts
table device down with the center of
the device in the center of the
charge area.
When charging, the operation indicator light (orange) comes on.
If charging is not occurring, refer to
“Situations in which the function
may not operate normally”
(P.443).
When charging is complete, the
operation indicator light (green)
comes on.
Operation indicator light
Charging area*
Charging tray
Approximately 1.0 in. (2.5
cm)
Approximately 3.9 in. (10 cm)
*
: Compatible portable devices and
the wireless charger contain
charging coils. The charging coil
in the wireless charger can be
moved within the charge area up
to the position of the charging coil
inside a portable device.
Charging is possible if the center
of the coil of the portable device
is placed within the charge area.
If 2 or more portable devices are
placed on the charging tray, their
charging coils may not be properly detected and they may not
be charged.
■ Using the wireless charger
Place the portable device on the
charging tray.
Place the charging side of the por-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Recharging function
 When charging is complete
and after a fixed time in the
charge suspension state,
charging restarts.
 When a portable device is
moved significantly in the
charge area, the charging coil
is disconnected and charging
is stopped momentarily. However, if there is a charging coil
in the charge area, the
charging coil inside the wireless charger will move toward
it and then charging restarts.
■ Rapid charging function
 The following portable
devices support rapid
5-4. Using the other interior features
charging.
• Portable devices compliant with
WPC Ver1.3.2 and compatible
with rapid charging
• iPhone’s with an iOS version that
supports 7.5 W charging (iPhone
8 and later models)
439
• Portable devices compatible with
Galaxy original rapid charging
standard.
 When a portable device that
supports rapid charging is
charged, charging automatically switches to the rapid
charging function.
■ Lighting conditions of operation indicator light
Operation indicator light
Charging tray side
Multimedia system screen side
Turning off
Disappear
Green (comes on) Gray
*1
Blue
When the Multimedia power supply
is off or engine switch is off
On Standby (charging possible
state)*1
When charging is complete*2
5
Charging
Interior features
Orange (comes
on)
Conditions
: Charging power will not be output during standby. A metallic object will
not be heated, if it is placed on the charging tray in this state.
*2: Depending on the portable device, there are cases where the operation
indicator light will continue being lit up orange even after the charging is
complete.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
440
5-4. Using the other interior features
■ The wireless charger is not working properly
The following are situations in which the wireless charger does not
work properly and how to deal with the possible causes.
Operation indicator light
Orange (Flashing
repeatedly once
every second)
Green (Flashing
repeatedly once
every second)
Green (comes on)
Multimedia system screen
Gray
Suspected causes/Handling
method
Vehicle to wireless charger communication failure
 If the engine is running, stop
and then restart the engine.
If the engine switch is in ACC, start
the engine. (P.204)
Disappear
Wireless charger and multimedia
system communication failure
 If the engine is running, stop
and then restart the engine.
If the engine switch is in ACC, start
the engine. (P.204)
Blue
AM radio stations are being automatically selected
 Wait until the system has completed the automatic selection
of AM radio stations. In the
case that automatic selection
cannot be completed, stop
automatic selection.
The smart key system is detecting the key
 Wait until the key detection is
complete.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
5-4. Using the other interior features
Operation indicator light
Multimedia system screen
441
Suspected causes/Handling
method
Foreign substance detection:
A metallic foreign substance is in
the charge area, and so the
abnormal heating prevention
function of the metallic foreign
substance operated
 Remove the foreign substance
from the charge area.
Green (comes on)
Gray
Battery protection function of
portable device:
Before full charging, battery protection function of portable
device operated
 Confirm the setting of portable
device.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
5
Interior features
Portable device misaligned/distanced from charging surface:
The charging coil in the portable
device moved outside of the
charging area, or lens convex is
large, or case is thick so the
abnormal heating prevention
function operated
 Remove the portable device
from the wireless charger, after
5 seconds, then place the portable device so that it is near
the center of the wireless charger.
Also, if a case or cover is
installed to the portable
device, remove it.
442
5-4. Using the other interior features
Operation indicator light
Orange (Repeatedly flashes 4
times continuously)
Multimedia system screen
Suspected causes/Handling
method
Gray
Safety shutdown resulting when
the temperature within the wireless charger exceeded the set
value
 Stop charging, remove the portable device from the charging
tray, wait for the temperature
to drop, and then start
charging again.
■ The wireless charger can be
operated when
The engine switch is in ACC or ON.
■ Usable portable devices
● Devices compatible with wireless
charging Qi standards can be
used. However, compatibility with
portable devices that comply with
Qi Ver. 1.0,1.3.2 and later versions is not guaranteed.
● Starting with mobile phones and
smartphones, it is aimed for low
power electrically supplied portable devices of no more than 5W.
● However, charging exceeding 5 W
is supported by the following portable devices.
• Charging at 7.5 W or less is supported by iPhone’s that support
7.5 W charging.
• Devices that comply with independent Galaxy charging standards
support rapid charging. Check the
specifications of each portable
device for the charging electricity.
• Charging at 15 W or less is supported by portable devices compliant with EPP output as defined by
WPC standard Ver1.3.2.
■ Using the smart key system
If the smart key system detects the
electronic key while a device is
being charged, charging will be temporarily stopped. When the electronic key is detected, charging will
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
automatically start again.
■ When covers and accessories
are attached to portable devices
Do not charge in situations where
cover and accessories not able to
handle Qi are attached to the portable device. Depending on the type
of cover (including for certain genuine manufacturer parts) and accessory, it may not be possible to
charge.
When charging is not performed
even with the portable device placed
on the charge area, remove the
cover and accessories.
■ AM radio cooperation function
during charging
● During charging, if noise occurs
when listening to the AM radio,
the charging frequency is automatically changed to reduce the
noise.
● When automatically seeking AM
radio stations, charging will be
suspended to prevent charging
noise from being detected as a
radio station. Charging will
resume automatically when seek
tuning is stopped.
■ Important points of the wire-
less charger
● If the electronic key cannot be
detected within the vehicle interior, charging can not be done.
When the door is opened and
5-4. Using the other interior features
closed, charging may be temporarily suspended.
● When charging, the wireless
charging device and portable
device will get warmer, however
this is not a malfunction. When a
portable device gets warm while
charging, charging may stop due
to the protection function on the
portable device side. In this case,
when the temperature of the portable drops significantly, charge
again.
The fan may start operating to
lower the temperature inside the
wireless charger, however this is
not a malfunction.
■ Operation sounds
A buzzing noise may be heard when
pressing the power switch to turn to
ACC or ON or when detecting a portable device. However, this is not a
malfunction.
■ Cleaning the wireless charger
■ Situations in which the function
may not operate normally
Devices may not be charged normally in the following situations.
● The portable device is fully
charged
● The portable device is being
charged with a cable connected
● There is foreign matter between
the charge area and portable
device
● Charging has caused the portable
device to heat up
● The temperature around the
charging tray is 95°F (35°C) or
higher, such as in extreme heat
● The portable device is placed with
its charging surface facing up
● The small portable device such as
foldable type is placed in an area
misaligned from the charge area
● The portable device is larger than
the charging tray
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● The camera lens protrudes 0.12 in
(3 mm) or more from the surface
of the portal device
● The vehicle is in an area where
strong electrical waves or noise
are emitted, such as near a television tower, power plant, gasoline
station, broadcasting station, large
display, airport, etc.
● The electronic key is not inside the
vehicle
● Any of the following objects is
stuck or installed between the
charging side of the portable
device and the charge area.
• Thick cases or covers
• A case or cover attached with an
uneven or tilted surface, so that
the charging side is not flat
• Thick decorations
• Accessories, such as finger
rings,a.straps, etc.
● When there is a gap between the
charging side of the portable
device and the charge area due to
a protrusion such as a camera on
the charging side of the portable
device.
● When the portable device is in
contact with, or is covered by any
of the following metallic objects:
• A card that has metal on it, such
as aluminum foil, etc.
• A pack of cigarettes that includes
aluminum foil
• A wallet or bag that is made of
metal
• Coins
• A heating pad
• CDs, DVDs or other media
• A metal accessory
• A case or cover made of metal
• A flip type case with a magnet on
the charging side of the portable
device
● Electric wave type wireless
remote controls are being used
nearby
● 2 or more portable devices are
placed on the charging tray at the
same time
5
Interior features
P.466
443
444
5-4. Using the other interior features
● If you use a device with a built-in
S-Pen (Galaxy Note series, etc.)
and the device with the S-Pen
inserted is on the tray.
If charging is abnormal or the operation indicator light continues to flash
for any other reason, the wireless
charger may be malfunctioning.
Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ If the smartphone OS has been
updated
If the smartphone OS has been
updated to a newer version, its
charging specifications may have
changed significantly. For details,
check the information on the manufacturer’s website.
■ Trademark information
• iPhone is a trademark of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
• “Galaxy” is a trademark or registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
■ Certification
■ Caution regarding interfer-
ence with electronic devices
People with implantable cardiac
pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or
implantable cardioverters, as well
as any other electrical medical
device, should consult their physician about the usage of the wireless charger.
■ To prevent malfunctions or
burns
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result
in a equipment failure and damage, catch fire, burns due to overheat or electric shock.
● Do not insert any metallic
objects between the charge
area and the portable device
while charging
● Do not attach an aluminum
sticker or other metallic object to
the charge area
● Do not attach an aluminum
WARNING
sticker or other metallic object to
the side of the portable device
(or to its case or cover) that
touches the charge area
■ Caution while driving
● Do not use the charging tray as
When charging a portable device,
for safety reasons, the driver
should not operate the main part
of the portable device while driving.
● Do not subject to a strong force
P.636
■ Caution while in motion
Do not charge lightweight devices
such as wireless headphones
while in motion. These devices
are very light and may be ejected
from the charging tray, which may
lead to unforeseen accidents.
a small storage space
or impact
● Do not disassemble, modify or
remove
● Do not charge devices other
than specified portable devices
● Keep away from magnetic items
● Do not perform charging if the
charging area is dirty
● Do not cover with a cloth or sim-
ilar material
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
5-4. Using the other interior features
NOTICE
■ To prevent malfunctions and
data corruptions
● When charging, bringing a
credit, or other magnetic card,
or magnetic storage media
close to the charge area may
clear any stored data due to
magnetic influence. Also, do not
bring a wristwatch or other precision instrument close to the
charge area since doing so may
cause it to malfunction.
● Do not charge with a non-con-
● Do not leave portable devices
inside the vehicle. The inside of
the vehicle can become hot in
extreme heat, which could
cause a malfunction.
Armrest (if equipped)
Pull the armrest down for use.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
armrest
Do not place too much strain on
the armrest.
Assist grips
An assist grip installed on the
pillar can be used when getting
in or out of the vehicle and others.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the wireless charger
for a long period of time when the
engine is stopped.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
assist grip
Do not hang any heavy object or
put a heavy load on the assist
grip.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
5
Interior features
tact IC card such as a transportation system IC card inserted
between the charging side of a
portable device and the charge
area. The IC chip may become
extremely hot and damage the
portable device or IC card. Be
especially careful not to charge
a portable device inside a case
or cover with a non-contact IC
card attached.
445
446
5-4. Using the other interior features
Coat hooks
 Type A
Power outlet (12 VDC)
The power outlet can be used
for 12 V accessories that run on
less than 10 A.
Open the lid.
 Type B
■ The power outlet can be used
when
The engine switch is in ACC or ON.
■ When turning the engine switch
WARNING
■ Items that must not be hung
on the hook
Do not hang a coat hanger or
other hard or sharp object on the
hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may
become projectiles that cause
death or serious injury.
off
Disconnect electrical devices with
charging functions, such as mobile
battery packs. If such devices are
left connected, the engine switch
may not be turned off normally.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power
outlet
Close the power outlet lid when
the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that
enter the power outlet may cause
a short circuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from
being blown
Do not use an accessory that
uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
5-4. Using the other interior features
447
Power outlets (120 VAC)
(if equipped)
Please use as a power supply
for electronic devices that use
less than 120 VAC.
■ Using the power outlets
 Rear of the console box
Open the lid.
■ Maximum available capac-
ity of the power outlet
 While the vehicle is being
driven
The maximum capacity of the
power outlet is always 120 V
AC/100 W.
 When the vehicle is stationary
 Bed
• The maximum capacity is 120 V
AC/400 W when the shift lever is
in P or N.
The maximum capacity of 400
W can only be restored by turning the power outlet main switch
off and then on again under condition described above.
■ When turning the power
outlets on
Press the “AC120V” switch.
The power outlets can be used
when the indicator on the
“AC120V” switch is illuminated.
The power outlets are turned
off/on each time the “AC120V”
switch is pressed.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ When connecting a device
Open the lid, and fully and
securely insert the plug of the
device into the power outlet.
5
Interior features
Open the lid.
• The maximum capacity is
restricted to 120 V AC/100 W
when the shift lever is moved to
any positions other than P or N.
448
5-4. Using the other interior features
 Rear of the console box
 Bed
■ When turning the power
outlets off
1 Turn the connected devices
off.
2 Press the “AC120V” switch to
turn the power outlets off.
3 Disconnect each plug from
the power outlets.
4 Close the lid of each power
outlet.
■ The power outlet can be used
when
The engine is running.
■ Electronic devices that can be
connected to the power outlets
Use electronic devices that can be
connected to the 120 VAC power
outlets. Depending on the devices
being used, the current flow may
become high and the electric power
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
for a moment may exceed the regulated capacity. If the regulated
capacity is exceeded by the electronic devices being used, the protection function of the power outlet
may operate and power outlet may
not be able to be used, but this is
not a malfunction. However,
observe the following precautions:
● Depending on the devices used, it
may cause interference with TV
and radio broadcasts.
● Observe the precautions that are
stated in the instruction manuals
for each of the electronic devices.
● It is assumed that many typical
general electronic devices will not
be used within the vehicle. The
following problems may occur
when using electronic devices
within the vehicle.
• Electronic device malfunction due
to vibrations while driving.
• Electronic device malfunction or
poor operations due to temperature changes* within the vehicle.
• The installation is unstable and
may not operate normally as the
compartment within the vehicle is
not flat.
*: Depending on the weather, season, usage environment, etc., the
vehicle compartment may
undergo extreme high or low temperatures.
■ Power outlet
The power outlet on the console box
is a device in order to use electronic
devices within the vehicle.
■ Devices which may not operate
correctly
The following 120 VAC devices may
not operate properly:
● Devices with high initial peak wattage
● Measuring devices that process
precise data
● Devices that require an extremely
5-4. Using the other interior features
stable power supply
● Devices that require a constant
power supply from the power outlet, such as a device with a timer.
■ Operating the Stop & Start Sys-
tem
When the engine restarts from the
engine stopped state due to the
operation of the Stop & Start system, the accessory outlet may be
temporarily unavailable, however
this is not a malfunction. Pressing
the “AC120V” switch again will
enable the accessory outlet to be
used.
■ When the power supply func-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● If any electrical device has mal-
functioned, park the vehicle in a
safe location and turn the
“AC120V” switch off.
● If the protection function activates
and power is cut, perform the following procedure.
1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place
and set the parking brake.
2 Ensure that the shift lever is in P
or N.
3 Check that the power consumed
by the electrical devices is within
400 W and any device has not
malfunctioned.
4 Press the “AC120V” switch.
If the inside of the vehicle is hot,
open the windows to lower the temperature and turn the switch back on
once the inside of the vehicle
reaches a normal temperature. If
following the procedure above does
not restore power, have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■ For safe use
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may lead to an
accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Do not use devices such as the
following when driving:
• Devices which cannot be properly secured within the vehicle.
• Devices which may distract the
driver and be a hindrance to
safe driving, such as a TV, DVD
player, etc.
5
Interior features
tion cannot be used
If the “AC120V” switch is pressed
but the switch indicator does not illuminate, the protection circuit may
have operated.
In this case, perform the appropriate
procedures as follows.
● Disconnect the plug of each
device from the power outlets,
check that the total power consumption of all devices to be connected to the power outlets,
reconnect the devices and then
press the “AC120V” switch again.
● Disconnect the plug of each
device from the power outlets,
check that the devices are not
malfunctioning, reconnect the
devices and then press the
“AC120V” switch again.
● If the temperature inside the vehicle is high, such as after the vehicle has been parked under the
sun, move the vehicle to a shaded
area, use the air conditioning system to sufficiently cool the interior,
and then press the “AC120V”
switch again.
If the power outlets cannot be used
even after performing the appropriate procedures above, have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
449
450
5-4. Using the other interior features
WARNING
• Unsecured devices which generate heat, such as a toaster,
microwave, electric heater, electric kettle, coffee maker, etc., as
they may cause burns or a fire
in the case of sudden braking or
an accident.
• Devices which may fall under
the pedals and prevent the
brake pedal from being
depressed.
● Do not use devices which pro-
duce steam while the windows
are closed. Doing so may cause
the windows to fog up, reducing
visibility and making it difficult to
drive safely. Also, the steam
may damage or negatively
affect other devices. If the
device must be used, stop the
vehicle and open the windows
before use.
● Do not use damaged electronic
devices. The power supply
function may not be able to be
used.
● Do not disconnect the plug of a
device while your hands are wet
or insert a pin or other object
into the power outlet. Also, if a
liquid or snow is on the power
outlet, dry the outlet before
using it.
● Do not attempt to modify, disas-
semble or repair a power outlet.
For information on repairs, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Do not let children touch the
power outlets.
● Keep the power outlets free of
dust and foreign matter. Also,
regularly clean the power outlet.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● If the plug of a device fits
loosely in a power outlet, even
though it is fully inserted,
replace the power outlet. For
information on replacement,
contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Using the power outlets while
parked or stopped
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may lead to an
accident, possibly resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Do not leave the vehicle unat-
tended while the engine is running and a device is connected
to a power outlet.
● Do not place luggage or get
near the vicinity of the tailpipe.
● Make sure that the hood is
closed. Do not put your head or
hands anywhere inside the
engine room, as the cooling
fans may operate suddenly. If
too close, hands and clothing
(especially a tie, scarf, etc.) may
get caught in a fan.
● Do not stop the vehicle near
objects which burn easily.
● Install and use appropriately
related devices to make air supply and exhaust ventilation possible in places where ventilation
is bad, such as within garages,
and places where the vehicle is
surrounded (places where snow
accumulates).
● Do not use in places where ven-
tilation is bad, such as within
garages where there are no air
supply and exhaust ventilation
devices, and places where the
vehicle is surrounded (places
where snow accumulates, etc.).
5-4. Using the other interior features
WARNING
● Do not use the power outlets if
the vehicle has a vehicle cover
installed.
● Do not sleep in the vehicle while
using devices such as an electric heater.
■ Devices to be connected
● Read the instruction manual
included with the electronic
device being used and observe
the precautions that are stated
regarding the product.
● Do not use when the power plug
or electronic device are damaged.
451
NOTICE
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may lead to the
power outlets not operating correctly or damage to the vehicle or
a connected device.
■ To avoid short circuit or mal-
function
● Do not set a device which generates heat near the interior
components or on a seat. Heat
may cause these parts to melt
or burn.
● Do not use devices which are
● Malfunctions or poor operations
may occur when the outside
temperatures are particularly
high or low.
sensitive to vibration or heat in
the vehicle.
These devices may malfunction
due to vibration while driving or
heat while the vehicle is parked
in the sun.
● Normal operations may not be
● When not using a power outlet,
● Excluding electronic devices
with waterproof specifications,
do not use in places where it
can be covered by rain or water,
or places with lots of humidity.
● Do not use medical equipment
as the power supply function
may temporarily stop depending
the conditions of the vehicle.
make sure to close the cover. If
foreign matter or a liquid enters
the power outlet, it may cause a
malfunction or short circuit.
● Do not use a multi-point outlet
adapter as doing so may overload the power outlet.
● Immediately stop using if there
is an unusual amount of heat
being felt from the power outlet.
■ When the ambient tempera-
ture is high
If the temperature inside the vehicle is high, such as after the vehicle has been parked under the
sun, move the vehicle to a shaded
area, use the air conditioning system to sufficiently cool the interior,
and then press the “AC120V”
switch again.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Interior features
possible for electronic devices
that require level installation.
5
452
5-4. Using the other interior features
Sun visors
NOTICE
■ To prevent the battery from
being discharged
Do not leave the vanity lights on
for extended periods while the
engine is off.
Rear door sunshades (if
equipped)
1 To set the visor in the forward
position, flip it down.
2 To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.
3 To use the side extender,
place the visor in the side
position, then slide it backward.
Pull up the tab of the sunshade
and hook the shade on using
the anchors.
To retract the sunshade, unhook
the sunshade and retract it slowly.
Vanity mirrors (if
equipped)
Open the cover.
The vanity light turns on.
NOTICE
■ To ensure normal operation
of the sunshades
Observe the following precautions:
● Do not place anything where it
may hinder the opening/closing
of the rear door sunshades.
● Do not attach items to the rear
door sunshades.
● Do not apply excessive load to
■ To prevent battery discharge
If the vanity lights remain on when
the engine switch is turned off, the
lights will go off automatically after
20 minutes.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
the rear door sunshades while
they are hanging from the
hooks.
● Do not operate the rear door
sunshade while the rear door is
opening/closing.
5-4. Using the other interior features
Garage door opener*
NOTICE
● Do not store the rear door sun-
shade in a tilted position. If
stored in a tilted position, the
rear door sunshade screen may
become creased.
■ To prevent damage to the rear
door sunshade
Observe the following precautions:
● Do not use the rear door sunshade when either hook is
detached. When the rear door is
opened/closed, the rear door
sunshade may be damaged.
● Do not pull on the screen while
the hooks are attached. The
screen may be damaged.
453
*
: If equipped
The garage door opener can
be programmed using the
HomeLink® to operate
garage doors, gates, entry
doors, door locks, home
lighting systems, security
systems, and other devices.
■ HomeLink® programming pro-
cedure
The programming procedures can
also be found at the following URL.
Website: www.homelink.com/toyota
5
System components
The HomeLink® wireless control
system in your vehicle has 3
buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different
devices. Refer to the programming methods on the following
pages to determine the method
which is appropriate for the
device.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Interior features
For support, contact customer support at the following.
Help Line: 1-800-355-3515
454
5-4. Using the other interior features
 Vehicles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror
Appears while HomeLink® is operating. When the menu button
(P.150) is pressed, the logo disappears even while the HomeLink®
is operating.
Setting icon
Press the menu button to change
the setting.
Menu buttons
®
HomeLink® buttons
HomeLink indicator light
Garage door operation indicators
HomeLink® icon
Illuminates while HomeLink® is
operating.
Buttons
 Vehicles with Digital Rear-
view Mirror
■ Codes stored in the Home-
Link® memory
● The registered codes are not
erased even if the battery cable is
disconnected.
● If learning failed when registering
a different code to a HomeLink®
button that already has a code
registered to it, the already registered code will not be erased.
■ Certification
P.637
HomeLink® indicator light
Illuminates above each button
selected.
HomeLink® icon
Garage door operation indicators
HomeLink® logo
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
5-4. Using the other interior features
WARNING
■ When programming a garage
door or other remote control
device
The garage door or other device
may operate, so ensure people
and objects are out of danger to
prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety
standards
Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any
garage door opener or device that
lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door
that cannot detect an interfering
object. A door or device without
these features increases the risk
of death or serious injury.
■ When operating or program-
ming HomeLink®
Programming the HomeLink®
■ Before programming Home-
Link®
 During programming, it is possible that garage doors,
gates, or other devices may
operate. For this reason,
make sure that people and
objects are clear of the
garage door or other devices
to prevent injury or other
potential harm.
 It is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
remote control transmitter for
more accurate programming.
 Garage door opener motors
manufactured after 1995 may
be equipped with rolling code
protection. If this is the case,
you may need a stepladder or
other sturdy, safe device to
reach the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door
opener motor.
■ Programming HomeLink®
Steps 2 through 4 must be performed within 60 seconds, otherwise the indicator light will
stop flashing and programming
will not be successfully completed.
1 Vehicles with Digital Rearview Mirror: Press the HomeLink® button or menu button
When the HomeLink® button
is pressed: HomeLink® Training Tutorial will be displayed
to assist you programming
the HomeLink®.
When the menu button is pressed:
Press the menu button
and
select the “SET UP”. HomeLink®
Training Tutorial will be displayed to
assist you programming the HomeLink®.
2 Press and release the HomeLink® button you want to program and check that the
HomeLink® indicator light
flashes (orange).
5
Interior features
Never allow a child to operate or
play with the HomeLink® buttons.
455
456
5-4. Using the other interior features
3 Point the remote control
transmitter for the device at
the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in.
(25 to 75 mm) from the
HomeLink® buttons.
 Vehicles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror
Keep the HomeLink® indicator light
in view while programming.
 Vehicles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror
 Vehicles with Digital Rear-
view Mirror
 Vehicles with Digital Rear-
view Mirror
 Programming a device other
than an entry gate (for U.S.A.
owners)
4 Program a device.
Press and hold the remote control
transmitter button until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from
slowly flashing orange to rapidly
flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code), then
release the button.
 Programming an entry gate
(for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a device in the Canadian market
Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second
intervals, repeatedly, until the
HomeLink® indicator light changes
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
5-4. Using the other interior features
from slowly flashing (orange) to
rapidly flashing (green) (rolling
code) or continuously lit (green)
(fixed code).
5 Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly
programmed button and
observing the indicator light:
 HomeLink® indicator light illuminates: Programming of a
fixed code device has completed. The garage door or
other device should operate
when a HomeLink® button is
pressed and released.
1 Locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door
opener motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the unit. The name and
color of the button may vary by
manufacturer. Refer to the owner’s
manual supplied with the garage
door opener motor for details.
2 Press and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button.
Perform 3 within 30 seconds after
performing 2.
 If the garage door or other
device does not operate, proceed to “Programming a rolling code system”.
6 Repeat the steps above to
program another device for
any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
■ Programming a rolling code
system
Two or more people may be
necessary to complete rolling
code programming.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3 Press and hold the desired
HomeLink® button (inside the
vehicle) for 2 seconds and
release it. Repeat this
sequence
(press/hold/release) up to 3
times to complete programming.
If the garage door opener
motor operates when the
5
Interior features
 HomeLink® indicator light
flashes rapidly: The garage
door opener motor or other
device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete programming, firmly press and
hold the HomeLink® button
for 2 seconds then release it.
457
458
5-4. Using the other interior features
HomeLink® button is
pressed, the garage door
opener motor recognizes the
HomeLink® signal.
 Vehicles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror
 Vehicles with Digital Rear-
view Mirror
compatibility, refer to
www.homelink.com.)
1 Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door
opener has been completed,
if the garage door opener
motor is trained to HomeLink®, both garage door
operation indicators will flash
rapidly (green) and the light
on the garage door opener
motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.
If the indicators do not flash, perform 2 and 3 within the first 10
presses of the HomeLink® button
after programming has been completed.
2 Press a programmed HomeLink® button to operate a
garage door.
■ Enabling 2-way communi-
cation with a garage door
(only available for compatible devices)
When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the
status of the opening and closing of a garage door through
indicators in your vehicle.
2-way communication is only
available if the garage door
opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3 Within 1 minute of pressing
the HomeLink® button, after
the garage door operation
has stopped, press the
“Learn” or “Smart” button on
the garage door opener
motor. Within 5 seconds of
the establishment of 2-way
communication with the
garage door opener, both
garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will flash
rapidly (green) and the light
on the garage door opener
motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.
5-4. Using the other interior features
■ Reprogramming a single
HomeLink® button
459
 Vehicles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror
When the following procedure is
performed, buttons which
already have devices registered
to them can be overwritten:
1 Press and hold the desired
HomeLink® button.
2 When the HomeLink® indicator starts flashing orange,
release the HomeLink® button and perform “Programming HomeLink®” 1 (it takes
20 seconds for the HomeLink® indicator to start flashing).
Opening
Closing
 Vehicles with Digital Rear-
view Mirror
5
Interior features
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the trans-
mitter.
● The battery side of the transmitter
must be pointed away from the
HomeLink® buttons.
Operating HomeLink®
Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink®
indicator light should turn on.
The status of the opening and
closing of a garage door is
shown by the garage door
opener indicators.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Opening
Closing
This function is only available if the
garage door opener motor used is a
compatible device. (To check
device compatibility, refer to
www.homelink.com.)
Color
Status
Orange (flashing)
Currently opening/closing
460
5-4. Using the other interior features
Color
Status
Green
Opening/closing
has completed
Red (flashing)
Feedback signals cannot be
received
The indicators can operate
within approximately 820 ft. (250
m) of the garage door. However,
if there are obstructions
between the garage door and
the vehicle, such as houses and
trees, feedback signals from the
garage door may not be
received.
To recall the previous door operation status, press and release
either HomeLink® buttons
and
or
and
(vehicles
with auto anti-glare inside rear
view mirror),
or
and
and
(vehicles
with Digital Rear-view Mirror),
simultaneously. The last
recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds.
Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three
codes)
Press and hold the 2 outside
buttons for 10 seconds until the
HomeLink® indicator light
changes from continuously lit
(orange) to rapidly flashing
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
(green).
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink® memory.
 Vehicles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror
 Vehicles with Digital Rear-
view Mirror
461
Maintenance and care
6
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle exterior .......... 462
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle interior ........... 466
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
.................................. 469
General maintenance.. 470
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M) programs ........................ 473
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions..................... 474
Hood ........................... 476
Tires ............................ 486
Tire inflation pressure.. 496
Wheels ........................ 498
Air conditioning filter.... 499
Electronic key battery.. 501
Checking and replacing
fuses.......................... 503
Light bulbs................... 506
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Maintenance and care
Engine compartment... 477
6
462
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
6-1.Maintenance and care
Perform cleaning in a manner appropriate to each
component and its material.
Cleaning instructions
 Working from top to bottom,
liberally apply water to the
vehicle body, wheel wells and
underside of the vehicle to
remove any dirt and dust.
 Wash the vehicle body using
a sponge or soft cloth, such
as a chamois.
 For hard-to-remove marks,
use car wash soap and rinse
thoroughly with water.
 Wipe away any water.
 Wax the vehicle when the
waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean
surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
■ High pressure car washes
As water may enter the cabin, do
not bring the nozzle tip near the
gaps around the doors or perimeter
of the windows, or spray these
areas continuously.
■ When using a car wash
If the door handle becomes wet
while the electronic key is within the
effective range, the door may lock
and unlock repeatedly. In that case,
follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2
m) or more separate from the
vehicle while the vehicle is being
washed. (Take care to ensure that
the key is not stolen.)
● Set the electronic key to batterysaving mode to disable the Smart
key system. (P.132)
■ Wheels and wheel ornaments
● Remove any dirt immediately by
using a neutral detergent.
● Wash detergent off with water
immediately after use.
● To protect the paint from damage,
make sure to observe the following precautions.
• Do not use acidic, alkaline or
abrasive detergent
• Do not use hard brushes
• Do not use detergent on the
wheels when they are hot, such
as after driving or parking in hot
weather
■ Brake pads and calipers
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors before washing
the vehicle.
Start washing from the front of the
vehicle. Extend the mirrors before
driving.
Rust may form if the vehicle is
parked with wet brake pads or disc
rotors, causing them to stick. Before
parking the vehicle after it is
washed, drive slowly and apply the
brakes several times to dry the
parts.
● Brushes used in automatic car
■ Bumpers and wheel arch mold-
washes may scratch the vehicle
surface, parts (wheel, etc.) and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
ings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
6-1. Maintenance and care
■ Plated portions
If dirt cannot be removed, clean the
parts as follows:
● Use a soft cloth dampened with an
approximately 5% solution of neutral detergent and water to clean
the dirt off.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft
cloth to remove any remaining
moisture.
● To remove oily deposits, use alcohol wet wipes or a similar product.
463
■ When cleaning the windshield
(vehicles with rain-sensing
windshield wipers)
Set the wiper switch to off.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”,
the wipers may operate unexpectedly in the following situations,
and may result in hands being
caught or other serious injuries
and cause damage to the wiper
blades.
WARNING
■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of
the engine compartment. Doing
so may cause the electrical components, etc. to catch fire.
■ Precautions regarding the
“AUTO”
● When the upper part of the
windshield where the raindrop
sensor is located is touched by
hand
● When a wet rag or similar is
held close to the raindrop sensor
● If something bumps against the
windshield
● If you directly touch the raindrop
sensor body or if something
bumps into the raindrop sensor
■ Precaution regarding the rear
bumper with Blind Spot Monitor (vehicles with painted rear
bumper)
If the paint of the rear bumper is
chipped or scratched, the following systems may not function correctly. If this occurs, consult your
Toyota dealer.
● BSM
● RCTA
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
6
Maintenance and care
exhaust pipe
Exhaust gases cause the exhaust
pipe to become quite hot. When
washing the vehicle, be careful
not to touch the pipe until it has
cooled sufficiently, as touching hot
exhaust pipe can cause burns.
Off
464
6-1. Maintenance and care
WARNING
● PKSB
NOTICE
● Do not apply wax to the sur-
faces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the
lenses.
■ When using an automatic car
tion and corrosion on the
body and components (aluminum wheels, etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in
the following cases:
wash (vehicles with rainsensing windshield wipers)
Set the wiper switch to the off
position.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”,
the wipers may operate and the
wiper blades may be damaged.
• After driving near the sea coast
■ When using a high pressure
■ To prevent paint deteriora-
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present
on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings
or bird droppings are present on
the paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke,
mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily
soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and
gasoline are spilled on the paint
surface
● If the paint is chipped or
scratched, have it repaired
immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from cor-
roding, remove any dirt and
store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use
organic substances or scrub
with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces
of the lights.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
car wash
● When washing the vehicle, do
not spray the camera or its surrounding area directly with a
high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure
water may cause the device to
not operate normally.
● On vehicles with Toyota Safety
Sense 2.5, do not spray water
directly on the radar which is
equipped behind the emblem.
Otherwise it may cause the
device to be damaged.
● Do not bring the nozzle tip close
to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), connectors or
the following parts. The parts
may be damaged if they come
into contact with high-pressure
water.
• Traction related parts
• Steering parts
• Suspension parts
• Brake parts
6-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
● Keep the cleaning nozzle at
least 11.9 in. (30 cm) away from
the vehicle body. Otherwise
resin section, such as moldings
and bumpers, may be deformed
and damaged.
Also, do not continuously hold the
nozzle in the same place.
465
■ Cleaning the high mounted
stoplight and cargo lamps
When using high-pressured car
washers, the tip of the nozzle
should be at least 20 in. (50 cm)
from the car body. Water can
seep lamp housing or the vehicle
cabin if the nozzle is closer to the
car body.
● Do not spray the lower part of
the windshield continuously.
If water enters the air conditioning
system intake located near the
lower part of the windshield, the
air conditioning system may not
operate correctly.
● Do not wash the underside of
the vehicle using a high pressure car washer.
■ When raising the windshield
Hook parts
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
6
Maintenance and care
wiper arms
Make sure to hold the hook parts
of the wiper arms to raise them.
Do not hold only the wiper blades
when raising them, or it may
cause deformation of the wiper
blades.
466
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
Perform cleaning in a manner appropriate to each
component and its material.
Protecting the vehicle
interior
 Remove dirt and dust using a
vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty
surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
 If dirt cannot be removed,
wipe it off with a soft cloth
dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately
1%.
Wring out any excess water
from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off remaining traces of
detergent and water.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam.
Rub in overlapping circles. Do not
use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and
let them dry. Excellent results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as
dry as possible.
■ Handling the seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm
water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for
excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
WARNING
■ Water in the vehicle
Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (P.36)
An electrical malfunction may
cause the airbags to deploy or not
function properly, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (espe-
cially instrument panel)
Do not use a polish wax or polish
cleaner. The instrument panel
may reflect off the windshield,
obstructing the driver’s view and
leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types
of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or
cause streaks or damage to
painted surfaces:
• Areas other than the seats and
steering wheel: Organic substances such as benzene or
gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene,
and alcohol
• Steering wheel: Organic substances, such as thinner, and
cleaner that contains alcohol
● Do not use a polish wax or pol-
ish cleaner. The instrument
panel’s or other interior part’s
painted surface may be damaged.
6-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Preventing damage to leather
surfaces
Observe the following precautions
to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from
leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to
direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in
the shade, especially during
summer.
● Do not place items made of
vinyl, plastic, or containing wax
on the upholstery, as they may
stick to the leather surface if the
vehicle interior heats up significantly.
467
■ Cleaning the inside of the
back window
● Do not use a glass cleaner to
clean the back window, as this
may cause damage to the back
window defogger heater wires
or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to
gently wipe the window clean.
Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires
or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or
antenna.
Cleaning the areas with
satin-finish metal accents
● Do not leave excess moisture
 Remove dirt using a waterdampened soft cloth or synthetic chamois.
■ Water on the floor
 Wipe the surface with a dry,
soft cloth to remove any
remaining moisture.
on leather surfaces, as prolonged exposure may cause
damage.
■ When cleaning the inside of
the windshield (vehicles with
Toyota Safety Sense 2.5)
Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch
the lens. (P.232)
■ Cleaning the areas with satin-
finish metal accents
The metal areas use a layer of real
metal for the surface. It is necessary
to clean them regularly. If dirty areas
are left uncleaned for long periods
of time, they may be difficult to
clean.
Cleaning the leather areas
 Remove dirt and dust using a
vacuum cleaner.
 Wipe off any excess dirt and
dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of
approximately 5% neutral wool
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
6
Maintenance and care
Do not wash the vehicle floor with
water.
Vehicle systems such as the
audio system may be damaged if
water comes into contact with
electrical components such as the
audio system above or under the
floor of the vehicle. Water may
also cause the body to rust.
468
6-1. Maintenance and care
detergent.
 Wring out any excess water
from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces
of detergent.
 Wipe the surface with a dry,
soft cloth to remove any
remaining moisture. Allow the
leather to dry in a shaded and
ventilated area.
■ Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the
interior of the vehicle at least twice a
year to maintain the quality of the
vehicle’s interior.
Cleaning the synthetic
leather areas
 Remove dirt and dust using a
vacuum cleaner.
 Wipe it off with a soft cloth
dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately
1%.
 Wring out any excess water
from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off remaining traces of
detergent and water.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
6-2.Maintenance
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care
and regular maintenance
are essential. It is the
owner’s responsibility to
perform regular checks.
Toyota recommends the
maintenance below.
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine
Toyota parts be used for repairs to
ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in
replacement or if a repair shop other
than a Toyota dealer performs
repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
469
■ Handling of the battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its
constituents, and a wide variety
of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects and
other reproductive harm. Work
in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained
in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Avoid
exposure and wash any
affected area immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds which are
known to cause brain damage.
Wash your hands after handling. (P.482)
■ Allow inspection and repairs to
WARNING
■ If your vehicle is not properly
maintained
Improper maintenance could
result in serious damage to the
vehicle and possible death or serious injury.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
General maintenance
General maintenance should be
performed on a daily basis. This
can be done by yourself or by a
Toyota dealer.
Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should
be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance
items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
6
Maintenance and care
be performed by a Toyota
dealer
● Toyota technicians are welltrained specialists and are kept up
to date with the latest service
information. They are well
informed about the operation of all
systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It
proves that the maintenance that
has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem
should arise while your vehicle is
under warranty, your Toyota
dealer will promptly take care of it.
470
6-2. Maintenance
■ Resetting the message indicat-
ing maintenance is required
After the required maintenance is
performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the
message.
To reset the message, follow the
procedure described below:
1 Press
or
of meter control
switches and select
on the
multi-information display.
2 Press
or
of meter control
switches and select “Vehicle Settings”, and then press and hold
.
3 Press
or
of meter control
switches and select “Scheduled
Maintenance”, and then press
.
4 Select the “Yes” and press
.
Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect
warranty coverage.
General maintenance
Listed below are the general
maintenance items that
should be performed at the
intervals specified in the
“Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance Guide”. It
is recommended that any
problem you notice should
be brought to the attention
of your Toyota dealer or
qualified service shop for
advice.
WARNING
■ If the engine is operating
Turn the engine off and ensure
that there is adequate ventilation
before performing maintenance
checks.
Engine compartment
Items
Check points
Battery
Check the connections. (P.482)
The use of Toyota repair manuals is
recommended.
Brake fluid
For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s
Warranty Information Booklet” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
Is the brake fluid at
the correct level?
(P.482)
Is the engine coolEngine coolant ant at the correct
level? (P.480)
Engine oil
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Is the engine oil at
the correct level?
(P.478)
6-2. Maintenance
Items
Check points
Exhaust system
There should not
be any fumes or
strange sounds.
Radiator/condenser
The radiator and
condenser should
be free from foreign objects.
(P.481)
Washer fluid
Is there sufficient
washer fluid?
(P.485)
Items
Head
restraints
• Do the head
restraints move
smoothly and
lock securely?
Accelerator
pedal
Indicators/buzzers
• Do the indicators and buzzers
function properly?
• When parked on
Automatic
a slope and the
transmission
shift lever is in P,
“Park” mechais the vehicle
nism
securely
stopped?
Brake pedal
• Does the brake
pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake
pedal have
appropriate
clearance from
the floor?
• Does the brake
pedal have the
correct amount
of free play?
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
• Does the parking brake operate normally?
• When parked on
Parking brake
a slope and the
parking brake is
on, is the vehicle
securely
stopped?
Seat belts
• Do the seat belts
operate
smoothly?
• The seat belts
should not be
damaged.
6
Maintenance and care
Brakes
Check points
• The accelerator
pedal should
move smoothly
(without uneven
pedal effort or
catching).
Check points
• The vehicle
should not pull to
one side when
the brakes are
applied.
• The brakes
should work
effectively.
• The brake pedal
should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal
should not get
too close to the
floor when the
brakes are
applied.
Vehicle interior
Items
471
472
6-2. Maintenance
Items
Seats
Check points
Items
• Do the seat controls operate
properly?
• Does the steering wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have
the correct
Steering wheel amount of free
play?
• There should not
be any strange
sounds coming
from the steering wheel.
Tires
• Is the tire inflation pressure
correct?
• The tires should
not be damaged
or excessively
worn.
• Have the tires
been rotated
according to the
maintenance
schedule?
• The wheel nuts
should not be
loose.
Windshield
wipers
• The wiper blades
should not show
any signs of
cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or
deformation.
• The wiper blades
should clear the
windshield without streaking or
skipping.
Vehicle exterior
Items
Check points
Doors
• Do the doors
operate
smoothly?
Engine hood
• Does the hood
lock system work
properly?
Fluid leaks
• There should not
be any signs of
fluid leakage
after the vehicle
has been parked.
Lights
• Do all the lights
come on?
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Check points
6-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection
and maintenance (I/M)
programs
Some states have vehicle
emission inspection programs which include OBD
(On Board Diagnostics)
checks. The OBD system
monitors the operation of
the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
Your vehicle may not pass
the I/M test in the following situations:
 When the battery is disconnected or discharged Readiness codes that are set during
ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness
codes may not be completely
set.
 When the fuel tank cap is
loose
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
The malfunction indicator
lamp comes on indicating a
temporary malfunction and
your vehicle may not pass the
I/M test.
When the malfunction
indicator lamp still
remains on after several
driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless
the vehicle is driven 40 or more
times.
If your vehicle does not
pass the I/M test
Contact your Toyota dealer to
prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
6
Maintenance and care
The OBD system determines
that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control
system. Your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test and may need
to be repaired. Contact your
Toyota dealer to service the
vehicle.
473
474
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions
6-3.Do-it-yourself maintenance
If you perform maintenance
by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure
as given in these sections.
Maintenance
Items
Parts and tools
• Grease
• Warm water
• Baking soda
Battery condi- • Distilled water
tion (P.482) • Conventional
wrench (for terminal clamp
bolts)
• FMVSS No.116
DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
FMVSS No.116
DOT 4 or SAE
Brake fluid
J1704 brake fluid
level (P.482)
• Rag or paper
towel
• Funnel (used
only for adding
brake fluid)
Items
• “Toyota Super
Long Life Coolant” or a similar
high quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, nonamine,
non-nitrite and
non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic
acid technology
For the U.S.A.:
Engine cool“Toyota Super
ant/intercooler
Long Life Coolcoolant level
ant” is pre-mixed
(P.480)
with 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super
Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed
with 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water.
• Funnel (used
only for adding
coolant)
• “Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil” or
equivalent
Engine oil level • Rag or paper
(P.478)
towel
• Funnel (used
only for adding
engine oil)
Fuses
(P.503)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Parts and tools
• Fuse with same
amperage rating
as original
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items
Light bulbs
(P.507)
Parts and tools
• Bulb with same
number and
wattage rating as
original
• Phillips-head
screwdriver
• Wrench
Radiator and
condenser
(P.481)

Tire inflation
pressure
(P.496)
• Tire pressure
gauge
• Compressed air
source
Washer fluid
(P.485)
• Water or washer
fluid containing
antifreeze (for
winter use)
• Funnel (used
only for adding
water or washer
fluid)
The engine compartment contains
many mechanisms and fluids that
may move suddenly, become hot,
or become electrically energized.
To avoid death or serious injury,
observe the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine
compartment
● Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from the moving fan and
engine.
● Be careful not to touch the
engine, inverter, radiator,
exhaust manifold, etc., right
after driving as they may be hot.
Oil and other fluids may also be
hot.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Do not leave anything that may
burn easily, such as paper and
rags, in the engine compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or
expose an open flame to gasoline or the battery. Gasoline and
battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when
working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive
sulfuric acid.
■ When working near the elec-
tric cooling fan or radiator
grille
Be sure the engine switch is off.
With the engine switch in ON, the
electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant
temperature is high. (P.481)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent
flying or falling material, fluid
spray, etc., from getting in your
eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner
filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter
removed may cause excessive
engine wear due to dirt in the air.
6
Maintenance and care
WARNING
475
476
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Opening the hood
1 Pull the hood lock release
lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2 Pull up the auxiliary catch
lever and lift the hood.
WARNING
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed
and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly,
it may open while the vehicle is in
motion and cause an accident,
which may result in death or serious injury.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
477
Engine compartment
Components
Fuse boxes (P.503)
Intercooler coolant reservoir (P.480)
Engine coolant reservoir (P.480)
Engine oil filler cap (P.478)
Engine oil level dipstick (P.478)
Brake fluid reservoir (P.482)
Intercooler radiators (P.480)
Engine radiator (P.481)
Condenser (P.481)
Cooling fan (P.480)
Washer fluid tank (P.485)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Maintenance and care
Battery (P.482)
6
478
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking the engine oil
With the engine at operating
temperature and turned off,
check the oil level on the dipstick.
1 Park the vehicle on level
ground. After warming up the
engine and turning off the
engine, wait about 5 minutes
for the oil to drain back into
the bottom of the engine.
2 Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out.
check whether the oil level is
above low level mark.
Low level mark
The shape of the dipstick may differ
depending on the type of vehicle or
engine.
6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert
it fully.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine
damage
Check the oil level on a regular
basis.
3 Wipe the dipstick clean.
4 Reinsert the dipstick fully with
its protruding areas (
in the
illustration) pointing towards
engine.
5 Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out and
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will
be consumed while driving. In the
following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil
may need to be refilled in between
oil maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for
example directly after purchasing
the vehicle or after replacing the
engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine
speeds or with a heavy load,
when towing, or when driving
while accelerating or decelerating
frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic
■ Engine oil level rise
If the vehicle is repeatedly driven
without the engine warmed up,
moisture caused by dew condensation inside the engine or fuel which
did not burn mixes into the engine
oil, resulting in a rise in engine oil
level.
However, this is not a malfunction.
For example, the engine become
difficult to be warmed up in the following situations.
● When driving a short distance
● When driving at a low speed
● When the outside temperature is
low
When checking the engine oil, make
sure that the engine is warmed up. If
the engine oil level exceeds the refill
upper limit mark, contact your Toyota dealer.
479
oil of the same type as that
already in the engine.
1 Remove the oil filler cap by
turning it counterclockwise.
2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Make sure that the oil level does
not exceed the refill upper limit
mark and is between the low level
mark and refill upper limit mark.
Adding engine oil
6
preparing the items needed
Make sure to check the oil type
and prepare the items needed
before adding oil.
 Engine oil selection
P.560
 Oil quantity (Low level mark
→ Refill upper limit mark)
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)
 Items
Clean funnel
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Low level mark
Refill upper limit mark
The shape of the dipstick may differ
depending on the type of vehicle or
engine.
3 Install the oil filler cap by
turning it clockwise.
Maintenance and care
■ Checking the oil type and
480
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ After changing the engine oil
The engine oil maintenance data
should be reset. Perform the following procedures:
1 Press
or
of the meter
control switches and select
.
3 Press
or
of the meter
control switches, select the “Oil
Maintenance” and then press
.
4 Select the “Yes” and push
.
“Reset Complete” is displayed
on the multi-information display.
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains poten-
on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine
2 Press
or
of the meter
control switches, select the
“Vehicle Settings” and then press
.
WARNING
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil
could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dip-
stick every time you refill the
vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap
is properly tightened.
Checking the
engine/intercooler coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory
if it is between the “F” and “L”
lines on the reservoir when the
engine is cold.
 Engine coolant
tially harmful contaminants
which may cause skin disorders
such as inflammation and skin
cancer, so care should be taken
to avoid prolonged and
repeated contact. To remove
used engine oil from your skin,
wash thoroughly with soap and
water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters
only in a safe and acceptable
manner. Do not dispose of used
oil and filters in household trash,
in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Toyota dealer, service
station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil
within the reach of children.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Engine coolant reservoir cap
“F” line
“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L”
line, add coolant up to the “F” line.
(P.551)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
 Intercooler coolant
481
If you cannot find a leak, have your
Toyota dealer test the cap and
check for leaks in the cooling system.
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Intercooler coolant reservoir
cap
“F” line
“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L”
line, add coolant up to the “F” line.
(P.551)
■ Coolant selection
■ If the coolant level drops within
a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses,
engine coolant reservoir cap, intercooler coolant reservoir cap, drain
cock and water pump.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
NOTICE
■ When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor
straight antifreeze. The correct
mixture of water and antifreeze
must be used to provide proper
lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the
antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to
prevent it from damaging parts or
paint.
Checking the engine radiator, condenser and intercooler radiators
Check the engine radiator, condenser and intercooler radiators
and clear away any foreign
objects. If either of the above
parts is extremely dirty or you
are not sure of their condition,
have your vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
6
Maintenance and care
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or a similar high quality
ethylene glycol based non-silicate,
non-amine, non-nitrite, and nonborate coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant
and 50% deionized water.
(Minimum temperature: -31°F [35°C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant
and 45% deionized water.
(Minimum temperature: -44°F [42°C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
Do not remove the engine coolant
reservoir and the intercooler coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under
pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing
serious injuries, such as burns.
482
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the engine radiator,
condenser or intercooler radiators or condenser as they may be
hot and cause serious injuries,
such as burns.
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture
from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid
can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly
opened brake fluid.
WARNING
Checking and adding the
brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm
your hands and eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in
your eyes, flush the affected area
with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort,
see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
Brake fluid reservoir cap
It is normal for the brake fluid level
to go down slightly as the brake
pads wear out or when the fluid
level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent
refilling, there may be a serious
problem.
“MAX” line
Checking the battery
“MIN” line
Check the battery as follows.
■ Adding fluid
■ Battery exterior
Make sure to check the fluid
type and prepare the necessary
item.
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections,
cracks, or loose clamps.
 Fluid type
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE
J1704 brake fluid
 Item
Clean funnel
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
483
looking directly into the cell.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
Bracket
■ Checking battery fluid
Check that the fluid level is
between the “UPPER LEVEL” or
“LOWER LEVEL” lines.
“LOWER LEVEL” line
Add distilled water before the fluid
level drops below the “LOWER
LEVEL” line.
■ Adding distilled water
1 Remove the vent plug.
2 Add distilled water.
If the “UPPER LEVEL” line cannot
be seen, check the fluid level by
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
O.K.
3 Put the vent plug back on
and close it securely.
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore,
observe the following precautions
before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery
installed on the vehicle, be sure to
disconnect the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on
the charger is off when connecting
and disconnecting the charger
cables to the battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting
the battery
The engine may not start. Follow the
procedure below to initialize the system.
1 Shift the shift lever to P.
2 Open and close any of the doors.
3 Restart the engine.
● Unlocking the doors using the
smart key system may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens,
use the wireless remote control or
the mechanical key to lock/unlock
the doors.
● Start the engine with the engine
6
Maintenance and care
“UPPER LEVEL” line
LOW
484
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
switch in ACC. The engine may
not start with the engine switch
turned off. However, the engine
will operate normally from the second attempt.
● The engine switch mode is
recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is disconnected and reconnected, the vehicle will return the
engine switch mode to the status it
was in before the battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off
the engine switch before disconnecting the battery. Take extra
care when connecting the battery
if the engine switch mode prior to
the battery being disconnected is
unknown.
If the engine will not start even after
multiple attempts, contact your Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■ Where to safely charge the
battery
Always charge the battery in an
open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.
■ Emergency measures regard-
ing electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean
water for at least 15 minutes
and get immediate medical
attention. If possible, continue
to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention
immediately.
■ Chemicals in the battery
● If electrolyte gets on your
A battery contains poisonous and
corrosive sulfuric acid and may
produce hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. To
reduce the risk of death or serious
injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the
battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with
tools.
● If you accidentally swallow elec-
● Do not smoke or light a match
near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin
and clothes.
clothes
It can soak through clothing on
to your skin. Immediately take
off the clothing and follow the
procedure above if necessary.
trolyte
Drink a large quantity of water
or milk. Get emergency medical
attention immediately.
■ When there is insufficient bat-
tery fluid
Do not use if there is insufficient
fluid in the battery. There is a possible danger that the battery may
explode.
● Never inhale or swallow electro-
lyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses
when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the
battery.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while
the engine is running. Also, be
sure all accessories are turned
off.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ When adding distilled water
Avoid overfilling. Water spilled
during battery recharging may
cause corrosion.
485
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as
necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the
washer fluid bottle.
Adding the washer fluid
If any washer does not work, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
WARNING
■ When adding washer fluid
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other
than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on
the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as
well as damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer
fluid not spraying.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Maintenance and care
Do not add washer fluid when the
engine is hot or operating as
washer fluid contains alcohol and
may catch fire if spilled on the
engine, etc.
6
486
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in
accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.
Checking tires
Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires.
Also check the tires for uneven
wear, such as excessive wear
on one side of the tread.
Check the spare tire condition
and pressure if not rotated.
is shown by a “TWI” or “
” mark,
etc., molded into the sidewall of
each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear
indicators are showing on a tire.
■ When to replace your vehicle’s
tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● The treadwear indicators are
showing on a tire.
● You have tire damage such as
cuts, splits, cracks deep enough
to expose the fabric, and bulges
indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the
size or location of a cut or other
damage
If you are not sure, consult with your
Toyota dealer.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be
checked by a qualified technician
even if it has seldom or never been
used, or damage is not obvious.
■ Maximum load of tire
New tread
Worn tread
Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Check that the number given by
dividing the maximum load by 1.10
of the replacement tire is greater
than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight
Ratings (GAWR) of either the front
axle or the rear axle, whichever is
greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label.
For the maximum load of the tire,
see the load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure mentioned on
the sidewall of the tire. (P.568)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
487
tires also have radial construction.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for
possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels.
(P.411)
■ If the tread on snow tires wears
■ Tire types
● Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since
summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires,
summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy
roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow
tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all
four tires.
● All season tires
● Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads
or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires,
select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the
originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original
equipment, make sure your snow
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
WARNING
■ When inspecting or replacing
tires
Observe the following precautions
to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as
well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an
accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different
makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than
those recommended by Toyota.
● Do not mix differently con-
structed tires (radial, bias-belted
or bias-ply tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season
and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been
used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not
know how they were used previously.
● Do not use tires with different
load rating and/ or speed symbol than what is specified on tire
pressure label or in owner’s
manual.
6
Maintenance and care
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use
year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow
tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,
all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway
driving.
down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as
snow tires is lost.
488
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving
on roads with loose surfaces or
potholes.
These conditions may cause
losses in tire inflation pressure,
reducing the cushioning ability of
the tires. In addition, driving on
rough roads may cause damage
to the tires themselves, as well as
the vehicle’s wheels and body.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
low tire inflation pressure before
serious problems arise.
The tire pressure warning system of this vehicle adopts a 2type warning system
 When “Adjust Pressure” is
displayed (Normal Warning)
The tire pressure warning light
comes on and a buzzer sounds
when the tire inflation pressure
becomes low due to natural air
leakage or outside temperature.
(Ways of coping: P.527, 564)
 When “Immediately Check
tire when Safe” is displayed
(Emergency Warning)
The tire pressure warning light
comes on and a buzzer sounds
when the tire inflation pressure
becomes low suddenly due to a
blowout. (Ways of coping: P.533)
However, the system may not be
able to detect sudden tire ruptures
(bursting, etc.).
Front
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Toyota recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.
Tire pressure warning
system
Your vehicle is equipped with a
tire pressure warning system
that uses tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters to detect
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
The tire pressure detected by the
tire pressure warning system can
be displayed on the multi-information display.
The unit can be changed.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ How to change the unit
1 Park the vehicle in a safe
place and turn the engine
switch off.
Changing the unit cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
2 Turn the engine switch to
ON.
3 Press
or
of the meter
control switch to select
4 Press
or
.
to select
“Vehicle Settings” and then
press and hold
5 Press
or
.
to select
“TPWS” and then press
6 Press
or
to select “Set
Unit” and then press
or
.
to select the
desired unit and then press
.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure
checks
The tire pressure warning system
does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to
check tire inflation pressure as part
of your routine of daily vehicle
checks.
■ Tire inflation pressure
● It may take a few minutes to dis-
play the tire inflation pressure
after the engine switch is turned to
ON. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation
pressure after inflation pressure
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
has been adjusted.
● Tire inflation pressure changes
with temperature. The displayed
values may also be different from
the values measured using a tire
pressure gauge.
■ Situations in which the tire
pressure warning system may
not operate properly
● In the following cases, the tire
pressure warning system may not
operate properly.
• If non-genuine Toyota wheels are
used.
• A tire has been replaced with a
tire that is not an OE (Original
Equipment) tire.
• A tire has been replaced with a
tire that is not of the specified size.
• Tire chains, etc., are equipped.
• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire
is equipped.
• If a window tint that affects the
radio wave signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on
the vehicle, particularly around the
wheels or wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is
extremely higher than the specified level.
• If wheels without tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters
are used.
• If the ID code on the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure
warning computer.
● Performance may be affected in
the following situations.
• Near a TV tower, electric power
plant, gas station, radio station,
large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio
waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio,
cellular phone, cordless phone or
other wireless communication
device
If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio
wave conditions, the display may be
corrected by driving and changing
6
Maintenance and care
7 Press
.
489
490
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
the radio wave conditions may
change.
● When the vehicle is parked, the
time taken for the warning to start
or go off could be extended.
● When tire inflation pressure
declines rapidly for example when
a tire has burst, the warning may
not function.
■ Warning performance of the tire
pressure warning system
The warning of the tire pressure
warning system will change in
accordance with the conditions
under which it was initialized. For
this reason, the system may give a
warning even if the tire pressure
does not reach a low enough level,
or if the pressure is higher than the
pressure that was adjusted to when
the system was initialized.
■ Certification
P.638
Installing tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels,
tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be
installed.
When new tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters are
installed, new ID codes must be
registered in the tire pressure
warning computer and the tire
pressure warning system must
be initialized. (P.492)
■ When replacing the tires and
wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter is not
registered, the tire pressure warning
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
system will not work properly. After
driving for about 20 minutes, the tire
pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute and stays on to indicate a
system malfunction.
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires,
wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and
tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the
wheels, tires or the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer
as the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters may be
damaged if not handled correctly.
● Make sure to install the tire
valve caps. If the tire valve caps
are not installed, water could
enter the tire pressure warning
valves, corrode the valves and
the tire pressure warning valves
could be bound.
● When replacing tire valve caps,
do not use tire valve caps other
than those specified. The cap
may become stuck.
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning
system must be initialized
in the following circumstances:
 When rotating the tires.
 When changing the tires.
 After registering the ID codes.
(P.492)
 When changing between two
registered wheel sets.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When the tire pressure warning
system is initialized, the current
tire inflation pressure is set as
the benchmark pressure.
■ How to initialize the tire
pressure warning system
1 Park the vehicle in a safe
place, turn the engine switch
off and wait 20 minutes or
more.
Initialization cannot be performed
while the vehicle is moving.
2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire
inflation pressure level.
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire
pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.
3 Start the engine.
4 Press
or
of the meter
5 Press
or
.
to select
“Vehicle Settings” and then
press and hold
6 Press
or
7 Press
or
to select
.
to select “Set
Pressure”. Then press and
hold
.
“Set Pressure Accepted” will
be displayed on the multiinformation display and the
tire pressure warning light will
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
A message is displayed on the
multi-information display. Also, “--”
is displayed for inflation pressure of
each tire on the multi-information
display while the tire pressure
warning system determines the
position.
8 Drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at
approximately 25 mph (40
km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes.
When initialization is complete, the
inflation pressure of each tire will be
displayed on the multi-information
display.
Even if the vehicle is not driven at
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, initialization can be completed by driving for a long time.
However, if initialization does not
complete after driving for 1 hour or
more, park the vehicle in a safe
place for approximately 20 minutes
and then drive the vehicle again.
■ When initializing
● Initialization is performed while
.
“TPWS” and then press
blink 3 times.
When the message disappears, initialization is complete.
driving at a vehicle speed of
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more.
● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation
pressure. Also, make sure the
tires are cold before carrying out
initialization or tire inflation pressure adjustment.
● The tire pressure warning system
can be initialized by yourself, but
depending on the driving conditions and driving environment, initialization may take some time to
complete.
6
Maintenance and care
control switch to select
491
492
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ The initialization operation
● If you have accidentally turned the
engine switch off during initialization, it is not necessary to restart
the initialization again as initialization will restart when the engine
switch has been turned to ON for
the next time.
● If you accidentally perform initialization when initialization is not
necessary, adjust the tire inflation
pressure to the specified level
when the tires are cold, and conduct initialization again.
● While the position of each tire is
being determined and the inflation
pressures are not being displayed
on the multi-information display, if
the inflation pressure of a tire
drops, the tire pressure warning
light will come on.
■ If the tire pressure warning sys-
tem is not initialized properly
● In the following situations, initial-
ization may take longer than usual
to be completed or may not be
possible. Normally, initialization
completes within approximately
30 minutes.
• Vehicle is not driven at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more
• Vehicle is driven on unpaved
roads
• Vehicle is driven near other vehicles and system cannot recognize tire pressure warning valve
and transmitters of your vehicle
over those of other vehicles
• If the vehicle is driven in heavy
traffic or another situation where
other vehicles are driven close by,
it may take time for the system to
recognize the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters of your
vehicle over those of other vehicles.
● If initialization does not complete
after driving for 1 hour or more,
park the vehicle in a safe place for
approximately 20 minutes and
then drive the vehicle again.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● If the vehicle is reversed during
initialization, the data up to that
point is reset, so perform the initialization procedure again from
the beginning.
● In the following situations, initialization will not be started or was
not completed properly and the
system will not operate properly.
Perform the initialization procedure again.
• If, when attempting to start initialization, the tire pressure warning
light does not blink 3 times.
• If, when the vehicle has been
driven for about 20 minutes after
performing initialization, the tire
pressure warning light blinks for
approximately 1 minute and then
illuminates.
If initialization cannot be completed
after performing the above procedure, contact your Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■ When initializing the tire pres-
sure warning system
Do not initialize tire pressure without first adjusting the tire inflation
pressure to the specified level.
Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if
the tire inflation pressure is low, or
it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
Registering ID codes
Every tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter has a
unique ID code. When replacing
a tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter, it is necessary
to register the ID code.
When registering the ID codes,
perform the following procedure.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
1 Park the vehicle in a safe
place, wait for approximately
20 minutes, and then start
the engine.
2 Press
or
of the meter
control switch to select
3 Press
or
.
to select
“Vehicle Settings” and then
press and hold
4 Press
or
.
to select
“TPWS” and then press
5 Press
or
.
to select
“Change Wheel”. Then press
and hold
until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
6 Drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at
approximately 25 mph (40
km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes.
When registration is completed, the
tire pressure warning light will go off
and the inflation pressure of each
tire will be displayed on the multiinformation display.
Even if the vehicle is not driven at
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, registration can be completed by driving for a long time.
However, if registration does not
complete after driving for 1 hour or
more, perform the procedure again
from the beginning.
7 Initialize the tire pressure
warning system. (P.490)
■ When registering ID codes
● ID code registration is performed
while driving at a vehicle speed of
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more.
● Before performing ID code registration, make sure that no wheels
with tire pressure warning valve
and transmitters installed are near
the vehicle.
● Make sure to initialize the tire
pressure warning system after
registering the ID codes. If the
system is initialized before registering the ID codes, the initialized
values will be invalid.
● ID codes can be registered by
yourself, but depending on the
driving conditions and driving
environment, registration may
take some time to complete.
● As the tires will be warm when
registration is completed, make
sure to allow the tires to cool
before performing initialization.
6
Maintenance and care
The change wheel set mode is activated and registration is started.
Then a message will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
When registration is being performed, the tire pressure warning
light will blink for approximately 1
minute then illuminate and “--” will
be displayed for the inflation pressure of each tire on the multi-information display.
493
494
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Canceling ID code registration
● To cancel ID code registration
after it has been started, select
“Change Wheel” on the multiinformation display and press and
hold again.
● If ID code registration has been
canceled, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute when the engine
switch is turned to ON and then
illuminate. The tire pressure warning system will be operational
when the tire pressure warning
light turns off.
● If the warning light does not turn
off even after several minutes
have elapsed, ID code registration
may not have been canceled correctly. To cancel registration, perform the ID code registration start
procedure again and then turn the
engine switch off before driving.
■ If ID codes are not registered
properly
● In the following situations, ID code
registration may take longer than
usual to be completed or may not
be possible. Normally, registration
completes within approximately
30 minutes.
If ID code registration is not complete after driving for approximately 30 minutes, continue
driving for a while.
• Vehicle is not parked for approximately 20 minutes or more before
driving
• Vehicle is not driven at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more
• Vehicle is driven on unpaved
roads
• Vehicle is driven near other vehicles and system cannot recognize tire pressure warning valve
and transmitters of your vehicle
over those of other vehicles
• Wheel with tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter installed is
inside or near the vehicle
If registration does not complete
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
after driving for 1 hour or more, perform the ID code registration procedure again from the beginning.
● If the vehicle is reversed during
registration, the data up to that
point is reset, so perform the registration procedure again from the
beginning.
● In the following situations, ID code
registration will not be started or
was not completed properly and
the system will not operate properly. Perform the ID code registration procedure again.
• If, when attempting to start ID
code registration, the tire pressure
warning light does not blink slowly
3 times.
• If, when the vehicle has been
driven for about 20 minutes after
performing ID code registration,
the tire pressure warning light
blinks for approximately 1 minute
and then illuminates.
● If ID code registration cannot be
completed after performing the
above procedure, contact your
Toyota dealer.
Selecting wheel set
Your vehicle is equipped with
tire pressure warning system
with the function to have ID
codes registered for a second
wheel set, for example a winter
set. You can register a second
wheel set by yourself or your
Toyota dealer.
After registration of a second
wheel set, either of these two
wheel sets can be selected for
usage with the tire pressure
warning system.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Operating conditions for
pressure warning light starts
slowly blinking 3 times.
the function
 This function will perform the
change of wheel set only if a
second wheel set has been
registered. If no second wheel
set has been registered, no
change will be made when
selecting this function in the
menu.
 Only a change between both
registered wheel set is possible, mixing between these
wheel sets is not supported.
■ How to change between
wheel sets
1 Have the vehicle fitted with
the preferred wheel set.
2 Press
or
of the meter
control switches on the steer3 Press
or
.
of the meter
control switches and select
“Vehicle Settings”, and then
press and hold
4 Press
or
.
of the meter
control switches and select
“TPWS”, and then press
5 Press
or
.
of the meter
control switches and select
“Change Wheel”. Then press
and hold
until the tire
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Afterward, the tire pressure warning
light turns on after flashing for 1
minute.
After 2 minutes, registration of a
second wheel set is being performed. The tire pressure warning
light will turn off and “--” will be displayed for the inflation pressure of
each tire on the multi-information
display.
6 Initialize the tire pressure
warning system. (P.491)
If the tire inflation pressure settings
for the installed tires change, initialization operations are required, but
if the tire inflation pressure settings
are the same, initialization is not
required.
7 Drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at
approximately 25 mph (40
km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes.
Registration of a second wheel set
is complete when the tire pressure
warning light turns off and the inflation pressure of each tire is displayed on the multi-information
display.
6
Maintenance and care
ing wheel and select
495
496
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
Tire pressure gauge
1 Remove the tire valve cap.
Checking the specified
tire inflation pressure
2 Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire
valve.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure and tire size
are displayed on the tire and
loading information label.
(P.564)
3 Read the pressure using the
gauge gradations.
4 If the tire inflation pressure is
not at the recommended
level, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press
the center of the valve to
deflate.
5 After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy
water to the valve and check
for leakage.
6 Put the tire valve cap back
on.
■ Tire inflation pressure check
Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month. Do not forget to
check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation
pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation
pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel economy
● Reduced driving comfort and poor
handling
● Reduced tire life due to wear
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating,
have it checked by your Toyota
dealer.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Instructions for checking tire
inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are
cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for
at least 3 hours or has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5
km, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is
properly inflated based only on its
appearance.
● It is normal for the tire inflation
pressure to be higher after driving
as heat is generated in the tire. Do
not reduce tire inflation pressure
after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity
weight.
Passengers and luggage weight
should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
WARNING
save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly
inflated, the following conditions
may occur which could lead to an
accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting
from overheated tires
● Air leaking from between tire
and wheel
● Wheel deformation and/or tire
damage
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Greater possibility of tire dam-
age while driving (due to road
hazards, expansion joints,
sharp edges in the road, etc.)
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjust-
ing tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps
back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt
or moisture may get into the valve
and cause an air leak, resulting in
decreased tire inflation pressure.
6
Maintenance and care
■ Proper inflation is critical to
497
498
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or
heavily corroded, it should
be replaced. Otherwise, the
tire may separate from the
wheel or cause a loss of
handling control.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care
should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those
removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*
: Conventionally referred to as offset.
Toyota does not recommend
using the following:
 Wheels of different sizes or
types
 Used wheels
 Bent wheels that have been
straightened
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are
equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow
the tire pressure warning system to
provide advance warning in the
event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are
replaced, the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters must be
installed. (P.490)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
WARNING
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a dif-
ferent size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual
or certification label, as this may
result in a loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a
leaking wheel which is designed
for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious
injury.
■ When installing the wheel
nuts
Never use oil or grease on the
wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and
grease may cause the wheel nuts
to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage.
In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen
and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in
death or serious injury. Remove
any oil or grease from the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts.
■ Use of defective wheels pro-
hibited
Do not use cracked or deformed
wheels. Doing so could cause the
tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an accident.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, make sure to have
tires serviced by your Toyota
dealer or other qualified service
shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Toyota dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Toyota
wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters may not work
properly with non-genuine
wheels.
499
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter
must be changed regularly
to maintain air conditioning
efficiency.
Removing the air conditioning filter
1 Turn the engine switch off.
2 Open the glove box.
Aluminum wheel precautions (if equipped)
6
3 Remove the panel.
Maintenance and care
 Use only Toyota wheel nuts
and wheel nut wrenches
designed for use with your
aluminum wheels.
 When rotating, repairing or
changing your tires, check
that the wheel nuts are still
tight after driving 1000 miles
(1600 km).
 Be careful not to damage the
aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
 Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent
and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your
wheels.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4 Unlock the filter cover (
),
pull the filter cover out of the
500
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
claws (
), and remove the
filter cover.
areas with heavy traffic flow, early
replacement may be required. (For
scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”.)
■ If air flow from the vents
decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check
the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
5 Remove the filter case.
■ When using the air condition-
ing system
Make sure that a filter is always
installed.
Using the air conditioning system
without a filter may cause damage
to the system.
■ To prevent damage to the fil-
6 Remove the air conditioning
filter from the filter case and
replace it with a new one.
The “
UP” marks shown on the
filter and the filter case should be
pointing up.
■ Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
ter cover
When moving the filter cover in
the direction of arrow to release
the fitting, pay attention not to
apply excessive force to the
claws. Otherwise, the claws may
be damaged.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a
new one if it is depleted.
As the key may be damaged
if the following procedure is
not performed properly, it is
recommended that key battery replacement be performed by your Toyota
dealer.
■ If the electronic key battery is
depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function properly.
● The operational range will be
reduced.
501
Replacing the battery
1 Take out the mechanical key.
2 Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the flathead screwdriver with a tape.
Items to prepare
6
 Small flathead screwdriver
 Lithium battery CR2450
■ Use a CR2450 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at
your Toyota dealer, local electrical
appliance shops or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by
the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3 Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.
Maintenance and care
 Flathead screwdriver
502
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING
■ Removed battery and other
parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause
choking. Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result
in death or serious injury.
■ Battery precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Do not swallow the battery.
Doing so may cause chemical
burns.
● A coin battery or button battery
is used in the electronic key. If a
battery is swallowed, it may
cause severe chemical burns in
as little as 2 hours and may
result in death or serious injury.
● Keep away new and removed
● Do not expose batteries to
extremely low pressure due to
high altitude or extremely high
temperatures.
● Do not burn, break or cut a bat-
tery.
NOTICE
■ When replacing the battery
Use a flathead screwdriver of
appropriate size. Applying excessive force may deform or damage
the cover.
■ For normal operation after
replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions
to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery
to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other
batteries from children.
component inside the remote
control.
● If the cover cannot be firmly
● Do not bend either of the battery
closed, stop using the electronic
key and stow the key in the
place where children cannot
reach, and then contact your
Toyota dealer.
● If you accidentally swallow a
battery or put a battery into a
part of your body, get emergency medical attention immediately.
■ To prevent battery explosion
or leakage of flammable liquid or gas
● Replace the battery with a new
battery of the same type. If a
wrong type of battery is used, it
may explode.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
terminals.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
503
 Passenger’ side instrument
panel
Remove the cover.
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a
fuse may have blown. If this
happens, check and replace
the fuses as necessary.
Checking and replacing
fuses
1 Turn the engine switch off.
2 Open the fuse box cover.
 Engine compartment: type A
fuse box
Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.
Vehicles with footwell lights:
Remove the footwell lights connector.
6
Maintenance and care
 Engine compartment: type B
fuse box
Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.
Remove the lid.
Make sure to push the claw when
removing/installing the lid.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
504
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
3 Pull toward the front of the
vehicle and remove the rear
seat under cover.
 Under the right-hand rear seat
Remove the side cover.
3 Remove the fuse with the
pullout tool.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout
tool.
Remove the clips.
4 Check if the fuse is blown.
Type A and B:
Replace the blown fuse with a new
fuse of an appropriate amperage
rating. The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
Type C and D:
Contact your Toyota dealer.
1 Lift the center rear seat under
cover in the direction of the
arrows and remove the
claws.
2 Pull the outer rear seat under
cover in the direction of the
arrows.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
 Type A
 Type D
Normal fuse
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Blown fuse
 Type B
505
■ After a fuse is replaced
● When installing the lid, make sure
that the tab is installed securely.
● If the lights do not turn on even
after the fuse has been replaced,
a bulb may need replacement.
● If the replaced fuse blows again,
have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a cir-
Blown fuse
 Type C
cuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from
damage.
■ When replacing light bulbs
Toyota recommends that you use
genuine Toyota products designed
for this vehicle.
Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, non-genuine parts or
parts not designed for this vehicle
may be unusable.
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Maintenance and care
Normal fuse
6
506
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING
■ To prevent system break-
downs and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a
fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher
amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in
place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Toyota
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulb by yourself. If necessary bulb replacement
seems difficult to perform,
contact your Toyota dealer.
For more information about
replacing other lights, contact your Toyota dealer.
fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a
wire, even as a temporary fix.
Preparing for light bulb
replacement
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse
Check the wattage of the light
bulb to be replaced. (P.565)
boxes.
NOTICE
Bulb location
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by
your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
Front turn signal/parking
lights (bulb type)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Lights that need to be
replaced by your Toyota
dealer
 Headlights
507
● Large drops of water have built up
on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the
headlight.
■ When replacing light bulbs
 Daytime running lights
P.505
 Front turn signal/parking lights
(LED type)
Replacing light bulb
 Front fog lights (if equipped)
■ Front turn signal/parking
 Side marker lights
lights (bulb type)
1 To allow enough working
space, turn the steering
wheel to the opposite side of
the bulb to be replaced.
Remove the screws, and
remove the fender liner.
 Side turn signal lights
 Trailering light (if equipped)
 Tail lights
 Stop lights
 Back-up light
 Rear turn signal lights
 High mounted stoplight/cargo
lamp
 Trailer hitch light (if equipped)
Turn the steering wheel to the left
when replacing the right side light
bulb, and turn the steering wheel to
the right when replacing the left
side light bulb.
6
 Bed lamp (if equipped)
Confirm that they are properly
engaged with the bulb base and that
there is no light leakage.
■ LED Lights
The lights other than front turn signal/parking lights (bulb type) consist
of a number of LEDs. If any of the
LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to
your Toyota dealer to have the light
replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the
inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up
on the inside of the headlight lens
does not indicate a malfunction.
Contact your Toyota dealer for more
information in the following situations:
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Maintenance and care
■ When replacing the light bulbs
508
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
2 Open the fender liner and
turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
3 Remove the light bulb.
5 Reinstall the fender liner and
install the screws.
WARNING
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not
attempt to replace the bulb
immediately after turning off the
lights. The bulbs become very
hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion
4 Install a new light bulb and
turn the bulb base clockwise.
of the light bulb with bare
hands.
When it is unavoidable to hold
the glass portion, use and hold
with a clean dry cloth to avoid
getting moisture and oils on the
bulb. Also, if the bulb is
scratched or dropped, it may
blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any
parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat
damage, fire, or water entering
the light unit. This may damage
the lights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
509
WARNING
■ To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated
and locked.
6
Maintenance and care
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
510
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
511
When trouble arises
7
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .... 512
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency
.................................. 512
If the vehicle is submerged
or water on the road is rising ............................. 513
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be
towed......................... 515
If you think something is
wrong ........................ 517
Fuel pump shut off system
.................................. 518
If a warning light turns on or
a warning buzzer sounds
.................................. 519
If you have a flat tire.... 533
If the engine will not start
.................................. 543
If you lose your keys ... 544
If the electronic key does
not operate properly .. 545
If the vehicle battery is discharged ..................... 547
If your vehicle overheats
.................................. 551
If the vehicle becomes stuck
.................................. 553
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7
When trouble arises
If a warning message is displayed........................ 529
512
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
7-1.Essential information
The emergency flashers are
used to warn other drivers
when the vehicle has to be
stopped on the road due to
a breakdown, etc.
Operating instructions
Press the switch to flash all of
the turn signal lights.
To turn them off, press the switch
once again.
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such
as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the
normal way, stop the vehicle
using the following procedure:
Stopping the vehicle
1 Steadily step on the brake
pedal with both feet and
firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal
repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
2 Shift the shift lever to N.
 If the shift lever is shifted to N
■ Emergency flashers
● If the emergency flashers are
used for a long time while the
engine is not running, the battery
may discharge.
● If any of the SRS airbags deploy
(inflate) or in the event of a strong
rear impact, the emergency flashers will turn on automatically.
The emergency flashers will turn
off automatically after operating
for approximately 20 minutes. To
manually turn the emergency
flashers off, press the switch
twice.
(The emergency flashers may not
turn on automatically depending
on the force of the impact and
conditions of the collision.)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3 After slowing down, stop the
vehicle in a safe place by the
road.
4 Stop the engine.
 If the shift lever cannot be
shifted to N
3 Keep depressing the brake
pedal with both feet to reduce
vehicle speed as much as
possible.
4 To stop the engine, press and
hold the engine switch for 2
consecutive seconds or
7-1. Essential information
more, or press it briefly 3
times or more in succession.
5 Stop the vehicle in a safe
place by the road.
WARNING
■ If the engine has to be turned
off while driving
Power assist for the steering
wheel will be lost, making the
steering wheel heavier to turn.
Decelerate as much as possible
before turning off the engine.
513
If the vehicle is submerged or water on
the road is rising
This vehicle is not designed
to be able to drive on roads
that are deeply flooded with
water. Do not drive on roads
where the roads may be
submerged or the water
may be rising. It is dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
if it is anticipated that the
vehicle will be flooded or
set adrift. Remain calm and
follow the following.
 If the door can be opened,
open the door and exit the
vehicle.
 If the door cannot be opened,
open the window using the
power window switch and
ensure an escape route.
 If the door and window cannot
be opened due to the rising
water, remain calm, wait until
the water level inside the
vehicle rises to the point that
the water pressure inside of
the vehicle equals the water
pressure outside of the vehicle and then open the door
after waiting for the rising
water to enter the vehicle, and
exit the vehicle.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
When trouble arises
 If the window can be opened,
exit the vehicle through the
window.
7
514
7-1. Essential information
When the outside water level
exceeds half the height of the door,
the door cannot be opened from the
inside due to water pressure.
■ Water level exceeds the floor
When the water level exceeds the
floor and time has passed, the electrical equipment will get damaged,
the power windows will not operate,
the engine stop, and the vehicle
may not be able to get moving.
■ Using an emergency escape
hammer*
Laminated glass is used in the windshield on this vehicle.
Laminated glass cannot be shattered with an emergency hammer*.
Tempered glass is used in the windows on this vehicle.
*
: Contact your Toyota dealer or
aftermarket accessory manufacturer for further information about
an emergency hammer.
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not drive on roads where the
roads may be submerged or the
water may be rising. Otherwise
the vehicle may be damaged and
cannot move, as well as become
flooded and set adrift, which may
lead to death.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed
7-2.Steps to take in an emergency
If towing is necessary, we
recommend having your
vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or commercial
towing service, using a
wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system
for all towing, and abide by
all state/provincial and local
laws.
515
Towing with a wheel-lift
type truck
 From the front
Use a towing dolly under the
rear wheels.
 From the rear
Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers
before towing
The following may indicate a
problem with your transmission.
Contact your Toyota dealer or
commercial towing service
before towing.
 The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
When trouble arises
 The engine is running but the
vehicle does not move.
7
516
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
■ When towing the vehicle
 2WD models
Be sure to transport the vehicle
with all four wheels raised off the
ground. If the vehicle is towed
with the tires contacting the
ground, the drivetrain and related
parts may be damaged or an accident may occur due to a change
in direction of the vehicle.
 4WD models
Be sure to transport the vehicle
with all four wheels raised off the
ground. If the vehicle is towed
with the tires contacting the
ground, the drivetrain or related
parts may be damaged, the vehicle may fly off the truck.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
vehicle when towing using a
wheel-lift type truck
● Do not tow the vehicle from the
rear when the engine switch is
off.
● When raising the vehicle,
ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite
end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while
being towed.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ When towing a vehicle
517
If you think something
is wrong
equipped with a Stop & Start
system
If it is necessary to tow the vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground,
perform the following procedure
before towing the vehicle, in order
to protect the system. Turn the
engine switch off and then start
the engine or turn the engine
switch to ON.
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your
vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
■ Towing with a sling-type truck
Visible symptoms
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.
 Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air
conditioning after use is normal.)
 Flat-looking tires or uneven
tire wear
Using a flatbed truck
Emergency towing
Your vehicle has not towing
hook. If towing is necessary, we
recommend having your vehicle
towed by your Toyota dealer or
commercial towing service.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
 Voltmeter continually points
higher or lower than normal.
 Engine oil pressure gauge
continually points lower than
normal.
 Automatic transmission fluid
temperature warning message is displayed
Audible symptoms
 Changes in exhaust sound
 Excessive tire squeal when
cornering
7
When trouble arises
When using a flat-bed truck to
transport the vehicle, use tire
strapping belts. Refer to the
owner’s manual of the flat-bed
truck for the tire strapping
method.
In order to suppress vehicle
movement during transportation, set the parking brake and
turn the engine switch off.
 Engine coolant temperature
gauge (4.2-inch display
type)/Engine coolant temperature gauge needle (full
LCD type) continually points
higher than normal.
518
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
 Strange noises related to the
suspension system
 Pinging or other noises
related to the engine
Fuel pump shut off
system
 Appreciable loss of power
To minimize the risk of fuel
leakage when the engine
stalls or when an airbag
inflates upon collision, the
fuel pump shut off system
stops supply of fuel to the
engine.
 Vehicle pulls heavily to one
side when braking
Restarting the engine
Operational symptoms
 Engine misses, stumbling or
running roughly
 Vehicle pulls heavily to one
side when driving on a level
road
 Loss of brake effectiveness,
spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor
Follow the procedure below to
restart the engine after the system is activated.
1 Turn the engine switch to
ACC or OFF.
2 Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the
vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked
onto the ground, the fuel system
has been damaged and is in need
of repair. Do not restart the
engine.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
519
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer
sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning
lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but
then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers
■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
Warning light
(U.S.A.)
or
(Red)
(Canada)
Details/Actions
Indicates that:
 The brake fluid level is low; or
 The brake system is malfunctioning
 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
Warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
■ High coolant temperature warning light*
Warning light
Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine is overheating
 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (P.551)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7
When trouble arises
(Yellow)
Details/Actions
520
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Charging system warning light* (warning buzzer)
Warning light
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.
■ Low engine oil pressure warning light* (warning buzzer)
Warning light
Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is excessively low
 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.
■ Malfunction indicator lamp
Warning light
(U.S.A.)
or
(Canada)
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
 The electronic engine control system;
 The electronic throttle control system; or
 The emission control system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
■ SRS warning light
Warning light
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
 The SRS airbag system;
 The front passenger occupant classification system; or
 The seat belt pretensioner system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
521
■ ABS warning light
Warning light
(U.S.A.)
or
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
 The ABS; or
 The brake assist system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
(Canada)
■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning
buzzer)
Warning light
(Red)
or
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
(Yellow)
■ PCS warning light
Warning light
Details/Actions
7
When a buzzer sounds simultaneously:
When a buzzer does not sound:
The PCS (Pre-Collision System) has become temporarily
(Flashes or illuunavailable, corrective action may be necessary.
minates)
(If equipped)  Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. (P.235, 529)
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability
Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate.
 P.394
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
When trouble arises
Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the PCS (Pre-Collision System).
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
522
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ LTA indicator* (warning buzzer)
Warning light
(Orange)
(If equipped)
*
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (P.258)
: For 4.2-inch display type: This light illuminates on the multi-information
display.
■ Stop & Start cancel indicator
Warning light
(Flashes)
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the Stop & Start system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
■ Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator (warning buzzer)
Warning light
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist function
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (P.293)
■ PKSB OFF indicator (warning buzzer)
Warning light
Details/Actions
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in the PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
When a buzzer does not sound:
Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (P.308)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
523
■ “RCTA OFF” indicator (warning buzzer)
Warning light
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) function
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the rear bumper around the radar sensor is
covered with dirt, etc. (P.285)
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (P.299)
■ Slip indicator light
Warning light
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
 The VSC/Trailer Sway Control system;
 The TRAC system;
 The hill-start assist control system;
 Multi-terrain Select brake control (if equipped);
 Crawl Control (if equipped); or
 The downhill assist control system (if equipped)
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
■ Inappropriate pedal operation warning light* (warning buzzer)
Warning light
When a buzzer does not sound:
Brake Override System is operating.
 Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake
pedal.
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display with a message.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
When trouble arises
When a buzzer sounds:
 Brake Override System is malfunctioning
 Drive-Start Control is malfunctioning
 Drive-Start Control is operating
 Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
*
7
Details/Actions
524
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Brake hold operated indicator (warning buzzer)
Warning light
(Flashes)
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
■ Parking brake indicator (warning buzzer)
Warning light
(Flashes)
(U.S.A.)
or
(Flashes)
(Canada)
Details/Actions
It is possible that the parking brake is not fully engaged or
released
 Operate the parking brake switch once again.
This light comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake
is fully released, the system is operating normally.
■ Rear differential lock indicator
Warning light
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the rear differential lock system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
■ Tire pressure warning light
Warning light
Details/Actions
When the light comes on after blinking for approximately 1
minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
 Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such as
 Natural causes
 Flat tire
 Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (P.527)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
525
■ Low fuel level warning light
Warning light
Details/Actions
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 3.4 gal. (13.0
L, 2.8 Imp. gal.) or less
 Refuel the vehicle.
■ Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warn-
ing buzzer)*
Warning light
Details/Actions
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat
belts
 Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front
passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to
make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.
*: Driver’s seat belt warning buzzer:
■ Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights*1 (warning
buzzer)*2
Warning light
Details/Actions
Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts
 Fasten the seat belt.
*1
: For 4.2-inch display type: This light illuminates on the multi-information
display.
*2
: Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer:
The rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear
passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is
unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time,
after the seat belt is fastened and unfastened and the vehicle reaches a
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7
When trouble arises
The driver’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or
her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to ON, the
buzzer sounds. If the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain
speed.
Front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front
passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is
unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time
after the vehicle reaches a certain speed.
526
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
certain speed.
■ Air suspension malfunction indicator*
Warning light
(If equipped)
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the air suspension system
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
*: For 4.2-inch display type: This light illuminates on the multi-information
display.
■ Trailer brake warning light
Warning light
(If equipped)
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
 Trailer brake control system; or
 Trailer connector circuit
 Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not
be heard due to being in a noisy
location or audio sound.
■ Front passenger detection sen-
sor, seat belt reminder and
warning buzzer
● If luggage is placed on the front
passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause
the warning light to flash and the
warning buzzer to sound even if a
passenger is not sitting in the
seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat,
the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may
not operate properly.
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors
the airbag sensor assembly, front
impact sensors, side impact sensors
(front door), side impact sensors
(front), side impact sensors (rear),
driver’s seat position sensor,
driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
passenger occupant classification
sensors, “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch, seat belt pretensioners, airbags, interconnecting wiring and
power sources. (P.37)
■ If the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several
driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after
several trips, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
■ Electric power steering system
warning light (warning buzzer)
When the battery charge becomes
insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering
system warning light may come on
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
and the warning buzzer may sound.
■ When the tire pressure warning
light comes on
Inspect the tires to check if a tire is
punctured.
If a tire is punctured: P.533
If none of the tires are punctured:
Turn the engine switch off then turn
it to ON. Check if the tire pressure
warning light comes on or blinks.
 If the tire pressure warning light
blinks for approximately 1 minute
then stays on
There may be a malfunction in the
tire pressure warning system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
 If the tire pressure warning light
comes on
1 After the temperature of the tires
has lowered sufficiently, check
the inflation pressure of each tire
and adjust them to the specified
level.
2 If the warning light does not turn
off even after several minutes
have elapsed, check that the
inflation pressure of each tire is
at the specified level and perform
initialization. (P.491)
■ The tire pressure warning light
■ Conditions that the tire pres-
sure warning system may not
function properly
P.489
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
WARNING
■ If both the ABS and the brake
system warning lights remain
on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place
immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.
The vehicle will become
extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail,
which could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
WARNING
■ When the electric power
steering system warning light
comes on
When the light comes on yellow,
the assist to the power steering is
restricted. When the light comes
on red, the assist to the power
steering is lost and handling operations of the steering wheel
become extremely heavy.
When steering wheel operations
are heavier than usual, grip the
steering wheel firmly and operate
it using more force than usual.
■ If the tire pressure warning
light comes on
Be sure to observe the following
precautions.
Failure to do so could cause a
loss of vehicle control and result
in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place
as soon as possible.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure
immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light
comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is
probable that you have a flat
tire. Check the tires. If a tire is
flat, change it with the spare tire
and have the flat tire repaired by
the nearest Toyota dealer.
7
When trouble arises
may come on due to natural
causes
The tire pressure warning light may
come on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks and tire inflation
pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the
tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
527
528
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and
braking.
If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the
steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air
leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system
may not activate immediately.
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label (tire and
load information label). (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light) when one or more
of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates,
you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Please note that the TPMS (tire
pressure warning system) is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
WARNING
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning
light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS
(tire pressure warning system)
from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS (tire pressure
warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function
properly.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ To ensure the tire pressure
warning system operates
properly
Do not install tires with different
specifications or manufactures as
the tire pressure warning system
may not operate properly.
529
If a warning message
is displayed
The multi-information display shows warnings of
system malfunctions, incorrectly performed operations, and messages that
indicate a need for maintenance. When a message is
shown, perform the correction procedure appropriate
to the message.
Additionally, if a warning
light comes on or flashes at
the same time that a warning message is displayed,
take the appropriate corrective action for the warning
light. (P.519)
■ Warning messages
The warning messages explained
below may differ from the actual
messages according to operation
conditions and vehicle specifications.
■ If a message about an operation
is displayed
● If a message about an operation
of the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal is displayed
A warning message about an operation of the brake pedal may be
shown while the driving assist sys-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7
When trouble arises
If a warning message is displayed again after the
appropriate actions have
been performed, contact
your Toyota dealer.
530
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
tems such as PCS (Pre-Collision
system) (if equipped) or the
dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range (if equipped) is
operating. If a warning message is
shown, be sure to decelerate the
vehicle or follow an instruction
shown on the multi-information display.
A warning message is shown when
Brake Override System operates.
(P.178)
A warning message is shown when
Drive-Start Control (P.184) or
Parking Support Brake (if equipped)
(P.304) operates. Follow the
instructions on the multi-information
display.
● If a message about an operation
of the engine switch is displayed
An instruction for operation of the
engine switch is shown when the
incorrect procedure for starting the
engine is performed or the engine
switch is operated incorrectly. Follow the instructions shown on the
multi-information display to operate
the engine switch again.
● If a message about a shift lever
operation is displayed
To prevent the shift lever from being
operated incorrectly or the vehicle
from moving unexpectedly, a message that requires shifting the shift
lever may be shown on the multiinformation display. In that case, follow the instruction of the message
and shift the shift lever.
● If a message or image about an
open/close state of a part or
replenishment of a consumable is
displayed
Confirm the part indicated by the
multi-information display or a warn-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
ing light, and then perform the coping method such as closing the
open door or replenishing a consumable.
■ If a message that indicates the
need for visiting your Toyota
dealer is displayed
The system or part shown on the
multi-information display is malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ If a message that indicates the
need for referring to Owner’s
Manual is displayed
● If “Engine Coolant Temp High
Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s
Manual” is shown, follow the
instructions (P.551).
● If the following messages are
shown, there may be a malfunction.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the
vehicle may be dangerous.
• “Transmission Oil Temp. High
Stop in a Safe Place and See
Owner’s Manual”
• “Charging System Malfunction
Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s
Manual”
• “Smart Key System Malfunction
See Owner’s Manual”
● If the following messages are
shown, there may be a malfunction.
Immediately have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
• “Oil Pressure Low Stop in a Safe
Place See Owner’s Manual”
• “Braking Power Low Stop in a
Safe Place See Owner’s Manual”
■ If “Shift to P Before Exiting
Vehicle” or “Shift to P when
Parked” is displayed
Message is displayed when the
driver’s door is opened without turning the engine switch to OFF with
the shift lever in any position other
than P.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Shift the shift lever to P.
■ If “Auto Power OFF to Conserve
Battery” is displayed
Power was turned off due to the
automatic power off function.
Next time when starting the engine,
increase the engine speed slightly
and maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the
battery.
■ If “Headlight System Malfunc-
tion Visit Your Dealer” is displayed
The following systems may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
● The LED headlight system
● The automatic headlight leveling
system (if equipped)
● Automatic High Beam
531
has been reset.
If necessary, perform maintenance.
Please reset the message after the
maintenance is performed.
(P.470)
*
: Refer to the separate “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your
vehicle.
■ If “Maintenance Required Visit
■ If “Engine Stopped Steering
■ If “Engine Maintenance
■ If “Engine Oil Level Low Add or
Power Low” is displayed
This message is displayed if the
engine is stopped while driving.
When steering wheel operations are
heavier than usual, grip the steering
wheel firmly and operate it using
more force than usual.
■ If “Maintenance Required
Soon” is displayed
Indicates that all maintenance
according to the driven distance on
the maintenance schedule* should
be performed soon.
Comes on approximately 4500
miles (7200 km) after the message
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Required Visit Your Dealer” is
shown
The engine or an engine component
is malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
■ If “Oil Maintenance Required
Soon” is displayed
Indicates that the engine oil should
be scheduled to be changed.
Check the engine oil and change it if
necessary. After changing the
engine oil, make sure to reset the
message. (P.480)
7
When trouble arises
Replace” is displayed
The engine oil level may be low.
Check the level of the engine oil,
and add engine oil if necessary
(P.478). This message may be
displayed if the vehicle is stopped
on a slope. Move the vehicle to a
level surface and check if the message disappears.
Your Dealer” is displayed
Indicates that all maintenance is
required to correspond to the driven
distance on the maintenance schedule*.
Comes on approximately 5000
miles (8000 km) after the message
has been reset. (The indicator will
not work properly unless the message has been reset.)
Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset the message
after the maintenance is performed.
(P.470)
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your
vehicle.
532
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If “Oil Maintenance Required” is
displayed
Indicates that the engine oil should
be changed.
Check and change the engine oil,
and oil filter by your Toyota dealer.
After changing the engine oil, make
sure to reset the message.
(P.480)
■ If a message that indicates the
malfunction of front camera is
displayed
The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in
the message is resolved. (P.235,
519)
● PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if
equipped)
● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped)
● Automatic High Beam
● RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped)
● Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range (if equipped)
■ If a message that indicates the
malfunction of radar sensor is
displayed
The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in
the message is resolved. (P.235,
519)
● PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if
equipped)
● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped)
● Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range (if equipped)
■ If “Radar Cruise Control
Unavailable See Owner’s Manual” is displayed (if equipped)
The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range system is suspended temporarily or until the problem shown in the message is
resolved. (causes and coping methods: P.235)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ If “Radar Cruise Control
Unavailable” is displayed (if
equipped)
The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range system cannot
be used temporarily. Use the system
when it becomes available again.
■ If “Power Tailgate Unavailable
Fully Close Tailgate Manually to
Re-Activate Power Tailgate” is
displayed (if equipped)
If the following message is displayed after pressing the Tailgate
opener switch, the power tailgate
requires re-initialization. To re-initialize the power tailgate, manually fully
close and latch the tailgate.
The power tailgate may require reinitialization when the following has
occurred.
• Jam detection has occurred and
the tailgate is not fully closed.
• The tailgate has been unplugged
and reconnected, and the tailgate
has not been fully closed.
• The power tailgate main switch
was pressed while the tailgate is
not fully closed.
• The 12-volt battery has been
reconnected while the tailgate is
not fully closed.
When the tailgate is fully closed and
latched, the system will re-initialize
and the message will disappear.
■ If “Power Tailgate Unavail-
able/Malfunction Visit Your
Dealer” is displayed (if
equipped)
When the following message is displayed, it is an indication that there
is a malfunction in the system.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ Warning buzzer
P.529
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Your vehicle is equipped
with a spare tire. The flat tire
can be replaced with the
spare tire.
533
Location of the spare tire,
jack and tools
■ Spare tire
For details about tires: P.486
WARNING
■ If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat
tire.
Driving even a short distance with
a flat tire can damage the tire and
the wheel beyond repair, which
could result in an accident.
■ Jack and tools
 Double Cab
Before repairing the tire
 Stop the vehicle in a safe
place on a hard, flat surface.
 Set the parking brake.
 Shift the shift lever to P.
 Stop the engine.
Jack
Tool bag
 For models with electronically
modulated air suspension:
Press the height control mode
select switch to set the height
control system to manual
mode. (P.373)
Wheel lock key (if equipped)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7
When trouble arises
 Turn on the emergency flashers. (P.512)
534
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
 CrewMax
● Put the jack properly in its jack
point.
● Do not put any part of your body
under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.
● Do not start the engine or drive
the vehicle while the vehicle is
supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while
someone is inside.
Jack
Tool bag
● When raising the vehicle, do not
put an object on or under the
jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a
height greater than that required
to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is neces-
sary to get under the vehicle.
● When lowering the vehicle,
make sure that there is no-one
near the vehicle. If there are
people nearby, warn them
vocally before lowering.
Wheel lock key (if equipped)
WARNING
■ Using the tire jack
Observe the following precautions.
Improper use of the tire jack may
cause the vehicle to suddenly fall
off the jack, leading to death or
serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any
purpose other than replacing
tires or installing and removing
tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that
comes with this vehicle for
replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles,
and do not use other tire jacks
for replacing tires on this vehicle.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ Using the jack handle
Insert the square head securely
until you hear a click to prevent
the extension parts from coming
apart unexpectedly.
Wheel lock nut (if
equipped)
When replacing tires on a vehicle with wheel lock nuts, use the
following procedures to remove
and install the wheel lock nuts.
The wheel lock key is stored in
the glove box. Always return the
wheel lock key to its original
position after use, so that it does
not get lost. (P.533)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Removal
For ease of removal, the wheel
lock nut should always be the
first one loosened.
1 Place the wheel lock key on
top of the wheel lock nut,
turning until the wheel lock
key and wheel lock nut patterns engage.
2 Place the wheel nut wrench
on the wheel lock key, and
while applying pressure on
the wheel lock key, loosen
the wheel lock nut.
■ Installation
For ease of installation, the
wheel lock nut should always be
the last one tightened.
1 By hand, install a wheel lock
nut on each wheel.
NOTICE
■ When using a wheel lock key
(if equipped)
Do not use an impact wrench.
Using an impact wrench may
cause permanent damage to
wheel lock nut and wheel lock
key. If in doubt about wheel lock
application, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Taking out the jack and
tool bag
1 Fold the head restraint
(P.145), and then pull the
strap and then fold down the
seatback.
7
2 Loosen and remove the jack.
3 Place the wheel nut wrench
on the wheel lock key, and
while applying pressure on
the wheel lock key, tighten
the wheel lock nut to the recommended torque.
1 Loosen
2 Tighten
After using the jack, install the jack
in the exact reverse order from
which they were removed.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
When trouble arises
2 Place the wheel lock key on
top of the wheel lock nut,
turning until the wheel lock
key and wheel lock nut patterns engage.
535
536
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
3 Unhook the tightening strap
and take out the tool bag.
lowering screw and turn it
counterclockwise.
Taking out the spare tire
1 Assemble the jack handle
extension as shown.
3 After the tire is lowered completely to the ground, remove
the holding bracket.
2 Insert the end of the jack
handle extension into the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
1 Chock the tires.
Tire
Wheel chock
positions
Front left-hand
side
Behind the rear
right-hand side
tire
537
3 Assemble the jack handle
extension as shown.
4 Position the jack at the correct jack point as shown.
Front right-hand Behind the rear
side
left-hand side tire
Rear left-hand
side
In front of the
front right-hand
side tire
Rear right-hand
side
In front of the
front left-hand
side tire
Vehicles with wheel locks: Use the
wheel lock key to loosen the wheel
lock.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Rear
Make sure the jack is positioned on
a level and solid place.
5 Raise the vehicle until the tire
is slightly raised off the
ground.
When positioning the jack under
the rear axle housing, make sure
the groove on the top of the jack fits
7
When trouble arises
2 Slightly loosen the wheel
nuts (one turn).
Front
538
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
with the rear axle housing.
• Do not touch the disc wheels or
the area around the brakes
immediately after the vehicle
has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven
the disc wheels and the area
around the brakes will be
extremely hot. Touching these
areas with hands, feet or other
body parts while changing a tire,
etc., may result in burns.
6 Remove all the wheel nuts
and the tire.
● Failure to follow these precau-
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
tions could cause the wheel
nuts to loosen and the tire to fall
off, resulting in death or serious
injury.
• After replacing a tire, check the
tightening torque as soon as
possible.
Steel wheel: 154 ft•lbf (209 N•m,
21.3 kgf•m)
Aluminum wheel: 97 ft•lbf (131
N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)
• When installing a tire, only use
wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel.
WARNING
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury:
• Lower the spare tire completely
to the ground before removing it
from under the vehicle.
• Do not try to remove the wheel
ornament by hand. Take due
care in handling the ornament to
avoid unexpected personal
injury.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
• Retighten the wheel nuts within
100 miles (160 km) of driving.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut
threads or bolt holes of the
wheel, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may
fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving.
• When installing the wheel nuts,
be sure to install them with the
tapered ends facing inward.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the spare tire
disc wheel seat
539
.
1 Remove any dirt or foreign
matter from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, causing the tire to come off.
3 Lower the vehicle.
2 Install the spare tire and
loosely tighten each wheel
nut by hand by approximately
the same amount.
When replacing an aluminum wheel
with a steel wheel (including a compact spare tire), tighten the wheel
nuts until the tapered portion
comes into loose contact with the
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7
When trouble arises
When replacing a steel wheel with
a steel wheel (including a compact
spare tire), tighten the wheel nuts
until the tapered portion
comes
into loose contact with the disc
wheel seat .
4 Securely tighten the wheel
nuts two or three times in the
order shown in the illustration
using a wheel nut wrench.
Tightening torque:
154 ft•lbf (209 N•m, 21.3
kgf•m)
540
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
■ Stowing the flat tire
Failure to follow steps listed under
stowing the tire may result in
damage to the spare tire carrier
and loss of the tire, which could
result in serious injury or death.
Stowing the flat tire, jack
and all tools
1 Remove the center wheel
ornament by pushing from
the reverse side.
4 While raising, secure the tire,
taking care that the tire goes
straight up without catching
on any surrounding part, to
prevent it from flying forward
during a collision or sudden
braking.
Tightening torque:
34.7 ft•lbf (46.6 N•m, 4.8 kgf•m)
5 Confirm it is not loose after
tightening:
2 Lay down the tire with the
valve stem facing up and
install the holding bracket.
Turn the jack handle extension clockwise to take up
slack in the chain.
1 Push and pull the tire
2 Try rotating
Visually check to ensure tire is not
hung on surrounding parts.
If looseness or misassembly exists,
repeat step2 and step4.
6 Repeat step5, any time the
tire is lowered or disturbed.
3 Check to ensure the holding
bracket is centered in the
wheel hub.
7 Stow the tools and jack
securely.
■ The temporary spare tire
● The temporary spare tire is identi-
fied by the “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” marking on the disc wheel
and/or tire sidewall.
Use the temporary spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the temporary
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
spare tire. (P.564)
■ When using the temporary
spare tire
As the temporary spare tire is not
equipped with the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter, low
inflation pressure of the spare tire
will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you
replace the temporary spare tire
after the tire pressure warning light
comes on, the light remains on.
■ If you have a flat rear tire on a
road covered with snow or ice
Install the temporary spare tire on
one of the front wheels of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and
fit tire chains to the rear tires:
1 Replace a front tire with the temporary spare tire.
2 Replace the flat rear tire with the
tire removed from the front of the
vehicle.
3 Fit tire chains to the rear tires.
WARNING
■ When using the temporary
spare tire
spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your
vehicle. Do not use your temporary spare tire on another vehicle.
● Do not use more than one tem-
porary spare tires simultaneously.
● Replace the temporary spare
tire with a standard tire as soon
as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration,
abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that
cause sudden engine braking.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ When the spare tire is
attached
The vehicle speed may not be
correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:
• ABS & Brake assist
• VSC
• TRAC
• AUTO LSD (if equipped)
• PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if
equipped)
• AHB (Automatic High Beam) (if
equipped)
• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped)
• Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range (if
equipped)
• EPS
• Trailer Sway Control
• Tire pressure warning system
• BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if
equipped)
7
• Panoramic view monitor (if
equipped)
When trouble arises
● Remember that the temporary
541
• Multi-terrain Monitor (if
equipped)
• Toyota parking assist monitor (if
equipped)
• Intuitive parking assist (if
equipped)
• PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
(if equipped)
• Navigation system (if equipped)
542
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
Also, not only can the following
system not be utilized fully, but it
may even negatively affect the
drive-train components:
• 4WD system (if equipped)
■ Speed limit when using the
temporary spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess
of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a temporary spare tire is installed on
the vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed for driving at high
speeds. Failure to observe this
precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■ Do not drive the vehicle with
a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat
tire.
Driving even a short distance with
a flat tire can damage the tire and
the wheel beyond repair.
■ Driving with tire chains and
the temporary spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the temporary spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■ When stowing the flat tire
Ensure that there is no object
caught between the tire and the
vehicle underbody.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the
wheels, tires or the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter,
contact your Toyota dealer as the
tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may be damaged if not
handled correctly.
■ To avoid damage to the tire
pressure warning valves and
transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Toyota
dealer or other qualified service
shop as soon as possible. Make
sure to replace the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter
when replacing the tire. (P.490)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not
start
If the engine will not start
even though correct starting
procedures are being followed (P.204), consider
each of the following points:
The engine will not start
even though the starter
motor operates normally.
One of the following may be the
cause of the problem:
 There may not be sufficient
fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
 The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again
following correct starting procedures. (P.204)
The starter motor turns
over slowly, the interior
lights and headlights are
dim, or the horn does not
sound or sounds at a low
volume.
One of the following may be the
cause of the problem:
 The battery may be discharged. (P.547)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
 The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. (P.482)
The starter motor does
not turn over
The engine starting system may
be malfunctioning due to an
electrical problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a
blown fuse. However, an interim
measure is available to start the
engine. (P.543)
The starter motor does
not turn over, the interior
lights and headlights do
not turn on, or the horn
does not sound.
One of the following may be the
cause of the problem:
 The battery may be discharged. (P.547)
7
 One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
(P.482)
When trouble arises
 There may be a malfunction
in the engine immobilizer system. (P.73)
543
Contact your Toyota dealer if the
problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
Emergency start function
When the engine does not start,
the following steps can be used
as an interim measure to start
the engine if the engine switch is
functioning normally.
544
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Do not use this starting procedure except in case of emergency.
1 Pull the parking brake switch
to check that the parking
brake is set. (P.213)
2 Check that the shift lever is in
P.
3 Turn the engine switch to
ACC.
4 Press and hold the engine
switch for about 15 seconds
while depressing the brake
pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started
using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be
made by your Toyota dealer
using other key and the key
number stamped on your
key number plate.
Keep the plate in a safe
place such as your wallet,
not in the vehicle.
NOTICE
■ When an electronic key is lost
If the electronic key remains lost,
the risk of vehicle theft increases
significantly. Visit your Toyota
dealer immediately with all
remaining electronic keys that
were provided with your vehicle.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
545
If the electronic key
does not operate properly
If communication between
the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (P.132)
or the electronic key cannot
be used because the battery
is depleted, the smart key
system and wireless remote
control cannot be used. In
such cases, the doors can
be opened and the engine
can be started by following
the procedure below.
1 Locks all the doors
2 Unlocks all the doors
Turning the key unlocks the driver’s
door. Turning the key again unlocks
the other doors.
■ Key linked functions
■ When the electronic key does
not work properly
● Make sure that the smart key sys-
NOTICE
■ In case of a smart key system
malfunction or other keyrelated problems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
Locking and unlocking
the doors
Use the mechanical key
(P.110) in order to perform the
following operations:
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1 Closes the windows and the panoramic moon roof*. (turn and
hold)
7
2 Opens the windows and the pan-
When trouble arises
tem has not been deactivated in
the customization setting. If it is
off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features: P.578)
● Check if battery-saving mode is
set. If it is set, cancel the function.
(P.132)
oramic moon roof*. (turn and
hold)
These settings must be customized
at your Toyota dealer.
*: If equipped
546
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
■ When using the mechanical
key and operating the power
windows and the panoramic
moon roof (if equipped)
Operate the power window or the
panoramic moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no
possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught
in the window or the panoramic
moon roof.
Also, do not allow children to
operate the mechanical key. It is
possible for children and other
passengers to get caught in the
power window or the panoramic
moon roof.
Starting the engine
1 Ensure that the shift lever is
in P and depress the brake
pedal.
2 Touch the Toyota emblem
side of the electronic key to
the engine switch.
When the electronic key is
detected, a buzzer sounds and the
engine switch will turn to ON.
When the smart key system is
deactivated in customization setting, the engine switch will turn to
ACC.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
3 Firmly depress the brake
pedal and check that
is
shown on the multi-information display.
4 Press the engine switch
shortly and firmly.
In the event that the engine still
cannot be started, contact your
Toyota dealer.
■ Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P, set the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P
and press the engine switch as you
normally do when stopping the
engine.
■ Electronic key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended
that the electronic key battery be
replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (P.501)
■ Alarm
Using the mechanical key to lock
the doors will not set the alarm system. If a door is unlocked using the
mechanical key when the alarm system is set, the alarm may be triggered. (P.74)
■ Changing engine switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press
the engine switch in step 3 above.
The engine does not start and
modes will be changed each time
the switch is pressed. (P.206)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery
is discharged
547
2 Open the hood. (P.476)
3 Open the positive (+) battery
terminal cover.
The following procedures
may be used to start the
engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged.
You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified
repair shop.
Restarting the engine
4 Remove the engine cover.
If you have a set of jumper (or
booster) cables and a second
vehicle with a 12-volt battery,
you can jump start your vehicle
by following the steps below.
1 Confirm that the electronic
key is being carried.
Lift the edge of the cover to disengage the fixed pins, and then pull
the cover towards you to remove it.
When connecting the jumper (or
booster) cables, depending on the
situation, the alarm may activate
and doors locked. (P.75)
7
When trouble arises
5 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to
on your vehicle and
connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to
on
the second vehicle. Then, connect a negative cable clamp to
on the second vehicle and connect the clamp at the other end of
the negative cable to .
Use jumper cables that can reach the specified terminals and connecting
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
548
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
point.
Positive (+) battery terminal (your vehicle)
Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Metallic point shown in the illustration
6 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the
engine speed slightly and
maintain at that level for
approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the battery of your
vehicle.
10When the engine cover
installing, reverse the step
removed.
7 Open and close any of the
doors of your vehicle with the
engine switch OFF.
■ Starting the engine when the
8 Maintain the engine speed of
the second vehicle and start
the engine of your vehicle by
turning the engine switch to
ON.
9 Once the vehicle’s engine
has started, remove the
jumper cables in the exact
reverse order from which
they were connected.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Once the engine starts, have the
vehicle inspected at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by
push-starting.
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the
audio system while the engine is
off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle
is running at a low speed for an
extended period, such as in heavy
traffic.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ When the battery is removed or
discharged
● Information stored in the ECU is
cleared. When the battery is
depleted, have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer.
● Some systems may require initialization. (P.589)
■ When removing the battery ter-
minals
When the battery terminals are
removed, the information stored in
the ECU is cleared. Before removing the battery terminals, contact
your Toyota dealer.
■ Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery
will discharge gradually even when
the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining
effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long
time, the battery may discharge,
and the engine may be unable to
start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)
■ When recharging or replacing
the battery
● In some cases, it may not be pos-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
careful when reconnecting the
battery.
● The Stop & Start system may not
automatically stop the engine for
up to an hour.
■ When replacing the battery
● Use a genuine battery specifically
designed for use with the Stop &
Start system or a battery with
equivalent specifications to a genuine battery. If an unsupported
battery is used, Stop & Start system functions may be restricted to
protect the battery. Also, battery
performance may decrease and
the engine may not be able to
restart. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
● Use a battery that conforms to
European regulations.
● Use a battery that the case size is
same as the previous one (LN4),
20 hours rate capacity (20HR) is
equivalent (75Ah) or greater, and
performance rating (CCA) is
equivalent (776A) or greater.
• If the sizes differ, the battery cannot be properly secured.
• If the 20 hour rate capacity is low,
even if the time period where the
vehicle is not used is a short time,
the battery may discharge and the
engine may not be able to start.
For details, consult your Toyota
dealer.
WARNING
■ When removing the battery
terminals
Always remove the negative (-)
terminal first. If the positive (+) terminal contacts any metal in the
surrounding area when the positive (+) terminal is removed, a
spark may occur, leading to a fire
in addition to electrical shocks
and death or serious injury.
7
When trouble arises
sible to unlock the doors using the
smart key system when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the
mechanical key to lock or unlock
the doors.
● The engine may not start on the
first attempt after the battery has
recharged but will start normally
after the second attempt. This is
not a malfunction.
● The engine switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the
battery is reconnected, the system
will return to the mode it was in
before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the
battery, turn the engine switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the
engine switch was in before the
battery discharged, be especially
549
550
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
■ Avoiding battery fires or
explosions
Observe the following precautions
to prevent accidentally igniting the
flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is
connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other
than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the other end of
the jumper cable connected to
the “+” terminal to come into
contact with any other parts or
metal surfaces in the area, such
as brackets or unpainted metal.
● Do not allow the + and - clamps
of the jumper cables to come
into contact with each other.
● Do not smoke, use matches,
cigarette lighters or allow open
flame near the battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous
and corrosive acidic electrolyte,
while related parts contain lead
and lead compounds. Observe
the following precautions when
handling the battery:
● When working with the battery,
always wear safety glasses and
take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into
contact with skin, clothing or the
vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● In the event that battery fluid
comes into contact with the skin
or eyes, immediately wash the
affected area with water and
seek medical attention. Place a
wet sponge or cloth over the
affected area until medical
attention can be received.
● Always wash your hands after
handling the battery support,
terminals, and other batteryrelated parts.
● Do not allow children near the
battery.
■ When replacing the battery
● When the vent plug and indica-
tor are close to the hold down
clamp, the battery fluid (sulfuric
acid) may leak.
● For information regarding bat-
tery replacement, contact your
Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper
cables, ensure that they do not
become entangled in the cooling
fan.
■ When connecting jumper
cables
Make sure to connect jumper
cables to the specified terminals
and connecting point. Failure to
do so may adversely affect the
electronic devices or damage to
them.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
551
If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
 The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (P.85,
89) enters the red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)
 “Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s
Manual” is shown on the multi-information display.
 Steam comes out from under the hood.
Correction procedures
dealer.
1 Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then
stop the engine.
2 If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after
the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Toyota
Engine radiator
Intercooler radiators
4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F”
and “L” lines on the reservoir.
 Engine
Reservoir
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7
When trouble arises
3 After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, inspect the
hoses, engine radiator core
(radiator) and intercooler
radiator core (radiator) for
any leaks.
Cooling fan
552
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
“F” line
“L” line
 Intercooler radiator
6 Start the engine to check that
the radiator cooling fan operates and to check for coolant
leaks from the radiator or
hoses.
7 If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately
and contact your Toyota
dealer.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at
the nearest Toyota dealer.
Reservoir
“F” line
“L” line
5 Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.
 Engine
8 Check if “Engine Coolant
Temp High Stop in a Safe
Place See Owner’s Manual”
is shown on the multi-information display.
If the message does not disappear:
Stop the engine and contact your
Toyota dealer.
If the message is not displayed:
Have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■ When inspecting under the
hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
 Intercooler radiator
● If steam is seen coming from
under the hood, do not open the
hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
● Keep hands and clothing (espe-
cially a tie, a scarf or a muffler)
away from the fan and belts.
Failure to do so may cause the
hands or clothing to be caught,
resulting in serious injury.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
● Do not loosen the coolant reser-
voir caps, while the engine and
radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or
coolant could spray out.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Add coolant slowly after the
engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant to a
hot engine too quickly can cause
damage to the engine.
■ To prevent damage to the
cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant
with foreign matter (such as
sand or dust, etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additive.
553
If the vehicle becomes
stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or
the vehicle becomes stuck
in mud, dirt or snow:
Recovering procedure
1 Stop the engine. Set the
parking brake and shift the
shift lever to P.
Do not press the shift release button after shifting the shift position to
P.
2 Remove the mud, snow or
sand from around the rear
wheels.
3 Place wood, stones or some
other material under the rear
wheels to help provide traction.
4 Restart the engine.
■ When it is difficult to free the
vehicle
Try the followings.
● Turn off the TRAC
(P.393)
● Using the rear differential lock*
(P.382)
● Switching the front-wheel drive
control switch* (P.379)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
When trouble arises
5 Shift the shift lever to D or R
and release the parking
brake. Then, while exercising
caution, depress the accelerator pedal.
7
554
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
● Using Crawl Control* (P.383)
● Using Multi-terrain Select*
(P.387)
*
: If equipped
WARNING
■ When attempting to free a
stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle
back and forth to free it, make
sure the surrounding area is clear
to avoid striking other vehicles,
objects or people. The vehicle
may also lunge forward or lunge
back suddenly as it becomes free.
Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
This may lead to unexpected
rapid acceleration of the vehicle
that may cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the trans-
mission and other components
● Avoid spinning the rear wheels
and depressing the accelerator
pedal more than necessary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck
even after these procedures are
performed, the vehicle may
require towing to be freed.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
555
7
When trouble arises
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
556
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
555
Vehicle specifications
8
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil
level, etc.).................. 556
Fuel information .......... 566
Tire information ........... 568
8-2. Customization
Customizable features 578
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ......... 589
8
Vehicle specifications
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
556
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
8-1.Specifications
Dimensions and weight
Cab type
Overall length
Double Cab
CrewMax
233.6 in. (5932 mm)*3
233.6 in. (5932 mm)*2
252.5 in. (6412 mm)*4
245.6 in. (6237 mm)*3
Overall width
80.0 in. (2031 mm)
77.2 in. (1960 mm)*4, 5
77.2 in. (1962 mm)*4, 6
2WD 78.6 in. (1997 mm)*3, 5
77.5 in. (1970 mm)*3, 6
77.5 in. (1969 mm)*3, 7
77.5 in. (1970 mm)*4, 5
*1
Overall height
4WD*
9
77.6 in. (1971 mm)
*4, 6
79.2 in. (2011 mm)*3, 5
78.1 in. (1984 mm)*3, 6
78.0 in. (1981 mm)
*3, 7
77.3 in. (1963 mm)*3, 7
77.3 in. (1965 mm)*3, 6
77.4 in. (1967 mm)*2, 5, 7
77.5 in. (1969 mm)*2, 6
77.9 in. (1978 mm)*3, 7
77.9 in. (1979 mm)*3, 6
78.1 in. (1983 mm)*2, 5, 7
78.1 in. (1984 mm)*2, 6
80.1 in. (2035 mm)*3, 7
4WD*
8
80.4 in. (2042 mm)*3, 5
80.2 in. (2037 mm)*3, 6
80.4 in. (2043 mm)*3, 6
80.3 in. (2041 mm)*2, 5
80.4 in. (2041 mm)*3, 7
80.4 in. (2042 mm)*2, 6
80.4 in. (2041 mm)*2, 7
Wheelbase
Front tread
145.7 in. (3700 mm)*3
145.7 in. (3700 mm)*2
164.6 in. (4180 mm)*4
157.7 in. (4005 mm)*3
2WD
68.3 in. (1735 mm)
4WD
68.1 in. (1728 mm)
Rear tread
*1
: Unladen vehicles
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
68.4 in. (1737 mm)
8-1. Specifications
*2
: Short Bed type
*3
: Standard Bed type
557
*4: Long Bed type
*5
: 245/75R18 tires
*6
: 265/70R18 tires
*7: 265/60R20 tires
*8
: Vehicles with Toyota official lift kit
*9
: Vehicles without Toyota official lift kit
Vehicle capacity weight
 Double Cab
Model code*
VXKA70L-CRUSZA
VXKA72L-CHUSZA
VXKA75L-CRUSZA
VXKA77L-CHUSZA
*
Driving system
2WD
4WD
Bed type
Vehicle capacityweight
(Occupants + luggage)
Standard
1555 lb. (705 kg)
Long
1575 lb. (715 kg)
Standard
1490 lb. (675 kg)
Long
1510 lb. (685 kg)
: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (P.558)
 CrewMax
Model code*
Driving system
Bed type
VXKA70L-PSULZA
(Occupants + luggage)
1420 lb. (645 kg)
Short
2WD
VXKA71L-PRULZA
VXKA71L-PRUSZA
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
1390 lb. (630 kg)
1400 lb. (635 kg)
Standard
1445 lb. (655 kg)
1445 lb. (655 kg)
8
Vehicle specifications
VXKA70L-PSUZZA
VXKA70L-PSUSZA
Vehicle capacityweight
558
8-1. Specifications
Model code*
Driving system
Bed type
VXKA75L-PSULZA
VXKA76L-PRULZA
Short
VXKA76L-PRUZZA
1380 lb. (625 kg)
1300 lb. (590 kg)
4WD
VXKA76L-PRUSZA
*
(Occupants + luggage)
1390 lb. (630 kg)
VXKA75L-PSUSZA
VXKA75L-PSUZZA
Vehicle capacityweight
1380 lb. (625 kg)
Standard
1345 lb. (610 kg)
1300 lb. (590 kg)
: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (P.558)
Seating capacity
Seating capacity
5 (Front 2, Rear 3)
Vehicle identification
left of the instrument panel.
■ Vehicle identification num-
ber
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier
for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for
your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your
vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
front left frame.
This number is also on the top
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
This number is also on the Certification Label.
The engine number is stamped
on the engine block as shown.
8-1. Specifications
559
Engine
Model
V35A-FTS
Type
6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline (with
turbocharger)
Bore and stroke
3.37  3.94 in. (85.5  100.0 mm)
Displacement
210.2 cu.in. (3445 cm3)
Valve clearance
Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
Research Octane Number
87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher
Standard fuel tank:
22.5 gal. (85.0 L, 18.7 Imp.gal.)
Large fuel tank:
32.2 gal. (122.0 L, 26.8 Imp.gal.)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Vehicle specifications
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
8
560
8-1. Specifications
Lubrication system
■ Oil capacity (Drain and refill
[Reference*])
With filter
7.7 qt. (7.3 L, 6.4 Imp.
qt.)
Without
filter
7.4 qt. (7.0 L, 6.2 Imp.
qt.)
*: The engine oil capacity is a refer-
ence quantity to be used when
changing the engine oil. When
actually adding the engine oil,
make sure that the oil level does
not exceed the refill upper limit
mark and is between the low level
mark and refill upper limit mark
(P.478). Warm up and turn off
the engine, wait about 8 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is
used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to
satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.
Oil grade:
ILSAC GF-6A multigrade engine
oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE
0W-20
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Outside temperature
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice
for good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained
here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates
the characteristic of the oil
which allows cold startability.
Oils with a lower value before
the W allow for easier starting
of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the
viscosity characteristic of the
oil when the oil is at high temperature.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant
Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is
added to some oil containers to
help you select the oil you
should use.
8-1. Specifications
561
Cooling system
Capacity
*
Gasoline
engine
13.1 qt. (12.4 L, 10.9 Imp. qt.)
Intercooler 4.6 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
 “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
 Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based nonsilicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
*
: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.
Ignition system (spark plug)
DENSO EC22HPR-D7
Gap
0.027 in. (0.7 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
8
Vehicle specifications
Make
562
8-1. Specifications
Electrical system
12.0 V or higher
(Turn the engine switch off and turn on the
high beam headlights for 30 seconds.)
Open voltage at 68°F (20°C):
Charging rates
Quick charge
15 A max.
Slow charge
5 A max.
Automatic transmission
Fluid capacity*
11.7 qt. (11.1 L, 9.8 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
*
: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■ Automatic transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal
noise or vibration, or damage the transmission of your vehicle.
Transfer (4WD models)
Oil capacity
2.17 qt. (2.05 L, 1.80 Imp.qt.)
Oil type and viscosity
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” at the
factory.
Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” or an equivalent of
matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact
your Toyota dealer for further details.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
8-1. Specifications
563
Differential
Front (4WD
models)
1.4 qt. (1.29 L, 1.1 Imp.qt.)
 Without rear differential lock system
Oil capacity
Rear
5.7 qt. (5.42 L, 4.8 Imp.qt.)
 With rear differential lock system
5.6 qt. (5.34 L, 4.7 Imp.qt.)
Oil type and viscosity
Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear
Oil” at the factory.
Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an
equivalent oil of matching quality to satisfy the above specification.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
Brakes
Pedal clearance*1
3.6 in. (93.3 mm) Min.
Pedal free play
0.04  0.24 in. (1  6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit
0.04 in. (1 mm)
Parking brake indicator*2
*1
When pushing the parking brake switch for
1 to 2 seconds: turns off
 FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
 FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N,
50 kgf) while the engine is running.
*2: Make sure to confirm that the brake warning light (yellow) does not illumi-
nate. (If the brake warning light illuminates, refer to P.519.)
Steering
Free play
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
8
Vehicle specifications
Fluid type
When pulling the parking brake switch for
1 to 2 seconds: comes on
564
8-1. Specifications
Tires and wheels
 18-inch tires (type A)
Tire size
245/75R18 112T, 245/75R18 112T (spare)
Tire inflation pressure
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) (spare)
inflation pressure)
Wheel size
18  7 1/2 J, 18  7J (spare)
Wheel nut torque
154 ft•lbf (209 N•m, 21.3 kgf•m)
 18-inch tires (type B)
Tire size
265/70R18 116T, 245/75R18 112T (spare)
Tire inflation pressure
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) (spare)
inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
18  7 1/2 J, 18  7J (spare)
Steel wheels:
154 ft•lbf (209 N•m, 21.3 kgf•m)
Aluminum wheels:
97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)
 18-inch tires (type C)
Tire size
265/70R18 116T, 265/70R18 116T (spare)
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
18  7 1/2 J, 18  7J (spare)
Steel wheels:
154 ft•lbf (209 N•m, 21.3 kgf•m)
Aluminum wheels:
97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
565
8-1. Specifications
 20-inch tires (type A)
Tire size
265/60R20 112H, 245/75R18 112T (spare)
Tire inflation pressure
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) (spare)
inflation pressure)
Wheel size
20  8J, 18  7J (spare)
Steel wheels:
154 ft•lbf (209 N•m, 21.3 kgf•m)
Wheel nut torque
Aluminum wheels:
97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)
 20-inch tires (type B)
Tire size
265/60R20 112H, 265/70R18 116T (spare)
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
inflation pressure)
Wheel size
20  8 1/2 J, 18  7J (spare)
Wheel nut torque
Steel wheels:
154 ft•lbf (209 N•m, 21.3 kgf•m)
Aluminum wheels:
97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)
Light bulbs
Light bulbs
Front turn signal/parking
lights
A: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
W
Type
7444NA
28/8
A
8
Vehicle specifications
Exterior
Bulb No.
566
8-1. Specifications
Fuel information
You must only use unleaded
gasoline.
Select octane rating 87
(Research Octane Number
91) or higher. Use of
unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating lower than 87
may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking
can lead to engine damage.
■ Recommendation of the use of
low emissions gasoline
Gasolines containing oxygenates
such as ethers and ethanol, as well
as reformulated gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are
typically acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.
Toyota recommends these fuels,
since the formulations allow for
reduced vehicle emissions.
■ Non-recommendation of the
use of blended gasoline
● Use only gasoline containing up to
At minimum, the gasoline you
use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the
U.S.A.
15% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than
15% ethanol, including from any
pump labeled E30 (30% ethanol
), E50 (50% ethanol ), E85
■ Gasoline quality
(85% ethanol ) (which are only
some examples of fuel containing
more than 15% ethanol).
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of
gasoline you are using. If driveability
problems persist, try changing the
brand of gasoline. If this does not
correct the problem, consult your
Toyota dealer.
■ Recommendation of the use of
gasoline containing detergent
additives
● Toyota recommends the use of
gasoline that contains detergent
additives to avoid build-up of
engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives
to clean and/or keep clean intake
systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration program.
● Toyota strongly recommends the
use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top
Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list
of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● If you use gasohol in your vehicle,
be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.
● Toyota does not recommend the
use of gasoline containing methanol.
8-1. Specifications
■ Non-recommendation of the
use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane
enhancing additive called MMT
(Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use
of gasoline that contains MMT. If
fuel containing MMT is used, your
emission control system may be
adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on
the instrument cluster may come on.
If this happens, contact your Toyota
dealer for service.
567
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is encountered after
using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that type of
fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It
can damage your vehicle’s paint.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Toyota dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light
knocking for a short time while
accelerating or driving uphill. This
is normal and there is no need for
concern.
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If
improper fuels are used, the
engine will be damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
● Do not use gasohol other than
the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel
system damage or vehicle performance problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with
an octane number or rating
lower than the level previously
stated will cause persistent
heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine
damage.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
8
Vehicle specifications
Leaded gasoline can cause
damage to your vehicle’s threeway catalytic converters causing the emission control system
to malfunction.
568
8-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Tire size (P.569)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P.569)
Location of treadwear indicators (P.486)
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a
bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P.486)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P.564)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Summer tires or all season tires (P.487)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
8-1. Specifications
569
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.
Typical DOT and Tire
Identification Number
(TIN)
 Type B
 Type A
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire size code
Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
Manufacturer’s code
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
Manufacturer’s optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the
Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Manufacturing week
Tire size
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the
■ Typical tire size information
tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Vehicle specifications
Manufacturing year
8
570
8-1. Specifications
Tire section names
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio (tire height to
section width)
Tire construction code (R =
Radial, D = Diagonal)
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Wheel diameter (inches)
Tread
Speed category (alphabet
with one letter)
Belt
Inner liner
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Reinforcing rubber
Speed symbol (alphabet with
one letter)
Rim lines
■ Tire dimensions
Carcass
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
It provides the purchasers
and/or prospective purchasers
of Toyota vehicles with informa-
8-1. Specifications
tion on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer
any questions you may have as you
read this information.
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must
conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to
these grades. Quality grades
can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test
course.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and
C, and they represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
braking (straight ahead) traction
tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades
of a tire assume that it is properly
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
8
Vehicle specifications
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2)
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use. Performance may differ
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
571
572
8-1. Specifications
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
Meaning
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km
under that condition
Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to
which a tire may be inflated, shown on the
sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by a manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio and heater, to the extent that
these items are available as factoryinstalled equipment (whether installed or
not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so
equipped, air conditioning and additional
weight optional engine
The sum of:
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of
Table 1* that follows
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as
specified in the third column of Table 1*
below
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
573
Meaning
Production options weight
The combined weight of installed regular
production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3
kg) in excess of the standard items which
they replace, not previously considered in
curb weight or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated
Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer’s designation
for a rim by style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight (Total
load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150
lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated
seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on the
tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share
of the maximum loaded vehicle weight,
and dividing by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by
the inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel
wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords
and that is shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
8
Vehicle specifications
The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share
of curb weight, accessory weight, and norVehicle normal load on the tire mal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by
two
574
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate
angles substantially less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the
load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread
or sidewall
Cord
The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber
compounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or
innerliner of the tire extending to cord
material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange
tire and rim system in which the rim is
designed with rim flanges pointed radially
inward and the tire is designed to fit on the
underside of the rim in a manner that
encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads
and at higher inflation pressures than the
corresponding standard tire
Groove
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating
medium within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord
material in the carcass
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Intended outboard sidewall
575
Meaning
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as
primarily intended for use on lightweight
trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to
carry for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible inflation The maximum cold inflation pressure to
pressure
which a tire may be inflated
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord
material
Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors
of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including
elevations due to labeling, decorations, or
protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars,
multipurpose passenger vehicles, and
trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight
rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between
adjacent plies
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
8
Vehicle specifications
Measuring rim
576
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber,
chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive
wheel, provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the
tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads
and at higher inflation pressures than the
corresponding standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors
of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration,
or protective bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread
and bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from
the cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to
or greater than 110, compared to the
ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test
Tire, when using the snow traction test as
described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard
Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and IceCovered Surfaces, and which is marked
with an Alpine Symbol (
) on at least
one sidewall
Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing,
and may be any rim listed as appropriate
for use with that tire
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
577
Meaning
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire
Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
*
: Table 1 -Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15
5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
16 through 20
7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
8
Vehicle specifications
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
578
8-2. Customization
Customizable features
8-2.Customization
■ Changing by using the mul-
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features
that can be personalized to
your preferences. The settings of these features can
be changed by using the
multi-information display,
the multimedia system or at
your Toyota dealer.
timedia system
1 Select
3 According to the display,
select the desired setting.
Various setting can be changed.
Refer to the list of settings that can
be changed for details.
WARNING
■ During customization
■ Changing by using the
meter control switches
or
to select
.
2 Operate the meter control
switches to select the desired
item to be customized.
3 According to the display,
select the desired setting and
then press
.
To go back to the previous screen
or exit the customize mode, press
on the main menu
2 Select “Vehicle customize”.
Customizing vehicle features
1 Press
.
As the engine needs to be operating during customization, ensure
that the vehicle is parked in a
place with adequate ventilation. In
a closed area such as a garage,
exhaust gases including harmful
carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This
may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During customization
To prevent battery discharge,
ensure that the engine is running
while customizing features.
Customizable features
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further
details.
Settings that can be changed using the multimedia system
Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display
Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
579
8-2. Customization
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display (P.85, 89, 93)
Function*1
Default setting
Language*2
Customized
setting
French
English
Spanish
—
O
—
—
O
—
—
O
—
—
O
—
km (km/L)
Units*2
miles (MPG
US)
km (L/100 km)
miles (MPG
Imperial)
Analog
Speedometer display*3
Fuel economy display
Digital
Total average
(Average fuel
consumption
[after reset])
Audio system linked display
Drive information type
Trip average
(Average fuel
consumption
[after start])
Tank average
(Average fuel
consumption
[after refuel])
On
Off
—
O
—
Trip (after
start)
Total (after
reset)
—
O
—
Average vehicle speed
—
O
—
O
—
O
—
Distance
Elapsed time
Drive information items (SecElapsed time
ond item)
Pop-up display
Average vehicle speed
—
On
*1: For details about each function: P.98
*2
: The default setting varies according to country.
*3
: Vehicles with full LCD type only
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Distance
Off
—
8
Vehicle specifications
Drive information items (First
item)
Digital & Analog
580
8-2. Customization
■ Head-up Display* (P.101)
Default setting
Customized
setting
Head-up display
On
Off
—
O
—
Eco Driving Indicator
On
Off
—
O
—
Route guidance to destination/street name
On
Off
—
O
—
Driving support system display*
On
Off
—
O
—
Compass
On
Off
—
O
—
Audio system operation status
On
Off
—
O
—
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Unlocking using a mechanical key
Driver’s door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two step
All doors
unlocked in
one step
— —
O
O
—
O
O
—
O
Function
*
: If equipped
■ Door lock (P.111, 118, 545)
Shift position
Automatic door locking funclinked door
tion
locking operation
Automatic door unlocking
function
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Shift position
linked door
unlocking
operation
Off
Speed linked
door locking
operation
Off
Driver’s door
linked door
unlocking
operation
581
8-2. Customization
■ Smart key system and wireless remote control (P.111, 118,
130)
Function
Default setting
Operating signal (Buzzers)
5
Operation signal (Emergency
flashers)
On
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened after being unlocked
60 seconds
Open door warning buzzer
(When locking the vehicle)
On
Customized
setting
Off
1 to 7
Off
O
—
O
O
—
O
O
—
O
— —
O
— —
O
O
—
O
— —
O
— —
O
— —
O
O
O
30 seconds
120 seconds
Off
■ Smart key system (P.111, 118, 130)
Function
Smart key system
Smart door unlocking
Default setting
Customized
setting
On
Off
Driver’s door
All the doors
Time elapsed before unlocking all the door when gripping
and holding the driver’s door
handle
Off
2 seconds
Number of consecutive door
lock operations
2 times
1.5 seconds
2.5 seconds
As many as
desired
Function
Wireless remote control
Unlocking operation
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Default setting
Customized
setting
On
Off
Driver’s door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two step
All doors
unlocked in
one step
—
Vehicle specifications
■ Wireless remote control (P.109, 111, 119)
8
582
8-2. Customization
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
One short
press
Tailgate opening operation
Push twice
Press and hold
— —
(short)
Press and hold
O
(long)
Off
Single press
Power tailgate opening operPress and hold Double press
ation*
Off
— —
O
Theft deterrent panic mode
On
Off
— —
O
Locking operation when door
opened
On
Off
O
—
O
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Indication to prevent misplacement in the rear seat
On
Off
—
O
—
—
O
—
*
: If equipped
■ Rear seat reminder (P.113)
■ Tailgate open alert (P.120, 122)
Default setting
Customized
setting
On
Off
Default setting
Customized
setting
Power tailgate operations
On
Off
—
O
—
Close Assist
On
Off
— —
O
Power tailgate operation by
tailgate opener switch on tail
lamp and tailgate handle
On
Off (latch
release only)
— —
O
Function
Tailgate open alert
■ Power tailgate* (P.120)
Function
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
583
8-2. Customization
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Operating signal (Buzzers)
Off
On
Power tailgate buzzer volume
Medium
*
Low
High
— —
O
—
O
—
— —
O
O
—
O
O
—
O
: If equipped
■ Driving position memory* (P.141)
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Selecting doors linked to the
memory recall function
Driver’s door
All doors
Driver’s seat slide movement
when exiting the vehicle
Full
Off
Partial
Off
Steering wheel movement
Tilt only
Telescopic
only
Tilt and telescopic
*
: If equipped
■ Outside rear view mirrors (P.160)
Function
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Customized
setting
Off
Linked to the
locking/
Linked to oper- — —
unlocking of
ation of the
the doors
engine switch
8
O
Vehicle specifications
Automatic mirror folding and
extending operation
Default setting
584
8-2. Customization
■ Power windows and panoramic moon roof*(P.165, 169)
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Mechanical key linked operation
Off
On
Wireless remote control
linked operation
Off
Wireless remote control
linked operation signal
(buzzer)
On
Off
— —
O
Side windows open warning
function
On
Off
— —
O
Sliding roof open warning
function
On
Off
— —
O
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Times of flashing of the lane
change signal flashers
3
— —
O
O
—
O
O
—
O
— —
O
— —
O
On (open only) — —
O
*: If equipped
■ Turn signal lever (P.212)
Off
4 to 7
■ Automatic light control system (P.219)
Function
Light sensor sensitivity
Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off
after doors are closed
Windshield wiper linked
headlight illumination
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Default setting
Customized
setting
Standard
-2 to 2
Off
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
On
Off
585
8-2. Customization
■ Lights (P.219)
Default setting
Customized
setting
Daytime running lights*
On
Off
O
—
O
Welcome lamp (if equipped)
On
Off
— —
O
On/Off
—
O
—
Early/Middle/Late
—
O
—
Function
*
: Except for Canada
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)*1 (P.237)
Function
Customized setting
PCS (Pre-Collision System)*2
Adjust alert timing
*1
: If equipped
*2
: The system is automatically enabled each time the engine switch is
turned to ON.
■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)* (P.248)
Function
Customized setting
Lane centering function
On/Off
—
O
—
Steering wheel vibration/Buzzer
—
O
—
High/Standard
—
O
—
Vehicle sway warning function
On/Off
—
O
—
Vehicle sway warning sensitivity
High/Standard/Low
—
O
—
Alert type
Alert sensitivity
: If equipped
■ RSA (Road Sign Assist)* (P.259)
Function
Customized setting
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
On/Off
—
O
—
Excess speed notification
method
No notification/Display
only/Display and buzzer
—
O
—
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Vehicle specifications
*
8
586
8-2. Customization
Function
Customized setting
Excess speed notification
level
1 mph (2 km/h)/3 mph (5
km/h)/5 mph (10 km/h)
—
O
—
Other notifications method
(No-entry notification)
No notification/Display
only/Display and buzzer
—
O
—
—
O
—
*
: If equipped
■ Stop & Start system (P.277)
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Change the Stop & Start system duration when the A/C is
on
Standard
Extended
■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)* (P.284)
Default setting
Customized
setting
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
On
Off
—
O
—
Outside rear view mirror indicator brightness
Bright
Dim
—
O
—
—
O
—
—
O
—
—
O
—
Function
Early
Alert timing for presence of
approaching vehicle (sensitivity)
Late
Intermediate
Only when
vehicle
detected in
blind spot
*: If equipped
■ Intuitive parking assist* (P.291)
Function
Intuitive parking assist
Buzzer volume
*: If equipped
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Default setting
Customized
setting
On
Off
Level 2
Level 1
Level 3
587
8-2. Customization
■ RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)* (P.298)
Function
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert)
Buzzer volume
Default setting
Customized
setting
On
Off
Level 2
Level 1
Level 3
—
O
—
—
O
—
O
—
O
O
—
O
*: If equipped
■ Automatic air conditioning system (P.416)
Function
A/C mode with auto
Default setting
Customized
setting
On
Off
Default setting
Customized
setting
■ Illumination (P.425)
Function
Off
Time elapsed before the interior lights and cargo lamp
turn off
15 seconds
Operation of the personal/interior lights after the
engine switch is turned off
On
Off
— —
O
Operation of the personal/interior lights when the
doors are unlocked
On
Off
— —
O
Operation of the personal/interior lights when you
approach the vehicle with the
electronic key on your person
On
Off
— —
O
Ambient lights*
On
Off
— —
O
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
30 seconds
8
Vehicle specifications
*: If equipped
7.5 seconds
588
8-2. Customization
■ Driving mode select switch* (P.376)
Function
Default setting
Powertrain control in Custom mode*
Normal
Suspension control in Custom mode*
Normal
Steering control in Custom
mode*
Normal
*
: If equipped
■ Vehicle customization
● When the smart key system is off,
the entry unlock function cannot
be customized.
● When the doors remain closed
after unlocking the doors and the
timer activated automatic door
lock function activates, signals will
be generated in accordance with
the operation buzzer volume and
operational signal (Emergency
flashers) function settings.
● Some settings can be changed
using a switch or the multimedia
system. If a setting is changed
using a switch, the changed setting will not be reflected on the
multimedia system until the
engine switch is turned off and
then to ON.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Customized
setting
Power
Eco
Sport
Comfort
Sport
O
—
—
O
—
—
O
—
—
8-3. Initialization
589
Items to initialize
8-3.Initialization
The following items must be initialized for normal system
operation after such cases as the battery being reconnected,
or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:
List of items to initialize
Item
When to initialize
Reference
PKSB (Parking
Support Brake)*
• After reconnecting or changing
the battery
P.309
Maintenance
required reminder
message
• After the maintenance is performed
P.470, 480
• When the tire inflation pressure
is changed, such as when
changing traveling speed or load
weight.
Tire pressure warn- • When the tire inflation pressure
ing system
is changed, such as when the
tire size is changed.
• When rotating the tires.
• After performing the transmitter
ID code registration procedure.
Toyota parking
assist monitor*
Multi-terrain Monitor*
Power tailgate*
*
• Battery has been reinstalled.
• The steering wheel has been
moved while the battery was
being reinstalled.
• Battery power is low.
P.324, 359, 372
• When the tailgate is reattached.
• Battery has been reinstalled.
• After jam protection function
operate.
• After turn on the power tailgate
system using the meter control
switch.
P.123, 532
: If equipped
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
8
Vehicle specifications
Panoramic view
monitor*
P.490
590
8-3. Initialization
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
591
For owners
9
9-1. For owners
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners............... 592
Reporting safety defects for
Canadian owners ...... 592
Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners (in
French)...................... 593
SRS airbag instructions for
Canadian owners (in
French)...................... 595
Camper information .... 603
9
For owners
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
592
9-1. For owners
Reporting safety
defects for U.S. owners
Reporting safety
defects for Canadian
owners
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should
immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales,
U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800331-4331).
Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety-related
defect to Transport Canada,
Defects Investigations and
Recalls, may telephone the
toll-free hotline 1-800-3330510, mail Transport Canada ASFAD, 330 Sparks Street,
Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5, or
complete the online form at
https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota
Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
Les clients canadiens
désireux de rendre compte
d’un défaut lié à la sécurité
auprès de Transport Canada,
Enquêtes sur les défauts et
rappels, peuvent appeler gratuitement l’assistance téléphonique au 1-800-333-0510,
écrire un courriel à Transports
Canada - ASFAD, 330 Sparks
Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5,
ou remplir la déclaration en
ligne à l’adresse
https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels.
9-1.For owners
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Ave. SE., Washington, DC
20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
9-1. For owners
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)
The following is a French
explanation of seat belt
instructions extracted from
the seat belt section in this
manual.
See the seat belt section for
more detailed seat belt
instructions in English.
593
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Lorsque vous utilisez la cein-
ture de sécurité du siège central arrière
Ne pas utiliser la ceinture de
sécurité du siège central arrière
avec une de ses deux boucles
déverrouillée. Si une seule des
boucles est verrouillée, tout freinage brusque ou collision peut
entraîner des blessures graves,
voire mortelles.
Utilisation correcte des
ceintures de sécurité
Entretien et nettoyage
■ Manipulation des ceintures
de sécurité
 Déroulez la sangle diagonale
de telle sorte qu’elle passe
bien sur l’épaule, sans pour
autant être en contact avec le
cou ou glisser de l’épaule.
 Réglez la position du dossier
de siège. Asseyez-vous le
dos le plus droit possible et
calez-vous bien dans le siège.
 Ne pas vriller la ceinture de
sécurité.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
9
For owners
 Placez la sangle abdominale
le plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
Avec un chiffon ou une éponge,
nettoyez à l’aide d’un savon
doux et de l’eau tiède. Vérifiez
aussi les ceintures régulièrement pour vous assurer qu’elles
ne présentent pas d’usure
excessive, d’effilochage ou de
coupures.
594
9-1. For owners
AVERTISSEMENT
■ État et usure des ceintures de
sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez
qu’elles ne sont pas entaillées,
effilochées, et que leurs ancrages
ne sont pas desserrés. Ne pas utiliser une ceinture de sécurité
défectueuse avant qu’elle ne soit
remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n’apporte aucune
garantie de protection de l’occupant contre des blessures graves,
voire mortelles.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
9-1. For owners
595
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in
French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.
Système de coussins gonflables SRS
■ Emplacement des coussins gonflables SRS
 Coussins gonflables SRS frontaux
Coussins gonflables SRS de genoux
Participe à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant
 Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et rideau
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux avant
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
9
For owners
Coussin gonflable SRS conducteur/passager avant
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et
du passager avant contre les chocs avec les éléments de l’habitacle
596
9-1. For owners
Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants aux
places avant
Coussins gonflables SRS rideau
• Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants assis
dans les sièges des places extérieures
• Participent à empêcher les occupants d’être éjectés du véhicule en cas
de retournement de celui-ci
■ Composition du système de coussins gonflables SRS
Capteurs d’impact avant
Coussins gonflables de genoux
Coussin gonflable passager avant
Capteurs d’impact latéral (avant)
Coussins gonflables rideau
Capteurs d’impact latéral (porte avant)
Capteurs de classification d’occupant du siège passager avant
Témoins indicateurs “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”
Coussins gonflables latéraux
Prétensionneurs et limiteurs d’effort de ceinture de sécurité
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
9-1. For owners
597
Capteurs d’impact latéral (arrière)
Coussin gonflable conducteur
Témoin d’alerte SRS
Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité conducteur
Capteur de position du siège conducteur
Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité passager avant
Boîtier électronique de coussins gonflables
Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELLIGENTS (ADVANCED AIRBAGS) conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208).
Le boîtier électronique de coussins gonflables (ECU) utilise les informations reçues des capteurs, etc. détaillés dans le schéma ci-dessus de composition du système pour commander le déploiement
des coussins gonflables. Ces informations comprennent des informations sur la gravité de la collision et les occupants. Le déploiement rapide des coussins gonflables est obtenu au moyen d’une
réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un
gaz inoffensif permettant d’amortir le mouvement des occupants.
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions avec les couss-
ins gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les coussins gonflables SRS.
À défaut, des blessures graves,
voire mortelles, pourraient
s’ensuivre.
● Le conducteur et tous les pas-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
For owners
sagers à bord du véhicule
doivent porter leur ceinture de
sécurité correctement.
Les coussins gonflables SRS
sont des dispositifs de protection complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité.
9
598
9-1. For owners
AVERTISSEMENT
● Le coussin gonflable SRS con-
ducteur se déploie avec une
puissance considérable et peut
occasionner des blessures
graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le conducteur se
trouve très près du coussin gonflable.
L’autorité fédérale chargée de la
sécurité routière aux États-Unis,
la NHTSA (National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration) conseille: Sachant que la zone de
danger pour le coussin gonflable
conducteur se trouve dans les
premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm)
du déploiement, placez-vous à 10
in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable
conducteur pour garantir une
marge de sécurité suffisante.
Cette distance est à mesurer
entre le moyeu du volant de direction et le sternum. Si vous êtes
assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm),
vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs
façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, tout en continuant à pouvoir atteindre confortablement
les pédales.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier
du siège.
Bien que les véhicules soient
différents les uns des autres, la
plupart des conducteurs peuvent s’asseoir à une distance de
10 in. (250 mm), même avec le
siège conducteur complètement
avancé, simplement en inclinant
un peu le dossier de siège. Si
vous avez des difficultés à voir
la route après avoir incliné votre
siège, utilisez un coussin ferme
et antidérapant pour vous
rehausser ou, si votre véhicule
est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.
• Si votre volant de direction est
réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas.
Cela vous permet d’orienter le
coussin gonflable vers votre
buste plutôt que vers la tête et
le cou.
Le siège doit être réglé selon les
recommandations de la NHTSA
ci-dessus, tout en conservant le
contrôle des pédales et du volant,
et la vue des commandes au tableau de bord.
9-1. For owners
AVERTISSEMENT
● Si vous attachez une rallonge
de ceinture de sécurité aux boucles des ceintures de sièges
avant, mais pas au pêne de la
ceinture de sécurité proprement dite, les coussins gonflables SRS frontaux déterminent
que le conducteur et le passager avant portent leur ceinture de sécurité, alors même
qu’elle n’est pas attachée. Dans
ce cas, les coussins gonflables
SRS frontaux risquent de ne
pas se déployer correctement
en cas de collision, causant des
blessures graves, voire mortelles. Veillez à porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge
de ceinture de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS pas-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Le déploiement d’un coussin
gonflable peut infliger des blessures graves, voire mortelles,
aux nourrissons et aux enfants
mal assis et/ou mal attachés.
Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les enfants trop
jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la
ceinture de sécurité. Toyota
recommande vivement que tous
les nourrissons et enfants
soient installés dans les sièges
arrière du véhicule et convenablement attachés. Les sièges
arrière sont plus sûrs pour les
nourrissons et les enfants que
le siège passager avant.
● Ne jamais installer un siège de
sécurité enfant type dos à la
route sur le siège passager
avant, même si le témoin indicateur “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé.
En cas d’accident, la force exercée par le déploiement rapide
du coussin gonflable passager
avant peut causer des blessures graves, voire mortelles à
un enfant, si le siège de sécurité
enfant type dos à la route est
installé sur le siège passager
avant.
● Ne pas s’asseoir sur le bord du
siège et ne pas s’appuyer contre la planche de bord.
9
For owners
sager avant se déploie également avec une puissance
considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, notamment lorsque le
passager avant se trouve très
près du coussin gonflable. Le
siège du passager avant doit se
trouver le plus loin possible du
coussin gonflable et le dossier
doit être réglé de manière à ce
que le passager avant soit assis
bien droit.
599
600
9-1. For owners
AVERTISSEMENT
● Ne pas laisser un enfant rester
debout devant le coussin gonflable SRS passager avant ni
assis sur les genoux du passager avant.
● Ne rien fixer ou disposer sur la
planche de bord, la garniture
centrale du moyeu de volant de
direction et la partie inférieure
du tableau de bord.
Lors du déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS conducteur,
passager avant et de genoux,
tout objet risque de se transformer en projectile.
● Ne pas laisser les occupants
des sièges avant voyager avec
un objet sur les genoux.
● Ne pas s’appuyer contre la
porte, contre le rail latéral de toit
ou contre les montants avant,
latéraux et arrière.
● Ne rien fixer sur les parties
telles que les portes, la vitre de
pare-brise, les vitres latérales,
les montants avant et arrière,
les rails latéraux de toit et les
poignées de maintien.
● Ne laissez personne s’age-
nouiller face à la portière sur les
sièges du passager ou sortir la
tête ou les mains à l’extérieur
du véhicule.
● Ne pas suspendre aux crochets
à vêtements un cintre nu ni
aucun autre objet dur ou tranchant. En cas de déploiement
des coussins gonflables SRS
rideau, tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et causer des blessures
graves, voire mortelles.
● Si une housse en vinyle recou-
vre la partie où le coussins gonflable SRS de genoux se
déploie, veillez à l’enlever.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
9-1. For owners
AVERTISSEMENT
● N’utilisez pour les sièges aucun
accessoire venant recouvrir les
parties où se déploient les coussins gonflables SRS latéraux,
car il risquerait d’en gêner le
déploiement. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les
coussins gonflables SRS
latéraux de s’activer correctement, neutraliser le système ou
provoquer le déploiement accidentel des coussins gonflables
SRS latéraux, provoquant ainsi
des blessures graves, voire
mortelles.
● Ne pas faire subir de chocs vio-
lents ni des pressions excessives aux parties renfermant les
composants des coussins gonflables SRS, ni aux portes
avant. En effet, cela pourrait
entraîner un mauvais
fonctionnement des coussins
gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez aucun composant
du système immédiatement
après le déclenchement
(déploiement) des coussins
gonflables SRS, car ils sont
alors encore très chauds.
● Si vous avez des difficultés à
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
● Si les parties renfermant les
coussins gonflables SRS, telles
que la garniture centrale du
volant de direction et les garnitures de montants avant et
arrière, apparaissent abîmées
ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Toyota.
● Ne rien poser sur le siège du
passager avant, comme un
coussin par exemple. Cela a
pour conséquence de répartir le
poids du passager sur toute la
surface du siège, ce qui
empêche le capteur de détecter
normalement le poids du passager. En conséquence, les
coussins gonflables SRS frontaux du passager avant peuvent
ne pas se déployer en cas de
collision.
■ Modification et élimination en
fin de vie des éléments du
système de coussins gonflables SRS
Ne mettez pas à la casse votre
véhicule et ne lui apportez aucune
des modifications suivantes sans
consulter votre concessionnaire
Toyota. Les coussins gonflables
SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner
correctement ou se déployer (se
gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant ainsi des blessures graves,
voire mortelles.
● Installation, dépose, démon-
tage et réparations des coussins gonflables SRS
● Réparations, modifications,
démontage ou remplacement
du volant de direction, du tableau de bord, de la planche de
bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage, des montants avant,
latéraux et arrière, des rails
latéraux de toit, des panneaux
de portes avant, des garnitures
de portes avant ou des hautparleurs de portes avant
9
For owners
respirer après le déploiement
des coussins gonflables SRS,
ouvrez une porte ou une vitre
pour faire entrer de l’air frais, ou
bien descendez du véhicule si
cela ne présente pas de danger.
Retirez tout résidu dès que possible afin d’éviter d’éventuelles
irritations de la peau.
601
602
9-1. For owners
AVERTISSEMENT
● Modifications du panneau de
porte avant (percer un trou
dedans, par exemple)
● Réparation ou modification des
ailes avant, du bouclier avant,
ou des flancs de l’habitacle
● Installation d’un équipement de
protection sur la calandre (parebuffle, pare-kangourou, etc.),
d’un chasse-neige, de treuils ou
d’une galerie de toit
● Modification des suspensions
du véhicule
● Installation d’appareils électro-
niques, tels qu’un émetteur/récepteur radio ou lecteur
de CD
● Aménagements du véhicule
visant à permettre sa conduite
par une personne atteinte d’un
handicap physique
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
9-1. For owners
603
Camper information
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulation issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides
the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on truck-camper loading. Your Toyota
dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you
read this information.
Center of gravity location
The figures given in the illustration indicate the recommended center
of gravity zone.
1 Recommended location for cargo center of gravity for cargo weight
rating
2 Rear end of truck bed
48.0 in. (1220 mm)
41.0 in. (1040 mm)
9
WARNING
If a load is too far back, it can cause dangerous handling. If it is too far forward, the front axle may be overloaded.
Cargo weight rating and proper matching
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo
load of the truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight fig-
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
For owners
■ Loading precaution
604
9-1. For owners
ure, the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included
in the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of camper
cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper. The total cargo
load should not exceed the truck’s cargo weight rating and the
camper’s center of gravity should fall within the truck’s recommended center of gravity zone when installed.
Recommended center of
gravity location zone
Camper center of gravity
■ Cargo weight rating
No.
Model code*
1
VXKA70LCRUSZA
2
VXKA72LCHUSZA
3
VXKA75LCRUSZA
4
Cab
Pas- Cargo Weight
Rating
Drive Bed Grade senger
lbs
kg
2WD
Double Cab
VXKA77LCHUSZA
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
4WD
StanSR5
dard
805
365
Long
825
375
740
335
760
345
SR5
StanSR5
dard
Long
SR5
5
9-1. For owners
605
Pas- Cargo Weight
Rating
Drive Bed Grade senger
lbs
kg
No.
Model code*
5
VXKA70LPSULZA
Limited
670
305
6
VXKA70LPSUSZA
Short SR5
650
295
7
VXKA70LPSUZZA
Platinum
640
290
8
VXKA71LPRULZA
695
315
9
VXKA71LPRUSZA
695
315
10
VXKA75LPSULZA
640
290
11
VXKA75LPSUSZA
Short SR5
630
285
12
VXKA75LPSUZZA
Platinum
550
250
13
VXKA76LPRULZA
Limited
630
285
14
VXKA76LPRUSZA
StanSR5
dard
595
270
15
VXKA76LPRUZZA
Platinum
550
250
*
Cab
2WD
LimStan- ited
dard
SR5
Limited
CrewMax
4WD
5
: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (P.558)
WARNING
Be careful — overloading can cause dangerous braking and handling
problems, and can damage your vehicle and its tires.
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
For owners
■ Overloading
9
606
9-1. For owners
Gross axle and vehicle weight ratings
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a
scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to
determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either
of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle
loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label which is
located on the door latch post on the left side of the vehicle.
(P.558) If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to
bring all weights below the ratings.
 Gross axle weight rating
 Gross vehicle weight rating
Front GAWR
Not exceed GVWR
Rear GAWR
■ GAWR and GVWR
 Double Cab models
Model
code*
Engine
VXKA70LCRUSZA
VXKA72LCHUSZA
VXKA75LCRUSZA
VXKA77LCHUSZA
Driving
Bed type
system
Standard
2WD
Long
V35AFTS
Standard
4WD
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Long
GAWR
Front
Rear
GVWR
7035 lb.
(3190 kg)
7165 lb.
4080 lb. 3860 lb. (3250 kg)
(1850 kg) (1750 kg) 7265 lb.
(3295 kg)
7375 lb.
(3345 kg)
9-1. For owners
*
607
: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (P.558)
 CrewMax models
Model
code*
Engine
Driving
Bed type
system
VXKA70LPSULZA
Short
VXKA70LPSUZZA
Standard
VXKA71LPRUSZA
V35AFTS
Short
7165 lb.
(3250 kg)
VXKA76LPRUZZA
7210 lb.
(3270 kg)
7275 lb.
(3300 kg)
4WD
VXKA76LPRULZA
*
6990 lb.
(3170 kg)
4080 lb. 3860 lb. 7230 lb.
(1850 kg) (1750 kg) (3280 kg)
VXKA75LPSUSZA
VXKA76LPRUSZA
GVWR
Rear
7010 lb.
(3180 kg)
2WD
VXKA71LPRULZA
VXKA75LPSUZZA
Front
7010 lb.
(3180 kg)
VXKA70LPSUSZA
VXKA75LPSULZA
GAWR
7340 lb.
(3330 kg)
Standard
7365 lb.
(3340 kg)
7375 lb.
(3345 kg)
: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (P.558)
9
For owners
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
608
9-1. For owners
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
609
Index
What to do if... (Troubleshooting) ................... 610
Alphabetical Index....... 613
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
610
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
1-1.What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you have a problem,
check the following before
contacting your Toyota
dealer.
The doors cannot be
locked, unlocked, opened
or closed
You lose your keys
 If you lose your keys, new
keys can be made by your
Toyota dealer. (P.544)
 If you lose your electronic
keys, the risk of vehicle theft
increases significantly. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. (P.544)
The electronic key does
not operate properly
 Is the electronic key battery
weak or depleted? (P.501)
The doors cannot be
locked or unlocked
 Is the engine switch in ON?
When locking the doors, turn the
engine switch off. (P.206)
your person.
 The function may not operate
properly due to the condition
of the radio wave. (P.132)
The rear door cannot be
opened
 Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle when the
lock is set. Open the rear door from
outside and then unlock the childprotector lock. (P.114)
If you think something is
wrong
The engine does not start
 Did you press the engine
switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal?
(P.204)
 Is the shift lever in P?
(P.204)
 Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the
vehicle? (P.131)
 Is the electronic key battery
weak or depleted?
 Is the electronic key left inside
the vehicle?
In this case, the engine can be
started in a temporary way.
(P.546)
When locking the doors, make sure
that you have the electronic key on
 Is the battery discharged?
(P.547)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
The shift lever cannot be
shifted from P even if you
depress the brake pedal
 Is the engine switch in ON?
If you cannot release the shift lever
by depressing the brake pedal with
the engine switch in ON. (P.209)
The windows do not open
or close by operating the
power window switches
 Is the window lock switch
pressed?
The power window except for the
one at the driver’s seat cannot be
operated if the window lock switch
is pressed. (P.167)
The engine switch is
turned off automatically
 The auto power off function
will be operated if the vehicle
is left in ACC or ON (the
engine is not running) for a
period of time. (P.207)
A warning buzzer sounds
during driving
611
Depending on the situation,
other types of warning buzzer
may also sound. (P.519, 529)
An alarm is activated and
the horn sounds
 Did anyone inside the vehicle
open a door during setting the
alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm
sounds. (P.74)
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
 Unlock the doors using the
entry function or wireless
remote control.
 Turn the engine switch to
ACC or ON, or start the
engine. (The alarm will be
deactivated or stopped after a
few seconds.)
A warning buzzer sounds
when leaving the vehicle
 Is the message displayed on
the multi-information display?
 The seat belt reminder light is
flashing
Check the message on the multiinformation display. (P.519)
Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts?
(P.525)
A warning light turns on
or a warning message is
displayed
 The parking brake indicator is
on
 When a warning light turns on
or a warning message is displayed, refer to P.519, 529.
Is the parking brake released?
(P.213)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
612
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
When a problem has
occurred
If you have a flat tire
 Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and replace the flat tire
with the spare tire. (P.533)
The vehicle becomes
stuck
 Try the procedure for when
the vehicle becomes stuck in
mud, dirt, or snow. (P.553)
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Alphabetical Index
613
Alphabetical Index
A
A/C ...........................................416
Air conditioning filter.............499
Automatic air conditioning system .....................................416
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
...............................................392
Warning light ........................521
ACC .........................................206
Active front spoiler ................406
Adaptive Variable Suspension
System (AVS) ........................393
AHB (Automatic High Beam).222
AI-SHIFT ..................................209
Air conditioning filter .............499
Air conditioning system ........416
Air conditioning filter.............499
Automatic air conditioning system .....................................416
Air suspension .......................373
Airbags ......................................36
Airbag operating conditions....38
Airbag precautions for your child
.............................................41
Correct driving posture...........27
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions .............................39
Curtain shield airbag precautions
.............................................41
Front passenger occupant classification system...................46
General airbag precautions....41
Locations of airbags ...............36
Modification and disposal of airbags .....................................44
Side airbag operating conditions
.............................................39
Side airbag precautions .........41
Side and curtain shield airbags
operating conditions .............39
Side and curtain shield airbags
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
precautions...........................41
SRS airbags ...........................36
SRS warning light .................520
Alarm .........................................74
Warning buzzer ....................519
Ambient lights.........................425
Anchor brackets .................55, 58
Antennas (smart key system)130
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
...............................................392
Warning light.........................521
Approach warning ..................270
Armrest....................................445
Assist grips .............................445
Audio system-linked display ...97
AUTO LSD system..................381
Automatic air conditioning system .........................................416
Automatic headlight leveling
system ...................................220
Automatic High Beam ............222
Automatic light control system
...............................................219
Automatic transmission.........208
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P.................................209
S mode .................................210
TOW HAUL switch................208
Auxiliary boxes .......................431
Average fuel economy .............95
Average vehicle speed .............97
AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension System) .........................393
614
Alphabetical Index
B
C
Back window
Power back window .............168
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Battery
Battery checking...................482
If the battery is discharged ...547
Preparing and checking before
winter.................................. 411
Warning light ........................520
Bed hooks ...............................433
Bed lamp .................................425
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)......284
Enabling/disabling the system
...........................................286
Trailer settings........................98
Boost Meter ..............................92
Bottle holders .........................430
Brake
Brake hold ............................216
Fluid .............................482, 563
Parking brake .......................213
Warning light ........................519
Brake assist ............................392
Brake hold...............................216
Break-in tips ...........................178
Brightness control
Instrument panel light control88,
92
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)......284
Enabling/disabling the system
...........................................286
Trailer settings........................98
Camper information ...............603
Care..................................462, 466
Aluminum wheel ornaments .462
Aluminum wheels .................462
Exterior .................................462
Interior ..................................466
Seat belts .............................466
Cargo and luggage .................184
Cargo capacity........................187
Cargo lamp..............................425
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Chains......................................413
Child restraint system..............53
Fixed with a LATCH system ...60
Fixed with a seat belt..............63
Front passenger occupant classification system ...................46
Points to remember ................53
Riding with children ................52
Types of child restraint system
installation method ...............55
Using an anchor bracket ........58
Child safety ...............................52
Airbag precautions .................41
Battery precautions ......484, 550
Child restraint system .............55
Heated steering wheel and seat
heater precautions..............423
How your child should wear the
seat belt................................30
Panoramic moon roof ...........172
Power back window..............168
Power window lock switch ....167
Power window precautions...166
Rear door child-protectors ....114
Removed electronic key battery
precautions.........................502
Seat belt extender precautions
.............................................30
Seat belt precautions..............52
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Alphabetical Index
Child-protectors ..................... 114
Cleaning ..........................462, 466
Aluminum wheel ornaments.462
Aluminum wheels .................462
Exterior.................................462
Interior ..................................466
Radar sensor........................233
Seat belts .............................466
Clock ...................................85, 89
Coat hooks..............................446
Condenser ..............................481
Console box............................431
Console box light ...................425
Consumption screen..............105
Coolant ....................................480
Checking ..............................480
Cooling system ......................480
Engine overheating ..............551
Coussins gonflables
Modification et élimination en fin
de vie des coussins gonflables
...........................................601
Crawl Control..........................383
Cruise control
Cruise control .......................274
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ..........262
Warning message ................277
Cup holders ............................429
Current fuel consumption .......95
Curtain shield airbags .............36
Customizable features ...........578
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
615
D
DAC..........................................390
Daytime running light system219
Daytime running lights
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Deck divider ............................433
Defogger
Outside rear view mirrors .....418
Rear window.........................418
Windshield ............................418
Differential...............................563
Digital Rear-view Mirror .........150
Dimension ...............................556
Dinghy towing.........................203
Display
Cruise control .......................274
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ..........262
Head-up display ...................101
Intuitive parking assist ..........291
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) .....255
Multi-information display.........93
Warning messages...............529
Display change button .......87, 91
Distance until next engine oil
change ...............................87, 91
Do-it-yourself maintenance ...470
Door courtesy lights...............425
Door lock
Side doors ............................ 111
Smart key system .................130
Wireless remote control........109
Doors
Automatic door locking and
unlocking system................115
Door glasses ........................165
Door lock .............................. 111
Open door warning buzzer .112,
114
Outside rear view mirrors .....160
Rear door child-protectors ....114
616
Alphabetical Index
Side doors ............................ 111
Downhill assist control system
...............................................390
Drive distance...........................97
Drive information .....................97
Drive-start control ..................184
Driving .....................................177
Break-in tips .........................178
Correct driving posture...........27
Procedures...........................177
Winter drive tips ................... 411
Driving information display.....95
Driving mode select switch ...376
Driving position memory .......141
Memory recall function .........143
Power easy access system..141
Driving range ............................95
Driving support system information display .............................96
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ...........262
Approach warning ................270
Warning message ................272
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
E
Eco Driving Indicator .......96, 104
EDR (Event data recorder).........9
Elapsed time .............................97
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
...............................................393
Warning light.........................521
Electronic key .........................108
Battery-saving function .........132
If the electronic key does not
operate properly .................545
Replacing the battery ...........501
Electronic sunshade ..............169
Electronically modulated air suspension..................................373
Emergency flashers ...............512
Emergency tire puncture .......533
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer sounds ..519
If a warning light turns on .....519
If a warning message is displayed.................................529
If the battery is discharged ...547
If the electronic key does not
operate properly .................545
If the engine will not start......543
If the vehicle is submerged or
water on the road is rising ..513
If you have a flat tire .............533
If you lose your keys.............544
If you think something is wrong
...........................................517
If your vehicle becomes stuck
...........................................553
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency.................512
If your vehicle needs to be towed
...........................................515
If your vehicle overheats ......551
Engine......................................559
Compartment........................477
Alphabetical Index
Engine switch .......................204
Fuel pump shut off system ...518
If the engine will not start .....543
Overheating..........................551
Starting the engine ...............204
Engine coolant .......................480
Capacity ...............................561
Checking ..............................480
Preparing and checking before
winter.................................. 411
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.................................85, 89
Engine immobilizer system .....73
Engine oil
Capacity ...............................560
Checking ..............................478
Warning light ........................520
Engine oil pressure gauge 85, 89
Engine switch .........................204
Auto power off function ........207
Changing the engine switch
modes ................................206
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency.................512
Engine switch light ................425
Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control (Enhanced VSC) ............392
Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control) ............392
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
...............................................393
Warning light ........................521
Event data recorder (EDR).........9
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
617
F
Flat tire.....................................533
Tire pressure warning system
...........................................488
Floor mats .................................26
Fluid
Automatic transmission ........562
Brake ....................................563
Washer .................................485
Fog light
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Switch ...................................222
Footwell lights ........................425
Four-wheel drive system .......379
Front fog light
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Front passenger occupant classification system ....................46
Front seat
Refresh system ....................136
Front seats ..............................135
Adjustment ...........................135
Cleaning ...............................466
Correct driving posture ...........27
Driving position memory .......141
Head restraints .....................144
Memory recall function .........143
Power easy access system ..141
Seat heaters .........................423
Seat position memory...........141
Seat ventilators.....................423
Front tray light ........................425
Front turn signal lights ..........212
Turn signal lever ...................212
Front turn signal/parking lights
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Wattage ................................565
Fuel
Capacity ...............................559
Fuel gauge .......................85, 89
Fuel pump shut off system ...518
618
Alphabetical Index
Information ...........................566
Opening the fuel tank cap ....230
Type .....................................559
Warning light ........................525
Fuel consumption
Average fuel economy ...........95
Current fuel consumption .......95
Fuel economy ...........................95
Fuel gauge ..........................85, 89
Fuel pump shut off system....518
Fuses .......................................503
G
Garage door opener ...............453
Gauges ................................85, 89
Glove box ................................429
Glove box light .......................425
H
Head restraints .......................144
Head-up display .....................101
Driving support system display
area ....................................103
Eco Driving Indicator ............104
HUD (Head-up display) switch
...........................................102
Navigation system-linked display area ............................103
Outside temperature ............101
Pop-up display .....................104
Settings ................................102
Headlights
Automatic High Beam system
...........................................222
Light switch ..........................219
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Heated steering wheel ...........423
Heaters
Automatic air conditioning system .....................................416
Heated steering wheel .........423
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Outside rear view mirrors .....418
Seat heaters .........................423
High mounted stoplight
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Hill-start assist control...........393
Hood ........................................476
Open.....................................476
Hooks
Coat hooks ...........................446
Retaining hooks (floor mat) ....26
Horn .........................................148
HUD (Head-up display) switch
...............................................102
I
Identification
Vehicle ..................................558
Ignition switch (engine switch)
...............................................204
Indicators ..................................82
Initialization
Items to initialize ...................589
Parking Support Brake .........309
Power windows ....................165
Tire pressure warning system
...........................................490
Inside rear view mirror ...........149
Instrument panel light control88,
92
Intercooler ...............................481
Intercooler coolant .................480
Capacity ...............................561
Checking ..............................480
Interior lights...........................425
Wattage ................................565
Interior lights list ....................425
Intuitive parking assist...........291
Enabling/disabling the system
...........................................292
Function................................291
Warning lights.......................522
Warning message.................293
Alphabetical Index
619
J
L
Jam protection function
Electronic sunshade.............171
Panoramic moon roof...........171
Power running boards .......... 116
Power tailgate ......................123
Power windows ....................165
Lane Tracing Assist (LTA)......248
Operation..............................248
Warning lights.......................522
Warning messages...............258
Language (multi-information display) .........................................98
LATCH anchors.........................60
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever .............476
Hood lock release lever ........476
Shift lever .............................209
Turn signal lever ...................212
Wiper lever ...........................226
License plate lights
Light switch...........................219
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Light bulbs
Replacing .............................506
Lights
Ambient lights .......................426
Automatic High Beam system
...........................................222
Cargo lamp ...........................426
Fog light switch.....................222
Headlight switch ...................219
Interior lights .................425, 426
Personal lights ......................426
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Trailering light .......................164
Turn signal lever ...................212
Vanity lights ..........................452
Wattage ................................565
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ......248
Operation..............................248
Warning lights.......................522
Warning messages...............258
Luggage compartment features
...............................................433
Bed hooks ............................433
Deck divider..........................433
K
Keyless entry
Smart key system.................130
Wireless remote control .......109
Keys.........................................108
Battery-saving function.........132
Electronic key.......................108
Engine switch .......................204
If the electronic key does not
operate properly .................545
If you lose your keys ............544
Key number plate .................108
Keyless entry.........111, 118, 130
Mechanical key ....................108
Replacing the battery ...........501
Warning buzzer ....................131
Wireless remote control .......109
Knee airbags.............................36
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
620
Alphabetical Index
Luggage storage box .............432
M
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance ..474
General maintenance...........470
Maintenance data.................556
Maintenance requirements...469
Malfunction indicator lamp....520
Manual headlight leveling dial
...............................................221
Menu icons ...............................94
Meter
Boost Meter............................92
Clock ................................85, 89
Engine oil pressure gauge85, 89
Indicators................................82
Instrument panel light control88,
92
Meter control switches ...........94
Meters ..............................85, 89
Multi-information display ........93
Pitch and roll gauges........92, 97
Settings ..................................98
Tow gauges ............................92
Voltmeter ..........................85, 89
Warning lights.................80, 519
Warning messages...............529
Meter control switches ............94
Mirrors
Digital Rear-view Mirror........150
Inside rear view mirror..........149
Outside rear view mirror defoggers ....................................418
Outside rear view mirrors .....160
Vanity mirrors .......................452
Mode select switch
TOW HAUL switch ............... 211
Multi-information display.........93
Audio system-linked display...97
Changing the display..............94
Cruise control .......................274
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Driving information display .....95
Driving support system information display ...........................96
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ..........262
Eco Driving Indicator ..............96
Fuel economy .........................95
Intuitive parking assist ..........291
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) .....255
Menu icons .............................94
Meter control switches............94
Navigation system-linked display
.............................................96
Settings ..................................98
Stop & Start system information
...........................................100
Tire pressure ........................488
Trailer settings ........................98
Vehicle information display .....97
Warning messages...............529
Multi-terrain Monitor...............362
Automatic display mode .......365
Camera switch......................362
Function................................363
Menu button .........................363
Multi-terrain Monitor precautions
...........................................372
Screen display and functions365
Things you should know .......372
Multi-terrain Select .................387
N
Navigation system-linked display
.........................................96, 101
Alphabetical Index
O
Odometer ............................87, 91
Odometer and trip meter display
Display change button......87, 91
Display items....................87, 91
Off-road precautions..............408
Oil
Differential oil .......................563
Engine oil .............................560
Transfer oil ...........................562
Opener
Hood.....................................476
Opening the fuel tank cap ....230
Tailgate................................. 119
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjustment ...........................160
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....284
Folding .................................162
Mirror position memory ........141
Outside rear view mirror defoggers ....................................418
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
...........................................298
Outside temperature ..85, 89, 105
Overheating ............................551
P
Panic mode ............................. 110
Panoramic moon roof ............169
Panoramic view monitor........327
Camera switch .....................329
Checking around the vehicle 332
Checking the bed .................347
Checking the front and around
the vehicle ..........................333
Checking the rear and around
the vehicle ..........................338
Customizing the panoramic view
monitor ...............................348
Display .................................330
Driving precautions ..............327
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
621
Magnifying function ..............347
Menu button .........................329
Panoramic view monitor precautions....................................348
Things you should know .......359
Parking assist sensors (intuitive
parking assist) ......................291
Parking brake..........................213
Brake system warning light ..519
Parking brake engaged warning
buzzer.................................215
Warning light.........................524
Warning message.................215
Parking lights
Light switch...........................219
Parking Support Brake (PKSB)
...............................................304
Enabling/disabling the system
...........................................306
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) ......312
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects) ....................309
Warning lights.......................523
Warning message.................308
PCS (Pre-Collision System)...237
Enabling/disabling the system
...........................................241
Function................................237
Warning light.........................521
Personal lights........................425
Pitch and roll gauges .........92, 97
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
...............................................304
Enabling/disabling the system
...........................................306
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) ......312
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects) ....................309
Warning lights.......................523
Warning message.................308
622
Alphabetical Index
Power back window ...............168
Power bed step.......................128
Power easy access system ...141
Power outlet....................446, 447
Power running boards ........... 115
Power steering (Electric power
steering system)
Warning light ........................521
Power tailgate
Wireless remote control .......120
Power tailgate opener switch 121
Power windows
Door lock linked window operation .....................................166
Jam protection function ........165
Operation .............................165
Window lock switch ..............167
Pre-Collision System (PCS)...237
Enabling/disabling the system
...........................................241
Function ...............................237
Warning light ........................521
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
R
Radar cruise control (dynamic
radar cruise control with fullspeed range) .........................262
Radiator ...................................481
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
...............................................298
Enabling/disabling the system
...........................................299
Warning lights.......................523
Warning message.................299
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
...............................................298
Enabling/disabling the system
...........................................299
Warning lights.......................523
Warning message.................299
Rear differential lock system.382
Rear door sunshades.............452
Rear seats ...............................138
Cleaning ...............................466
Head restraints .....................144
Seat heaters .........................423
Seat ventilators.....................423
Rear turn signal lights............212
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Turn signal lever ...................212
Rear view mirror
Digital Rear-view Mirror ........150
Inside rear view mirror ..........149
Outside rear view mirrors .....160
Rear window defogger ...........418
Refueling .................................230
Capacity ...............................559
Fuel types .............................559
Opening the fuel tank cap ....230
Replacing
Electronic key battery ...........501
Fuses....................................503
Light bulbs ............................506
Road Sign Assist ....................259
Alphabetical Index
RSA (Road Sign Assist) .........259
S
Safety Connect .........................68
Seat
Front seat refresh system ....136
Seat belt reminder light .525, 526
Seat belts ..................................29
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder
anchor height .......................33
Automatic Locking Retractor ..31
Child restraint system installation
.............................................55
Cleaning and maintaining the
seat belt..............................466
Emergency Locking Retractor 31
How to wear your seat belt.....30
How your child should wear the
seat belt................................30
Pregnant women, proper seat
belt use.................................29
Reminder light and buzzer .525,
526
Seat belt extender ..................30
Seat belt pretensioners ..........34
SRS warning light.................520
Seat heaters ............................423
Seat position memory............141
Seat ventilators ......................423
Seating capacity .............187, 558
Seats................................135, 138
Adjustment ...........................135
Adjustment precautions136, 138,
140
Child seats/child restraint system
installation ............................53
Cleaning ...............................466
Driving position memory.......141
Folding down and returning the
rear seatbacks....................138
Head restraints.....................144
Power easy access system..141
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
623
Properly sitting in the seat ......27
Seat heaters .........................423
Seat position memory...........141
Seat ventilators.....................423
Sensor
Automatic headlight system .219
Automatic High Beam system
...........................................222
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) .....285
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ..........232
Inside rear view mirror ..........150
Intuitive parking assist ..........291
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) .....248
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) ......285
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects) ....................291
PCS (Pre-Collision System) .232
Radar sensor ........................232
Rain-sensing windshield wipers
...........................................228
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
...........................................285
Shift lever ................................209
Automatic transmission ........208
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P.................................209
Shift lever light........................425
Shift lock system ....................209
Side airbags ..............................36
Side marker lights
Light switch...........................219
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Side mirrors
Adjustment ...........................160
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) .....284
Folding..................................162
Heaters .................................418
Mirror position memory.........141
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
...........................................298
624
Alphabetical Index
Side turn signal lights............212
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Turn signal lever...................212
Side windows .........................165
Smart key system...................130
Antenna location ..................130
Entry functions ..............111, 118
Starting the engine ...............204
Snow tires ............................... 411
Spare tire
Inflation pressure..................564
Storage location ...................533
Spark plug...............................561
Specifications .........................556
Speedometer ......................85, 89
Steering wheel
Adjustment ...........................147
Heated steering wheel .........423
Meter control switches ...........94
Power easy access system..141
Steering wheel position memory
...........................................141
Stop & Start system ...............277
Function ...............................277
System information display ..100
Warning light ........................522
Stop & Start system information
display ...................................100
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Storage box ............................432
Storage features .....................428
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes stuck 553
Sun visors ...............................452
Switches
Activating the Automatic High
Beam..................................222
Automatic High Beam system
...........................................222
Brake Hold switch ................216
Cruise control switch ............274
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
DAC/CRAWL switch .....383, 390
Display change button ......87, 91
Door lock switches ...............114
DRIVE MODE switch............376
Driving position memory
switches..............................141
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range switch263
Emergency flashers switch...512
Engine switch .......................204
Fog light switch.....................222
Front-wheel drive control switch
...........................................379
Garage door opener switches
...........................................453
Heated steering wheel switch
...........................................423
Height control mode select
switch .................................373
Height control switch ............373
HUD (Head-up display) switch
...........................................102
Light switches .......................219
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch
...........................................254
Meter control switches............94
Mode select switch ......376, 383,
387, 390
MTS switch ...........................387
Outer mirror extend switch ...162
Outside rear view mirror
switches..............................160
Panoramic moon roof switches
...........................................169
Parking brake switch ............213
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
...........................................306
Power door lock switch.........114
Power steps switch....... 117, 129
Power tailgate opener switch121
Power window switches .......165
Rear differential lock system 382
Alphabetical Index
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers switch
...........................................418
Seat heater switches............423
Seat ventilator switches .......423
“SOS” button ..........................68
Stop & Start cancel switch ...278
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch ...........................147
Tire pressure warning reset
switch .................................491
TOW HAUL switch ............... 211
Trailer brake control switch ..398
Trailering light switch............164
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch .................................263
VSC OFF switch...................393
Window lock switch ..............167
Windshield defogger switch .418
Windshield wiper and washer
switch .................................226
Windshield wiper de-icer switch
...........................................421
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
625
T
Tail lights
Light switch...........................219
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Tailgate ....................................118
Power tailgate.......................120
Removing the tailgate...........125
The Secondary Collision Brake
...............................................393
Theft deterrent system
Alarm ......................................74
Engine immobilizer system.....73
Tire inflation pressure............496
Maintenance data .................564
Tire inflation pressure display
function...............................488
Warning light.........................525
Tire information ......................568
Glossary ...............................572
Size ......................................569
Tire identification number .....569
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 570
Tire pressure display .............488
Tire pressure warning system
...............................................488
Function................................488
Initializing..............................490
Installing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters ......490
Registering ID codes ............492
Selecting wheel set ..............494
Warning light.........................525
Tires .........................................486
Chains ..................................413
Checking ..............................486
If you have a flat tire .............533
Inflation pressure ..................496
Information ...........................568
Replacing .............................533
Rotating tires ........................488
Size ......................................564
626
Alphabetical Index
Snow tires ............................ 411
Tire inflation pressure display
function...............................488
Tire pressure warning system
...........................................488
Warning light ........................525
Tools ........................................533
Top tether strap ........................58
Tow gauges...............................92
TOW HAUL switch.................. 211
Towing
Dinghy towing.......................203
Emergency towing................515
Trailer Backup Guide............401
Trailer settings........................98
Trailer towing........................188
Toyota parking assist monitor
...............................................314
Distance guide line display mode
...........................................319
Driving precautions ..............314
Estimated course line display
mode ..................................317
Parking assist guide line display
mode ..................................318
Screen display......................315
Things you should know.......324
Toyota parking assist monitor
precautions.........................319
Using the system..................316
Toyota Safety Sense 2.5 ........232
AHB (Automatic High Beam) 222
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ..........262
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).....248
PCS (Pre-Collision System) .237
RSA (Road Sign Assist) .......259
TRAC (Traction Control) ........393
Traction Control (TRAC) ........393
Trailer Backup Guide .............401
Canceling the system...........404
Precautions ..........................405
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Procedure .............................401
Setup (Calibration) ...............402
Trailer hitch light ...................404
Using Guidance mode ..........403
Using Straight Path Assist ....403
Trailer brake ............................398
Trailer brake controller...........398
Trailer settings ........................98
Trailer hitch light.............404, 425
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Trailer settings ..........................98
Trailer Sway Control...............393
Trailer towing ..........................188
Trailer Backup Guide............401
Trailer settings ........................98
Trailering light
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Transfer ...................................562
Transmission
Automatic transmission ........208
Trip meters ..........................87, 91
Turn signal lights....................212
Replacing light bulbs ............507
Turn signal lever ...................212
U
USB charging ports................436
V
Vanity lights ............................452
Vanity mirrors .........................452
Vehicle capacity weight .........557
Vehicle data recording ...............7
Vehicle identification number558
Vehicle information display .....97
Ventilators (seat ventilators) .423
Voltmeter .............................85, 89
Alphabetical Index
W
Warning buzzers
Approach warning ................270
Brake hold ............................524
Brake Override System ........524
Brake system .......................519
Charging system ..................520
Downshifting......................... 211
Drive-Start Control ...............524
Electric power steering.........521
Engine ..................................520
Hands off steering wheel warning (LTA) .............................258
Intuitive parking assist..297, 522
Low engine oil pressure .......520
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)...248,
252, 522
Open door .................... 112, 114
Open window .......................166
PCS (Pre-Collision System) .521
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
...........................................523
Pre-collision braking.............237
Pre-collision warning ............237
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
...................................299, 523
Seat belt .......................525, 526
SRS airbag...........................520
Vehicle sway warning function
(LTA)...................................258
Warning lights ..................80, 519
ABS ......................................521
Air suspension malfunction indicator ...................................526
Brake hold operated indicator
...........................................524
Brake Override System ........524
Brake system .......................519
Charging system ..................520
Drive-Start Control ...............524
Electric power steering.........521
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
627
High coolant temperature .....519
Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator ...................................522
Low engine oil pressure .......520
Low fuel level........................525
LTA indicator .........................522
Malfunction indicator lamp....520
Parking brake indicator.........524
PKSB OFF indicator .............523
Pre-collision system .............521
RCTA OFF indicator .............523
Rear differential lock indicator
...........................................524
Seat belt reminder light 525, 526
Slip indicator .........................523
SRS airbag ...........................520
Stop & Start cancel indicator 522
Tire pressure ........................525
Trailer brake warning light ....526
Warning messages .................529
Washer.....................................226
Adding ..................................485
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................411
Switch ...................................226
Washing and waxing ..............462
Weight
Cargo capacity .....................187
Load limits ............................187
Wheel lock nut ........................534
Wheels .....................................498
Replacing .............................498
Size ......................................564
Wheel lock nut ......................534
Window lock switch ...............167
Windows
Power back window..............168
Power windows ....................165
Rear window defogger .........418
Washer .................................226
Windshield defogger ..............418
Windshield wipers ..................226
628
Alphabetical Index
Rain-sensing windshield wipers
...........................................226
Winter driving tips.................. 411
Wireless charger ....................437
Wireless remote control ........109
Battery-Saving Function.......132
Locking/Unlocking ................109
Replacing the battery ...........501
?
For information regarding
the equipment listed
below, refer to the “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.
· Navigation system
· Audio/visual system
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
Alphabetical Index
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
629
630
Certifications
Safety Connect
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
631
Smart key system and engine immobilizer system
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID:NI4TMLF19D-1
FCC ID:HYQ14FBX
 For vehicles sold in Canada
IC: 2842A-TMLF1901
IC: 1551A-14FBX
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
632
Toyota Safety Sense 2.5
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam, Puerto Rico,
A.Samoa and Saipan
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
633
 For vehicles sold in Canada
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
634
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam, Puerto Rico,
A.Samoa and Saipan
 For vehicles sold in Canada
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
635
Intuitive parking assist
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam, Puerto Rico,
A.Samoa and Saipan
 For vehicles sold in Canada
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
636
Wireless charger
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam, Puerto Rico,
A.Samoa and Saipan
 For vehicles sold in Canada
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
637
Garage door opener
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii
FCC ID: NZLUAHL5E & NZLAECHL5
 For vehicles sold in Canada
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
638
Tire pressure warning system
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam, Puerto Rico,
A.Samoa and Saipan
 For vehicles sold in Canada
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
639
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
640
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever (P.476)
Fuel filler door (P.231)
Tire inflation pressure (P.564)
Hood lock release lever (P.476)
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
P.559
Fuel type
P.559
Cold tire inflation
pressure
P.564
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference)
P.560
Engine oil type
P.560
Owners Manual_USA_M0C066_en
">